Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Edition Y
ROUTERMAPPERMAN
RouterMapper ™

Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Edition Y
May 2009
Copyright Information
Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation, 1025 West NASA Boulevard,
Melbourne, Florida 32919-0001 U.S.A. All rights reserved. This publication
supersedes all previous releases. Printed in Canada.
This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and are
distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and
decompilation. No part of this product or related documentation may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of
Harris Corporation and its licensors, if any.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated into new editions of the publication. Harris Corporation may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described
in this publication at any time.

Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your warranty
coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures for obtaining
warranty service. To view the complete warranty, visit our website.
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Communication Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using RouterMapper On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Full-Text Help Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Contacting Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2: Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installing RouterMapper Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing RouterMapper on PCs Using
Microsoft® Windows Me Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting RouterMapper to Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Downloading Router Frame and Control Panel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . 14
Creating an Additional Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote Dial-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Uninstalling RouterMapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Launching RouterMapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Overview of the Main Menu Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Sorting Entries in the Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Device Definition Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Router Definition Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide iii

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Device Summary List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting up a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Polling the Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Polling Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Possible Polling Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Combiner System Polling Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Discovering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding Devices Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Editing Device Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Copying Control Panel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Downloading Device Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Managing Database Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Managing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Managing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Enabling Logical Database Name Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Accessing the Device Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Printing Key Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Backing Up and Restoring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Backing Up a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Restoring a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Upgrading Edge and Panacea Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Adding a Frame by Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding a Frame by Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding a Frame Using the Add Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adding Platinum Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Selecting the Frame Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setting Up a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Selecting Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Selecting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adding Integrator Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Adding Integrator Data Router Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital) Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Setting Up Output Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adding Integrator Combiner Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Setting Up a Combiner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Adding Combiner System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Adding Panacea Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Adding Other (Legacy) Harris Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

iv RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Control Panels by Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adding Control Panels by Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adding Control Panels Using the Add Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Edge and Edge II Protocol Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Adding Edge Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adding an Edge by Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adding an Edge by Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adding an Edge Using the Add Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Setting Coax Protocol Option Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Setting Network Information for Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Automating Logical Names Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Edge Web Router Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Editing Edge Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Changing Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values . . . . . . . . . 206
Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Changing Coax Protocol Option Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting Up Edge Web Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting Up Web Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Upgrading Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application

Configurations
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Adding Web Router Application Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configuring Web Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Adding Pushbutton Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Adding Index Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Setting Up Web Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Assigning Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Editing User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Deleting Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide v

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Defining the Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Naming a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Changing a Level’s Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Specifying the Logical Router Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Overview of the Edit Logical Sources Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Modifying the Edit Logical Sources Dialog Grid Appearance . . . . . . . . . . 231
Assigning a Source Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Assigning an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Assigning the Level Inputs and Physical Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Sharing Level Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Status Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Adding Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Deleting Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Editing Sources Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Overview of Edit Logical Destinations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Assigning a Destination Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Assigning an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Adding Logical Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Deleting Logical Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Editing Destination Grid Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Setting Up CENTRIO Virtual Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Adding Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Editing Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Editing Remote Access Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Editing a Database that Includes Partitioned Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Adding a New Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Viewing Sources Affected by a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Deleting a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Generating Category Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Changing a Category Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Correcting Source Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Correcting Destination Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Creating and Managing Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Adding a New Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Deleting an Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Changing an Index Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Correcting Source Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

vi RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Correcting Destination Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Managing Custom Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Adding Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Importing Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Restoring Default Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Removing Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Editing a Frame’s Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Editing a Router Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Editing the Router Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Configured Matrices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Matrix Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Detected Matrices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Detected Cards Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Monitoring Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Firmware Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Control Card(s) Tab and Control Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
I/O Hardware Module Tab (Panacea Frames Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Parametric Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Panacea Web Panels Tab (Panacea Frames Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Panacea Web Users Tab (Panacea Frames Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Assigning Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Creating a Source Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Creating a Destination Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Creating a Category/Index Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Creating a Salvo Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Adding or Editing a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Creating a Command Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Adding, Editing, or Deleting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Creating a Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Creating a Panel Status Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Creating a Page Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Creating a Lock Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Creating a Protect Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Creating an Alarm Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Using the Alarm Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Adding Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide vii

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Editing Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Deleting Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating a Source Alarm Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Creating a Parametric Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Adding Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Editing Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Deleting Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating a Chop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating an On-Air Swap Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
ABA(1)-XY Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
ABA(1)-SB, ABA1ESBp Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
ABA-AFV, ABA(1)-MB, ABA1EMBp Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Moving a Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Limiting the Sources and Destinations
Available to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of
Sources or Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Assigning a Favorite Source or
Destination to a Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Editing Details of a Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Setting the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Determining Destinations Accessible to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Assigning Sources to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Assigning a Category Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Changing a Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Changing Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

viii RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

ABA2EXYp Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

ABA2ESBp Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
ABA2EMBp Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Moving a Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of
Sources and Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Editing Details of a Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Setting the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Assigning Sources to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Assigning a Category Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Changing a Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Changing Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Editing LCD Button Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Setting Up Button Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Setting Up Button Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Setting Up Button Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Controlling Backlight Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide ix

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Changing Intensity for Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Setting Up Button Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Monitoring Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Serial Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Ethernet Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Setting Network Information for RCP-IDe Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Configuring Breakaway Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Changing Panel Name or ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Edit Button Function Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Configuring Breakaway Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Modifying the GPI Panel Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

x RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

GPI Panel Definition File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Setting the Panel ID and Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Configuring Aux and Main Contact Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Example of GPI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Index
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide xi

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

xii RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1
Introduction

Overview
The RouterMapper configuration utility is an easy-to-use Microsoft®
Windows®1 based application for programming RouterWorks®, router frames,
control panels, and the Opus master controller2. Using RouterMapper, you may
create a database that describes a routing system (i.e., available levels, sources,
and destinations). That database may be downloaded to a control panel and/or
router frame, and may be used in conjunction with RouterWorks software
applications. Function keys and selection keys (on Programmable Panel series
panels only) may be defined, and keycap inserts printed.
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Communication Dependencies” on page 3
• “Contacting Us” on page 7
• “System Requirements” on page 2
• “Using this Manual” on page 3
• “Using RouterMapper On-Line Help” on page 5
• “What’s New” on page 2

1 “Windows” is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/

or other countries.
2 RouterMapper versions 5.06 and higher no longer support Opus master controllers.
Please use RouterMapper version 5.05 or lower to access and configure the Opus mas-
ter controller.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 1

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

What’s New
These features are new additions to Edition Y of the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide:
• Added support for TDM Starting Slot Offset
• Added support for Platinum PT-MX and PT-DX modules

System Requirements
RouterMapper may be used with any IBM-compatible computer that meets
these minimum requirements:
CPU 266 MHz Pentium II
RAM At least 128 MB
Hard disk space At least 30 MB free
Additional disk drives CD-ROM or CD-RW
Operating system1 Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Me2
Windows Vista (requires CCS Navigator™)
Port(s) Serial port, RS-232 or RS-422/9600 baud or higher
(RCP-IDe) Ethernet port
Display resolution 800×600, 256 colors
1024×768, high color (16 bit) recommended
Pointing device Mouse, trackball, touch screen, or other pointing
device

1 Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows XP, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
2 See page 13 for special information concerning the installation of RouterMapper using
Microsoft Windows Me operating system.

2 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Communication Dependencies
Table 1-1 provides a list of communication device dependencies for Harris
router frames, control panels, and master control panel. To download, poll and/
or control the device(s) listed in the left column, the communication link(s)
marked with a “•” must be properly configured and connected.

Table 1-1. Communication Dependencies

Serial Or Ether- Ethernet Con-
net Gateway nection to Opus
Device(s) Connection to Master Control
Router System System
Edge protocol gateway •
Opus ABA panel •
Opus frame •
Opus master control panel •
Router control panels •
Router frames •

Using this Manual

This manual is intended as a reference to the RouterMapper software and is not
organized in step-by-step tutorial fashion. The manual has the following writing
conventions:

Table 1-2. Writing Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection
names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books
or publications, and the first instances of new
terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as
ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries,
such as a DOS entry or something you type into
a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 3

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table 1-2. Writing Conventions (Continued)

Term or Convention Description
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to
Note avoid and troubleshoot problems

2. The manual is divided into these sections:

• General information: These sections relate to Harris routers, panels, and
master controllers.
• Introduction
• Installing software
• Getting started
• Adding devices
• Editing logical databases
• Router-specific information: These sections relate to router frames
(e.g., Platinum™, Integrator™, Panacea™) and panels.
• Editing a router frame definition
• Assigning button functions
• Panel configurations
• Opus master controller-specific information: These sections relate
specifically to the Opus master controller.
• Editing a frame definition
• Panel configurations
• Editing the Opus router control assignment

4 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using RouterMapper On-Line Help

The on-line help offers complete information on all RouterMapper functions.
General Help, context-sensitive Help, and Help search functions are available.

General Help
When you need help on any RouterMapper topic, choose Help from the main
menu bar. This will allow you to locate information by category.

Figure 1-1. General Help Menu Selections

Context-Sensitive Help
Context-sensitive Help gives you instant help whenever a menu command is
highlighted, a dialog box is open, or a pop-up message box is displayed. Press
F1 for context-sensitive help.

Full-Text Help Search

RouterMapper Help includes a full text search capability so that you can find
help topics containing the text string you specify. Several options are available
that allow you to refine your search.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 5

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-2. Full-Text Help Search Using the Index Function

Figure 1-3. Full-Text Help Search Using the Search Function

6 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Contacting Us
If you have questions about this or other Harris products, contact us for
technical support and product information.

Technical Support
We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our custom-
ers around the world. Visit our website for information on how to contact the
Customer Service team in your geographical region.

Product Information
If you would like the latest product information or documentation, contact your
dealer or our Sales Department; or, visit our website for more information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 7

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

8 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2
Installation

Overview
This chapter provides the information you need to successfully install (or
uninstall) the RouterMapper software application.
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Connecting RouterMapper to Your System” on page 14
• “Downloading Router Frame and Control Panel Configurations” on page 14
• “Installing RouterMapper Software” on page 10
• “Installing RouterMapper on PCs Using Microsoft® Windows Me
Operating System” on page 13
• “Uninstalling RouterMapper” on page 34

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 9

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Installing RouterMapper Software

1. Insert the RouterMapper program disk into the appropriate drive on your
personal computer.
2. Select Run from the Microsoft® Windows® Start menu.
3. In the Command Line box, enter [drive designator]:\setup.exe.

Figure 2-1. Run Dialog Box

4. Click OK to launch the RouterMapper setup program. The setup program

will display an installation confirmation dialog box.

Figure 2-2. Initial RouterMapper Setup Dialog Box

• Click OK to continue program installation.

• Click Cancel to abort the installation.

10 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

5. The Install Directory dialog box opens. At this screen, you must designate
the directory where the RouterMapper program files are stored. The default
is C:\Program Files\Harris\RtrWrks. To change the destination directory,
enter the complete path of the desired directory in the highlighted box.
RouterMapper will create the specified directory (if it does not already
exist) and will store all program files in this directory.

Figure 2-3. Install Directory Dialog Box

6. Click OK. The Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager dialog box opens.

Figure 2-4. Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Dialog Box

The optional Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager function allows you to

manage the dynamic routing thread connections between Integrator frames
and other large routing systems based on Integrator frames.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 11

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

7. Click OK. A Program Group dialog box opens. At this screen, you may
select the program group where the application icons should appear.

Figure 2-5. Program Group Dialog Box

8. When the program installation is complete, a Read Me dialog box opens on

the screen. This box includes up-to-date information that may or may not
have been incorporated into the manual at the time of program release.
9. Click OK to close the Read Me dialog box and return to the desktop.

Note
You may find it helpful to set up a RouterMapper shortcut on your
desktop.

If the RouterMapper program has been successfully installed, the Start

menu will include a new group titled Leitch Routing Switchers, with the
following icons:
• Read Me
• Un-Install
• RouterMapper Help
• RouterMapper
• Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

12 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-6. Leitch Routing Switchers Dialog Box

• Select the Read Me icon to reopen the text notes that were displayed on
installation.
• Select the Un-Install icon to launch an application by which the
RouterMapper software can be removed from the system.
• Select the RouterMapper Help icon to open a Windows® Help file.
• Select the RouterMapper icon to open the configuration utility. The
operation of the utility is described in detail in the chapters that follow.
• Select the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager icon to open the Dynamic
Routing Fabric configuration utility. The DRFM provides run-time
management of dynamic routing threads configured via RouterMapper.
The operation of this utility is described in a separate document;
however, configuration information on dynamic routing fabric
management and dynamic routing threads is described in detail in
“Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric” starting on page 262.

Installing RouterMapper on PCs Using

Microsoft® Windows Me Operating System
If you want to install RouterMapper on a PC that uses the Microsoft Windows
Me operating system, you may need to manually remove the following files and
Windows registry entries.

Files and Directories

1. At the root directory (C:\Leitch)
a. Move any previously-created databases that you want to save to another
location.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 13

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

b. Move any previously-created PAN files that you want to save to another
location.
c. Delete all files and subdirectories.
2. At the Windows root directory (C:\Windows [or WINNT, etc.])
a. Move the EDITRTR.INI file that you want to save to another location.
b. Delete EDITRTR.INI file in the Windows root directory.

Registry Entries
Use REGEDIT to remove the following key, sub-keys and values:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Leitch Routers and Switchers

Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

• If you are downloading router frame and control panel device
configurations only, you must have a PC that has a serial port connector.
• If you have a CCS Router Gateway, you must have a PC that has an
Ethernet connections (You will connect to a router via the Ethernet
gateway.)

Downloading Router Frame and Control Panel Configurations

To download device configurations, the PC running the RouterMapper software
must be connected to a serial port on one of the router frames. Communications
between the PC and the panels is carried from the router frame to all of the
panels via the X-Y control bus.
Figure 2-7 on page 15 shows the possible connections. Serial connection pin
assignments are shown in Figure 2-8 on page 15.

14 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

RouterMapper™
Control
Software

RouterMapper™ Remote
Control
Software
Network workstation
RS-232/RS-422
X-Y control

Router frames SPT

Gateway
Gateway
bus

PW CT FAN
R RL DESTINATION SOURCES
CPU 2 ®

Status
FAN
SAT 1 VIDEO Video Clear
Group
VTR CAM SAT DDR Studio Maint ESS 7 8 9
CTR
PW

1
R

CPU 1

ABA2 X-Y programmable

Group
AUDIO Lt A1 Clear
2
NET TX RX EDIT Uplink QC CG 4 5 6 Take

Group Clear
5V
24V 24V FA
1 2 N
AUDIO Rt A2 Clear
3
Trunk ATR TEST MIC MON MCR AUX 1 2 3
All

Select Lock Group

Dest Dest HOUSE TC T/C Clear
4
Black Bars VTR 12 A B C D 0 Bkspc

24V 24V FA
5V 1 2 N

ABA1 X-Y programmable

Destination Source
Status
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select XYp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear ABA Alphanumeric 9 0
Dest BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 All

PW CTR FAN
R L

CPU 2 ®

FAN
CTR
PW
R

CPU 1

ABA X-Y programmable

Source
Status
Enable VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset CAM SAT AUX 0 1 2 3 4 TAKE

24V 24V FA
5V 1 2 N
Clear
Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear T/C Clear BETA TRUNK MIC 5 6 7 8 9
All

24V 24V FA
5V 1 2 N

16x1p
Enable

Lock
SOURCES
Single bus
CTR
PW

FAN
R

CPU 2 ®
CTR
PW

FAN
R

16 XSBAp
1
Single bus with Breakaway
CPU 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
24V

5V
24V

FA
N
1

Multibus X-Y programmable

32x1p Destinations Sources
24V 24V FA
PANEL

32x8p
5V 1 2 N
ENABLE

75Ω
RCP-GPIp

Contact Closure
75Ω

RS-422
Automation System
or
Ethernet Other External Control

Figure 2-7. Connecting RouterMapper to a Control Panel

Figure 2-8. Serial Connection Pin Assignments

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 15

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Creating an Additional Serial Port

If a serial port is not available on any of the router frames in the system, then an
SPT-LSERIAL1 can be used to provide a serial port for the system. Possible
connections are shown in Figure 2-9. Serial connection cable pin assignments
are shown in Figure 2-10 on page 17.

Figure 2-9. Connecting RouterMapper to Panel via SPT-LSERIAL

1 For
more information on ordering the SPT-LSERIAL, contact your Sales or Customer Service
representative.

16 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-10. SPT-LSERIAL Serial Port Pin Assignments

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 17

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Communications Settings
The Communications Settings dialog box allows you to control various
telecommunications devices by changing settings (see Figure 2-11).

Connection Type Comm Port

Set to Serial for direct connections Set to match communications
Set to Dial-Up for remote dial-up port used on PC running editor
Set to TCP/IP for Ethernet via software
TCP/IP
Set to Demo for testing panels
without being attached to a Phone Number
router Set to remote router phone
number

Baud Rate
Set to match serial port on Dialing Properties
router frame, RSCE frame, or SPT- Set desired automatic remote
LSERIALprotocol translatounit redial parameters

Dial Mode Modem Initialization String

Set to tone or pulse Set to configure the modem
dialing before it dials remote router

Figure 2-11. Communications Settings

• If you choose a direct connection type, you can change baud rate or comm
port settings.
• If you choose a remote dial-up connection type, you can set the baud rate
for your modem, the remote router telephone number, automatic redialing
properties, tone or pulse dialing mode, and your modem initialization string.

Note
Download and Poll operations are not supported in Demo mode. DRFM
operations will not operate in Demo mode.

• If you choose a TCP/IP connection type, you can set the IP address
connections and give instructions on what to do if a current IP address
connection fails.
• If your PC is not connected to a routing system, but you want to see how
RouterWorks software will operate with a routing system, choose Demo
Mode to simulate the presence of a router and will allow the RouterWorks
software to be operated normally.

Selecting Serial, Dial-Up, TCP/IP, or Demo Connection Settings

1. Select the RouterMapper icon from the Start menu or from your desktop
shortcut.
2. Click Comm Settings at the RouterMapper menu bar. The
Communications Settings dialog box opens.
3. Click the appropriate radio button to select the connection.

18 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

If you choose Serial, follow these steps:

1. The Communications Settings dialog box opens as shown in Figure 2-12 on
page 19.

Figure 2-12. Serial Connection Type Dialog Box

2. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to set the baud rate. The baud
rate must match the baud rate setting of the router frame’s serial port. The
default baud rate is 9600 baud.
3. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to select the COMM port.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
After the communications settings have been selected, you may test the
configuration by performing a Poll. An error message that indicates a
communication failure is displayed if the port is not properly configured or
connected. For more information on performing a Poll, see page 43.

Note
For more information on setting the IP address of the Gateway, refer to
the manual that was supplied with the your Router Ethernet Gateway.

If you choose TCP/IP, follow these steps:

1. The Communications Settings dialog box opens as shown in Figure 2-13 on
page 20.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 19

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-13. TCP/IP Connection Type Dialog Box

2. Enter the IP address that matches the IP address of your CCS Router
Gateway, and then click Add. The new IP address appears in the Host IP
Connections Orders dialog box.
If you have incorrectly entered the IP address, follow these
steps:
• Highlight the incorrect address in the Host IP Connections Orders dialog
box, and then click Modify.
• The Modify Host dialog box opens.

Figure 2-14. Modify Host Dialog Box

• Correct the IP address, and then click OK. The corrected IP address
appears in the Host IP Connections Orders dialog box.
If you want to remove an IP address, follow these steps:
• Highlight the IP address in the Host IP Connections Orders dialog box,
and then click Remove.
The IP address is removed from the list.
If you want to remove all IP addresses, follow these steps:
• Click Remove All.
• The following dialog box opens:

20 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-15. Warning for Remove All Dialog Box

All IP address will disappear from the Host IP Connections Orders dialog
box. (You will not be able to leave the TCP/IP Connection Setting dialog
box without entering at least one IP address.)
3. Under Host IP reconnect preferences, select the appropriate radio button to
tell the system what to do if the current IP address connection fails.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
After the communications settings have been selected you may test the
configuration by performing a Poll. An error message that indicates a
communication failure is displayed if the port is not properly configured or
connected. For more information on performing a Poll, see page 43.
If you choose Demo, follow these steps:
1. The Communications Settings dialog box opens as shown in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16. Demo Connection Type Dialog Box

2. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

If you choose Dial-Up, follow these steps:
1. The Communications Settings dialog box opens as shown in Figure 2-17.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 21

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-17. Dial-Up Connection Type Dialog Box

2. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to set the baud rate. The baud
rate must match the baud rate setting of the router frame’s serial port.
3. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to select the COMM port.
4. In the Phone Number edit box, enter the phone number of the remote
router. Include the area code, if required, and any additional numbers
necessary. If an outside line must be accessed before the number is dialed,
place a comma in the phone number string. The comma will cause the
modem to pause for one second before continuing to dial the number.
Additional commas may be added as necessary (each comma equals one
second). All other appropriate Hayes compatible commands are recognized
in the phone number string.
5. Click the appropriate Dial Mode radio button to select either Tone or Pulse
dialing. Click the appropriate mode.
6. The Modem Initialization String edit box allows the modem to be
configured before it attempts to dial the remote router. The default string
will work for most modems. If the modem includes special features such as
data compression or error correction, these special features may have to be
disabled in order for the system to work properly. Try the default modem
initialization string first. If the modem does not operate properly, refer to the
modem instruction manual for commands to disable the special features.
Enter those commands in the Modem Initialization String edit box.
7. Change one or all of the following selections in the Dialog Properties box:
• RouterMapper will automatically redial the remote if the connection
attempt is not successful. The Max Retries spin box designates the
maximum number of times the modem will attempt to redial. Click the
Up/Down arrows or enter the desired number in the Max Retries edit
box.

22 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

• The time required for RouterMapper to connect to the remote router

depends on the modem, the phone system and the origin of the call (local
vs. long distance), etc.
• The Wait Period spin box designates the amount of time RouterMapper
will wait for a connection before initiating a redial. Increase the Wait
Period setting if the panel continuously times-out and redials.
• The Pause Period spin box determines the delay between a time-out and
a redial attempt. Click the Up/Down arrows, or type the desired number
directly in the edit box.
• Occasionally, a modem will report a successful connection, even though
no data is actually being transferred. The Wait After spin box designates
a delay time during which RouterMapper will wait before accessing the
remote router. If RouterMapper momentarily connects and then breaks
the connection, increase the Wait After connect time.
8. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Remote Dial-Up
Selecting the remote dial-up icon at the Start menu will open an application note
describing three methods of controlling Harris routing systems at remote sites.
(For the purposes of this manual, only the RouterWorks remote dial-up method
is discussed.)

Connecting the Equipment

Note
The SCE/RSCE-101 in use must be operating with Revision 3.0 or later
software. The XPlus frame also requires Revision 3.0 or later software.

The RouterWorks remote dial-up application requires two modems.

• One modem is connected to the PC. The PC modem does not require special
cabling. Connect the PC modem as directed in the modem instruction
manual.
• One modem is connected to a serial port on the router at the remote site. The
router modem must be connected to a serial port on the remote router. A
standard modem cable can be used. (The connector on the router is a 9-pin,
male connector configured with the same pin-out as the serial port on an
IBM-PC/AT.) The remote router serial port may be an SCE-101, an
RSCE-101, or an XPlus™.

Configuring the PC Modem

The PC modem does not require special configuration for use with the
RouterWorks applications. See Figure 2-18 on page 25 for a picture of the
proper way to connect equipment for remote dial-up.
Harris has available a set of preconfigured and tested modems and required
cables (Part # RCP-MODEM-KIT) for the remote dial-up option used with

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 23

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

RouterWorks, EventWorks, and the RCP-ANXY. This option offers a

plug-and-play solution for controlling a router at a remote site. Contact your
local dealer for more information.

Configuring the Router

To configure the routing system for remote use, follow these steps:
1. Set the DIP switches on the remote router’s serial port to the default
configuration.
2. Set the Echo Mode ON.
3. Set the baud rate as appropriate.
4. Refer to the router manual for baud rate and echo mode switch positions.

CAUTION
We recommend that you test your system before
its final installation at the remote site. Testing
will require access to two phone lines, and
should include a complete operational test of
the dial-up and control functions.

Configuring the Router Modem

To configure the router modem, temporarily connect the modem to a PC and
follow the programming instructions provided in the Remote Dial-Up
application note. To open the application note, select the Remote Dial-Up icon
from the Start menu.

24 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-18. Connecting Equipment for Remote Dial-Up

Configuring RouterWorks
To configure the RouterWorks database for remote use, follow these steps:
1. Select the RouterMapper icon from the Microsoft® Windows® Start menu
or from your desktop shortcut.
2. From the RouterMapper main menu, select Comm Settings. The
Communications Settings dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the baud rate and comm port to be used in the remote system.
4. Click Dial-Up (located in the Connection Type group).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 25

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

5. The Communications Settings dialog box will change, as shown in

Figure 2-13 on page 20.
6. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to set the baud rate. The baud
rate must match the baud rate setting of the router frame’s serial port.
7. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to select the COMM port.
8. In the Phone Number edit box, enter the phone number of the remote
router. Include the area code, if required, and any additional numbers
necessary. If an outside line must be accessed before the number is dialed,
place a comma in the phone number string. The comma will cause the
modem to pause for one second before continuing to dial the number.
Additional commas may be added as necessary (each comma equals one
second). All other appropriate Hayes-compatible commands are recognized
in the phone number string.
9. Click the appropriate Dial Mode radio button to select either Tone or Pulse
dialing. Click the appropriate mode.
10. The Modem Initialization String edit box allows the modem to be
configured before it attempts to dial the remote router. The default string
will work for most modems. If the modem includes special features such as
data compression or error correction, these special features may have to be
disabled in order for the system to work properly. Try the default modem
initialization string first. If the modem does not operate properly, refer to the
modem instruction manual for commands to disable the special features.
Enter those commands in the Modem Initialization String edit box.
11. Change one or all of the following selections in the Dialog Properties box:
• RouterMapper will automatically redial the remote if the connection
attempt is not successful. The Max Retries spin box designates the
maximum number of times the modem will attempt to redial. Click the
Up/Down arrows or enter the desired number in the Max Retries edit
box.
• The time required for RouterMapper to connect to the remote router
depends on the modem, the phone system and the origin of the call (local
vs. long distance), etc.
• The Wait Period spin box designates the amount of time RouterMapper
will wait for a connection before initiating a redial. Increase the Wait
Period setting if the panel continuously times-out and redials.
• The Pause Period spin box determines the delay between a time-out and
a redial attempt. Click the Up/Down arrows, or type the desired number
directly in the edit box.
• Occasionally, a modem will report a successful connection, even though
no data is actually being transferred. The Wait After spin box designates
a delay time during which RouterMapper will wait before attempting to
access the remote router. If RouterMapper momentarily connects and
then breaks the connection, increase the Wait After connect time.
12. After setting all modem parameters, click OK to close the Communications
Settings dialog box.

26 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

13. Click Save from the RouterMapper File menu to save the modifications.
14. Click Exit to leave RouterMapper.

Controlling a Remote Router

After the router, the router modem and the RouterWorks database have been
configured for remote operations, launch the RouterWorks application by
selecting the appropriate panel icon at the Start menu. The selected application
automaticallys dial the remote router, and the Dialing Remote System dialog
box opens. When the connection to the remote router is established, the dialog
box will disappear from the screen, and the RouterWorks control panel is
displayed. The on-screen control panel will now be on-line and will operate
normally. When the panel is closed, the phone connection to the remote router is
automatically disconnected.

Automatic Disconnect Feature

If a remote router is inactive for an extended time, the automatic disconnect
feature will break the phone connection. This feature is user-configurable, and it
can be disabled. When a time-out occurs, a dialog box opens on the
RouterWorks screen to warn the user that a disconnect is imminent. If the
Cancel button is not pressed within 10 seconds, the remote connection is
broken.
• Press Cancel to abort the disconnect.
• Press Hang Up to disconnect the remote router.
To configure the Automatic Disconnect time-out period, follow these steps:
1. Open the RouterMapper initialization file (editrtr.ini) in any text editor.
(The editrtr.ini file is located in the Windows directory.)
2. Set the RemoteTimeOutInterval= line to the desired time period (in
minutes). The maximum is 240 minutes (4 hours), and the minimum is 1
minute.
3. To disable the automatic disconnect, set the RemoteTimeOutInterval=
line to 0.

Preferences
The Preferences dialog box allows you to control how particular aspects of
RouterMapper information is displayed.
To access the Preferences dialog box, click Preferences at the RouterMapper
menu bar. A drop down list similar to the one shown in Figure 2-19 on page 28
opens.
Choose one of these selections:
• Editor
• Panel Defaults
• Soft Panel Fonts
• Hard Panel Fonts

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 27

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

• Button Color
• Zero-Based Export

Figure 2-19. Preferences Dialog Box

Editor Preferences Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to display certain kinds of helpful information when
you edit router databases or panel settings.

28 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-20. Editor Preferences Dialog Box

• The Hints for Router Database Editing selections allows RouterMapper

to display warnings whenever a user reassigns logical source or destination
definitions.
• The Hints for Copy Panels selections allows RouterMapper to display
hints on how to copy a panel's button definitions from one panel to another
panel.
• The Hints for Override Configured Matrix selections allows
RouterMapper to display warnings when you copy Integrator’s Detected
Matrix database over to a Programmed Matrix database.
• The Hints for Unknown Status Devices selections allows RouterMapper
to display warnings whenever you download a configuration for a device
with an unknown status.
• The Hints for Panacea & Edge selections allows RouterMapper to display
warnings when you remove a frame’s configuration files after a download
or an upload, or reset a frame after a download.
• The Hints for Panel Definition Editing selections allows RouterMapper to
display warnings when you delete a panel's button definition and when you
redefine a panel's button definition.
• The Legacy Frame selections allow you to
• Keep and show all found legacy frames (VIA, XPlus, XPRESS, MixBox,
etc.) when a system poll is completed

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 29

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

• Remove all legacy frames from the RouterMapper database when a

system poll is completed
• Prompt you as to which of the above operations to perform after a system
poll is completed
• The Hints for DB-Sync Options selection allows RouterMapper to display
messages when logical database changes require updates to the Platinum,
Panacea, and Edge products that support logical names synchronization1.
• The Hints for User Download Options allows RouterMapper to display
messages about selecting different options for downloading devices. (See
“Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58 for more information about
this topic.)
• Clicking on the Normal radio button selection allows you to display
three download options: Download selected devices, download changed
devices, or download all devices (see Figure 2-21).

Figure 2-21. Normal Download Display

• Clicking on the Advance radio button allows you to display appropriate

download options based on available devices in a database. It “filters” the
device selection option to allow you to either download panels or other
devices separately (see Figure 2-22).

1 Logical
names synchronization allows dynamically updatable name support within a router
control system. The feature provides a means by which all devices using the same source and
destination names can receive notifications when the name has changed. As a result, the user does
not have to download the device database information for the name synchronization to take place.

30 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-22. Advance Download Display

Panel Defaults Dialog Box

This dialog box provides the default button definition for all panels' two
auxiliary buttons.

Figure 2-23. Panel Defaults Dialog Box

Soft Panel Fonts Dialog Box

Hard Panel Fonts Dialog Box
These dialog boxes allow you to select the fonts to use on soft panel and hard
panel displays.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 31

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-24. Fonts Dialog Box

Edit Button Colors Dialog Box

The Edit Button Colors dialog box allows you to change panel button
background color and panel button text color. You can also use this dialog box
to select color printing for key caps.

Figure 2-25. Button Colors Dialog Box

To change a panel button background color, follow these steps:

1. Click Preferences at the RouterMapper menu bar.
2. Select the Edit Button Color radio button.

32 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

3. Select the button on which you want to change the background color. A
color selection dialog box opens.
4. Check the color that you want the box to be. You may select either a basic or
a custom color.
5. Click OK. You will return to the Button Colors dialog box.
6. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To change a panel button text color, follow these steps:
1. Select Preferences at the RouterMapper menu bar.
2. Select the Edit Text Color radio button.
3. Click the button on which you want to change the text color. A color
selection dialog box opens.
4. Check the color that you want the box to be. You may select either a basic or
a custom color.
5. Click OK. You will return to the Button Colors dialog box.
To select color printing for key caps, follow these steps:
1. Click PREFERENCES at the RouterMapper menu bar.
2. Check the Use Colors When Printing Key Caps check box.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu .
Zero-Based Export

Note
Navigator requires you to export your database with zero-based
numbers.

This selection allows you to controls whether you export a RouterMapper

database with zero-based or one-based numbers.
• When this selection is checked, the database is exported with zero-based
numbers.
• When this selection is not checked, the database is exported with one-based
numbers.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 33

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Uninstalling RouterMapper
RouterMapper has a customized uninstall function to allow you to remove it
from your system.

Note
If you set up a desktop shortcut to RouterMapper, you will need to
remove it separately. The Uninstall process will not remove user-defined
shortcut icons.

To uninstall RouterMapper, follow these steps:

1. From the Windows menu bar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2. Click on the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3. Scroll down to the “Leitch RouterMapper” listing, and then click on it.
Program usage information, as well as a Change/Remove button, appears.
4. The Select Uninstall Method dialog box opens.

Figure 2-26. Select Uninstall Method Dialog Box

CAUTION
Never use the custom uninstall unless instructed to
do so by Customer Service representatives.

5. Choose the Automatic radio button to uninstall all RouterMapper software

components.
6. The Perform Uninstall dialog box opens.

34 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-27. Perform Uninstall Dialog Box

7. Follow the instructions listed on the Perform Uninstall dialog box.

• Click Back to change the uninstall options.
• Click Finish to complete the uninstall process.
• Click Cancel to exit the program without uninstalling RouterMapper
components.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 35

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

36 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3
Startup and Customization

Overview
This chapter provides information on starting up and customizing the
RouterMapper software application.
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Adding Devices Manually” on page 53
• “Backing Up and Restoring Databases” on page 71
• “Copying Control Panel Definitions” on page 55
• “Discovering Devices” on page 51
• “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58
• “Editing Device Definitions” on page 54
• “Enabling Logical Database Name Synchronization” on page 64
• “Launching RouterMapper” on page 38
• “Managing Database Elements” on page 60
• “Overview of the Main Menu Dialog Box” on page 39
• “Polling the Control System” on page 43
• “Printing a Database” on page 70
• “Printing Key Caps” on page 68
• “Setting up a Database” on page 43
• “Upgrading Edge and Panacea Firmware” on page 77

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 37

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Launching RouterMapper
1. Select the RouterMapper icon from the Start menu or from your desktop
shortcut.
2. The RouterMapper main menu opens, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Router database
definition section Device management section

Router database
summary
Device summary list
(list of devices asso-
ciated with the data-
base)
Router database
editing functions

Status indicators
Device definition buttons

Figure 3-1. RouterMapper Main Menu

38 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Overview of the Main Menu Dialog Box

The RouterMapper main menu dialog box provides a summary of router and
control panel databases.
• The left third of the dialog box summarizes the current router database, and
holds buttons that access the Router Level Definitions and Edit Logical
Database windows. The Router Definition box displays a static list control
that shows all levels enabled for the system (and the levels’ respective
sizes). You cannot select items in this list, but you can scroll up and down to
view levels that are not currently viewable.
• Buttons located at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to perform device
downloading and defining functions.
• The right side of the main menu dialog box displays a list of all devices
associated with the database. Devices may include control panels, router
frames, master controllers, SPTs, and other downloadable Harris devices.
The dialog box is arranged in tree format (each device is grouped by type),
and can be viewed either in expanded or minimized view. To view a list of
all devices of a certain type (for example, all control panels in the database),
click the plus (+) sign. The list will expand, as shown in Figure 3-2 on
page 39.

“Tree” control:
Top level root
(click to expand)

Figure 3-2. Expanding a Top-level Root Entry

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 39

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Sorting Entries in the Device List

You can sort entries in the device list by Device, Type, ID, or Status. Click the
appropriate column header to resort the list.

Pop-Up Menus
RouterMapper includes pop-up menus for quick access to commonly used
functions. Pop-up menus (accessed by clicking the right mouse button) will only
contain those options that are valid in the area where the mouse cursor is
located. For example, right-clicking on a panel name in the device list will
produce a pop-up menu similar to the one shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3. Revealing Quick Access Pop-Up Menus

Device Definition Function Buttons

The Discovery button is a quick way to search the control system for any
programmable devices that may be present in the system. Unlike the Polling
option, the Discovery option will not obtain information about current
configurations; however, it will allow you to select discovered devices to add to
the device list. You can then use RouterMapper’s Edit capabilities to configure
the device. (See “Discovering Devices” starting on page 51, for more
information.)
The Poll button is used to query the control system for any programmable
devices that may be present in the system. Polling will obtain information about
the current configuration of each physical device, and will compare it to the
information found in the database to determine if the database information
matches the actual configuration. (See “Polling the Control System” starting on
page 43, for more information.)

40 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

The Download button downloads the device configuration information created

in RouterMapper to the physical device’s memory. (See “Downloading Device
Definitions” starting on page 58, for more information.
The Edit button is used to modify the device’s definition. Because different
devices have different features and capabilities, the appearance of the Edit
dialog box will depend on the type of device being edited. For more information
about editing frames, see “Editing Device Definitions” starting on page 54.
Panel editing procedures are covered in separate sections (see the table of
contents for your particular panel).
The Add button allows you to manually add a new device to the device list.
New devices are assigned the next available ID, and the default source,
destination and (in the case of control panels) function key mappings. (See
“Adding Devices Manually” starting on page 53, for more information.)
The Delete button deletes a device from the list and from the database.

Router Definition Function Buttons

The Define Levels button allows a unique name and/or color to be assigned to
each level in the system. (See “Defining the Levels” starting on page 226, for
more information.) It also allows the size of the logical database to be set.
The Sources button opens the Edit Logical Sources dialog box. (See “Defining
the Sources” starting on page 230, for more information.)
The Destinations button opens the Edit Logical Destinations dialog box. (See
“Defining the Destinations” starting on page 248, for more information.)
The Routing Fabric button opens the Edit Logical Database dialog box. (See
“Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric” starting on page 262, for more
information.)

Device Summary List

The editor will not attempt to download devices that have a device definition
error.
The user-assigned Name helps you to quickly locate the desired device.
The Type information includes the device style (e.g., ABA, GPI) and the size of
the device (e.g., 32×32, 32×8, 4RU).
The ID is the device’s physical address in the system.
The Status indicates the current status of each device. See Table 3-2 on page 45
for a list of status indicators and their meanings.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 41

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

System Limitations
Table 3-1 lists RouterMapper system limitations.

Table 3-1. RouterMapper System Limitations

System Item Limitation
Maximum number of levels 16
Maximum number of logical sources 3072
Maximum number of logical destinations 3072
Maximum number of sources usable with non Power-PC 128
based alphanumeric panels (panels that do not have serial
& Ethernet ports) when in program mode (DIP switch
mode is only limited by router system size)
Maximum number of panels in one router system
Platinum routers 512
Panacea routers with enhanced resource module and
firmware version 3.12 or higher
Integrator routers 128
Panacea routers with standard resource module
Maximum number of salvos (the actual number of salvos 254
that can be downloaded to panels is limited by panel
memory and the number of buttons on the panel, but RW/
RM supports up to 254 salvos total)
Maximum number of Integrator frames in one router 128
system
Maximum number of matrices per Integrator frame 8
Maximum number of components per Integrator frame 5
matrix

42 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Setting up a Database
To set up a database, follow these steps:
1. Set the COMM properties (see “Communications Settings” on page 18).
2. Poll the system for frames, control panels, master controllers and Edge
products; discover and add them; or add them manually (see “Polling the
Control System” on page 43, “Discovering Devices” on page 51, and
“Adding Devices Manually” on page 53.
3. Edit the frames. Set the levels, source offsets and destination offsets, etc.
(see “Editing a Frame Definition” on page 293).
4. Edit the logical database. Define the logical sources, logical destinations,
etc. (see “Editing a Logical Database” on page 225).
5. Configure the control panels (see the table of contents for your particular
panel).
6. Download all frames, control panels, master controllers, and Edge products
(see “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58).

Polling the Control System

Polling may be used to add control panels and/or Platinum, Panacea, and
Integrator series frames to the database. Polling may also be used to determine
whether the configuration of the physical devices is up-to-date with respect to
the database configuration. When polling is initiated, RouterMapper will
compare a version stamp stored within the device with a version stamp stored in
the editor database. If the versions do not match, the physical device must be
updated with the current database information (device information must be
downloaded again).
To initiate a Poll, follow these steps:
1. Click Poll at the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. Click Poll.
2. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Selected Devices(s) or Entire Router System.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 43

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

3. RouterMapper will query all downloadable devices connected to the control

system to determine which devices exist, and whether the configuration of
each is up-to-date with respect to the database.
• If new devices are found, the device list (at the main menu) is updated, as
shown in Figure 3-4 on page 44. Table 3-2 on page 45 shows a listing of
the polling status designators.

Note
There are specialized dialog boxes to help you pinpoint
and correct polling problems in a Combiner system. See
“Combiner System Polling Problems” on page 46 for
explanations and examples.

• If errors are found during the polling process, RouterMapper will list the
errors at the main menu. Table 3-3 on page 46 shows a listing of possible
problem conditions and their corrective actions.

Press Poll Poll will return a list of panels and frames

found; device status will be displayed

Figure 3-4. Main Menu Dialog Box after System Poll

4. After the Poll is successfully completed, the device definitions must be

downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can take
effect. See “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58 for information
on how to perform this process.

44 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Polling Status Indicators

Table 3-2. Polling Status Indicators
Status Indicator Description
Configuration Errors Device has one or more errors in configuration setup
Device Type Mismatch Device’s configuration does not correlate to its device type
External Thread Failed Integrator frame in a Combiner system has invalid thread(s) connections
Flash Not Installed Integrator frame’s logic card does not have flash memory
Hardware Changed Integrator frame’s read-only data has been updated based on latest device’s
hardware setup
Multiple Devices Two or more same type devices have the same ID
Needs Download Device’s configuration and/or thread connections (only in Integrator frame)
are mismatched, or device configuration has been modified
New New device is added to the database
Not Found Device is not found
OK Device is found with matching configuration. If device is an Integrator
frame, it has valid Thread connection(s)
Out of Memory Integrator frame does not have enough memory to store configuration data
Partial Found Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that are missing
System Errors Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that have one or more
of the following errors:
• Configuration errors
• Device type mismatch
• Flash not installed
• Hardware change
• Multiple devices
• Out of memory
Thread Failed Unable to retrieve Integrator frame’s thread connection(s)
Unknown RouterMapper does not recognize the device type or needs to do a system
poll to update its database (every time a database is loaded, all devices’
status is reset to “Unknown”)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 45

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Possible Polling Problems

Table 3-3. Polling Problems and Corrective Actions
Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Device did not respond The device is defined in the Verify that a device with the
database, but could not be found on specified ID is in the control
the network. system; verify the physical
device’s DIP switch settings
Device style mismatch The type setting in the database did Edit the Device Style setting
not match the type of the physical Check device IDs
device found at the specified ID.
Multiple devices at same ID Two or more physical devices of Change one of the devices to a
the same style were found sharing different ID
the same ID.
Multiple styles with same ID Two or more physical devices of Change the ID settings (all devices
different styles were found sharing sharing an ID must be the same
the same ID. style)

Combiner System Polling Problems

Specialized dialog boxes help you pinpoint and correct polling problems in a
Combiner system. These dialog boxes will pop up after you have performed a
system poll. (See page 43 for more information about performing a system
poll).
1. If there are problems in your Combiner system, RouterMapper will display
a Combiner System Error Report screen, as shown in Figure 3-5 on page 46.

Figure 3-5. Combiner System Error Report Dialog Box

46 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

In the Combiner System Issues box, you will see all of the hardware
included as part of the Combiner system. Frames with associated errors are
marked with a red “X” superimposed over the frame icon.
1. Click any of the frames with errors associated. A Device Description dialog
box opens, which displays frame-specific information such as Frame ID,
Level, Matrix, etc. In the System Error Description box, RouterMapper lists
all Combiner system errors.

Figure 3-6. Error Report for Specific Frame

2. Highlight any of the error descriptions, and then click Detail... to display
the Error Description dialog box.

Figure 3-7. Error Description Dialog Box

3. The Error Description dialog box describes the system issue or error, and
provides information on how to correct the error. See Table 3-4 on page 49
on for a list of Combiner system polling failure conditions and their
associated corrective actions.
4. After reviewing the error description, click OK to return to the Combiner
System Error Report dialog box, and then click OK to return to the
RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 47

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

5. Perform all recommended corrective actions, and then perform another poll
to make sure that all Combiner system errors have been corrected.
Table 3-4 on page 49 provides a list of Combiner system polling failure
conditions and their associated corrective actions.

48 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Table 3-4. Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions

Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Combiner system has old firmware One or more frame members have old Contact Customer Service
firmware version; system’s Dynamic representative to get a firmware
Routing Fabric database is incomplete upgrade
Same frame configured in multiple One or more frame members are Option 1: Configure a new system,
combiner system configured to be part of another and then download devices to update
Combiner system this system’s invalid frames
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with
OK status) turned ON, power down the
rest of the frames that are part of this
Combiner system (make sure the
control cable is directly connected to
the frame which is turned on.
Repoll the Combiner system

If the polled system has a valid

configuration, power up the rest of the
frames and download this valid
configuration to those frames (a default
Combiner system is rebuilt after the
system poll)
Special configuration to the system is
lost, since one or more frames were
powered down during the poll
Frame is no longer part of a combiner One or more frame members are no Option 1: Configure a new system,
system longer part of this Combiner system and then download devices to update
this system’s invalid frames
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with
OK status) turned ON, power down the
rest of the frames that are part of this
Combiner system.

Make sure the control cable is directly

connected to the frame which is turned
on
Repoll the Combiner system
If the polled system has a valid
configuration, power up the rest of the
frames and download this valid
configuration to those frames (a default
Combiner system is rebuilt after the
system poll)

Special configuration to the system is

lost, since one or more frames were
powered down during a poll

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 49

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Table 3-4. Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions (Continued)
Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
One or more frames are missing One or more frame members are Check the control cable and make sure
missing that the frames are powered ON
Delete this Combiner system from the
RouterMapper database
Perform another system poll (if the
hardware is unavailable, add the
necessary hardware before you repoll
the system.)
Combiner system matrix size is not One or more frame members’ Configure a new system, and then
matched configuration does not fit with this download devices to update this
Combiner system system’s invalid frames

50 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Discovering Devices
An alternative to polling the system is to discover the devices via
RouterMapper’s Discovery function. The discovery function differs from
polling in that discovery does not provide detailed information about
configuration of the physical devices.
To discover a device, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Discover.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Discovery.
2. RouterMapper will query the control system, and then display a list of
newly discovered devices (see Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8. Device Discovery Dialog Box

If you do not want to add particular discovered items to the Device List,
click the check box next to its name. This will remove the selection mark
from the check box.
3. Click Add Newly Discovered. RouterMapper will add the discovered items
to the Device List.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 51

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-9. Adding a Frame by Discovery

4. Select the discovered device you want to configure, and then click Edit.
Because different devices require different configuration settings, editing
procedures for each device supported by RouterMapper are discussed in
separate chapters.
• For information on editing a frame definition, see Chapter 9.
• For information about editing the various control panels, see Chapter 10
through Chapter 16.
• For information about editing an Edge, see Chapter 6.
5. After device editing is successfully completed, the device definitions must
be downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can take
effect. See “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58 for information
on how to perform this process.

52 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Adding Devices Manually

An alternative to polling the system for devices is to create the device
definitions via RouterMapper’s Add function. The new device is assigned the
next available ID, and the default source, destination and (in the case of control
panels) function key mappings.
To add a new device manually, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Add. The Add a New Device to the
Database dialog box opens (see Figure 3-10).
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Add Device. A second shortcut menu opens (see Figure 3-15 on
page 63).
2. Select a device type from the drop-down list box.

Figure 3-10. Add New Device to the Database Dialog Box

3. Click OK.
4. Depending on which device type you selected, the Add Edge, Add Panels,
or Add Router Frame dialog box opens.
5. Select the device you want to add, and then click OK.
Because different devices require different configuration settings,
procedures for each device supported by RouterMapper are discussed in
separate chapters.
• For information on adding frames, see Chapter 4: “Adding Frames”
starting on page 79.
• For information about adding control panels, see Chapter 5: “Adding
Router Control Panels” starting on page 171.For information about
adding an Edge, see Chapter 6: “Adding and Editing Edge
Configurations” starting on page 177.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 53

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

6. After devices are successfully added, the device definitions must be

downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can take
effect. See “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58 for information
on how to perform this process.

Editing Device Definitions

1. Double-click the device name in the list at the RouterMapper main menu (or
select the device name, and then click Edit).
2. Depending on which device type you selected, the Edit Frame, Edit Panel,
Edit Edge, or Master Control Panel or Frame dialog box opens.
Because different devices require different configuration settings, editing
procedures for each device supported by RouterMapper are discussed in
separate chapters.
• For information on editing a frame definition, see Chapter 9.
• For information about editing the various control panels, see Chapter 10
through Chapter 16.
• For information about editing an Edge, see Chapter 6.
3. After device editing is successfully completed, the device definitions must
be downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can take
effect. See “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58 for information
on how to perform this process.

54 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Copying Control Panel Definitions

CAUTION
Copying a panel definition will overwrite the existing
panel definition.

In a router control system involving multiple control panels, many of the panels
will share a common definition. To avoid having to add and edit each panel
individually, use the Copy function to copy the panel definition information
from one panel to another, or to many panels simultaneously.
To copy a panel, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main menu.
2. Select Copy.
A shortcut Hint dialog box may appear. It displays information that
otherwise may be overlooked or not known, and may have a significant
effect on your choices.
You may disable this (and any other future) Hints boxes. Simply select the
check box at the bottom.

Figure 3-11. Hint Dialog Box

3. The Copy Panels dialog box opens (see Figure 3-12 on page 56).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 55

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Copy Sources button

Copies source assignments from panel
selected in Copy From panel list to panel(s)
selected in Copy To panel list

Copies destination assignments from panel

selected in Copy From panel list, to panel(s)
selected in Copy To panel list

Copies selection key assignments

(categories, favorite sources, favorite
destinations) from panel selected in Copy
From panel list, to panel(s) selected in
Copy To panel list

Notes:
All panels will appear in both lists.

Copying a panel definition from one panel to

another will overwrite the existing assign-
Copy From Copy To ments of the panels selected in the Copy To
list of panels list of panels list.

Single panel original to be copied from is

selected in the Copy From list.

Single or multiple panels to be copied to

are selected in the Copy To list.

Figure 3-12. Copy Panel Definitions

The Copy Panels dialog lists all panels in the database. Each panel appears
twice: once in the Copy From section, and once in the Copy To section.
• The panel configuration to be copied (the one you want the other panels
to look like) is selected from the Copy From list.
• The panel or panels that will receive the new configuration are selected
from the Copy To list.
• Multiple panels may be selected from the Copy To list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
while selecting the panels).
The radio buttons at the top of the Copy Panels dialog make it easier to find the
appropriate panels by sorting the lists into panel types. Clicking on the
RCP-ABA button, for example, will cause the Panel Lists to display only
RCP-ABA panels.

Note
The Sources, Destinations and Categories function buttons will not be
enabled until panels have been selected (highlighted) in both Copy From
and Copy To boxes. Select one panel in the Copy From box, then one or
more in the Copy To box. Press the appropriate function button(s).

56 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

The function buttons located between the two lists are used to select the specific
configuration information that is to be copied.
• To copy source assignments, click Sources.
• To copy destination assignments, click Destinations.
• To copy selection key assignments (categories, favorite sources, and
favorite destinations), click Categories.

CAUTION
Copying a panel definition will overwrite the existing
panel definition.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 57

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Downloading Device Definitions

After device definitions have been created and edited, they must be downloaded
to the physical device before the new configuration can take effect.
To download a device, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the device entry that requires downloading. Multiple devices may
be selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
2. Click Download.
OR
Right-click the mouse button to access the Device Management menu (see
Figure 3-17 on page 65).
3. The About to Download dialog box (see Figure 2-21 on page 30) opens.
4. Make one of the following choices:
• Choose (Download to) Selected Device if you want the newly created/
edited device configuration information to be downloaded to the
highlighted device entry.
• Choose (Download to) Changed Devices if you want the newly created/
edited device configuration information to be downloaded to all changed
devices (not just the highlighted device) in the control system.
• Choose (Download to) All Devices if you want the newly created/edited
device configuration information to be downloaded to all devices
(changed or not) in the control system.
5. Click OK.
• If the download process is completed without errors, a summary dialog
box opens. This dialog box will list the number of devices that were
successfully downloaded. The Device List is updated to reflect the
current status of the devices (the devices is marked “OK”).
• If errors are encountered during the download process, a Download
Failures dialog box opens. This dialog box will list the error(s)
encountered for each device. After all errors are corrected, download the
devices again. (See Table 3-5 on page 59 for corrective actions.)

58 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Table 3-5. Download Problems and Corrective Actions

Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Device did not The device is defined in the database, Verify that a device having the specified ID
respond but could not be found on the network. is in the control system and is in Program
Mode (devices that have been downloaded
must remain in Program Mode after the
download is complete); verify the physical
device’s DIP switch settings
Device style mismatch The Device Style setting in the Edit the Device Style setting
database did not match the style of the
physical device found at the specified
ID.
Multiple styles with Two or more physical devices of Change the ID settings (all devices sharing
same ID different styles were found sharing the an ID must be the same style)
same ID.
Panel brand mismatch User tried to download a Harris panel Download the appropriate panel brand (see
configuration to a Leitch panel, or a page 174 for more information about panel
Leitch panel configuration to a Harris brands)
panel (a Download error dialog box
opens and “Configuration Errors”
appears in the RouterMapper main
menu status row)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 59

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Managing Database Elements

RouterMapper allows you to manipulate groups of devices in folders, as well as
individual devices. A series of pop-up menus provide you with management
tools and shortcuts for tasks such as polling, discovering, and adding.

Managing Folders
By default, RouterMapper stores polled devices (see page 40) in folders
according to device type (e.g., routers, control panels, etc.). You can manage
your folders’ setup in several ways, as shown in Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 on
page 61.

Figure 3-13. Managing FoldersShortcut Menu

Polling Folders
The Poll and Poll Selected Devices selections are used to query the control
system for programmable devices that may be present in the folder. Polling will
obtain information about the current configuration of each physical device, and
will compare it to the information found in the database to determine if the
database information matches the actual configuration. (See “Polling the
Control System” starting on page 43, for more information.)

Discovering Folders
The Discover option is a “shortcut” that performs the same function as the
Discovery device definition function button on the main menu. The Discovery
function differs from polling in that discovery does not provide detailed
information about configuration of the physical devices.(See “Discovering
Devices” starting on page 51, for more information.)

Adding a New Folder

• Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens (see Figure 3-13).
• Click Add Folder.
• A New Folder selection appears in the Device Summary list.
To change the New Folder selection name, follow the steps as explained in
“Renaming a Folder” on page 61.

60 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Accessing the Folder Management Menu

Highlight the folder you want manipulate, and then right-click the mouse
button. A shortcut menu opens (see Figure 3-14).

Figure 3-14. Folder Management Selections

Polling Folders
The Poll Devices in Folder selection is used to query the control system for any
programmable devices that may be present in the folder. Polling will obtain
information about the current configuration of each physical device, and will
compare it to the information found in the database to determine if the database
information matches the actual configuration. (See “Polling the Control
System” starting on page 43, for more information.)

Downloading Folders
The Download Devices In Folder selection downloads the device
configuration information created in RouterMapper to the physical device’s
memory. (See “Downloading Device Definitions” starting on page 58, for more
information.)

Renaming a Folder
• Highlight the folder you want rename, and then right-click the mouse button
to access the Folder Management menu (see Figure 3-14).
• Select Rename Folder, and then type in the new folder name desired.

Adding a Sub-Folder
• Highlight the folder where you want add a sub-folder, and then right-click
the mouse button to access the Folder Management menu (see Figure 3-14).
• Select Add Sub Folder. A New Folder selection opens, indented, under the
appropriate folder in the Device Summary list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 61

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

• To change the New Folder selection name, follow the steps as explained in
“Renaming a Folder” on page 61.

Copying a Folder Link

You can copy the entire contents of one folder into another folder. For example,
you may have set up a folder called “Control Room Devices” and another folder
named “Platinum Routers.” If you want all of the devices listed on one folder to
appear in both folders, you can copy the link from one folder to another:
• Highlight the folder you want copy from, and then right-click the mouse
button to access the Folder Management menu (see Figure 3-14).
• Select Copy Folder Link, and then scroll down to the folder that you want
to copy to (the target folder).
• Right-click the mouse button to access the Device Management menu (see
Figure 3-14), and then select one of the following options:
• Select Paste Link Into to paste the folder link anywhere within the target
folder.
• Select Paste Link Before to paste the folder link in front of a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.
• Select Paste Link After to paste the folder link behind a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.

Moving a Folder Link

You can move the entire contents of one folder into another folder. For example,
you may have set up a folder called “Control Room Devices” and another folder
named “Platinum Routers.” If you want to move all of the devices listed in one
folder to another folders you can cut-and-paste the link from one folder to
another: (If you want to move only one device, use the Cut Device Link
option.)
• Highlight the folder you want move from, and then right-click the mouse
button to access the Folder Management menu (see Figure 3-14).
• Select Cut Folder Link, and then scroll down to the folder that you want to
move to (the target folder).
• Right-click the mouse button to access the Folder Management menu (see
Figure 3-14), and then select one of the following options:
• Select Paste Link Into to move the folder link anywhere within the
target folder.
• Select Paste Link Before to move the folder link in front of a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.
• Select Paste Link After to move the folder link behind a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.

62 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Deleting a Folder
CAUTION
Using the Delete Folder selection will remove the
selected folders/devices from all folders that you
have may have moved or copied via the Cut Folder
Link or Copy Folder Link selection. If you want to
delete only the selected folder/device, use the
Remove From Folder selection.

• Highlight the folder you want delete, and then right-click the mouse button
to access the Folder Management menu (see Figure 3-14).
• Select Delete Folder, and then click Yes at the message dialog box that
appears.

Managing Devices
As with folders, you can manage devices in several ways, as shown in
Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-17 on page 65.

Figure 3-15. Managing Devices Shortcut Menu

Polling Devices
The Poll and Poll Selected Device(s) options are “shortcuts” that performs the
same function as the Poll device definition function button on the main menu.
These selections are used to query the control system for specific programmable
devices that may be present in the folder. Polling will obtain information about
the current configurations of the physical devices, and will compare it to the
information found in the database to determine if the database information
matches the actual configuration. (See “Polling the Control System” starting on
page 43, for more information.)

Discovering Devices
The Discover option is a “shortcut” that performs the same function as the
Discovery device definition function button on the main menu. The discovery
function differs from polling in that discovery does not provide detailed
information about configuration of the physical devices.(See “Discovering
Devices” starting on page 51, for more information.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 63

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Adding a Device
This option is a “shortcut” that performs the same function as the Add device
definition function button on the main menu.
• Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
• Select Add Device. A second shortcut menu opens (see Figure 3-15 on
page 63).
Each of these Add Devices selections is explained in much greater detail
throughout the manual. See “Adding Devices Manually” starting on page 53,
for more information.

Enabling Logical Database Name Synchronization

RouterMapper version 6.08 and higher includes the capability to synchronize
name changes for certain elements of a RouterMapper database. The names
synchronization feature is available for the following products:
• Platinum routers running build 3.5 or higher
• Panacea routers with advanced resource cards running build 3.18 or higher
• Edge protocol gateways with advanced resource cards running build 3.18 or
higher
• Control panels with RES-H resource modules, build 3.18 or higher
The names synchronization feature allows all devices using the same source and
destination names to be updated whenever the logical names for the database
change. As a result, you do not have to perform a RouterMapper device
download for the changed name synchronization to take place. On devices
equipped with advanced resource modules, the device will actually reboot after
the Names DB Sync has been updated.
To enable or disable the synchronization feature, highlight the device which you
want to include in the names synchronization process, and then right-click the
mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.

64 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-16. Logical Database Synchronization Selections

Select the appropriate choice to enable or disable automation for the chosen
device. A check mark appears next to the selection.

Accessing the Device Management Menu

Highlight the device you want manipulate, and then right-click the mouse
button. A shortcut menu opens (see Figure 3-17).

Figure 3-17. Device Management Selections

Downloading Devices
The Download option will allow you to download information about a physical
device so that a new configuration can take effect. The Download process is
explained in much greater detail in the section “Downloading Device
Definitions” starting on page 58.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 65

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Removing a Device from a Folder

The Remove From Folder option will allow you to remove selected devices
from the pertinent folder only. It will not remove the device from any folders
that you may have moved or copied via the Cut Folder Link or Copy Folder
Link selection.
• Highlight the device you want in the folder you want to remove it from, and
then right-click the mouse button to access the Device Management menu
(see Figure 3-17).
• Select Remove From Folder, and then click Yes at the message dialog box
that appears.

Copying a Device Link

You can copy a device so that it appears in several folders at once. For example,
you may have set up a folder called “Control Room Devices” and another folder
named “Platinum Routers.” If you want a particular Platinum router to appear in
both folders, you can copy the link from one folder to another:
• Highlight the device in the folder you want copy from, and then right-click
the mouse button to access the Device Management menu (see
Figure 3-17).
• Select Copy Device Link, and then scroll down to the folder that you want
to copy to (the target folder).
• Right-click the mouse button to access the Device Management menu (see
Figure 3-17), and then select one of the following options:
• Select Paste Link Into to move the device link anywhere within the
target folder.
• Select Paste Link Before to move the device link in front of a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.
• Select Paste Link After to move the device link behind a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.

Moving a Device Link

You can move a device from one folder into another folder. For example, you
may have set up a folder called “Control Room Devices” and another folder
named “Platinum Routers.” If you want to move a device listed in one folder
into another folder you can cut-and-paste the link from one folder to another:
• Highlight the device in the folder you want move from, and then right-click
the mouse button to access the Device Management menu (see
Figure 3-17).
• Select Cut Device Link, and then scroll down to the folder that you want to
move to (the target folder).
• Right-click the mouse button to access the Device Management menu (see
Figure 3-17), and then select one of the following options:
• Select Paste Link Into to move the device link anywhere within the
target folder.
• Select Paste Link Before to move the device link in front of a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.

66 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

• Select Paste Link After to move the device link behind a particular
device or subfolder in the target folder.

Deleting a Device
CAUTION
Using the Delete selection will remove the selected
device from all folders that you have may have
moved or copied via the Cut Folder Link or Copy
Folder Link selection. If you want to delete only the
selected device, use the Remove From Folder
selection.

• Highlight the device you want delete, and then right-click the mouse button
to access the Device Management menu (see Figure 3-17).
• Select Delete, and then click Yes at the message dialog box that appears.

Editing a Device
The Edit option is a “shortcut” that performs the same function as the Edit
device definition function button on the main menu. This option is used to
modify the device’s definition. Because different devices have different features
and capabilities, the appearance of the Edit dialog box will depend on the type
of device being edited. For more information about editing frames, see “Editing
Device Definitions” starting on page 54. Panel editing procedures are covered
in separate sections (see the table of contents for your particular panel).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 67

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Printing Key Caps

Using RouterMapper, control panel key caps can be printed using any standard
printer. After the router database has been edited and selection keys have been
assigned, print and assemble the keycap legends so that the markings on each
key will match the key’s programming.
To print and assemble key caps, follow these steps:
1. From the RouterMapper main menu, right-click the panel or panels to be
printed. (Multiple panels can be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques [hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting panels].)
2. Select Print Key Caps from the pop-up menu. A Windows print dialog box
opens.
3. Select the printer, paper orientation, paper size, and any other setup
information that may be required. For best results, use 8 ½×11-inch clear
transparencies.
4. Click OK to begin printing.
5. After the key caps have been printed, carefully cut them along the
guidelines provided.
6. Assemble as shown in Figure 3-18 on page 69.

68 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-18. Assembling Key Caps

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 69

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Printing a Database
Note
To create PDF files, you must have the appropriate printer drivers
installed on your PC.

RouterMapper allows you to print a paper copies or create Adobe® PDF®1

versions of your created databases.
1. Select Print Logical Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or press
<Ctrl> P.
2. The Print Database dialog box opens.

Figure 3-19. Print Database Dialog Box

3. Click the proper radio button to sort the data.

4. Click OK. A Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. Select the printer that provides the type of output you want.
6. Choose the desired options (e.g., paper size, paper source, orientation), and
then click OK.

1 Adobe
and PDF are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and/or other countries.

70 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Backing Up and Restoring Databases

RouterMapper allows you to back up and restore your created databases. Back
up your databases frequently to make sure you do not lose important
configuration information because of a system or hard disk crash, power outage,
database corruption, or other “disaster.”

Backing Up a Database
RouterMapper allows you to back up any database currently in use. You can
choose to back up the database onto an individual PC or to a Platinum or a
Panacea enhanced module router/server.
To back up a database to an individual PC, follow these steps:
1. Select Backup Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or press
<Ctrl> B. The Backup RouterMapper Database dialog box opens.

Figure 3-20. Backup RouterMapper Database Dialog Box

2. Select the PC radio button.

3. Verify the database listed in the Target Database box is the one you want to
back up information to.
• Click Original Database if it is the database you want.
• Click Browse… if you want to choose a database different from the one
listed.
You may back up files to a ZIP file, which RouterMapper will automatically
create for you. The ZIP file will contain all files associated with a particular
database. You can move or copy the ZIP file to another location, as desired,
and then restore the database and all of its associated files.
Alternatively, you may back up to a DA4 (“traditional” RouterMapper) file
format.
4. When you have the correct source and target databases selected, click OK.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 71

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

5. When RouterMapper finishes backing up the database, click OK to return

to the RouterMapper main menu.
To back up a database to a router server, follow these steps:
1. Select Backup Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or press
<Ctrl> B. The Backup RouterMapper Database dialog box opens (see
Figure 3-20 on page 71).
2. Select the Router Server radio button. The dialog box will expand to show
new selections (see Figure 3-21). You can specify the IP of the frame where
the backup will reside, or select the frame from the current configuration (if
a Platinum, or a Panacea or Edge with an enhanced resource module, is part
of the configuration).

Figure 3-21. Router Server Selections

• If you want to specify a particular IP address:

• Click the Specify IP Address for backup check box. The dialog
box will expand to show new selections (see Figure 3-21). When
you deselect this check box, the dialog box will return to its original
appearance.

72 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-22. Router Server IP Selections

• Enter the IP address of the target device; if necessary enter the

appropriate user name and password assigned to that IP address.
• Click OK.
• When RouterMapper finishes backing up the database, click OK to
return to the RouterMapper main menu.
• If you want a frame from the current configuration:
• Select the target server from the Database to Target Server
drop-down list box.
• Click OK.
• When RouterMapper finishes backing up the database, click OK to
return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Restoring a Database
RouterMapper allows you to restore databases you backed up via the
RouterMapper backup utility. (See “Backing Up a Database” starting on
page 71, for more information about the backup utility.)
You may either restore the database in use or select other databases to restore.
To restore a database from an individual PC, follow these steps:
1. Select Restore Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or press
<Ctrl> R. The Restore RouterMapper Database dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 73

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Database to
restore data FROM

Used to find a Used to select

database different the database
from the one listed listed

Database to
restore data TO

Figure 3-23. Restore RouterMapper Database Dialog Box

2. Verify the database listed in the Reference Database box is the one you want
to restore information from.
• Click Current Database if it is the database you want.
• Click Browse… if you want to choose a database different from the one
listed.
3. Verify the database listed in the Target Database box is the one you want to
restore information to.
• Click Original Database if it is the database you want.
• Click Browse… if you want to choose a database different from the one
listed.
4. When you have the correct source and target databases selected, click OK.
5. When RouterMapper finishes restoring the database, click OK to return to
the RouterMapper main menu.
To restore a database from a router server, follow these steps:
1. Select Restore Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or press
<Ctrl> R. The Restore RouterMapper Database dialog box opens.
2. Select the Router Server radio button. The dialog box will expand to show
new selections (see Figure 3-24). You can specify the IP of the frame where
the backup will reside, or select the frame from the current configuration (if
a Platinum, or a Panacea or Edge with an enhanced resource module, is part
of the configuration).

74 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-24. Router Server Selections

• If you want to specify a particular IP address:

• Click the Specify IP Address for restore check box. The dialog
box will expand to show new selections (see Figure 3-21). When
you deselect this check box, the dialog box will return to its original
appearance.

Figure 3-25. Router Server IP Selections

• Enter the IP address of the target device; if needed, enter the

appropriate user name and password.
• Click OK.
• A message opens to ask if you want to overwrite the existing
database. Click OK.
• When RouterMapper finishes restoring the database, click OK to
return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 75

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

• If you want to restore a database from a frame in the current

configuration:
• Select the target server from the Reference Database from Router
Server drop-down list box.
• Click OK.
• A message asks if you want to overwrite the existing database.
Click OK.
3. When RouterMapper finishes restoring the database, click OK to return to
the RouterMapper main menu.

76 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Upgrading Edge and Panacea Firmware

RouterMapper allows you to upgrade firmware for an Edge, a Panacea
enhanced module router, or a P-RES-H panel. Follow these steps to upgrade
your Edge or Panacea enhanced module firmware:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, highlight the name of the device that you
want to upgrade.

Note
You can only upgrade one device at a time from the main
menu. If you select a series of devices for upgrade,
RouterMapper will only upgrade the first device in the series.

2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.

3. Scroll down to the Firmware Upgrade option. RouterMapper will prompt
you for the directory location and file name of the .ZIP file to send to the
device. The default name is P-RES-H_3_18.zip.

Figure 3-26. Firmware Upgrade Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 77

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

RouterMapper will use the frame’s IP address to establish an FTP connection.

(You set up the IP address via the device’s control card. See page 155 for more
information about the Panacea control card. See Chapter 6: “Adding and Editing
Edge Configurations” for more information about the Edge control card.)

Figure 3-27. Upgrade Process Display

78 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4
Adding Frames

Overview
RouterMapper supports downloading and managing Platinum, Integrator, and
Panacea series frames. Legacy frames (e.g., XPlus, Hedco, Mixbox, NEO, VIA,
and XPRESS) are not configurable via RouterMapper; however, they should be
added to the database so that RouterMapper will have a complete “view” of the
control system and will operate properly. Harris router frames can be added to
the database by discovering devices, polling the control network for installed
frames, or by manually creating entries in the device list using the Add
command. The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 80
• “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80
• “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 81
• “Adding Integrator Frames” on page 123
• “Adding Integrator Combiner Systems” on page 147
• “Adding Other (Legacy) Harris Frames” on page 168
• “Adding Panacea Frames” on page 151
• “Adding Platinum Frames” on page 82
For information about adding a control panel, see Chapter 5.
For information about adding and editing an optional Panacea or Edge web
configuration, see Chapter 7.
For information about adding and editing an Edge configurations, see
Chapter 6.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 79

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding a Frame by Polling

1. Click Poll at the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. Select Poll.
2. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Poll Selected Device(s) or Entire Router System.
3. RouterMapper will query the control system, and return error messages if
errors are found.
4. If no errors are found, RouterMapper will update the Device List with all
frames that were found during the Poll (see Figure 3-4 on page 44 for an
example.

Adding a Frame by Discovery

1. Click Discovery at the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Discovery.
2. RouterMapper will query the control system, and then display a list of
newly discovered devices (see Figure 3-8 on page 51 for an example).
If you do not want to add particular discovered items to the Device List,
click the check box next to its name. This will remove the selection mark
from the check box.
3. Click Add Newly Discovered. RouterMapper will add the discovered items
to the Device List.
4. Select the discovered frame you want to configure, and then click Edit. (For
information on editing a frame definition, see Chapter 9.)

80 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding a Frame Using the Add Command

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Add. The Add a New Device to the
Database dialog box opens (see Figure 3-10 on page 53 for an example).
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Add Device. A second shortcut menu opens (see Figure 3-15 on
page 63).
2. Select a device type from the drop-down list box.
3. Click OK.
4. Depending on which device type you selected, the Add Edge, Add Panels,
or Add Router Frame dialog box opens.
5. Select the device you want to add, and then click OK.
The dialogs that appear during the Add process depend on the type of frame
being added. Platinum frames, Integrator series frames, Panacea frames,
combiner systems, and non-Integrator series frames, are covered separately.
• For information on adding Platinum frames, see “Adding Platinum Frames”
on pages 82 through 113.
• For information on adding Integrator frames:
• See “Adding Integrator Frames” on pages 123 through 126.
• See “Adding Integrator Data Router Frames” on pages 127 through
132.
• See “Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital) Routers” on pages 133
through 136.
• See “Setting Up Output Monitoring” on pages 137 through 146.
• See “Adding Integrator Combiner Systems” on pages 147 through 150.
• For information on adding Panacea frames, see “Adding Panacea Frames”
on pages 151 through 167.
• For information on adding other Harris frames, see “Adding Other (Legacy)
Harris Frames” on pages 168 through 169.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 81

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Platinum Frames

Adding a Platinum frame to the RouterMapper database is a multi-step process
that requires you to
• Select a frame size (page 82)
• Set up a matrix (page 83)
• Set up monitoring, if you have optional monitoring modules as part of your
system (page 105)
• Set up controls (page 108)
• Set up SNMP (page 113)

Selecting the Frame Size

1. Choose one of the following methods to add a device to the RouterMapper
database:
• Poll (see “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80 for information on
how to use this method)
• Discovery (see “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 80 for
information on how to use this method)
• Add (see “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 81 for
information on how to use this method)
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select Router Type
dialog box opens.
3. Select the frame type. A blue border appears around the selected frame type.
4. Click OK. The Platinum Frame Size dialog box opens.
5. Select the Platinum frame size you want (options are 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU). A blue border appears around the selected type.
6. Click Next. The Platinum Configured Matrices dialog box opens.

82 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Setting Up a Matrix

Figure 4-1. Platinum Configured Matrix Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to add a new matrix, or delete or configure an
existing matrix for a Platinum frame. The Output column and the Input column
are set up with separate list box controls. You can use standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys) to select multiple
modules on each, or both, lists.
You may “quick-add” one or more matrices, for which RouterMapper will
automatically assign inputs, outputs, and formats. You also may add new
matrices one at a time, and select specific numbers of inputs and outputs, and
select a specific format.
• For information on how to quick-add matrices, go to page 84.
• For information on how to add matrices one at a time, go to page 85.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 83

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

“Quick-Adding” a New Matrix

1. Move the cursor display somewhere within the matrix list control area, and
then right-click the mouse. A selection box will pop up.

Figure 4-2. Add Matrices Selection Box

2. Select Add Multiple Matrices. The Add Multiple Matrices dialog box
opens.

Figure 4-3. Add Multiple Matrices Dialog Box

3. Fill in these fields via their associated drop-down list boxes:

a. # of Matrices: Choose the total number of matrices you want in
addition to the one that already appears in the matrix description area.
RouterMapper will evenly divide the remaining modules into the
requested matrices.
b. Starting Level: Choose the Level number that corresponds to the level
number the physical router frame will occupy in the routing system.
c. If you want all matrices to have the same Level, click the check box.

84 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

4. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box. The new matrix
information appears in the description boxes. The matrix’s module
information is color-coded as shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1. Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the
selected matrix.
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because
they are assigned to another matrix.
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be
assigned to any matrix.
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to
(or unassigned from) the selected matrix.

d. Click Next. The Monitoring Matrices dialog box opens. Go to page 105
to continue.

Adding a New Matrix

1. At the Configured Matrix dialog box, click Add. (Alternatively, move the
cursor display somewhere within the matrix list control area, and then
right-click the mouse. A small selection box will pop up. Select Add
Matrix.) The Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 4-4) opens.

Figure 4-4. Add WB Matrix Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 85

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Depending on the matrix type you choose, the appearance and selections for this
dialog box will change.
• For instructions on setting up a wideband matrix, see page 86.
• For instructions on setting up a TDM matrix, see page 88.
• For instructions on setting up a CENTRIO matrix, see page 92.
Adding Wideband Matrices
1. At the Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 4-4 on page 85), choose WB
from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
2. In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular Platinum
matrix.
3. Choose a matrix format from the Format drop-down list box.
4. In the Level box, enter a number that corresponds to the first level number
the physical router matrix will occupy in the routing system.
5. Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs
drop-down list box. (You cannot type information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make are
reflected in the # of Physical INs selection as well. if you do not want to
change the number of physical inputs, please do not change the # IN Slots
selection.
6. In the Input Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at
which input numbering will start for the specified component in the logical
database.
7. Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs
drop-down list box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make
are reflected in the # of Physical OUTs selection as well. if you do not want
to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change the # OUT
Slots selection.
8. In the Output Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at
which output numbering will start for the specified component in the logical
database.

Note
The Audio Type drop-down list box is only available for TDM
matrix types.

9. If you want to automatically set up a monitoring matrix, click the Create

And Link To A Monitor Matrix check box. (Select this option only if your
Platinum modules include a dual output module such as the PT-HSR-DOB,
PT-SR-DOB, or PT-ENC-DOB.)
Select this option only if you want RouterMapper to automatically create a
monitoring matrix for you. In addition, RouterMapper will automatically
update the matrix to reflect any other changes that you make. If you prefer

86 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

to set up and update a monitoring matrix manually, do not choose this

option. You can manually set up a monitoring matrix at the Monitoring
Matrices dialog box. (See page 105 for more information.)
10. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your
I/O modules.
• Click the Auto radio button if you want RouterMapper to automatically
assign slots for the I/O modules. If you select this option, you will not
be able to change the Input Card Type, Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list
boxes.
• Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for
the I/O modules yourself. (If you select slot assignments that are
incompatible with other settings, RouterMapper will warn you with
appropriate error messages.)

Note
PM- series will modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames
only. PT- series modules will operate in 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU frames.

a. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type list
box.
Some input modules (e.g., PT-HS-IB+) have options available; if so, the
Input Plugins dialog box will display a list of available options. For
more information about the options available, please refer to the
Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
b. Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot
drop-down list box.
c. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots
drop-down list box. RouterMapper will automatically calculate the
number of physical inputs you will have for the number of modules you
selected. Changing this selection may change the number of physical
inputs required; if you do not want to change the number of physical
inputs, please do not change this entry.
d. Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type
drop-down list box.
Some output modules (e.g., PT-HS-OB+) have options available; if so,
the Output Plugins dialog box will display a list of available options.
For more information about the options available, please refer to the
Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
e. Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT
Slot drop-down list box.
f. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT
Slots drop-down list box. RouterMapper will automatically calculate
the number of physical outputs you will have for the number of
modules you selected.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 87

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs

required; if you do not want to change the number of physical outputs,
please do not change this entry.
11. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box. The new matrix
information appears in the description boxes. Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 4-1 on page 85.
12. RouterMapper will display the crosspoint locations associated with your
matrix information. You will need to make sure you have crosspoint
modules installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur
correctly. Go to page 95.
Adding TDM Matrices
1. At the Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 4-4 on page 85), choose time
division multiplex (TDM) from the Matrix Type drop-down list box. The
Add TDM Matrix dialog box opens.

Figure 4-5. Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box

2. In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular TDM matrix.
3. Choose a matrix format from the Format drop-down list box.
4. In the Level box, enter a number that corresponds to the first level number
the physical router matrix will occupy in the routing system.
5. Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs
drop-down list box. (You cannot type information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make are
reflected in the # of Physical INs selection as well. If you do not want to
change the number of physical inputs, please do not change the # IN Slots
selection.

88 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

6. In the Input Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at
which input numbering will start for the specified component in the logical
database.
7. Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs
drop-down list box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make
are reflected in the # of Physical OUTs selection as well. if you do not want
to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change the # OUT
Slots selection.
8. In the Output Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at
which output numbering will start for the specified component in the logical
database.
9. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your
I/O modules.
• Click the Auto radio button if you want RouterMapper to automatically
assign slots for the I/O modules. If you select this option, you will not
be able to change the Input Card Type, Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list
boxes.
• Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for
the I/O modules yourself. (If you select slot assignments that are
incompatible with other settings, RouterMapper will warn you with
appropriate error messages.)

Note
PM- series will modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames
only. PT- series modules will operate in 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU frames.

a. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type list
box.
Some input modules (e.g., PT-HS-IB+) have options available; if so, the
Input Plugins dialog box will display a list of available options. For
more information about the options available, please refer to the
Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
b. Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot
drop-down list box.
c. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots
drop-down list box. RouterMapper will automatically calculate the
number of physical inputs you will have for the number of modules you
selected.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs
required; if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs,
please do not change this entry.
d. Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type
drop-down list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 89

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Some output modules (for example, PT-HS-OB+) have options

available; if so, the Output Plugins dialog box will display a list of
available options. For more information about the options available,
please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
e. Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT
Slot drop-down list box.
f. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT
Slots drop-down list box. RouterMapper will automatically calculate
the number of physical outputs you will have for the number of
modules you selected.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs
required; if you do not want to change the number of physical outputs,
please do not change this entry.
10. The Options box allows you to set up audio types for AES or analog format
selections. Since you selected “TDM” as your matrix type, the Audio Type
drop-down list box is enabled.
a. Choose one of these audio types:
• Select Mono to route individual audio channels. With this selection
you can set 1-16 independent mono audio channels per device (via
a drop-down list box).
• Select Stereo to always route a stereo pair (two channels) of audio
together. With this selection you can set 1-8 stereo pairs1 per device
(via a drop-down list box).
b. When you select the first check box (Breakaway audio from video),
RouterMapper will look for the first available level in the current
database, and then put the selected audio on that level. The next check
box will become available for selection.
If you disable this check box, the other audio type options will no
longer be available for selection.
c. When you select the second check box (Breakaway individual audio
channels [mono]/stereo pairs [stereo]), RouterMapper will set each
partition to a different level so that the audio can be broken away.
On stereo audio types only, the next check box will become
available for selection.
d. When you select the third check box (Breakaway individual audio
channels), RouterMapper will allow you to breakaway the left and right
stereo audio channels.

1 In
stereo pairs, “left” is one channel and “right” is one channel.

90 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Table 4-2 and Table 4-3 show examples of different selections, and the
results of those selections.

Table 4-2. AES or Analog Stereo Audio Types

Selection
Breakaway
No. Stereo Audio from Breakaway Breakaway Result
Pairs Stereo Pairs Channels
Video
2 No No No Two stereo partitions with same level
as video
2 Yes No No Two stereo partitions set to the same
level but on a different level from the
video to allow audio to be broken
away from the video
2 Yes Yes No Two stereo partitions, each set to a
different level to allow the audio to be
broken away from the video and/or
from the other audio pair
2 Yes Yes Yes Four audio partitions that allow for the
audio to be broken away from the
video and/or from any of the sub
channels of audio in either stereo pair

Table 4-3. AES or Analog Mono Audio Types

Selection
Breakaway
No. Mono Audio from Breakaway Result
Channels Stereo Pairs
Video
2 No No Two mono partitions with same level as video
2 Yes No Two mono partitions set to the same level but on a
different level from the video to allow audio to be
broken away from the video
2 Yes Yes Two audio partitions that allow for the audio to be
broken away from the video and/or from any of the sub
channels of audio in either partition

11. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box. The new matrix
information appears in the description boxes. Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 4-1 on page 85.
12. RouterMapper will display the crosspoint locations associated with your
matrix information. You will need to make sure you have crosspoint
modules installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur
correctly. Go to page 95.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 91

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding CENTRIO Matrices

This section explains how to add CENTRIO device information to a Platinum
router database. You can also create destinations that represent actual PIPs or
use existing destinations and have the PIPs follow them. See “Setting Up
CENTRIO Virtual Destinations” on page 258 for more information.

Note
The terms “multiview,” “multiviewer,” and “CENTRIO” are often used
interchangeably. In this manual, however, “multiviewer” and “multiview”
refer to the screen display information, while “CENTRIO” refers to the
hardware device itself.

1. At the Configured Matrix dialog box, click Add. (Alternatively, move the
cursor display somewhere within the matrix list control area, and then
right-click the mouse. A small selection box will pop up. Select Add
Matrix.) The Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 4-4 on page 85) opens.
2. Choose Multiview from the Matrix Type drop-down list box. The Add
CENTRIO Matrices dialog box (Figure 4-6) opens.

Figure 4-6. Add CENTRIO Matrices Dialog Box

3. Choose the desired matrix format from the Format drop-down list box.
4. Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs
drop-down list box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots field, any changes you make are
reflected in the # of Physical INs field as well. if you do not want to change
the number of physical inputs, please do not change the # IN Slots field.

92 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

5. Choose the appropriate number of modules from the # CENTRIO Modules

drop-down list box. (You cannot type in the information into this field.)
6. Select the starting slot for your CENTRIO modules from the Starting
CENTRIO Slot drop-down list box.
7. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slots assignments for your
I/O modules.
• Click the Auto radio button if you want RouterMapper to automatically
assign slots for the I/O modules. If you select this option, you will not
be able to change the Input Card Type, Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list
boxes.
• Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for
the I/O modules yourself. (If you select slot assignments that are
incompatible with other settings, RouterMapper will warn you with
appropriate error messages.)

Note
PM- series will modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames
only. PT- series modules will operate in 9RU, 15RU, and
28RU frames.

a. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type
drop-down list box.
Some input modules (e.g., PT-HS-IB+) have options available; if so, the
Input Plugins dialog box will display a list of available options. For
more information about the options available, please refer to the
Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
b. Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot
drop-down list box.
c. Select the number of modules of this type you need from the # IN Slots
drop-down list box. RouterMapper will automatically calculate the
number of physical inputs you will have for the number of modules you
selected.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs
required; if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs,
please do not change this entry.
8. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box. The new matrix
information appears in the description boxes. (Matrix information is
color-coded as described in Table 4-1 on page 85.)
9. Note that two different types of multiviewer selections have been added:
one for the underlying CENTRIO video matrix and one for CENTRIO PIPs
(this is the virtual CENTRIO matrix).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 93

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-7. CENTRIO Entries

Highlight CENTRIO PIPs, and then click Advanced....The Matrix Partition

dialog box appears. RouterMapper by default assigns an output offset equal
to the size of the frame. The example in Figure 4-8 on page 95 shows a
matrix with 128 outputs as well as an output offset of 128.

94 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-8. CENTRIO PIPs Matrix Outputs and Output Offset

10. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box.

Note
There are other setup options available with PIPs. See “Setting Up
CENTRIO Virtual Destinations” on page 258 for more information.

11. RouterMapper will also display the crosspoint locations associated with
your matrix information. You must make sure you have crosspoint modules
installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur correctly. Go to
page 95.
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints

Note
The Enable Redundant Crosspoint function is available
with 128×128 and 256×256 frames only.

If you want to enable redundant crosspoints, you will need to set the crosspoint
switching mode. (This option requires an additional crosspoint card.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 95

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

To enable redundant crosspoints, at the Configured Matrices dialog box

right-click the mouse button, and then choose Redundant Switch Mode from the
shortcut menu. The default setting is None.

Figure 4-9. Redundant Switch Mode Pop-Up Menu

• Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active
crosspoint module.
• Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active
crosspoint module. Existing crosspoints will not be switched, but will
remain on their original crosspoint module.
Changing Sync Settings
If you want to change the sync setting assignments, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the mouse, and then choose Assign Syncs from the pop-up
menu.
Default values are Sync 1, Sync 2, Sync 3, and Sync 4. You can change
these default values at the Control Settings tab. See page 112 for
instructions on changing sync names and settings.

Figure 4-10. Assign Syncs Pop-Up Menu

2. Select the sync you want to assign to the selected slots. (All cards assigned
with the same sync number will have the same sync characteristics.)
Changing Initial Source Mode Settings1
If you want to change the initial source mode settings, follow these steps:
1. In the Configuration box, highlight the configuration you want to set.

1 You
may also set this function at the Monitor Matrix tab. See page 106 for more information.

96 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

2. Right-click the mouse, and then choose Set On-Download Initial Source
Mode from the shortcut menu.
• Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect
outputs after download.
• Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the
matrix areas after download.
• Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected
to the first input in the matrix.
Partitioning the Matrix
If you want to partition the matrix, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the matrix you want to configure.
2. Click Advanced.... The Matrix Partition dialog box (Figure 4-11 on
page 97) opens.
At the top left of the dialog box you will see pertinent matrix information.
You can change the name, the input partition display color, starting level,
and input and output offsets.

Figure 4-11. Matrix Partition Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 97

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

At the top right of the dialog box is the Matrix Size information box. This
display is for informational purposes only; you cannot change the matrix
size here.
3. Below the Matrix Size box is the Partition Type drop-down list box. Here
you will select from these partition type components: None, RGB/Stereo,
Contiguous, Wild, Shared Inputs, Mono Breakaway, and Stereo Breakaway.
None
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type.
To enable this method, select None from the Partition Type drop-down
list box, and then go on to step 4 on page 104. (See page 316 for
information about additional advanced functions associated with this
partition type.)
RGB/Stereo Partitioning

Figure 4-12. RGB/Stereo Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of

equal size. You can connect the RGB outputs from a component device
to the first three physical inputs on the router, and the RGB outputs of a
second component device to physical inputs four, five and six (each
group of three inputs appears to the control system as a single input, and
is switched simultaneously).

98 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

To enable this method, select RGB/Stereo from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then go on to step 4 on page 104. (See page 318
for information about additional advanced functions associated with
this partition type.)
Contiguous Partitioning

Figure 4-13. Contiguous Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of sources
and destinations; RouterMapper automatically assigns blocks of
physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components
(this option differs from Shared Inputs in that input blocks cannot
overlap).
To enable this method, select Contiguous from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then go on to step 4 on page 104. (See page 320
for information about additional advanced functions associated with
this partition type.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 99

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Wild Partitioning

Figure 4-14. Wild Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to allow any input or output to be

assigned to any component.
To enable this method, select Wild from the Partition Type drop-down
list box, and then go on to step 4 on page 104. (See page 321 for
information about additional advanced functions associated with this
partition type.)

100 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Shared Inputs

Figure 4-15. Shared Inputs Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of sources
and destinations. RouterMapper automatically assigns blocks of
physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components
(this option differs from Contiguous in that input blocks can overlap).
To enable this method, select Shared Inputs from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then go on to step 4 on page 104. (See page 324
for information about additional advanced functions associated with
this partition type.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 101

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Mono Breakaway

Figure 4-16. Mono Breakaway Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of

equal size (that is, RGB) and allow any input or output to be assigned to
any component, or to more than one component at the same time. This
option is useful when setting up TDM applications where you want to
breakaway mono audio channels.
To enable this method, select Mono Breakaway from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then go on to step 4 on page 104. (See page 325
for information about additional advanced functions associated with
this partition type.)

102 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Stereo Breakaway

Figure 4-17. Stereo Breakaway Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of

equal size (that is, RGB) and allow any input, channel, or output to be
assigned to any component, or to more than one component at the same
time. This option is useful when setting up stereo audio channels1 in
TDM applications where you want to breakaway channels or always
move them together. To enable this method, select Stereo Breakaway
from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then go on to step 4 on
page 104. (See page 327 for information about additional advanced
functions associated with this partition type.)

1 Each
AES signal consists of two audio channels. For example, in stereo pairs, “left” is one
channel and “right” is one channel.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 103

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

4. Under the matrix information display are the Physical Input View and
Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs
provides a graphic representation of how your selected input and output
partitions will look, based on the partition type components you selected.
Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
5. You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component. Click somewhere within the read-only area of the matrix
partition list for the matrix you want to change. The Physical Map Order
dialog box opens.
(Alternatively, move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then
right-click the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens. Select Physical Map
Order.)

Figure 4-18. Physical Map Order Dialog Box

The Physical Map Order dialog box displays the physical I/O location of a
particular component. At this dialog box, you can change the input or output
assignment of any physical component.
To change I/O assignments, click the physical location number for the
appropriate component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box. RouterMapper will assign the
new number to your chosen component, and assign the original number
from your chosen component to the component to which the physical
number was originally assigned. For example, if you want to change the
assignment of Component Input 9 from 179 to 187 (which is currently

104 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

assigned to Component Input 17), RouterMapper will assign 187 to

Component Input 9 and 179 to Component Input 17.
6. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box.
7. Click Next. The Monitoring Matrices dialog box opens.

Selecting Monitoring

Figure 4-19. Platinum Monitor Dialog Box

Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and outputs
as a set of inputs on a separate matrix (which is called the monitor matrix). It
allows you to monitor what comes out of a particular output. If you have a
monitoring module installed in your Platinum router, you can set up monitoring
information here. You can monitor input signals, output signals, or both input
and output signals. You can set up a matrix monitoring configuration in one of
two ways: via the Quick-Physical I/O selection list, or by manually inputting the
information desired. (If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that is
automatically created and updated, do not choose this option. See page 85
through page 86 for information on having RouterMapper create a monitoring
matrix automatically.)
To “quick-add” a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix to the list
box.
2. In the Quick-Physical I/O Selection List box, highlight the name of the
matrix to assign to the monitoring configuration list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 105

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

3. Click the appropriate radio button to select input or output monitoring, or

both.
4. Click Assign. The selected matrix appears in the Monitoring Matrix
Configuration list box.
• To remove the matrix, click Delete.
• To edit matrix information, highlight the name of the matrix assigned to
the monitoring configuration list, and then click Advanced. The
Monitor Matrix dialog box opens. (See step 5 through step 6, starting on
page 106, for more instructions on completing this dialog box.)
5. Click Next. The Control Settings dialog box opens.
To manually create a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix to the list
box.
2. At the matrix list control area, highlight the desired input and/or output
module slots to include in the selected monitor matrix.
3. Right-click the mouse, and select Assign to Monitor Matrix.
4. Click Advanced. The Monitor Matrix dialog box opens.

Figure 4-20. Monitor Matrix Dialog Box

5. In the Properties box, make the following selections:

• Select the desired level on which this matrix will operate from the
drop-down list box.
• If you want input monitoring offset, set the desired input offset number.
• If you want output monitoring offset, set the desired output offset
number.

106 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Select a display color.

Note
If you have already set this selection (as described on
page 96), you do not have to set it again.

6. In the On-Download Initial Source box, select one of the following options:
• Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect
outputs after download.
• Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the matrix
areas after download.
• Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected
to the first input in the matrix.
If you have added more than one matrix, and some of the same modules are
assigned to both matrixes, an asterisk appears to the left of the name (see
Figure 4-21 on page 107). The asterisk means that this particular matrix will
provide virtual output monitoring. See the Platinum Frame and Modules
Manual Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for more
information on real and virtual output monitoring.

Figure 4-21. Virtual Monitoring Indicators

7. Click Next. The Control Settings dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 107

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Selecting Controls

Figure 4-22. Platinum Control Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to set up frame identifiers needed for file transfer
protocol (FTP) functions, Ethernet network functions, I/O sync and reference
settings, SNMP settings, protocol and license key settings, allowing database
name synchronization, and enabling the TDM starting slot offset.

Enabling TDM Starting Slot Offset

The TDM starting slot offset selection allows you to specify the starting slot for
Platinum TDM matrices in 15RU and 28RU frames. It is especially useful when
you use an ATDM32-X28 or ATDM16-X15 crosspoint module.
The TDM starting slot offset is a number that indicates where the contiguous
TDM modules are placed in the frame.
• For a 15RU frame, slot numbers range from 1 to 17.
• For a 28RU frame, slot numbers range from 1to 33.
At the TDM Starting Slot drop-down list box, select the number that
corresponds with the slot where a TDM matrix is located.

Allowing Database Name Synchronization

Select the “Allow the frame to automate the Logical Database Synchronization”
check box to allow this device to use the database name synchronization
function. (See page 30 and page 64 for more information about this feature.)

108 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Note
You can also enable this function at the main menu. See page 64 for
instructions.

Setting up Platinum Frame Identification

1. Select the frame ID (the frame’s physical address) from the drop-down list
box.
2. In the Frame Name box, enter the frame’s descriptive name.

Setting up Platinum FTP Functions

1. In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings.... The
Communication Settings dialog box opens. If necessary, select the FTP
Login tab.

Figure 4-23. FTP Login Tab

2. In the Username box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The
actual username is set up or changed via Navigator.)
3. In the Password box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The
actual password is set up or changed via Navigator.)
4. In the Confirm box, re-enter the password you just entered.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 109

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Setting Up Platinum Network Settings

1. In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings.... The
Communication Settings dialog box opens.
IMPORTANT: The ENET 1 and ENET 2 tabs control the Ethernet
ports on your Platinum router. The configuration steps you
follow will differ, depending on whether you use one or both
ports.
The ENET 1 and the ENET 2 tabs’ network properties are divided into two
sections: the Current (read-only) section, which is displayed on the left side
of Figure 4-24/Figure 4-25; and the Programmed (editable) settings section,
which is displayed on the right side of Figure 4-24/Figure 4-25.

Note
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The MAC
address is set up via Navigator or card-edge controls.

Programmed settings include

• Frame IP address (this is necessary for transferring or upgrading files
via an FTP site; the actual frame IP address is set up via Navigator or
card-edge controls.)
• Gateway address
• Subnet Mask address

Figure 4-24. ENET 1 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results

110 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-25. ENET 2 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results

To set up communication for RouterMapper to transfer configuration

files to the Platinum frame (this is not assigning an IP address to the
frame):
a. Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.
b. Select the ENET 1 tab.
c. Fill in the Frame IP address.
d. Click OK to accept the changes.
To assign IP settings to the Platinum frame's ENET 1 and/or ENET 2
ports:
a. Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.
b. Select the ENET 1 tab.

Note
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The
MAC address is set up via Navigator or card-edge
controls.

c. Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask

address.

Note
The ENET 2 port is disabled by default; you will need to
make changes only if you are using a second Ethernet
port on a Platinum router.

d. Select the ENET 2 tab.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 111

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

e. Select the Check to modify network settings for this port check box.
f. Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask
address.
g. Click Download to accept the changes and send the changes to the
router. You will receive a series of informational messages showing the
progress of the download.

If the IP address you changed from is already set up

in the Comm Settings menu, this download will
change the selection at the RouterMapper Comm
Settings menu. If the IP Address you changed from
is not already set up, this download will not add the
selection to the list.

Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and References

Note
The I/O Type drop-down list box appears when the you select Standard
radio button. The Sync Pulse Delay box appears when you select the
Advanced radio button.

If you want to configure the sync settings, In the Platinum I/O Sync and
References box, click Sync.... The Configure I/O Sync Settings dialog box
opens.

Figure 4-26. Configure I/O Sync Settings Dialog Box(Standard Setting

Selected)

You can configure separate settings for up to four separate sync ports. For each
port, choose the following settings:
1. Choose the desired sync (1 through 4) from the drop-down list box.
2. Enter a name by which to identify a particular sync port.
3. Choose Auto, Standard, or Advanced mode.
• In Auto mode the switch point is determined by the detected sync type
only, based on SMPTE RP-168 specifications.

112 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing reference.

Select which one you want from the I/O Type drop-down list box.
• Advanced mode provides the option to enter a sync pulse (take) delay in
microseconds. Enter the delay time you want in the Sync Pulse Delay
box.
4. Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box.
5. If you will not use Simple Network Routing Protocol with your Platinum
router, click Finish. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
If you will use Simple Network Routing Protocol with your Platinum router,
you will need to select the appropriate SNMP settings and, if desired, set up
advanced settings for updating license key and map names information. See
“Selecting SNMP” on page 113 for more information.

Selecting SNMP
If you will use Simple Network Routing Protocol with your Platinum router,
you will need to select the appropriate SNMP settings and, if desired, set up
advanced settings for updating license key and map names information.
To set up the SNMP Agent for your Platinum routing system, you must
purchase separate license support.
• See the Simple Network Management Protocol for Platinum, Panacea, and
Edge Products Installation and Configuration Manual for information on
SNMP licensing, activating the SNMP Agent, and using SNMP to control at
Platinum router.
• See “SNMP Agent” on page 357 for information about configuring an
SNMP Agent via RouterMapper.

Updating License Keys and Logical Settings

See “Advanced Settings” on page 359 for more information about license key
and logical file names.

Changing Protocol Settings

To enable this function, click Protocols... at the Platinum Control Settings
dialog box (see Figure 4-22 on page 108). The Change Protocol Settings dialog
box opens. This multi-tabbed dialog box allows you to perform the following
tasks:
• Enable and disable signal presence messages for inputs and outputs (this
function’s description starts on page 114)
• Enable message filtering by connections, devices, and level inputs and
outputs (this function’s description starts on page 115)
• Enable message filtering by server connections, devices, and level inputs
and outputs (this function’s description starts on page 118)
• Enable serial or X-Y ports on the Platinum communications back panel (this
function’s description starts on page 121)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 113

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Enabling Signal Presence Messages

To enable this function, select the Protocols tab at the Change Protocol Settings
dialog box. When you have finished filling out the selections as described, do
one of the following:
• Select the Connections tab to continue the changing protocol settings
process.
• Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box, and then click OK to
return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Figure 4-27. Protocols Tab

This tab shows you the available protocols that your Platinum frame currently
supports. You cannot disable any of these protocols; however, this tab allows
you to enable and disable signal presence settings for the X-Y pass through
protocol1.
• When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is selected,
RouterMapper will allow input signal presence messages to be sent.
• When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is not
selected, RouterMapper will filter out input signal presence messages.
• When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is selected,
RouterMapper will allow output signal presence messages to be sent.
• When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is not
selected, RouterMapper will filter out output signal presence messages.

1 For
a detailed discussion of the X-Y pass-through protocol, see the Harris Routing Switchers
Serial Protocol Reference Operation and Reference Manual.

114 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Enabling Message Filtering by Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs And Outputs
To enable this function, select the Connections tab at the Change Protocol
Settings dialog box. When you have finished filling out the selections as
described, do one of the following:
• Select the Servers tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
• Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box, and then click OK to
return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Figure 4-28. Connections Tab

This tab allows you to make the appropriate selections to enable filtering out
messages based on specific connections, devices, and level inputs/outputs.
Enabling Connections Group Box
The Enable Connections group box displays all current connections available on
your Platinum frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the following
connections; default connections show an asterisk at the end of the connection
name.

Note
You can enable or disable any of the default connections. You cannot edit
or delete default connections. Any user-added (non-default) connections
can be edited or deleted.

• XYSer1 uses X-Y pass through and X-Y terminal protocols on serial port 1
on the Platinum communications back panel.
• XYSer2 uses X-Y pass through & X-Y Terminal protocols on serial port 2
on the Platinum communications back panel.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 115

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• XYCoax1 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 1 on the Platinum

communications back panel.
• XYCoax2 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 2 on the Platinum
communications back panel.
To enable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
connection name is checked.
To disable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
connection name is unchecked.
To add a connection, follow these steps:
1. Click Add under the Enable Connections group box. The Add New Client
Connection dialog box opens.

Figure 4-29. Add New Client Connection Dialog Box

2. Enter a connection name in the Name box.

3. Click OK to return to the Connections tab. The Connections Property
Settings box opens.
At the Connection Property Settings box, you must specify a server IP and
port number because the Network Client selection uses the Ethernet port.
See page 118 for more information.
4. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Input & Output for Status
Message Postings group box.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows
you to specify the level inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per
each connection.
1. Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list.
2. If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down
list box.
3. Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs
list. Any status messages for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow
Inputs list box are filtered out from this connection.

116 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list using
standard Windows selection techniques. Move inputs between lists via the
>, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for
all detected inputs are allowed for the selected connection.
4. Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow
Outputs list. Any status messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the
Allow Outputs list box are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs list using
standard Windows selection techniques. Move outputs between lists via the
>, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages
for all detected outputs are allowed for the selected connection.
5. If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the
summary of all the assigned level inputs and outputs. The Input & Output
Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs displayed.
When finished, click OK. You will return to the Connections tab.
6. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status
Message Posting group box.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box
The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to
make selections to filter out status messages by devices.
1. Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list. A list of
devices attached to that connection appear in the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box.
2. To allow status message postings for a specific devices:
• Enter the device ID number in the device ID edit box.
• Click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a panel,
frame, or Edge, the device’s name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the
Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices From This
Connection check box to allow the frame to post all status messages for
all detected devices associated with the selected connection.
3. To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:
• Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box. Multiple device IDs may be selected
from the list using standard Windows selection techniques.
• Click Delete to remove the selected device IDs from the list.
4. To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.
5. Make the appropriate selections for the Connection Property Settings group
box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 117

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Connection Property Settings Group Box

If you selected Network Client as a connection type, you must specify a server
IP and port number in this group box. You can also specify whether or not you
want to let the frame automatically reconnect if a server connection fails or is
lost.
Click the Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices from This
Connection… check box to allow the frame to post status messages for all
detected devices for the selected connection. If the check box is unchecked, the
frame will use the assigned device IDs to determine which devices are allow
status message posting.

Enable Message Filtering by Server Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs and Outputs
To enable this function, select the Servers tab at the Change Protocol Settings
dialog box. When you have finished filling out the selections as described, do
one of the following:
• Select the Ports tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
• Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box, and then click OK to
return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Figure 4-30. Servers Tab

This tab allows you to filter out messages based on specific server connections,
devices, and level inputs/outputs. This tab functionality is very similar to the
Connections tab; however, server connections are for other devices (panels,
frames, Edge, dialog box application, etc.) to connect to Platinum frame through
the Ethernet ports.

118 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Enabling Connections Group Box

The Enable Connections group box displays all current server connections
available on your Platinum frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the
following connections; default connections show an asterisk at the end of the
connection name.
• XYNetSrv uses X-Y pass through protocol.
• XYTelnet uses X-Y terminal and XY pass through protocols.
• XYAdmin uses X-Y pass through protocol.
• XYStream uses X-Y Pass through protocol.
To enable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left of
the connection name is checked.
To disable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left
of the connection name is unchecked.
To add a server connection, follow these steps:
1. Click Add under the Enable Connections group box. The Add New Server
Connection dialog box opens.

Figure 4-31. Add New Server Connection Dialog Box

2. Enter a server name in the Name box.

3. From the Type drop-down list box, select a protocol type for the server
connection.
• Select Network Client to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network
client.
• Select Network Server to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network
server.
• Select Telnet Server to use X-Y terminal and X-Y pass through
protocols on a Telnet server.
4. Click OK to return to the Servers tab. The Connections Property Settings
box opens. (At the Connection Property Settings box, you must specify a
listening port number and the maximum number of clients allowed. See
page 120 for more information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 119

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

5. Make the appropriate selections for the Connection Property Settings group
box.
Connection Property Settings Group Box
Each server connection requires that you specify a unique listening port (that
other devices and/or applications must know to connect to a this particular
server from the frame); and a maximum number of other devices and/or
applications that the frame allows to connect to this server at a time.
1. In the Listening Port box, enter the port number of the listening port.
2. In the Max Clients box, enter the maximum number of other devices and/or
applications allowed to connect to this server at one time.
3. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Input & Output for Status
Message Postings group box.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows
you to specify the level inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per
each server.
1. Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list.
2. If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down
list box.
3. Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs
list. Any status messages for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow
Inputs list box are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list using
standard Windows selection techniques. Move inputs between lists via the
>, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for
all detected inputs are allowed for the selected connection.
4. Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow
Outputs list. Any status messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the
Allow Outputs list box are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs list using
standard Windows selection techniques. Move outputs between lists via the
>, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages
for all detected outputs are allowed for the selected connection.
5. If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the
summary of all the assigned level inputs and outputs. The Input & Output
Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs displayed.
6. When finished, click OK. You will return to the Server tab.
7. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status
Message Posting group box.

120 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box

The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to
make selections to filter out status messages by devices.
1. Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list. A list
of devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs
for Status Message Posting list box.
2. To allow status message postings for a specific devices, enter the device ID
number in the device ID edit box, and then click Add. Note that, for any
device IDs already assigned to a panel, frame, or Edge, the device’s name is
shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the
Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices From This
Connection check box to allow the frame to post all status messages for all
detected devices associated with the selected connection.
3. To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:
• Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box. Multiple device IDs may be selected
from the list using standard Windows selection techniques.
• Click Delete. The selected device IDs are removed from the list.
4. To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.

Enabling Serial or X-Y Ports on the Platinum Communications Back Panel

To enable this function, select the Ports tab at the Change Protocol Settings
dialog box.

Figure 4-32. Ports Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 121

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

The currently enabled serial and Ethernet ports are displayed in the Enable Ports
box. The port selections that you cannot enable or disable are greyed out.
• To enable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
port name is checked.
• To disable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
port name is unchecked.
When finished, click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box; click OK
to again return to the RouterMapper main menu.

122 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Integrator Frames

1. Choose one of the following methods to add a device to the RouterMapper
database:
• Poll (see “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80 for information on
how to use this method)
• Discovery (see “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 80 for
information on how to use this method)
• Add (see “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 81 for
information on how to use this method)
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select Router Type
dialog box opens.
3. Select the frame type. A blue border appears around the selected frame type.
4. Click Next. The Select Frame Size dialog box opens.
5. Select an Integrator frame size. Options are 4RU, 6RU, 8RU, and Gold
types. A blue border appears around the selected type.
6. Click Next. The Router Frame dialog box opens.

Figure 4-33. Select Router Frame Matrix Size Dialog Box

7. Select the Matrix Type from the drop-down list box. Options are
• SDI
• Analog video
• Analog stereo audio
• Analog mono audio
• AES EBU
• High Definition (HD)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 123

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Data router1 (the data router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is

different from other types of matrix format editing [see page 127 for
instructions on adding data router frames])
• Integrator Gold multirate digital (the multirate digital router’s
Configured Matrices dialog box is different from other types of matrix
format editing [see page 133 for instructions on adding Integrator Gold
frames])
8. Click the desired matrix size. (The Max Matrix Size options changes as the
Matrix Type is changed.)
9. (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed, select the
proper check box. (See “Setting Up Output Monitoring” starting on
page 137, for more information on how to set up the output monitoring
function.)
10. Click Add. The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right-hand
side of the dialog box.
You may continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You will not be
able to select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An
outline appears around the matrix to indicate that it is selected. [The color of
the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click Delete.)
By default, the Stuffed As size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size.
In some cases, however, you may wish to override the default in order to
save slots for future use. To override the default, select the desired Matrix
and Stuffed As sizes, and then click Add.
In the example shown in Figure 4-34 on page 125, “128×64” matrix size
was selected as the matrix size, and “32×48” was selected as the Stuffed As
size.

1 For
more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing
Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

124 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-34. Frame Matrix Size with Empty Slots (128×64 Max Matrix
Size, 32×48 Stuffed As Size)

11. After you finish defining the matrices, click Next.

12. The Configured Matrices dialog box opens.1 Matrix type and matrix size
properties are displayed, but cannot be edited on this screen. To change
either the matrix type or matrix size, click Back to return to the previous
screen.
13. Fill in the following fields:
• Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is outlined)
• Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID from the
drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define the new
frame name as desired
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the
Destination Offset in previous Harris product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for this matrix.

1 The Configured Matrices dialog boxes for the data router and the multirate digital router are
different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 127 for more information on the
data router. See page 133 for more information on the multirate digital router.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 125

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-35. Configured Matrices Dialog Box

• First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source Offset
described in other Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix.
14. If the matrix should be partitioned, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning
check box, and then click Next. (See “Matrix Partitioning” starting on
page 311, for more information on matrix partitioning.)
15. Click Finish. The Integrator frame is added to the device list at the
RouterMapper main menu.

126 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Integrator Data Router Frames

1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in “Adding Integrator
Frames” steps 1 through 6 (page 123).
2. At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box (Figure 4-33 on
page 123), select “Data router” from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
3. Click the desired matrix size.
4. Click Add. The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right-hand
side of the dialog box.
You may continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You will not be
able to select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An
outline appears around the matrix to indicate that it is selected. [The color of
the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click Delete.)
By default, the Stuffed As size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size.
In some cases, however, you may wish to override the default in order to
save slots for future use.
5. After you finish defining the matrices, click Next. The Configured Matrices
dialog box (Figure 4-36 on page 128) opens.
The data router's1 Configured Matrices dialog box is somewhat different
from other types of matrix format editing. There are two different items on
this dialog box: a Data Router Type list box and an Edit Ports button in the
Signal Type field. (Other matrix format editing shows a list box of signal
formats instead.)
6. Fill in the following fields:
• Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is outlined)
• Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID from the
drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define the new
frame name as desired
• Level on which this matrix will operate

1 For
more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing
Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 127

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-36. Data Router Configured Matrices Dialog Box

• First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the
Destination Offset in previous Harris product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source Offset
described in other Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix.
• The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.
7. Select the desired data router type from the drop-down list box. Data router
types are as follows:
• Dest to Controller — Point to point connection1; all previous
connections using the new source and destination are disconnected
when a new switch is made.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the port
used as a source in the switch command is configured to connect to a
device (tributary); therefore, the port itself is a controller. The
Destination is configured to be connected to a controller; therefore, the
port itself is a device (tributary). When ports configured as “RS422
Auto” are connected to ports that are either “RS422 Controller” or
“RS422 Device,” they take the opposite configuration
(controller/device) from the port to which they are being connected.
“RS232 Auto” ports are always configured as DTE when used as a
destination and DCE when used as a source.

1 For
a more detailed explanation of point to point operations, see the Integrator™ Series Data
Routing Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

128 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Dest to Device — Point to point connection; all previous connections

using the new source and destination are disconnected when a new
switch is made.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the port
used as a source in the switch command is configured to connect to a
controller; therefore, the port itself is a device. The Destination is
configured to be connected to a device (tributary); therefore, the port
itself is a controller. When ports configured as “RS422 Auto” are
connected to ports that are either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422
Device,” they take the opposite configuration (controller/device) from
the port to which they are being connected. “RS232 Auto” signal types
are always configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE
when used as a source.
• Gang Dest to Controller — Ganged operation1; multiple destinations
may be connected to a source.
The “return path” connection (transmit to the source, receive from the
destination) is disconnected from previous destinations and connected
to the current destination when making a connection to a source that
already has a connection. Destinations may be switched away from a
source. If the destination switched away (or disconnected) is the
“reverse path” then the first physical destination connected to that
source is chosen as the new “reverse path.” Disconnecting the reverse
path (i.e. the destination associated with a source that has multiple
destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the reverse path when a
source only has one connection is allowed.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the port
used as a source in the switch command is configured to connect to a
device (tributary); therefore, the port itself is a controller. The
Destination is configured to be connected to a controller; therefore, the
port itself is a device (tributary). When configured as “RS422 Auto” are
connected to ports that are either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422
Device,” then they take the opposite configuration (controller/device).
“RS232 Auto” are always configured as DTE when used as a
destination and DCE when used as a source.
• Gang Dest to Device — Ganged operation; multiple destinations may
be connected to a source. The “return path” connection (transmit to the
source, receive from the destination) is disconnected from previous
destinations and connected to the current destination when making a
connection to a source that already has a connection. Destinations may
be switched away from a source. If the destination switched away (or
disconnected) is the “reverse path” then the first physical destination
connected to that source is chosen as the new “reverse path.”
Disconnecting the reverse path (i.e. the destination associated with a
source that has multiple destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the
reverse path when the source only has one connection is allowed.
1 For
a more detailed explanation of ganged operations, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing
Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 129

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the port
used as a source in the switch command is configured to connect to a
controller; therefore, the port itself is a device. The Destination is
configured to be connected to a device (tributary); therefore, the port
itself is a controller. When configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected
to ports that are either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device,” then
they take the opposite configuration (controller/device). “RS232 Auto”
are always configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE
when used as a source.
8. Click Edit Ports. The Edit Ports Signal Type dialog box opens (see
Figure 4-37 on page 131).
9. Select the desired port.
10. Choose a signal type from the Signal Type drop down list box. (To change
more than one port’s signal type, press and hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys while selecting desired ports.) Signal types are as follows:
• Data RS232 Auto — This port signal type must only be used for a port
on a RS-232 card. This port will switch between DTE and DCE, based
on Source/Destination context.
• This port is set to DTE when the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller” and the port is used as a Destination.
• This port is set to DCE when the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller” and the port is used as a Source.
RS-232 ports do not automatically take the opposite sense of the other
port in a switch.

130 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-37. Edit Port Signal Types Dialog Box

• Data RS232 DCE — This port is always configured as DCE regardless

of its use as a Source or as a Destination in a crosspoint Take command.
It will communicate with a DTE port through a 1:1 cable or a DCE port
through a null modem cable.
• Data RS232 DTE — This port is always configured as DTE regardless
of its use as a Source or as a Destination in a crosspoint Take command.
It will communicate with a DCE port through a 1:1 cable or a DTE port
through a null modem cable.
• Data RS422 Auto — This port chooses its port configuration based on
its use as a source or destination in a switch command depending on the
Data Router Type setting. If the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller,” the port is configured as a tributary if used as a destination
so that it may be connected to a controller, provided that the source is
not “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device.” Otherwise, it take the
opposite sense: If the source is “RS422 Controller,” the port is
configured as a controller so that it may be connected to a device. If the
source is “RS422 Device,” the port is configured as a device so that it
may be connected to a controller.
• Data RS422 Controller — This port is always configured as a device
so that it may be connected to a controller with a 1:1 cable.
• Data RS422 Device — This port is always configured as a controller so
that it may be connected to a device with a 1:1 cable.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 131

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

11. Click OK to accept your changes. You will return to the Configured
Matrices dialog box.
12. At the Configured Matrices dialog box, click OK to accept your changes.
RouterMapper will return you to the main menu screen.

132 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital) Routers

1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in “Adding Integrator
Frames” steps 1 through 4 (see page 123).
2. At the Select Frame Size dialog box, select the Integrator Gold frame type.
3. Click the desired matrix size.
4. (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed, select the
proper check box. (See “Setting Up Output Monitoring” starting on
page 137, for more information on how to set up the output monitoring
function.)
5. Click Add. The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right-hand
side of the dialog box.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An
outline appears around the matrix to indicate that it is selected. [The color of
the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click Delete.)
6. Click Next. The Configured Matrices dialog box (Figure 4-38 on page 134)
opens.
The Integrator Gold multirate digital router’s Configured Matrices dialog
box is somewhat different from other types of matrix format editing. Note
that the I/O Signals field in the dialog box shows an Edit button. (Other
matrix format editing dialog boxes shows a list box of signal formats).
7. Fill in the following fields:
• Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is outlined)
• Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID from the
drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define the new
frame name as desired
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the
Destination Offset in previous Harris product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for this matrix.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 133

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-38. Integrator Gold Configured Matrices Dialog Box

• First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source Offset
described in other Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix.
• The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.
8. Click Edit. The Edit Component Signal Type dialog box opens (see
Figure 4-39). You can modify only the level output reclocker and level
input EQ fields.
• The Frame static box shows the Integrator Gold frame name.
• The Component static box shows the Integrator Gold component
name.
• The Level static box shows the Integrator Gold component level.
• The Destination Settings list view box shows all available level
outputs for the component. The list view also provides the level output
reclocker setting that each level output uses.
• The Source Settings list view box shows all available level inputs for
the component. The list view also provides the level input EQ setting
that each level input uses.

134 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-39. Integrator Gold Edit Component Signal Types Dialog Box

9. Modify the level output reclocker as follows:

a. Highlight the desired level output.
b. Choose a signal type from the Reclocker Setting drop-down list box.
(To change more than one level output reclocker, press and hold down
the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired level outputs.)
Reclocker settings are as follows:

Table 4-4. Reclocker Settings

Reclocker
Setting Description

143 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 143 Mb/s signal

177 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 177 Mb/s signal
270 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 270 Mb/s signal
360 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 360 Mb/s signal
540 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 540 Mb/s signal
1.485 Gb/s Reclocker only locks to 1.485 Gb/s signal
Auto pass ASI Reclocker locks to any of 143, 270, 360, 540
Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s (177 Mb/s is not allowed
as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 135

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Table 4-4. Reclocker Settings (Continued)

Reclocker
Description
Setting
Auto pass 177 Reclocker locks to any of 143, 177, 270, 360,
540 Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s (ASI should not be
used as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
By-pass SDI slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output
slew rate is hard coded to the slower SDI slew
rate
By-pass HD slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output
slew rate is hard coded to the faster HD slew
rate

c. Click OK. You will return to the Configured Matrices tab.

10. Modify the level input EQ as follows:
a. Highlight the desired level input.
b. Choose a signal type from the EQ Setting drop-down list box. (To
change more than one level input EQ, press and hold down the <Shift>
or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired level inputs.)
c. Click OK. You will return to the Configured Matrices tab.
11. Click Finish to accept all changes and additions. You will return to the
RouterMapper main menu.

136 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Setting Up Output Monitoring1

An optional output monitoring submodule may be installed on audio and/or
video output modules in an Integrator frame. Output monitoring is a feature that
treats the matrix destinations as a set of sources on a separate matrix (called the
output monitoring matrix). It allows you to monitor what comes out of a
particular destination. For example, a 64×32 matrix with SDI format that has
output monitoring, would have another matrix of 32×1 with SDI format.
To set up the output monitoring function, follow these steps:
1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in “Adding Integrator
Frames” steps 1 through 6 (page 123).
2. At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box
• Highlight the desired matrix size.
• Choose the check box for output monitoring, and then click Add. (Note
the “OM” that has appeared in the upper left corner of the added matrix.
This “OM” may appear at another location on the matrix, depending on
which spigot the signal is being driven to.)

Figure 4-40. Output Monitoring Function Selected

3. Click Next.
4. Continue with steps 12 through 14 under “Adding Integrator Frames”
(pages 125 through 126). The Integrator frame is added to the device list at
the RouterMapper main menu. Notice that the router level definition will
indicate one additional destination.
5. At the RouterMapper main menu screen, highlight the Integrator with the
output submodule attached, and then click Edit.
1
The output monitoring option is available only on Integrator products.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 137

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

6. At the Edit Frame dialog box, select the Output Monitoring tab.

Figure 4-41. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Output Monitoring Tab

7. Set the Level, Destination, and First Source parameters. Like any other
matrix, an output monitoring matrix can be configured (such as assigning
level control, starting destination, and sources).
• Level: level on which this matrix will operate
• Destination: destination number for this matrix (the point at which
destination numbering will start for this matrix)
If you choose to have the output monitoring matrix on the same level as
the matrix that the destinations areis monitored, you must assign a
different destination number (for the output monitoring destination) that
does not conflict with the destinations that is monitored. See
Figure 4-42 on page 139 for an example of the output monitoring
matrix on the same level as the monitoring matrix. See Figure 4-43 on
page 139 for an example of the output monitoring matrix on a different
level from the monitoring matrix.
• First Source: first source for this matrix (the First Source is analogous
to the Source Offset in previous Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix. The first source number must be
the same as the first destination number of the destinations that is
monitored. (See “Adding Logical Sources” starting on page 246, for
more information about logical sources.)
8. Click OK. The Integrator frame is updated at the RouterMapper main
menu.

138 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-42. Output Monitoring Matrix — Same Level

Figure 4-43. Output Monitoring Matrix — Different Level

Defining Destinations as Sources for Output Monitoring

On some occasions, you may need to define a particular destination as a source
for output monitoring. (This may happen when you are not using a control
panel.)
1. Follow steps 1 through 8 under “Setting Up Output Monitoring” (pages 137
through 139).
2. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Define Levels.
3. Make sure that the logical router size can accommodate both levels. (In the
example shown in Figure 4-44, the logical router size is set for 64 sources
and 33 destinations.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 139

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-44. Setting Logical Router Size

4. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

5. Click Sources. The Logical Sources tab opens.
6. Scroll to the first available logical source entry to be assigned to a
destination (the “first source” entry from step 7 of “Setting Up Output
Monitoring” [page 138]).

140 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

7. Set up names that match the destination names entered into the Logical
Destination database.
When assigning or editing source names, keep in mind that these characters
are “illegal”: the “~” character, the “\” character, and all non-printable
ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters). These characters may
corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the database.

Figure 4-45. Setting Up Names For New Sources

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 141

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

8. Delete all sources that precede your newly-named source(s) on the output
monitoring level only.

Figure 4-46. Deleting Sources

142 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

9. Starting at your first newly named source, redefine the levels (e.g., “1,” “2,”
etc.).

Figure 4-47. Redefining Levels

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 143

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

10. Right-click in the Levels field, and then select Clear Invalid Assignments.

Figure 4-48. Clearing Invalid Assignments

11. Select the Logical Destinations tab.

12. Right-click in the Levels field, and then select Clear Invalid Assignments.
13. Delete all logical assignments for the output monitoring level.
14. Scroll down to the location of the destination you want to function as the
output monitor (usually the last name in the list).
15. Set up an easily-remembered name for the new output monitor.

144 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

16. Enter the same output monitor destination number you set at the Output
Monitoring tab for the output monitoring level.

Figure 4-49. Naming the New Output Monitor

17. Click Done. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
Figure 4-50 on page 146 illustrates a RouterWorks display that shows the output
monitoring function.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 145

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-50. Output Monitoring Function as Displayed in RouterWorks

146 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Integrator Combiner Systems

Note
You cannot edit or delete dynamic routing threads in a combiner system;
however, you can edit dynamic routing thread remote accessible sources
in a combiner system.

The combiner option allows you to join several Integrator frames to provide a
routing system with more than 128 inputs. Setting up systems in this way will
allow you to have a system with up to 512 inputs × 512 outputs.
Internal connections for the combiner systems are managed through the
Dynamic Routing Fabric™. See page 262 for more information about dynamic
routing threads.

Restrictions
Several restrictions exist in a potential combiner system:
1. You cannot partition any part of the combiner system.
2. All frames within the combiner system must be a single format. (You cannot
have an analog video frame and an SDI frame in one combiner system, for
example.)
3. A 6RU frame size is the smallest “building block” for your potential
combiner system.

Setting Up a Combiner System

Choose what size system you need; that is, how many inputs and how many
outputs. (Maximum combiner system size is 512×512.)
You may find it helpful to plan out your combiner system on paper. It is easier
for you to add and edit your choices if you have a system setup already defined.
See Figure 4-51 on page 148 and Figure 4-52 on page 149 for examples of the
types of information you will need to set up your system.

Adding Combiner System Components

1. Choose one of the following methods to add a device to the RouterMapper
database:
• Poll (see “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80 for information on
how to use this method)
• Discovery (see “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 80 for
information on how to use this method)
• Add (see “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 81 for
information on how to use this method)
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down box, and then click OK. The
Add Router Frame dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 147

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

3. Select the Frame type. A blue border appears around the selected frame
type.
4. Click Next. The Edit Combiner System dialog box opens. (This dialog box
will look slightly different, depending on whether or not you are
configuring a combiner system for an Integrator Gold. Figure 4-52 on
page 149 shows a picture of the Edit Combiner System dialog box for an
Integrator Gold. Figure 4-51 on page 148 shows a picture of the Edit
Combiner System dialog box for all other Integrators.)

Name and Matrix format

Level and signal type

Size

Figure 4-51. Combiner Choices (Except Integrator Gold)

148 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Name and Matrix format

Level and signal types

Size

Figure 4-52. Combiner Choices for Integrator Gold

5. Make your selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows (see
Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 for the location of these selections):
• Name — what you want this combiner system to be named
• Level on which this combiner system will operate
• Matrix format — select the signal format that the frame will route (all
frames within the combiner system must be a single format)
• Signal type — select the specific signal type within the format (analog
audio, mono audio, stereo audio, and AES formats use the same signal
type for input and output signals)
• Output signal1 — output signal type for Integrator Gold format
• Input signal1 — input signal EQ setting for Integrator Gold format
• Size — number of sources and number of destinations
• Source and destination offsets
• Combiner system input and output thread offsets — these offsets
must be above the Source and Destination Offsets’ values

1 This
option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 149

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Dual Output
• Output Monitoring — allows you to set up a router feature that treats
the matrix destinations as a set of sources on a separate matrix
• Starting frame ID — the physical address of the first frame in the
combiner system. At any time you may click View Picture to see a
block diagram and other frame details.
6. Click Done. RouterMapper will add frames to the device tree and
automatically add a set of dynamic routing threads for the combiner system.
7. Physically set up the frames as they are specified in the RouterMapper
database (set frame IDs and wire the system).

Note
RouterMapper does not allow you to use the dynamic routing
thread Edit function on a connection within a combiner
system.

8. Poll the entire system (click Poll at the RouterMapper main menu) to verify
that all frames are operating and detected correctly.
9. Download the new configuration to the frames (see “Downloading Device
Definitions” starting on page 58).
10. Make sure that the combiner system crosspoints operate correctly.

150 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Panacea Frames

Note
A standard Panacea frame cannot be downloaded.

Choose one of the following methods to add a device to the RouterMapper

database:
• Poll (see “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80 for information on how
to use this method)
• Discovery (see “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 80 for information
on how to use this method)
• Add (see “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 81 for
information on how to use this method)

Selecting the Desired Router Frame

1. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select Router Type
dialog box opens.
2. Select the frame type. A blue border appears around the selected frame type.
3. Click Next. The Select Frame Size dialog box opens.
4. Select either a Standard or an Enhanced control style and a frame size
(options are 1RU and 2RU). A blue border appears around the selected
frame type.
5. Click Next. The Router Frame dialog box opens.

Figure 4-53. Router Frame Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 151

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Selecting the Desired Matrix Type

1. Select the matrix type from the drop-down list box. (The Max Matrix Size
options will change as the Matrix Type is changed.)
2. Click on the desired matrix size.
3. (Optional) If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the
proper check box under Module Options. Table 4-5 lists matrix types with
programmable I/O submodules.

Table 4-5. Matrix Types and Supported I/O Submodules

Matrix Type Submodule Supported
AES EBU (all matrix sizes) Quiet switch
High Definition:
16×2, 32×2 only (HSC) HD clean switch
16×8, 32×8 only (HSCQ) Clean-quiet switch
16×8 only Clean switch with bypass
All sizes Reclocker
SDI
16×2, 32×2 only (SC) SD clean switch
16×8, 32×8 only (SCQ) Clean-quiet switch
16×8 only Clean switch with bypass
All sizes Reclocker

4. Click Add. The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right side of
the dialog box. For router matrices with reclocking, clean-quiet switch, or
relay bypass, an annotation (RC, CQ, CS, or CQB) appears in the top left
corner of the matrix frame setting.
Continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You will not be able to
select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An
outline appears around the matrix to indicate that it is selected. The color of
the matrix indicates the Matrix Type. Click Delete.)

Note
The Hardware button appears only if your Panacea router
contains an enhanced resource module.

5. (RES-H or enhanced modules only) Click HARDWARE… to change the

I/O hardware module default settings of a selected matrix in the empty
frame. The I/O Hardware Module dialog box opens. (See “I/O Hardware
Module Tab (Panacea Frames Only)” (page 374) for more information
about this dialog box).
6. After you finish defining the matrices, click Next. The Configured Matrices
dialog box opens.

152 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Configuring the Matrix Type

Frame
Matrix 1 settings

Matrix 2

Figure 4-54. Panacea Configured Matrices Dialog Box

At the Configured Matrices dialog box, you can change the properties for each
matrix individually (as matrix properties), or for both at the same time (as frame
properties). Frame control style and frame size properties are displayed, but
cannot be edited on this screen. To change either the matrix type or matrix size,
click on Back to return to the frame size selection screen.
To change the matrix properties
1. Click on the matrix settings display area for the matrix you want to change
(shown as “Matrix 1” and “Matrix 2” in Figure 4-54).
2. Fill in the following fields:
• Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is outlined)
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Destination for this matrix (same as Destination Offset described
in other Harris product manuals); determines the point at which
destination numbering will start for this matrix
• First Source for this matrix (same as Source Offset described in other
Harris product manuals); determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix
• Signal Type: select a signal type for this matrix format as desired
• Matrix Name: define a new matrix name as desired
• Matrix Color: define a new matrix color as desired
To change the frame properties
1. Click on the right side of the empty frame (shown in Figure 4-54 as “Frame
Settings”). The Frame Properties dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 153

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-55. Frame Properties Dialog Box

2. Fill in the following fields:

• Level on which this frame will operate
• First Destination for this frame (same as Destination Offset in other
Harris product manuals); determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for this frame
• First Source for this frame (same as Source Offset described in other
Harris product manuals); determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this frame
• Frame ID (the frame's physical address); select the frame ID from the
drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Panacea [Frame ID]”); define the new
frame name as desired
3. If the matrix needs to be partitioned, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning
check box, and then click Next. (See “Matrix Partitioning” [page 311] for
more information on this topic.)
4. Make one of the following selections:
a. If your Panacea frame has a standard resource card installed, click
Finish. The Panacea frame is added to the device list at the
RouterMapper main menu.

Note
The Protocols, SNMP..., and Advanced... buttons
appear only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource module.

b. If your Panacea frame has an enhanced resource card installed, click

Next. The Control Card dialog box opens.

154 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Configuring the Control Card

The Panacea Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s)
that are installed in the frame. This information is read-only (except for the
network programmed section) and is presented as an aid in troubleshooting a
system.
If a control card is installed, the details for the current card are shown on the
Control Card tab; otherwise, only the network settings information appears.

Figure 4-56. Panacea Control Card Dialog Box

1. Fill in the network settings as desired.

2. Make one of the following selections:
• Click Protocols to access the Edit Protocols dialog box (see “Editing
Protocols” on page 156 for more information).
• Click SNMP... to access the SNMP Agent Options dialog box (see
“Setting up the SNMP Agent” on page 159 for more information).
• Click Advanced... to access advanced Control Card options (see
“Advanced ContrOl Card Dialog Box” on page 163 for more
information).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 155

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Editing Protocols
The Edit Protocols dialog box is a tabbed dialog that allows you to view the
protocol settings for the Panacea’s serial and Ethernet ports, and set the
automated database name synchronization function.
Editing Serial Protocols
RouterMapper allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s serial
ports. You can change some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1. At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.

Figure 4-57. Edit Protocols Dialog Box (Serial Protocols Tab Selected)

2. Highlight the target port/protocol selection, and then click Edit (or
double-click the item selection). The Options dialog box opens and the
option values for the selection are displayed.
3. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut menu
opens (see Figure 4-58 on page 157).

156 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-58. Changing Serial Protocol Option’s Value

4. Select the new value.

5. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection appears
in the Value column.
6. Click OK. You will return to the Serial Protocols tab.
7. Click OK. You will return to the Control Card(s) tab.
8. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.
Editing Ethernet Protocols
RouterMapper allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s
Ethernet ports. You can change some of the option values for a selected
protocol.
1. At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 157

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-59. Edit Protocols Dialog Box (Ethernet Protocols Tab

Selected)

2. Highlight the target port/protocol selection, and then click Edit (or
double-click the item selection). The Options dialog box opens.

Figure 4-60. Changing Ethernet Protocol Option’s Value

3. Select the new value.

4. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection appears
in the Value column.
5. Click OK. You will return to the Ethernet Protocols tab.
6. Click OK. You will return to the Control Card(s) tab.
7. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

158 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Setting Automated Database Names Synchronization

The names synchronization feature allows Panacea devices using the same
source and destination names as other devices in the same database to be
updated whenever the logical names for the database change. As a result, you do
not have to perform a RouterMapper device download for the changed name
synchronization to take place.
1. At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Name Sync tab.

Figure 4-61. Edit Protocols Dialog Box (Name Synch Tab Selected)

2. Select the “Allow the frame to automate the Logical Database

Synchronization” check box to allow this device to use the database name
synchronization function. (See page 30 and page 64 for more information
about this feature.)

Note
You can also enable this function at the main menu. See
page 64 for instructions.

3. Click OK. You will return to the Control Card(s) tab.

4. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Setting up the SNMP Agent

1. If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP... on the Control Card(s)
tab. The SNMP Agent Options dialog box opens.
The SNMP Agent Options dialog box is a dialog box that allows you to set
up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 160 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• See page 160 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting Trap
Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 162 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 159

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• See page 163 for a description of the System fields.

2. When all SNMP Agent selections are complete, click OK. The Panacea
frame is added to the device list at the RouterMapper main menu.
SNMP Agent OptionS Dialog Box
The SNMP Agent Options dialog box is a dialog box that allows you to set up
all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three separate group boxes are displayed on
this dialog box:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (see page 160)
• SNMP Agent (see page 162)
• System (see page 163)

Figure 4-62. SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or
delete SNMP Trap Destinations.
To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination
1. To add a destination, click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click
Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box opens.

160 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-63. Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

2. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap
destination.
3. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for the SNMP
Trap destination. The port number can be from 1 to 65535.
4. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community name.
5. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that you
would like to use for the SNMP Trap.
6. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds) before an
SNMP Trap is sent to a manager if the initial attempt failed.
7. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager
if the initial attempt failed.
To delete an SNMP Trap destination
1. At the SNMP Agent Options dialog box list control, select the IP address
for the SNMP Trap Destination you want to delete. Multiple devices may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
2. Click Delete. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You are prompted to
confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 161

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

SNMP Agent
Table 4-6 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed in the
SNMP Agent group box.

Table 4-6. SNMP Agent Items of SNMP OptiOns Dialog Box

Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The
network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in
SNMP terms, a “Get” operation has
to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information
from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in
SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in
a MIB browser in order to write
information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps
are sent if the read or write
community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address pop-up
dialog box (see Figure 4-64)

The Managers Address pop-up dialog box allows you to specify the addresses
of the managers whose requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.

Figure 4-64. Manager Address Dialog Box

162 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

To add a manager address

1. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
To modify a manager address
1. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
2. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
3. Modify the manager address as desired.
4. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
To delete a manager address
1. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple addresses).
2. Click Remove. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You are prompted to
confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the
Navigation dialog box. This is user-defined information that, once provided by
an administrator, is available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB
browser. Table 4-7 shows the fields and function descriptions for the items listed
in the System box.

Table 4-7. System Fields of SNMP OPtions Dialog Box

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch
Agent”
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name

Advanced ContrOl Card Dialog Box

The advanced Control Card dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to
view the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration
information; and displays information and settings for virtual XY, time server,
and Map Names options.
• See page 164 for a description of the Config Files tab.
• See page 164 for a description of the Virtual XY tab.
• See page 165 for a description of the Time Servers tab.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 163

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• See page 165 for a description of the Map Names tab.

When all advanced selections are complete, click OK. The Panacea frame is
added to the device list at the RouterMapper main menu.
Config Files Tab
The Config Files tab dialog box shows you the locations of configuration files
in the frame.

Figure 4-65. Config Files Tab

Virtual XY Tab
The Virtual XY tab dialog box allows you to set virtual X-Y and Telnet ports.

Figure 4-66. Virtual XY Tab

The Virtual XY tab allows you to make the following settings:

• Maximum number of open Telnet connections (maximum allowable
connections is 12)
• Telnet socket port ID
• Maximum number of open virtual XY connections (maximum allowable
connections is 20)
• Virtual XY socket port ID

164 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Time Server Tab

Note
This capability is only available for enhanced resource cards with
Panacea Web support installed.

The Time Server Tab dialog box allows you to change the frame’s time server
settings for the web support.

Figure 4-67. Time Server Tab

The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
• Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)
• Maximum wait time for server connection
• Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Map Names Tab
The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame's source and
destination “Names Mapping” file based on the current logical database.

Figure 4-68. Map Names Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 165

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer
the Map Names file to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on
RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol.
(You are asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the Map
Names file to be generated.
• With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the
current logical database.
• With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an
existing file.
• When you select Reboot After Update, the frame will reboot after the file
has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the frame to use the
new transfer file.
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses. You must
activate the SNMP Agent firmware if you ordered it separately from your
original product purchase. If you ordered the SNMP Agent firmware at the same
time as your original product purchase, it is factory-installed and you do not
need to activate it.
Before you activate the SNMP feature, make sure you have obtained an
appropriate license activation code. You will need to provide the Customer
Service representative with the serial number of your product. See the product
manual for instructions.
The License tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer
the license key to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on
RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol.
(You are asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated.)

166 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-69. License Tab

• In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation code you
received from your Customer Service representative (see note).
• When you click Update, the frame will reboot after the file has been
transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the SNMP license is
recognized.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 167

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Other (Legacy) Harris Frames

1. Choose one of the following methods to add a device to the RouterMapper
database:
• Poll (see “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80 for information on
how to use this method)
• Discovery (see “Adding a Frame by Discovery” on page 80 for
information on how to use this method)
• Add (see “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 81 for
information on how to use this method)
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select Router Type
dialog box opens.
3. Select the Frame type. A blue border appears around the selection
4. Click Next. The Edit Frame dialog box opens.

Figure 4-70. Edit Frame Dialog Box (Non-Integrator Frames)

5. Make selections from these drop-down list boxes:

• Number of Matrices for this frame
• Matrix properties:
• Select Matrix allows a specified matrix to be displayed on the
dialog
• Matrix Type
• Matrix Size, which is the matrix dimension of the selected matrix

168 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Sources1, which is the number of sources for the selected matrix

• Destinations2, which is the number of destinations for the selected
matrix
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Source for this matrix (same as Source Offset in other Harris
product manuals); determines the point where source numbering for
this matrix starts
• First Destination for this matrix (same as Destination Offset in
other Harris product manuals); determines the point where
destination numbering for this matrix starts
• Is Matrix Partitioned3 allows this matrix to partition into multiple
components
• Number of Components for this matrix to partition into
• Components1:
• Select Component allows the specified component to be displayed
on the dialog
• Component Size displays the matrix dimensions of the specified
component
• Component Level on which this component will operate
• Source Offset4 determines the point at which source numbering
will start for the specified component
• Destination Offset2 determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for the specified component
6. Click Finish. The frame is added to the device list at the RouterMapper
main menu.

1 Generic
frames only
2 VIA and XPlus only
3 VIA with SDI format and XPlus only
4 VIA and XPlus only

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 169

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

170 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5
Adding Router Control Panels

Overview
RouterMapper supports downloading and managing programmable panel series
control panels. Programmable panel series control panels can be added by
polling the system or by manually adding the panel using the Add feature.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Adding Control Panels by Polling” on page 172
• “Adding Control Panels by Discovery” on page 172
• “Adding Control Panels Using the Add Command” on page 173
For information about adding a frame, see Chapter 4.
For information about adding and editing an Edge configurations, see
Chapter 6.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 171

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

Adding Control Panels by Polling

1. Click Poll at the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. Select Poll.
2. A shortcut menu opens. Select Entire Router System.
3. RouterMapper will query the control system, and return error messages if
errors are found.
4. If no errors are encountered, RouterMapper will update the Device List with
all the control panels that were found during the poll (see Figure 3-4 on
page 44 for an example).

Adding Control Panels by Discovery

1. Click Discovery at the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Discovery.
2. RouterMapper will query the control system, and then display a list of
newly discovered devices (see Figure 3-8 on page 51 for an example).
If you do not want to add particular control panels, click the check box next
to its name. This will remove the selection mark from the check box.
3. Click Add Newly Discovered. RouterMapper will add the discovered items
to the Device List.
4. Select the discovered panel you want to configure, and then click Edit. For
information about editing the different types of control panels, see Chapter
10 through Chapter 16.

172 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

Adding Control Panels Using the Add Command

1. Click Add at the RouterMapper main menu. The Add New Device dialog
box opens.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. shortcut menu opens.
Select Add Device. A second shortcut menu opens.
2. Select Router Control Panel from the drop-down list box. The Add Panels
dialog box opens.

Figure 5-1. Add Panels Dialog Box

Note
The Panel Brand selection is enabled only for Harris- or
Leitch-branded control panels of certain styles. For all other
styles, the Panel Brand selection is greyed out.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 173

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

Figure 5-2. Add Panels Dialog Box for 32×8 CQ-S1 and -X Panels

Note
If you have not added a Panacea clean switch/quiet switch
router, the 32×8 CQ-S and -X panel selections will not appear
in the Panel Style drop-down list box, and the Associate with
Frames drop-down list box is greyed out.

3. Select the Panel Style from the drop-down list box.

(For Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panels only) If you chose
a 32×8 CQ-S or -X panel as the desired panel style, select the frame to
associate with this panel from the Associate with Frame drop-down list box.
4. If the Panel Brand selection is enabled, choose the appropriate Panel Brand
radio button.
• If a “Harris” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the
Harris radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris
radio button.
• If a “Leitch” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the
Leitch radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch
radio button.

1 In
RouterMapper, the “32×8 CQ-S” corresponds to an R(L)CP-32×8CQp control panel with
standard clean switch/quiet switch configuration. The “32×8 CQ-X” corresponds to an control
panel R(L)CP-32×8CQp with program/preview clean switch/quiet switch configuration. For
more information about the 32×8CQp control panel, see the P-SCQ, P-HSCQ Clean Switch/Quiet
Switch Configuration, Installation, and Operation Manual.

174 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

5. Select the Panel ID (the panel’s physical address) from the drop-down list
box.
6. Type the panel name into the Panel Name box.
7. If you want to add more than one panel with options identical to those you
just selected: (If one panel with these options is sufficient, you do not need
to change the default number.)
a. Click on the up/down arrows to the right of the Number of Panels to
Add list box.
b. Select the number of additional panels you want.
8. Click OK. The control panel is added to the device list at the RouterMapper
main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 175

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

176 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6
Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Overview
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Adding Edge Configurations” on page 179
• “Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values” on page 207
• “Changing Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values” on page
206
• “Edge Web Router Application” on page 205
• “Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values” on page 190
• “Setting Network and Configuration Information” on page 208
• “Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options” on page 181
• “Upgrading Firmware” on page 210

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 177

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Edge and Edge II Protocol Gateways

The Edge1 protocol gateway provides external physical connectivity to any
Harris routing system, regardless of the type(s) of Harris routing switcher
involved. Use of standard TCP/IP communications allows the unit to provide
connectivity over most standard LAN, MAN, WAN, or Internet connections.
The Edge translates between Harris protocol and the protocols used by other
manufacturers or equipment. It can be used to integrate otherwise incompatible
devices in a system, and it may be used to expand a system beyond the normal
limitations imposed by hardware or system design. Edge serial port and
Ethernet connection protocol assignments are configurable in RouterMapper.
Edge II serial port, Ethernet connection, and coax protocol assignments are
configurable in RouterMapper.

1 Except
where noted, the term “Edge” is used in the manual to refer to both Edge and Edge II.

178 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Adding Edge Configurations

The Edge protocol gateway can be added to the database by polling the control
network for installed devices. You can also manually create entries for a Edge.

Adding an Edge by Polling

1. Click Poll at the RouterMapper main menu.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. Select Poll.
2. A shortcut menu opens. Select Entire Router System.
3. RouterMapper will query the control system, and return error messages if
errors are found.
4. If no errors are found, RouterMapper will update the Device List with all
devices that were found during the Poll (see Figure 3-4 on page 44 for an
example).

Adding an Edge by Discovery

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Discover.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Discovery.
2. RouterMapper will query the control system, and then display a list of
newly discovered devices (see Figure 3-8 on page 51 for an example).
If you do not want to add particular discovered items, click the check box
next to its name. This will remove the selection mark from the check box.
3. Click Add Newly Discovered. RouterMapper will add the discovered items
to the Device List.
4. Select the discovered frame you want to configure, and then click Edit. (For
information on editing a frame definition, see page 206.

Adding an Edge Using the Add Command

1. Click Add at the RouterMapper main menu. The Add a New Device to the
Database dialog box opens (see Figure 3-10 on page 53 for an example).
Select Edge from the drop-down list box.
OR
Right-click the mouse button anywhere within the Device Summary
section. A shortcut menu opens.
Select Add Device, and then select Add Edge.
2. The Edge Device dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 179

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• For Sony protocol only, select Edge II.

• For all other protocols, select Edge.
3. Click OK. The Add Edge dialog box opens.
The Add Edge dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to set protocol
assignments and option values for the newly-added Edge. Tab selections will
vary, depending on whether you selected Edge or Edge II. Any tab can be
selected by clicking on the appropriate tab. Information on using those tabs can
be found in pages 181 through 210.

180 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options

RouterMapper allows you to set the protocol settings for the Edge’s serial ports.
You can switch from X-Y protocol to the “foreign” protocol resident on your
Edge. In addition, you can change some of the option values for a selected
protocol.
1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.

Figure 6-1. Edge and Edge II Serial Protocols Tabs

2. Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the
item selection). The Options dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 181

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-2. Serial Protocol Options Dialog Box, Non Pro-Bel

Configurations

Figure 6-3. Serial Protocol Options Dialog Box, Pro-Bel Configurations

Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop
bits, and serial interface are displayed. On GVG-7000 configurations only,
an assigned value for Map Type are displayed. On Pro-Bel configurations
only, a Mappings button will also be displayed. (See “Setting Mapping
Values for Pro-Bel Configurations” on page 185 for more information on
setting the mapping values for a Pro-Bel configuration.) The Edge provides
bidirectional translation of the following router control protocols:
• Harris pass-thru protocol
• GVG SMS-7000 protocol1

182 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• Jupiter ASCII protocol1

• Jupiter ESswitch protocol1
• NVISION protocol1
• NV 9000 protocol1
• PESA P1 protocol2
• Pro-Bel SW-P-02 protocol3
• Pro-Bel SW-P-08 protocol3
• Utah Scientific RCP-1 protocol4
3. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol you want to switch to.
Supported serial protocols include
• Leitch terminal X-Y
• GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
• Jupiter ESswitch server and client
• Jupiter ASCII server and client
• NVISION server and client
• NV9000 server and client
• PESA P1 server and client
• Pro-Bel SW-P-02 server and SW-P-02 client
• Pro-Bel SW-P-08 server and SW-P-08 client
• Utah RCP-1 server and client
4. The assigned values for the selected protocol appear. While all relevant
protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be configurable.
These values are displayed for informational purposes only; you cannot
change them through RouterMapper. To change a value:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 6-4 on page 184).
b. Select the new value, and then click somewhere outside the drop-down
list box. The new selection appears in the Value column.
c. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Edge serial ports dialog
box.

1
GVG SMS-7000, Jupiter ASCII, and Jupiter ESswitch protocols are product of Thomson Grass
Valley, headquartered in Paris, France.
1 NVISION and NV9000 protocols are products of NVISION Inc., headquartered in Grass Valley,

California.
2 PESA CPU Link No. 1 (P1) protocol is a product of QuStream Corporation, headquartered in

Toronto, Canada.
3 SW-P-02 and SW-P-08 protocols are products of Pro-Bel Ltd., headquartered in Reading,

Berkshire, UK.
4 RCP-1 protocol is a product of Utah Scientific, headquartered in Salt Lake City, Utah.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 183

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

5. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main

menu.

Figure 6-4. Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

184 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel Configurations

RouterMapper allows you to set mapping values for Pro-Bel SW-P-02 and
SW-P-08 configurations. To set the mapping values, follow these steps:
1. At the Serial Protocol Options dialog box, select the desired Pro-Bel
protocol from the Protocol drop-down list box. A Mappings... button opens
on the Options display (see Figure 6-3 on page 182).
2. Click Mappings.... The ProBel Inputs and Outputs dialog box opens (see
Figure 6-5).

Figure 6-5. Pro-Bel Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box

Note
The ability to set levels is only available for the SW-P-08 protocol. When
the SW-P-02 protocol is selected, the Pro-Bel Level drop-down list box is
greyed out.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 185

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

3. Set up input and output information as follows:

Selecting Inputs
• From the Input Range’s Probel Level drop-down list box, select the level1
at which you want the Pro-Bel router to start for the inputs you will
specify for mapping.
• In the Input Range entry box (to the left of the Add button), enter the
Pro-Bel router inputs you want to map. You can enter single inputs (for
example, 1), a range of inputs (for example, 2-5), or a combination of
both (for example, 1,2-5). Separate entries with a comma, but without
blank spaces.
• Click Add. The input numbers appear in the Input Range display box.
Selecting Outputs
• From the Output Range’s Probel Level drop-down list box, select the
outputs’ level1 at which you want the Pro-Bel router to start for the
outputs you will specify for mapping.
• In the Output Range entry box (to the left of the Add button), enter the
Pro-Bel router outputs you want to map. You can enter single outputs (for
example, 1), a range of outputs (for example, 2-5), or a combination of
both (for example, 1,2-5). Separate entries with a comma, but without
blank spaces.
• Click Add. The output numbers appear in the Output Range display box.
4. Click Next. The Mapped Matrices dialog box opens. In the lower left corner
the Unassigned Probel Inputs and Outputs notice opens.

1A database can include up to 16 independent router levels, numbered from 0 to 15. These level
numbers correspond to the level number(s) that each physical router frame will occupy in the
routing system. (For more information about levels, see “Defining the Levels” on page 226.)

186 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-6. Pro-Bel Mapped Matrices Dialog Box

5. Click Add. The Add Matrix dialog box opens.

Figure 6-7. Pro-Bel Add Matrix Dialog Box

a. Enter a name for the new Pro-Bel matrix.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 187

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

b. If desired, click Color..., and then select a new color for the matrix.
c. From the level drop-down list box, select the Level at which you want
this matrix to start.
d. Enter the desired matrix size. This matrix size can include all or some of
the inputs and outputs to be mapped.
You can manipulate this matrix size to match the number of Pro-Bel
inputs and outputs, or you can change it so that some inputs and outputs
will remain unassigned, so as to add them to different matrix(es).
e. Enter the desired starting number for input and output offsets.
f. Select the desired format from the drop-down list box.
g. If you want to change the Pro-Bel input or output mapping assignments,
click the number for the appropriate component input or output, and
then select a new input/output number from the drop-down list box.
h. Click OK to return to the Mapped Matrices dialog box.
If you have assigned all of your Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, the
Unassigned Probel Inputs and Outputs notice will not longer be
displayed.
If you have not assigned all of your Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, the
unassigned Probel inputs and Outputs notice will indicate the number of
unassigned items remain.
• Click View to see which inputs and/or outputs are unassigned.
• Click Clear to remove the unassigned list from the dialog box.
• Click Add to add the unassigned items to a new matrix.
• You may also add the unassigned items to an existing matrix:
Highlight the desired matrix, click Edit, and then change the matrix
size to accommodate the number of I/Os you want to add.
Click OK to return to the Mapped Matrices dialog box.
6. If desired, click Probel View to view a “snapshot” of the Pro-Bel to Harris
mapping. It will show you which Pro-Bel I/Os are mapped to which Harris
I/Os, assigned levels, and assigned matrix names.

188 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-8. Pro-Bel to Harris Mapping

7. Click OK until you return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 189

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values

RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or both) of
an Edge’s client and server Ethernet connection. You cannot switch between
protocols, but you can change some option values.

Figure 6-9. Edge and Edge II Ethernet Protocols Tabs

1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab. The assigned
values for the default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet
port are displayed.
Supported protocols include
• GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
• NVision server and NVision client
• NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client

190 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• Leitch virtual X-Y server and Leitch virtual X-Y client

• Leitch Telnet X-Y server
2. Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit. The Options dialog
box opens (see Figure 6-10 on page 191). The option values for the client or
server selection are displayed.

Figure 6-10. Ethernet Protocols Options Dialog Box

3. To change a value, take these steps:

a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 6-11 on page 192).
b. Select the new value.
c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Edge Ethernet Protocols tab.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 191

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-11. Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

192 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Setting Coax Protocol Option Values

RouterMapper allows you to set the protocol settings for the Edge II’s coax
ports. You can switch from X-Y protocol to the Sony protocol resident on your
Edge II. In addition, you can change the baud rate values for the Sony SBUS
Client protocol.
1. At the Add Edge II dialog box, select the Coax Protocols tab.

Figure 6-12. Coax Protocols Tab (Edge II Only)

Note
The Coax I port must use Leitch X-Y protocol.

2. Highlight the target Edge II selection, and then click Edit (or double-click
the item selection). The Options dialog box opens (see Figure 6-13 on
page 194). The option values for the client or server selection are displayed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 193

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-13. Coax Protocols Options Dialog Box

3. To change a value, take these steps:

a. Highlight the baud rate value you want to change. A shortcut menu opens
(see Figure 6-14 on page 194).
b. Select the new value, and then click somewhere outside the drop-down
list box. The new selection appears in the Value column.
c. Click OK. You will return to the Edge II Coax Protocols tab.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

Figure 6-14. Changing Sony SBUS Protocol Baud Rate Value

194 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Viewing the Detected Cards Tab

Figure 6-15. Edge Detected Cards Tab

The Detected Cards tab displays back panel information for the Edge. (This
information is read-only.) The tab will show the card type, back panel type, and
version.

Setting Network Information for Edge

Figure 6-16. Edge Control Cards Tab

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in
the Edge device. The information is updated on every Poll of the control
system.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 195

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and
network and configuration files setup on the right.

System Information
• The Name field will display the Edge device name.
• The ID list box will display the Edge device ID.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version fields will display the versions of
the software installed on the active control card.
• The DIP switch fields will show the current positions of the control card's
DIP switches. A “0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF)
position. A “1” indicates that a switch is in the (or ON) position.
• DIP Switch, Top displays information about the top switch of the three
DIP switches on the front of the control.
• DIP Switch, Middle displays information about the middle switch of the
three DIP switches on the front of the control.
• DIP Switch, Bottom displays information about the bottom switch of the
three DIP switches on the front of the control.

Network Information
The control card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Programmed settings.
• Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the Edge. When you select the
Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are read-only.
• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings
that you want used with the Edge. When you select the Programmed radio
button, you can edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the Edge.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the Edge is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to
which the Edge belongs.

SNMP
If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP.... The SNMP Agent
Options dialog box (Figure 6-17 on page 197) opens. The SNMP Agent Options
dialog box is a dialog box that allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent
settings.
• See page 197 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options dialog box
components.
• See page 198 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting Trap
Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 199 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.

196 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• See page 200 for a description of the System fields.

Advanced Control Options

If you want to set up advanced control options, click Advanced…. The
Advance Settings dialog box (Figure 6-20 on page 201) opens. The Advance
Settings dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view the
configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration
information; and displays information and settings for virtual XY, time server,
and Map Names options.
• See page 201 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 202 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 203 for a description of the Config Files tab.

SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

The SNMP Agent Options dialog box is a dialog box that allows you to set up
all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three separate group boxes are displayed on
this dialog box:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (see page 198)
• SNMP Agent (see page 199)
• System (see page 200)

Figure 6-17. SNMP Agent OptioNs Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 197

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or
delete SNMP Trap Destinations.
To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:
1. To add a destination, click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click
Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box opens.

Figure 6-18. Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

2. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap
destination.
3. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for the SNMP
Trap destination. The port number can be from 1 to 65535.
4. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community name.
5. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that you
would like to use for the SNMP Trap.
6. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds) before an
SNMP Trap is sent to a manager if the initial attempt failed.
7. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager
if the initial attempt failed.
To delete an SNMP Trap destination:
1. At the SNMP Agent Options dialog box list control, select the IP address
for the SNMP Trap Destination you want to delete. Multiple devices may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
2. Click Delete. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR

198 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You are prompted to
confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
SNMP Agent
Table 6-1 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed in the
SNMP Agent group box.

Table 6-1. SNMP Agent Items of SNMP OptioNs Dialog Box

Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The
network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in
SNMP terms, a “Get” operation has
to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information
from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in
SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in
a MIB browser in order to write
information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps
are sent if the read or write
community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address pop-up
dialog box (see Figure 6-19)

The Managers Address pop-up dialog box allows you to specify the addresses
of the managers whose requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 199

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-19. Manager Address Dialog Box

• To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• To modify a manager address:
a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.
d. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• To delete a manager address:
a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple addresses).
b. Click Remove. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You are prompted to
confirm the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the
Navigation dialog box. This is user-defined information that, once provided by
an administrator, is available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB

200 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

browser. Table 6-2 shows the fields and function descriptions for the items listed
in the System box.

Table 6-2. System Fields of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch Agent”
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name

Advance Settings Dialog Box

The Advance Settings dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view
the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration
information; and displays information and settings for time server and Map
Names options.
Time Server Tab

Note
This capability is only available for enhanced resource cards with Edge
Web support installed.

The Time Server Tab dialog box allows you to change the frame's time server
settings for the web support.

Figure 6-20. Time Server Tab

The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
• Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)
• Maximum wait time for server connection
• Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 201

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Map Names Tab

The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame's source and
destination “Names Mapping” file based on the current logical database.

Figure 6-21. Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer
the Map Names file to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on
RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (You
are asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the Map
Names file to be generated.
• With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the
current logical database.
• With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an
existing file.
• When you select Reboot After Update, the frame will reboot after the file
has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the frame to use the
new transfer file.

202 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Config Files Tab

The Config Files tab dialog box shows you the locations of configuration files
in the frame.

Figure 6-22. Config Files Tab

License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses.

Figure 6-23. License Tab

Note
You must activate the SNMP Agent firmware if you ordered it separately
from your original product purchase. If you ordered the SNMP Agent
firmware at the same time as your original product purchase, it is
factory-installed and you will not need to activate it. Before you activate
the SNMP feature, make sure you have obtained an appropriate license
activation code. You will need to provide the Customer Service
representative with the serial number of your product. See the product
manual for instructions.

The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer
the license key to the frame.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 203

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• Use XY File Transfer to export a file by X-Y transfer (based on

RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting).
• Use FTP to export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (You are
asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated.)
• In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation code you
received from your Customer Service representative (see note).
• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the file has
been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the SNMP license is
recognized.

Automating Logical Names Synchronization

The names synchronization feature1 allows Edge devices using the same source
and destination names as other devices in the same database to be updated
whenever the logical names for the database change. As a result, you do not
have to a RouterMapper device download for the changed name
synchronization to take place.
1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Name Sync tab.

Figure 6-24. Name Sync Tab

2. Select the “Allow this device to automate the Logical Database

Synchronization” check box to allow this device to use the database name
synchronization function. (See page 30 and page 64 for more information
about this feature.)
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

1 The
names synchronization feature is available for Edge protocol gateways with advanced
resource cards running build 3.18 or higher.

204 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Note
You can also enable this function at the main menu. See page 64 for
instructions.

Edge Web Router Application

The optional web router application uses standard web browsers to perform
certain control panel functions for Panacea routers and Edge protocol gateways
that have an enhanced resource module installed. The enabling software is
purchased as a separate flash module; to become operable, it requires the
presence of an enhanced resource module.
The web router application flash module is available for retrofit into non-web
enabled Panacea or Edge frames. Web-enabled frames have the flash module
already installed.
For more information about the optional web router application, see “Chapter 7:
Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations” starting on
page 211.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 205

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Editing Edge Configurations

Changing Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values
RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or both) of
an Edge serial ports. You can switch from X-Y protocol to the “foreign”
protocol resident on your Edge. In addition, you can change some of the option
values for a selected protocol.
1. Double click the target Edge selection on the main menu (or highlight the
target Edge selection, and then click Edit).
2. The Edit Edge dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Serial Protocols
tab.
3. Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit. The Options dialog
box opens (see Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3 on page 182). The assigned values
for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial
interface for the selected serial port are displayed.
4. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol you want to switch to.
Supported serial protocols include
• Leitch terminal X-Y
• GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
• Jupiter ESswitch server and client
• Jupiter ASCII server and client
• NVISION server and NVISION client
• NVISION 9000 server and NVISION 9000 client
• PESA P1 server and client
• Pro-Bel SW-P-02 server and client
• Pro-Bel SW-P-08 server and client
• Utah RCP-1 server and client
5. The assigned values1 for the selected protocol appear. You can change some
of the option’s values at this dialog box.
To change a value, follow these steps:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 6-11 on page 192).
b. Select the new value.
c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.

1 While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be configurable.
These values are displayed for informational purposes only; you cannot change them through
RouterMapper.

206 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

d. (For Pro-Bel routers only) To change mapping values, click Mapping,

and then follow the instructions as outlined for “Setting Mapping
Values for Pro-Bel Configurations” steps • (page 186) through 7
(page 189).
e. Click OK. You will return to the Edge serial ports dialog box.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values

RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or both) of
an Edge client and server Ethernet connection. You cannot switch between
protocols, but you can change some of the option values.
1. Double click the target Edge selection on the main menu (or highlight the
target Edge selection, and then click Edit).
2. The Edit Edge dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet Protocols
tab. The assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the
selected Ethernet port are displayed. (See Figure 6-2 on page 182.)
Supported protocols include
• NVision server and NVision client
• NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client
• GVG SMS-7000 server and GVG SMS-7000 client
• Leitch virtual X-Y server and Leitch virtual X-Y client
• Leitch Telnet XY server
3. Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit. The Options dialog
box opens (see Figure 6-10 on page 191). The assigned values for the
default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are
displayed.
You can change some of the option’s values1 at this dialog box.
To change a value, follow these steps:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 6-11 on page 192).
b. Select the new value.
c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Edge Ethernet controllers dialog box.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

1 Whileall relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be configurable.
These values are displayed for informational purposes only; you cannot change them through
RouterMapper.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 207

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Viewing the Detected Cards Tab

The Detected Cards tab displays back panel information for the Edge. (This
information is read-only.) The tab will show the card type, back panel type, and
version.

Figure 6-25. Edge Detected Cards Tab

Setting Network and Configuration Information

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in
the Edge frame. This information is read-only (except for the network
programmed section) and is presented as an aid in troubleshooting a system.
The information is updated on every Poll of the control system. The dialog box
shows read-only system information for the control card on the left, and the
control card's network and configuration files setup on the right.
1. Double click the target Edge selection on the main menu (or highlight the
target Edge selection, and then click Edit).
2. The Edit Edge dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Control Card tab.

208 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-26. Edge Control Card Tab

The control card's network properties are divided into two sections: Current
and Programmed settings.
• Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the Edge. When you select the
Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are read-only.
• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address
settings that you want used with the Edge.
3. Select the Programmed radio button to edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the Edge.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the Edge is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to
which the Edge belongs.
4. If you changed the IP address, gateway, or subnet mask, click Download IP
Info.
5. If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP.... The SNMP Agent
Options dialog box opens. The SNMP Agent Options dialog box is a dialog
box that allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 197 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• See page 198 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting Trap
Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 199 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 200 for a description of the System fields.
6. If you want to set up advanced control options, click Advanced…. The
Advance Settings dialog box (Figure 6-20 on page 201) opens. The
Advance Settings dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 209

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration
information; and displays information and settings for virtual X-Y, time
server, SNMP licensing, and Map Names options.
• See page 201 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 202 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 203 for a description of the Config Files tab.
• See page 203 for a description of the License tab.

Changing Coax Protocol Option Values

RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for the Edge II’s coax
ports. You can switch from X-Y protocol to the Sony protocol resident on your
Edge II, or you can change the baud rate values for the Sony SBUS Client
protocol.
To change a value, follow these steps:
1. At the Add Edge II dialog box, select the Coax Protocols tab (see
Figure 6-12 on page 193).

Note
The Coax I port must use Leitch X-Y protocol.

2. Highlight the target Edge II selection, and then click Edit (or double-click
the item selection). The Options dialog box opens (see Figure 6-13 on
page 194). The option values for the client or server selection are displayed.
3. Highlight the baud rate value you want to change. A shortcut menu opens
(see Figure 6-14 on page 194).
4. Select the new value, and then click somewhere outside the drop-down list
box. The new selection appears in the Value column.
5. Click OK. You will return to the Edge II Coax Protocols tab.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

Setting Up Edge Web Panels

For information about adding and editing an Edge web configuration, see
“Adding Web Router Application Devices” on page 212.

Setting Up Web Users

For information about adding users for an Edge web configuration, see “Setting
Up Web Users” on page 221.

Upgrading Firmware
Instructions on upgrading Edge firmware are provided in “Upgrading Edge and
Panacea Firmware” on page 77.

210 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7
Adding and Editing Web Router
Application Configurations

Overview
The optional web router application uses standard web browsers to perform
certain control panel functions for Panacea routers and Edge protocol gateways
that have an enhanced resource module installed. The enabling software is
purchased as a separate flash module; to become operable, it requires the
presence of an enhanced resource module.
The web router application flash module is available for retrofit into non-web
enabled Panacea or Edge frames. Web-enabled frames have the flash module
already installed.
Only P-RES-H (version 3.16 or higher) modules with licensed web protocols,
used in conjunction with RouterMapper version 6.05 or higher, support the web
router application download properly.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 211

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Adding Web Router Application Devices

Note
If you have a Panacea or Edge device already set up in a RouterMapper
database, you do not need to re-add it. You can access the Web Panels
and Web Users tabs via the device’s Edit function.
To successfully use the web router application, an Ethernet connection is
required between a Panacea or Edge device and a PC running RouterMapper.
The web router application does not operate via a serial connection. Before you
can configure web panels or add web users, you must add either a Panacea
router or an Edge protocol gateway device.
• For information about adding a Panacea router configuration, see “Adding
Panacea Frames” on page 151.
• For information about adding an Edge configuration, see “Adding Edge
Configurations” on page 179.

Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users

After you save any additions or changes to web panel or user information, you
must perform a download. When a download is performed, a file containing the
user information is downloaded, along with the other PWeb files, to the
web-enabled frame. This file overwrites the file that is already resident on the
frame. If you do not want to overwrite existing information, poll the
appropriate web-enabled device BEFORE making any additions or
changes. When you poll a web-enabled device, RouterMapper merges the
information from the frame with corresponding information (if any) currently
listed in RouterMapper. One of these scenarios takes place:
• If a user exists on the frame and in the RouterMapper list, the poll updates
user information in RouterMapper with the values from the frame.
• If a user exists on the frame but does not exist in the RouterMapper list, the
user information is added to RouterMapper. An asterisk in front of the user
name signifies the user information is from the frame.
• If a user is deleted from the frame but is still listed in RouterMapper, that
user is deleted from RouterMapper.

212 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Configuring Web Panels

The web router application allows you to set up virtual (or “web”) panels that
have the same characteristics as equivalent Harris hardware panels (see
page 214 for a list of panel styles). These web panels can be customized to
allow the system administrator to control the types of functions available to
individual web users. For example, the system administrator can assign
different access rights, accessible levels, destination offsets, destinations, and
sources, to two different users of the same panel.

Figure 7-1. Web Panels Tab for Panacea Products

Figure 7-2. Web Panels Tab for Edge Products

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 213

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Note
Make sure you review the information provided in “Before You Begin
Setting Up Web Panels or Users” on page 212 before you perform any of
these functions.

At the Web Panels tab, you can add different web panel styles, delete existing
panels, select a default panel, and change the configuration of an existing panel.
You can add these panel styles:
• Pushbutton panels (a pushbutton panel is similar to a programmable panel)
• 16×1
• 16×4
• 16×8
• 16×16
• 32×1
• 32×4
• 32×8
• 32×16
• 32×32
• Alphanumeric breakaway panels
• Index

Adding Pushbutton Panels

1. Choose one of the following:
• If you are adding web panels for Edge Web, add an Edge, and then select
the Web Panels tab.
• If you are adding web panels for Panacea Web, highlight the appropriate
Panacea frame at the device summary list, click Edit, and then select the
Web Panels tab.
2. At the Web Panels tab, click Add. The Panel Styles drop-down list box
opens.

Figure 7-3. Panel Styles Drop-Down List Box

214 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

3. Select the panel style you want from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The Push Panel Configuration tab opens. If necessary, select the
Destinations tab.

Note
For a more in-depth discussion about control panel
destinations, see “Defining the Destinations” on page 513.

Figure 7-4. Pushbutton Panel Configuration Destinations Tab

4. Enter a unique name in the Configuration Name box. (This name also
appears in the Configuration Name box on the Web Panels tab). Using
unique configuration names, you can set up multiple panels of the same
style (for example, several 16×1 or index panels), but with different
configurations, panel IDs, and/or assigned users.
5. Enter a unique panel ID number for this web panel configuration. This
panel ID is used by RouterMapper to identify the panel type and specialized
configuration you assign; you also use this panel ID to assign specialized
panel configurations to specific users (see Figure 7-11 on page 222).
6. Assign the logical destination(s) to the desired button(s). You can drag and
drop a destination from the Logical Destinations list to any of the buttons to
make an assignment.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 215

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

To remove a logical destination assignment, drag and drop the selected

button to the Delete bin.
After you download the panel configuration from RouterMapper, the
destinations assigned to the DEST buttons can be viewed on the appropriate
push panel configurations in the web router application.
7. When destination assignments are complete, select the Sources tab.

Note
For a more in-depth discussion about control panel sources,
see “Defining the Sources” on page 517.

Figure 7-5. Pushbutton Panel Configuration Sources Tab

8. Assign the logical source(s) to the desired Source Select Key button(s). You
can drag and drop a source from the Logical Sources list to any buttons to
make an assignment.
To remove a logical source assignment, drag and drop the selected button to
the Delete bin.
After you download the panel configuration from RouterMapper, the
destinations assigned to the Source Select Key buttons can be viewed on the
appropriate push panel configurations in the web router application.

216 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

9. When all source assignments are complete, select the Levels tab.

Note
For a more in-depth discussion about control panel levels,
see “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 521.

Figure 7-6. Push Panel Configuration Levels Tab

10. Enable the levels by checking the appropriate check boxes. If a box is
checked, the level is enabled for this panel. (To disable a level, click the
check box; the check mark disappears and the level is disabled.)
11. When all level assignments are complete, click OK to return to the Web
Panels tab.
12. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main menu.
13. Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the
RouterMapper database.
14. Click Download to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device
firmware.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 217

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Adding Index Panels

1. Click Add. The Panel Styles drop-down list box opens.

Note
For a more in-depth discussion about control panel
assignments, see “Assigning a Favorite Source or
Destination to a Selection Key” on page 447.

2. Select the Index panel style from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The Index Panel Configuration tab opens. If necessary, select the
Assignments tab.

Figure 7-7. Index Panel Configuration Assignments Tab

3. Enter a unique name in the Configuration Name box. (This name also
appears in the Configuration Name box on the Web Panels tab). Using
unique configuration names, you can set up multiple panels of the same
style (for example, several 16×1 or index panels), but with different
configurations and/or assigned users.
4. Enter a unique panel ID number for this web panel configuration. This
panel ID is used by RouterMapper to identify the panel type and specialized
configuration you assign; you also use this panel ID to assign specialized
panel configurations to specific users (see Figure 7-11 on page 222).
5. The top row of Index buttons on the dialog box correspond to the top two
rows of selection keys on a virtual index panel appearing in the web router
application. The bottom row of Index buttons on the dialog box correspond
to the bottom two rows of selection keys on a virtual index panel appearing

218 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

in the web router application. After you download the panel configuration
from RouterMapper, the category designators assigned to the Index buttons
appear on the index panel selection keys of the web router application.
At the Assignments tab you can assign the logical sources and destinations
for the panel to control, and what categories/indices are displayed on the
web virtual panel’s buttons.
• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab displays these lists in
numeric-alphabetic order.
• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical
order, the Assignments tab displays these lists in the order in which you
first assigned the Sources and Destinations.
6. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the desired destinations from
the Global Database list box in the Destinations group, and then click
Assign. The selected destination assignments appear in the This Panel list
box.
7. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the desired sources from the
Global Database list box in the Sources group, and then click Assign. The
selected source assignments appear in the This Panel list box.
8. The Categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments
dialog. The Global Database list includes all of the categories set up for the
selected panel type. Select the category name from the Categories list box,
and then drag the category name to the selection key. The selection key
changes to reflect the new assignment.
9. When all assignments are complete, click the Windows & Pages tab. To
display and control more levels than would normally be available on a
panel, multiple pages can be created, each with a different definition. You
can assign up to four dialog boxes to a page; and each dialog box can have a
different assigned level.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 219

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Figure 7-8. Index Panel Configuration Windows & Pages Tab

After you download the panel configuration from RouterMapper:

• Window assignments are associated with the desired pages.
• Window and page assignments appear on the index panel selection
window buttons of the web router application.
To add a page and corresponding windows:
• Click Add to create a blank page.
• Select the newly-added page, and then, from the drop-down list box to
the right of the Windows list, assign levels to the page’s windows.
• Click Apply Changes to apply the changes to the selected page.
To delete a page and corresponding windows:
• Select the page you want to delete (or, use standard Windows selection
techniques [hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys] to select multiple
devices).
• Click Delete. The selected page(s) and associated window assignments
are removed.
10. When all windows and pages assignments are complete, click OK to return
to the Web Panels tab.
11. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main menu.
12. Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the
RouterMapper database, and then click Download to send the changes to
the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.

220 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Setting Up Web Users

Figure 7-9. Web Users Tab for Panacea Configurations

Figure 7-10. Web Users Tab for Edge Configurations

Note
Make sure you review the information provided in “Before You Begin
Setting Up Web Panels or Users” on page 212 before you perform any of
these functions.

At the Web Users tab, you can

• Add users

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 221

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

• Edit existing user information

• Delete users
• Assign specific panel configurations to available users

Adding Users
1. If necessary, navigate to the Web Users tab, and then click Add. The Add
PWeb User dialog box opens.

Figure 7-11. Add PWeb User Dialog Box

2. Fill in the following fields:

• Username: Add the desired user name here. The name should be no
more than 20 alphanumeric characters and should not include special
characters, spaces, or non-printing characters.

Note
Special characters include the following:
/ \ // \\ , ~ . ! ? { } [ ] | % # @ * & ^ ` = + < > ; : $ ( )

• Password: Add the desired password for the assigned user name here.
The password should be no more than 20 alphanumeric characters and
should not include spaces or non-printing characters. Passwords can
include special characters so as to make the password more secure.
• Confirm: Re-enter the same information as you entered it in the
Password field.
• Idle Timeout: Assign the number of minutes to wait before an assigned
user is logged out when no screen activity is going on. Numeric values
range from 0 (disable timeout) to 43200 minutes (30 days). The default
value is 60 minutes.
• User Group: Assign the appropriate group access for the assigned user.
User groups may also allow limited administration rights as set up by the
system administrator. A user can belong to the Admin (group 1), User
(group 2), or one of 256 user-definable groups.

222 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

For users that also function as system administrators, assign Group 1.

• Panel ID: Enter the panel ID for the specific panel configuration that you
want to assign to this particular user. (Panel IDs and their corresponding
configurations are set up at the Panel Configuration tab. For pushbutton
panels, see Figure 7-4 on page 215. For index panels, see Figure 7-7 on
page 218.)
To enable this selection, click the check box next to “Use a specific
Panel ID for this user.”
3. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the Web Users dialog box. The
name you added appear in the Available Users box.
4. Select the user name you just added, and then select the desired
configurations from the appropriate Assigned Configurations drop-down
list boxes.
5. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main menu.
6. Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the
RouterMapper database.
7. Click Download1 to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled
device firmware. After you download the information from RouterMapper,
the users can access their assigned configurations via the Web Router
application.

Assigning Configurations
1. If you haven’t already done so, set up the web panel configurations via the
Web Panels tab (or add the configurations via the Web Router application).
2. If you haven’t already done so, add the user’s name to the Available Users
list (or add the user’s name via the Web Router application).
3. At the Web Users tab, select the appropriate user name, and then select the
desired configuration from the appropriate Assigned Configurations
drop-down list boxes.
4. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main menu.
5. Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the
RouterMapper database.
6. Click Download1 to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled
device firmware. After you download the information from RouterMapper,
the users can access their assigned configurations via the Web Router
application.

1 The download directs RouterMapper to overwrite any user information that is already resident on

the frame. See “Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users” on page 212 for instructions
on what to do if you want to avoid overwriting existing information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 223

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 7: Adding and Editing Web Router Application Configurations

Editing User Information

1. At the Web Users tab, highlight the user name for which you wish to change
information, and then click Edit. The Edit PWeb User dialog box opens.

Figure 7-12. Edit PWeb User Dialog Box

The Username field is greyed out, which indicates that you cannot change
the user name.
2. Change one or more of the remaining fields as described in “Adding Users”
on page 222. If you change a user’s password, you need to make the same
change in the Confirm field as well.
3. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the Web Users dialog box.
Click OK again to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.
4. Click Download1 to send the changes to the RouterMapper database and to
the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.

Deleting Users
1. Select the user’s name from the Available Users list, and then click Delete.
The selected user is removed from the list.
2. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the RouterMapper main menu.
3. Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the
RouterMapper database, and then click Download1 to send the changes to
the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.

1 The download directs RouterMapper to overwrite any user information that is already resident on

the frame. See “Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users” on page 212 for instructions
on what to do if you want to avoid overwriting existing information.

224 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8
Editing a Logical Database

Overview
The logical database can be described as the overall “picture” of the entire
routing system. A database includes one or more levels, as well as a number of
logical sources and logical destinations. Editing the database might include the
following elements:
• Modifying the Edit Logical Database dialog box’s grid appearance
• Assigning unique names, colors or icons to the levels, logical sources and/or
the logical destinations
• Remapping level inputs
• Adding or deleting logical sources
• Enabling or disabling statusing
• Editing status names
• Reassigning physical inputs (applies only to partitioned Integrator frames)
• Assigning new or additional icons for use in the database and for display in
RouterWorks
Information on defining each property is included in the sections that follow.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 225

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Defining the Levels

A router database can include up to 16 independent router levels. Levels are
numbered from 0 to 15. These level numbers correspond to the level number(s)
that each physical router frame will occupy in the routing system.
• On Integrator, Panacea, and Platinum frames, the level number may be
specified via RouterMapper.
• On Pro-Bel third-party routers controlled via the Edge protocol gateway, the
level number may be specified via RouterMapper. See “Setting Mapping
Values for Pro-Bel Configurations” on page 185 for instructions.
• For more information on configuring the level(s) for another Harris router
type, see the manual that was supplied with the frame.
The number of levels in a database and the physical size of each are determined
by the properties selected when router frames were added. Levels cannot be
added directly to a database.
A unique name and color can be assigned to each level in the database. (The
level color is used to differentiate the level selection buttons and status displays
on RouterWorks control panels.) To define the levels for a database, click
Define Levels at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Level dialog box
opens (see Figure 8-1 on page 227).
At the Edit Levels dialog box, you can enable or disable any level (Levels 0-15)
allowed in the system, regardless of if there is a router on that level.
• The values for the Logical System Size set the maximum values allowed in
the Inputs and Outputs fields for each level.
• The Actual Inputs/Outputs are the number of actual hardware inputs/outputs
you have configured for this level in this database.
• The values that are grayed out are not editable. All other values (Level,
Color, Inputs, and Outputs) are editable.

226 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Logical System Size

Logical size of the system,
regardless of whether or not
a router is attached

Level Name
8-character name
identifies the Level Color
The color that will be displayed
in breakaway buttons and on
RouterWorks displays

Figure 8-1. Edit Levels Dialog Box

Naming a Level
To assign a unique name to a level, type the desired name in the Level Name
edit box. You may enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Changing a Level’s Color

RouterMapper includes a standard RGB color palette from which a unique color
can be selected to represent each level. The level is represented by the selected
color on all control panels based on this database. You can select one of 48
preset colors, or you can use the custom color palette to create custom colors.
To select a preset color, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Define Levels. The Edit Levels
dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 227

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. Click the color box for the appropriate level. The RouterMapper preset
color palette opens.
3. Click the desired color.
4. Click OK. The selected color will now appear in all buttons and LEDs
associated with this level.

Figure 8-2. RouterMapper Preset Color Palette

To create a custom color, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Define Levels. The Edit Levels
dialog box opens.
2. Click the color box for the appropriate level. The RouterMapper preset
color palette opens.
3. Click More Colors.... The palette will expand to include the custom palette.
4. Enter the RGB (red / green / blue) values for the desired color in the
appropriate boxes.
OR
Click the mixing palette until the desired color appears in the sample color
box.
5. Click Add to Custom Colors to save the custom color. The color will now
be added to the preset color palette.

228 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-3. RouterMapper Custom Color Palette

Specifying the Logical Router Size

The logical router size is defined as the number of inputs and outputs seen by
the system and the operator. To specify the logical size of the router, click the
Up or Down arrows in the Logical System Size spin boxes OR type the
appropriate number in each box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 229

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Defining the Sources

The Edit Logical Database dialog box is a tabbed dialog that includes all
functions necessary for configuring the logical database. When this dialog box
is accessed (click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main menu), the
Logical Sources tab is automatically selected when the dialog box appears. Any
of the other tabs (Status Names, Logical Destinations, Categories, Indexes,
Dynamic Routing Fabric, or Icons Management) can be selected by clicking on
the appropriate tab. Information on using those tabs can be found on pages 243
through 291. Only the Logical Sources dialog box is discussed in this section.

Figure 8-4. Edit Logical Sources Dialog Box

Throughout this section, the terms level input and physical input are used. If the
database does not include frames that have been partitioned, then the terms level
input and physical input mean the same thing. If, on the other hand, the database
contains a partitioned frame, then configuration of the database is a bit more
complex. The sample case (databases including only non-Integrator or
non-partitioned Integrator frames) is explained first in pages 230 through 243.
Pages 274 through 276 provide additional information necessary for
configuring partitioned frames.

Overview of the Edit Logical Sources Dialog

The Logical Sources dialog displays the definition information for each logical
source in spreadsheet-type format.
• Each row of the spreadsheet is one complete logical source (e.g., Source 1,
Source 2, etc.).
• Each column represents one distinct property (i.e., Name, Icon, and
Physical Assignment) on each level.

230 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• The colored cells located just to the right of the word “Icon” will vary,
depending on how the levels were defined for the database.

Modifying the Edit Logical Sources Dialog Grid Appearance

RouterMapper will allow you to modify the grid appearance of the Logical
Sources tab. You may
• Hide a level
• Set all levels to the same width
• Set all components to the same width
• Set all components within a chosen level to the same width
• Save a modified grid appearance for future use
• Restore the grid to the last-saved grid appearance.

Hiding a Level
To “hide” (not delete) a level so that you can no longer see it while you are
working:
1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens. Make sure that you have selected the Logical Sources tab.
2. Right-click the level name (at the top of the dialog box) of the level you
wish to hide. A shortcut menu opens (see Figure 8-5).

Figure 8-5. Hiding a Level Dialog Box

3. Highlight Hide [Level Name], and then click <Enter> (or click the left
mouse button). The chosen level column is hidden from view.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 231

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Unhiding a Level
Too “unhide”a previously hidden Level so that you can see it while you are
working:
1. Move the cursor to the line between the hidden level column and the level
column immediately to its right. A horizontal, double-headed arrow
appears.
2. You may “unhide” the hidden level column in one of two ways:
• Press and hold the left mouse button, and then drag your mouse to the
right until the hidden level is at the width you desire.
• Right-click any visible level. A shortcut menu opens. Choose Show All
Levels, and then click <Enter> (or click the left mouse button) (see
Figure 8-6).

Figure 8-6. Unhiding Levels

Set All Levels to the Same Width

To set all Levels to the same width as a Level you select:
1. Right-click the level name of the Level with the width you want to
duplicate. A shortcut menu opens.
2. Highlight Set All Levels to [Level Name]’s Width, and then click <Enter>
(or click the left mouse button) (see Figure 8-7). All Level columns are reset
to the same width as the Level you chose.

Figure 8-7. Set All Levels to [Level Name] Width Dialog Box

232 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Set All Components to the Same Width

To set all of the components in all Levels to the same width as a component you
choose:
1. Right-click the name of the component with the width you want to
duplicate. A shortcut menu opens.
2. Highlight Set All Components to [Level Name’s] Width, and then click
<Enter> (or click the left mouse button) (see Figure 8-8 on page 233). All
component columns are reset to the same width as the component you
chose.

Figure 8-8. Set All Components to the Same Width Dialog Box

Set All Components in the Same Level to the Same Width

To set the components within a chosen Level to equal widths
1. Right-click the name of the component with the width you want to
duplicate. A shortcut menu opens.
2. Highlight Set All Components in [Level Name] to [Level Component’s]
Width, and then click <Enter> (or click the left mouse button) (see
Figure 8-9 on page 233). All component columns within that level is reset
to the same width as the Level component you chose.

Figure 8-9. Set All Components in a Level to the Same Width Dialog
Box

Save a Modified Grid Appearance

This operation will save the changes that you just made to the grid appearance
of the Logical Sources tab.
1. Right-click any level or component name. A shortcut menu opens (see
Figure 8-10 on page 234).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 233

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. Highlight Save Default Grid View, and then click <Enter> (or click the
left mouse button). RouterMapper will save all of your level and component
changes.

Figure 8-10. Save Default Grid View Dialog Box

Restore the Last-Saved Grid Appearance

Note
This operation will only restore your grid back to the last appearance you
saved. It does not have a “history” function.

This operation will restore the last-saved (default) grid appearance of the
Logical Sources tab.
1. Right-click any level or component name. A shortcut menu opens (see
Figure 8-11 on page 234).
2. Highlight Restore Default Grid View, and then click <Enter> (or click the
left mouse button). RouterMapper will restore your last-saved level and
component changes.

Figure 8-11. Restore Last Saved Grid View Dialog Box

234 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Assigning a Source Name

Note
When assigning or editing Source names, keep in mind that certain
characters are “illegal.” These characters are the ~,\, and all
non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters). These
characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the
database.

When the database is first created, each logical source is assigned a generic
name such as “Input 1,” “Input 2,” etc. Each logical source can be renamed to
uniquely identify the source to a user. This is the name that appears on
RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on printed key caps for push button
control panels.
A Source Name can contain any 8 characters.

Note
If a router will include ABA panels, be sure to consider how the choice of
a Source Name will impact category indexing. (Category indexing is the
primary method of selecting sources and destinations on an ABA panel.)
RouterMapper automatically generates categories and indexes when the
Source Names are assigned, and so, it is important to understand the
category indexing process before a Source Name is selected. For a
detailed explanation of category indexing, see page 276.

To assign the Source Name, follow these steps:

1. Highlight the text in the Name box.
2. Over-type the text with the new name.
3. Make any other changes (as described in this section), and then click OK. to
accept the changes.
4. (Platinum1, Panacea2, and Edge3 devices only) If database name
synchronization has been enabled, the following message appears:

1 For
information on enabling database synchronization for Platinum routers, see page 64 and
page 108.
2 For information on enabling database synchronization for Panacea routers, see page 64.
3 For information on enabling database names synchronization for Edge devices, see page 64 and

page 204.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 235

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-12. Database Names Synchronization Message

5. Click the appropriate button to accept or reject the device update.

RouterMapper will accept all changes, and then return to the main menu.

Using Source Names to Automatically Create Categories and Indexes

Note
For a detailed discussion of category indexing on ABA panels, see
page 276.

When a Source or Destination name is entered in the database, RouterMapper

uses the name to automatically create a category. RouterMapper finds the last
space in the Source or Destination name, and then uses all characters to the left
of that space as the category (the space is included in the category name). All
characters to the right of the space will become the index. For example, if a
logical source is named “VTR 1,” RouterMapper will create a category named
“VTR.” Similarly, if a logical source is named “Paint 1,” a category named
“Paint” is created.
If the Source or Destination name does NOT include a space, the entire name is
used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR1” is typed without a
space, the category “VTR1” is created. This may limit the number of sources
that can be accessed from the panel. Use spaces appropriately when naming
sources or destinations.
If any character after the space is not a valid index character (valid characters
are any combination of numbers, 0-9), the entire name is used to create the
category name. For example, if “VTR 10Z” is typed, a category named “VTR
10Z” is created (not a category “VTR” and an index “10Z”).

Overriding the Automatic Category Name Assignment

Any part of a Source Name can be used as the category name. To use characters
other than those preceding the space (as described previously), highlight the
characters that are to be used as the category name, and then right-click with the
mouse. From the pop-up dialog, select Make Into Category.

236 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-13. Make Into Category Pop-Up Dialog Box

Using Type Assist and Error Correct

To simplify the process of assigning Source Names, RouterMapper includes
some Type Assist features. For instance, if “VTR 1” was entered in row one,
and a “V” is typed in row two, RouterMapper will automatically fill-in “VTR 2”
in the box. You can accept the suggested name by pressing <Enter>, or
continue typing a name in the box. If RouterMapper encounters a possible error
in a Source Name, it will notify you and suggest a change (see Figure 8-14).
Remember that a category name must match exactly. “VTR” is not the same as
“Vtr.” Two different ABA buttons would be required for these categories.

Figure 8-14. Error Correct Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 237

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Assigning an Icon
A unique icon can be assigned to each logical source. The icon appears on
RouterWorks control panels.

Figure 8-15. Assigning an Icon

Note
Icons are not used on ABA or push button hardware panels.

To assign an icon, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Sources tab.)
2. Click the Icon box on the RouterMapper Sources tab. A drop-down list box
arrow appears.
3. Click the arrow. The drop-down list containing icons for a number of
common audio/video devices opens.
4. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of icons.
5. Click the desired icon.

Assigning the Level Inputs and Physical Inputs

The Sources tab of the Edit Logical Database dialog box includes one Level
Input column for each level, as shown below. A logical source can be disabled
on one level and enabled on others. For example, if your source is named
“CAMERA,” you will probably want to disable all audio levels for that source.
Likewise, an audio deck source will only require that audio levels be enabled. A
dotted line in the Level Input box indicates that the source is disabled on that
level.
If the database includes partitioned Integrator frames, the Level Input column
may display BOTH the Level Input number and the Physical Input number(s).
In such cases, the level input number is the top number. The bottom numbers
identify the physical input for each component in the partitioned matrix (see
page 274 for more information on databases that include partitioned matrices).

238 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

To assign a Level Input, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Sources tab.)
2. Click the Level Input number. A drop-down list box arrow appears.
3. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the desired
Physical Source
OR
Type the desired Level Input number in the box.

Note
To disable a Level Input on a level, select the dotted line from the
drop-down list box.

Linking Level Inputs

When a Level Input is assigned on a level, RouterMapper will automatically
assign that same Level Input on all higher levels in that row.
To disable this feature, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the spreadsheet.
2. Select Edit Preferences1.
3. Disable the Link Level Inputs check box.

Mapping of Logical Sources to Level Inputs

A logical source need not include connections on all levels in the system. It is
possible to define video-only or audio-only logical sources. Unused level inputs
can then be used to create separate logical sources. In the example below, the
system includes several cameras (video-only inputs). The unused audio inputs
areis used to create separate logical sources for audio-only devices. Because the
audio-only devices are defined as separate logical sources, they are independent
of the cameras and can be selected without having to perform a breakaway
operation.

1 See
page 247 for more information about the Edit Preferences function.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 239

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-16. Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Sources

If a logical source involves multiple levels, the input numbers used by the
device need not be the same on all levels. For example, a VTR may connect to
input 5 on the video level, input 13 on the audio level and input 3 on the time
code level. Once the logical source has been defined, the fact that different
inputs are used on different levels is completely hidden from the user. All
appropriate inputs are selected when the logical source is selected. This feature
allows the various levels to be of different sizes and allows them to be wired
independently of each other.

240 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-17. “Wild-Mapping” of Sources

Sharing Level Inputs

A level input may be assigned to more than one Logical Source on a level. A
common application of this feature is a system configuration in which a user
wishes to associate the same audio signal to multiple video-only sources. For
example, when broadcasting an auto race, you might wish to associate the
announcer’s audio with all cameras. Whenever any camera source is connected
to a video and audio destination, the announcer’s audio will also be selected on
the audio level. By allowing multiple camera logical inputs to share the same
audio signal, level inputs are saved.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 241

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-18. Shared Level Inputs

Statusing Shared Level Inputs

While it is important to show the current status of some levels, it may not be
necessary to show the status of all levels on the control panel. For example, in
the configuration discussed above, it is important to status the video level in
order to indicate which camera is selected, but it is not necessary to status the
audio level since it will always be the announcer’s audio. To eliminate clutter on

242 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

the display, statusing should only be enabled on sources that require it. The
default condition is Statusing Enabled. (Currently, only RouterWorks supports
the Disable Status feature.)
To disable statusing on a shared input, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens. Right-click the Level Input number. A shiortcut menu
opens.
2. Select Status from the popup dialog. Statusing is disabled if the Status line
is not checked. An indicator appears in the Level Input box to show that
statusing is disabled on that level.

Status enabled

Status disabled

Figure 8-19. Disabling Statusing on a Shared Input

Status Names

Note
When assigning or editing Status names, keep in mind that certain
characters are “illegal.” These characters are the ~,\, and all
non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters). These
characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the
database.

The RCP-ABA control panels include four windows that can be used to display
the current status of the router (i.e., which sources and destinations are
connected on each level). The name assigned to the source or destination is

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 243

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

displayed in the dialog box, and a status LED is lit to indicate that the panel is
operating in statusing mode.

Figure 8-20. RCP-ABA Statusing

If a level input1 is assigned to more than one Logical Source on a level, how
does the panel know which Source Name to display in the status dialog box?
For example, consider a router database that includes two logical sources named
“Test 1” and “Test 2.” When Test 1 is selected, you want BARS to be connected
on the video level, and SILENCE on the audio level. When Test 2 is selected,
you want BARS to be connected on the video level, and TONE on the audio
level. The logical source-to-level input mapping would look like Figure 8-21.

Figure 8-21. Status Name Mapping Example

But if both logical sources in our example share the BARS input, how would the
ABA panel know which Source Name to display on the video level? Should it
display “Test 1” or “Test 2?” To solve this problem, the ABA panels display
Status Names in the status windows instead of the Source Names. In our
example, the status windows would look like Figure 8-22.

1 Sharing
level inputs is discussed in “Sharing Level Inputs” starting on page 241.

244 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-22. RCP-ABA Status Name Usage

Editing a Status Name

By default, RouterMapper creates Status Names when the logical sources are
named. “Test 1,” then, would be automatically assigned a Status Name of “Test
1.” But, as we have seen in our example, more complex databases might require
different status names.
To edit a Status Name, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 8-23 on page 245.
3. Click the cell that contains the Status Name.
4. Type the new name in the box. RouterMapper will break the default link
between the Logical Source Name and the Status Name.
From this point on, changes made to the Logical Source Name will not affect
the Status Name.

Figure 8-23. Edit Logical Database Dialog Box, Status Name Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 245

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

To restore a broken link1, follow these steps:

5. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
6. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 8-23.
7. Right-click in the Status Name cell.
8. Select Link Status Name to Logical Source from the pop-up menu. Future
changes to the Logical Source Name is copied to the Status Name.
To display Status Names, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 8-23.
3. Click the Status Names tab at the Edit Logical Database dialog box.
OR
Right-click anywhere on the Logical Sources spreadsheet.
4. Select Show Status Names from the pop-up menu.

Adding Logical Sources

Logical sources can be added in one of two ways:
1. Method 1
• At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens.
• Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as
shown in Figure 8-23 on page 245.
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet, and select Edit Router Size
from the popup dialog. Change the logical router size attributes.
2. Method 2
• At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens.
• Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as
shown in Figure 8-23 on page 245.
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet, and select Add Logical
Sources from the popup dialog.
• Enter the desired number of new sources in the list box.
• Click OK. The sources areis added to the end of the list. (The Insert After
Current Row option is currently not available.)

1 The
broken link is indicated by a broken chain icon in the cell.

246 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Deleting Logical Sources

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 8-23 on page 245.
3. Right-click anywhere within the row that contains the logical source.
4. Select Delete Logical Source from the popup dialog.
5. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

Editing Sources Preferences

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Sources. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box opens, as shown
in Figure 8-23 on page 245.
3. Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
4. Select Edit Preferences from the popup dialog.
5. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 8-24. Edit Logical Source Grid Preferences Dialog Box

• To disable the automatic check for spaces in a Source Name, check Don’t
Check for Spaces.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically add spaces where they appear to
belong, check Add Spaces Automatically.
• To disable the automatic check for matching Category Names (i.e., VTR vs.
Vtr), check Don’t Check Capitalization.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 247

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• To set RouterMapper to automatically correct capitalization without

prompting, check Correct Capitalization Errors Automatically.
• To disable the Type Assist for Physical Index assignments, uncheck Link
Level Inputs (see page 239 for more information).
• To reset all preferences to their original default values, click Reset All
Preferences.
• To configure RouterMapper to warn you when you attempt to duplicate a
physical source, check Treat Duplicate Level Inputs as Warnings.

Defining the Destinations

The Edit Logical Database dialog box is a tabbed dialog that includes all
functions necessary for configuring the logical database. When this dialog box
is accessed by pressing the Destinations button at the RouterMapper main
menu, the Logical Destinations tab is automatically selected when the dialog
box opens. Any of the other tabs (Status Names, Logical Sources, Categories, or
Indexes) can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab. Only the Logical
Destinations dialog box is discussed in this section.

Figure 8-25. Edit Logical Destinations Dialog Box

Throughout this section, the terms level output and physical output are used. If
the database does not include Integrator frames that have been partitioned, then
the terms level output and physical output mean the same thing. If, on the other
hand, the database contains a partitioned Integrator frame, configuration of the
database is more complex.

248 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Overview of Edit Logical Destinations Dialog

The Logical Destinations dialog displays the definition information for each
logical destination in spreadsheet-type format. Each row of the spreadsheet is
one complete logical destination (i.e., Dest 1, Dest 2, etc.). Each column
represents one distinct property (i.e., Name, Icon, and Physical Assignment on
each level). The colored cells located just to the right of the word “Icon” will
vary depending on how the levels were defined for the database.

Assigning a Destination Name

Note
When assigning or editing Destination names, keep in mind that certain
characters are “illegal.” These characters are the ~,\, and all
non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters). These
characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the
database.

When the database is first created, each logical destination is assigned a generic
name such as “Output 1,” “Output 2,” etc. Each logical destination can be
renamed to uniquely identify the destination to a user. This is the name that
appears on RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on printed key caps for
push button control panels.
A Destination Name can contain any 8 characters. To assign the Destination
Name, highlight the text in the Name box and over-type it with the new name. If
the router will include ABA panels, be sure to consider how the choice of a
Destination Name will impact category indexing. (Category indexing is the
primary method of selecting sources and destinations on an ABA panel.)
RouterMapper automatically generates categories and indexes when the
Destination Names are assigned, so it is important to understand the category
indexing process before a Destination Name is selected. For a detailed
explanation of category indexing, see page 276.

Using Destination Names to Automatically Create Categories and Indexes

When a Source or Destination name is entered in the database, RouterMapper
uses the name to automatically create a category and index. RouterMapper finds
the last space in the Source or Destination name, and then uses all characters to
the left of that space as the category (the space is included in the category
name). All characters to the right of the space will become the index. For
example, if a logical destination is named “VTR 1,” RouterMapper will create a
category named “VTR.” Similarly, if a logical destination is named “SAT 1,” a
category named “SAT” is created.
If the Source or Destination name does NOT include a space, the entire name is
used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR1” is typed WITHOUT
a space, the category “VTR1” is created. This may limit the number of
destinations that can be accessed from the panel. Use spaces appropriately when
naming sources or destinations. If any character after the space is not a valid

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 249

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

index character (valid characters are any combination of numbers, 0-9), the
entire name is used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR 10B” is
typed, a category named “VTR 10B” is created (not a category “VTR” and an
index “10B”).

Overriding the Automatic Category Name Assignment

Note
For a detailed discussion of category indexing on the ABA panels, see
page 276.

Any part of a Destination Name can be used as the category name. To use
characters other than those preceding the space (as described previously),
follow these steps:
1. Highlight the characters that are to be used as the category name
2. Right-click with the mouse.
3. From the pop-up dialog, select Make Into Category.

Using Type Assist and Error Correct

To simplify the process of assigning Destination Names, RouterMapper
includes some Type Assist features. For instance, if “VTR 1” was entered in
row one, and a “V” is typed in row two, RouterMapper will automatically fill-in
“VTR 2” in the box. You can accept the suggested name by pressing the
<Enter> key, or continue typing a name in the box. If RouterMapper encounters
a possible error in a Destination Name, it will notify you and suggest a change.
For example, if “VTR 1” was entered in one row, and you type “Vtr 2” in
another row, a dialog box (like that shown below) opens. Remember that a
category name must match exactly. “VTR” is not the same as “Vtr.” Two
different ABA buttons would be required for these categories.

Figure 8-26. Error Correct Dialog Box

250 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Assigning an Icon
A unique icon can be assigned to each logical destination. This icon is displayed
on RouterWorks control panels as shown in Figure 8-27.

Figure 8-27. Assigning an Icon Dialog Box

Note
Icons are not used on ABA or hardware panels.

To assign an icon, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)
2. Click the Icon box. A drop-down list box arrow appears.
3. Click the arrow. The drop-down list containing icons for a number of
common audio/video devices opens.
4. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of icons.
5. Click the desired icon.

Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs

To understand how level outputs, physical outputs and logical destinations work
together within a router, consider the following scenario:
An operator wishes to connect VTR 1 to a destination. He selects the logical
source VTR 1 on the control panel. The control panel requests a switch on
level input one. The router interprets the request as a switch on physical
inputs 1, 2, and 3. When VTR 1 is pressed on the control panel, the router
performs the RGB switch on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 251

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-28. Matrix Partitioning Example

The Destinations tab of the Edit Logical Database dialog box includes one
Level Output column for each level, as shown below. A logical destination can
be disabled on one level and enabled on others. For example, if your destination
is named “MONITOR,” you will probably want to disable all audio levels for
that destination. A line in the Level Output box indicates that the destination is
disabled on that level.
If the database includes partitioned Integrator frames, the Level Output column
may display both the Level Output number and the Physical Output number(s).
In such cases, the level output number is the top number. The bottom numbers
identify the physical output for each component in the partitioned matrix (see
page 274 for more information on databases that include partitioned matrices).

252 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Level output Level output Indicates that MON 1

number for column for destination is disabled
VTR 1 the Video level on the Audio level

Figure 8-29. Logical Destinations Tab

To assign a Level Output, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)

Note
To disable a Level Output on a level, select the dotted line
from the drop-down list box.

2. Click the Level Output number. A drop-down list box arrow appears.
3. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the desired
Physical Destination
OR
Type the desired Level Output number in the box.

Using Type Assist

When a Physical Destination is assigned on a level, RouterMapper will
automatically assign that same Physical Destination on all higher levels in that
row.
To disable this feature, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)
2. Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
3. Select Edit Preferences1, and then disable the Link Level Inputs check
box.

1 See
page 256 for more information about the Edit Preferences function.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 253

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Mapping of Level Outputs

A logical destination need not include connections on all levels in the system. It
is possible to define video-only or audio-only logical destinations. Unused
outputs can then be used to create separate logical destinations. In the example
below, the system includes a pair of router outputs that feed a Still Store
(video-only). The unused audio outputs are used to create separate logical
destinations for audio-only devices such as audio monitoring speakers. Because
the audio monitoring speakers are defined as separate logical destinations, they
are independent of the Still Stores and can be selected without having to
perform a breakaway operation. The use of video-only and audio-only
destinations helps maximize use of router outputs.

Figure 8-30. Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Destination

If a logical destination involves multiple levels, the output numbers used by the
device need not be the same on all levels. For example, a VTR may connect to
output 5 on the video level, output 13 on the audio level and output 3 on the
time code level. Once the logical destination has been defined, the fact that
different outputs are used on different levels is completely hidden from the user.
All appropriate outputs are selected when the logical destination is selected.
This feature allows the various levels to be of different sizes and allows them to
be wired independently of each other.

254 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-31. “Wild-Mapping” of Logical Destinations

Adding Logical Destinations

Logical destinations can be added in either of two ways:
1. Method 1
• At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
• Select Edit Router Size from the popup dialog.
• Change the Logical Router Size attributes.
2. Method 2
• At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
• Select Add Logical Destinations from the popup dialog.
• Enter the desired number of new destinations in the list box.
• Click OK.
• The destinations are added to the end of the list. (The Insert After Current
Row option is currently not available.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 255

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Deleting Logical Destinations

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)
2. Right-click anywhere within the row that contains the logical destination.
3. Select Delete Logical Destination from the shortcut menu dialog. You are
prompted to confirm the deletion.

Editing Destination Grid Preferences

1. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Destinations. The Edit Logical
Database dialog box opens. (If necessary, click the Logical Destinations
tab.)
2. Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet, and then select Edit Preferences
from the menu.
3. The Edit Logical Destination Grid Preferences dialog box opens (see
Figure 8-32 on page 256).

Figure 8-32. Edit Logical Destination Grid Preferences Dialog Box

• To disable the automatic check for spaces in a Destination Name, check

Don’t Check for Spaces.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically add spaces where they appear to
belong, check Add Spaces Automatically.
• To disable the automatic check for matching Category Names (i.e., VTR
vs. Vtr), check Don’t Check Capitalization.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically correct capitalization without
prompting, check Correct Capitalization Errors Automatically.

256 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• To disable the Type Assist for Physical Index assignments, uncheck Link
Level Inputs.
• To reset all preferences to their original default values, click Reset All
Preferences.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 257

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Setting Up CENTRIO Virtual Destinations

Note
This section explains how to set up virtual destinations through
RouterMapper for use with your CENTRIO in conjunction with other
remote control devices. It does not explain how to set up PIPs on your
CENTRIO device. See the CENTRIO Multiviewer Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Guide for more information about using the
CENTRIO on-screen application. See the pertinent control device manual
for information about using the control device to display CENTRIO
outputs.

RouterMapper allows you to create destinations that represent actual PIPs or use
existing destinations and have the PIPs follow them. To do this you must first
set up the CENTRIO for your Platinum router database, as described in “Adding
CENTRIO Matrices” on page 92.

Creating Destinations Representing Actual PIPs

1. Set up the CENTRIO for your Platinum router database (see page 92).
2. At the RouterMapper main menu screen, click Sources.
The Logical Sources tab appears.
3. Make sure the CENTRIO video matrix (CENTRIO V) and the virtual
matrix (CENTRIO PIPs) are mapped to the same sources, as shown in
Figure 8-33.

Figure 8-33. Verifying CENTRIO Source Mapping

258 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

4. Select the Logical Destinations tab, and then scroll down to the PIP names.
They start at the same point as their corresponding destination offset (see
Figure 8-34).

Destination Offset
indicator

CENTRIO PIP
destinations;
There are 32 PIP
destinations per
CENTRIO device

Figure 8-34. CENTRIO Logical Destinations Mapping

5. Edit the PIP destinations as follows:

• Assign a different name1: see page 249
• Assign an icon to a PIP: see page 251
• Change the output level: see page 251
• Delete a destination: page 256
6. If necessary, check that the appropriate destination names appear (or are
assigned) to the desired control device.

Setting Up PIPs to Follow Destinations

1. If necessary, set up the CENTRIO for your Platinum router database, as
described in “Adding CENTRIO Matrices” on page 92.
2. At the RouterMapper main menu screen, highlight the appropriate Platinum
entry, and then click Define Levels. The Edit Levels dialog box appears.
3. In the Logical System Size Destinations spin box, change the number of
destinations to whatever (smaller) number of destinations you want the PIPs
to follow.

1 This
is the name that appears on RouterWorks, on ABA and IDe control panels, and on printed
key caps for push button control panels.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 259

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-35. Changing Level Destinations

4. Click OK to return to the main menu.

5. Highlight the appropriate Platinum entry, and then click Edit. The
Configured Matrices dialog box appears.
6. Highlight the CENTRIO PIPs entry, and then click Advanced. The Matrix
Partition dialog box appears.

Figure 8-36. Changing the PIP Offset Entry

7. Change the Output Offset entry to 0.

8. Click OK. An information message appears. Click OK again to return to
the main menu.
9. Click Destinations. The Logical Destinations tab appears.

260 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-37. PIPs Follow Destinations

Destinations are now mapped to Matrix 1 and to the CENTRIO PIP matrix.
From now on, when you switch a destination, you will not only switch the
output destination but also the source displayed on the CENTRIO PIP. This
also changes the PIP 1 parameter available on a Navigator NUCLEUS
device.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 261

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

A dynamic routing thread (DRT) is a physical or logical connection between
two or more frames that allows the sources from one frame (the upstream
frame) to be available to another frame or frames (the downstream frame[s]).

Upstream

Frame 1
“Upstream” to Frame 2 DRT makes Frame 1
and Frame 3 sources available to
Frame 2

DRT makes Frame 1

Frame 2 and Frame 2 sources
“Upstream” to Frame 3 available to Frame 3
“Downstream” to Frame 1
Downstream

Frame 3
“Downstream” to Frame 1
and Frame 2

Figure 8-38. “Upstream” and “Downstream” Frames

Dynamic routing threads help you expand the size of your system, make
resources available to several users at the same time, or to restrict remote user
access to available sources.
The dynamic routing fabric management process consists of
• Adding dynamic routing threads
• Editing dynamic routing threads when necessary
• Editing remote access lists when necessary
• Deleting dynamic routing threads when necessary
• Optimizing dynamic routing threads and creating a dynamic routing
thread database file (RouterMapper performs this function automatically)

262 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• Downloading dynamic routing thread information to frames.

Adding Dynamic Routing Threads

Note
You cannot edit or delete dynamic routing threads in a combiner system;
however, you can edit dynamic routing thread remote accessible sources
in a combiner system.

The number of dynamic routing threads you may add is limited by the number
of outputs available on the downstream frames.
• You may divide all of your upstream outputs equally between your
downstream frames.
• You may send some of your upstream outputs to a single downstream
frame.
• You may divide some of your upstream outputs between your
downstream frames, with one downstream frame receiving more dynamic
routing threads than the other downstream frame.
Figure 8-39 on page 263 shows examples of different ways in which you can
add dynamic routing threads.

Figure 8-39. Dynamic Routing Thread Distribution Examples

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 263

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

To add dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:

1. Set up and partition your router frames. (These steps are described in
“Matrix Partitioning” starting on page 311.)
2. Click Dynamic Routing Threads at the RouterMapper main menu (or
choose Edit > Dynamic routing threads from the menu bar). The Edit
Logical Database dialog box opens (see Figure 8-40 on page 264).

Shows total number of

dynamic routing threads

Figure 8-40. Edit Logical Database Dialog Box, Dynamic Routing

Threads Tab

3. Click Add. The Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box opens (see
Figure 8-41).

“Upstream”
frame selections

“Downstream”
frame selections

Figure 8-41. Add Dynamic Routing Threads Dialog Box

264 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

4. Make your selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows.

Upstream
Frame ID: Choose the upstream frame.
Level: Choose the upstream level.
Starting Level Output: Choose the first upstream source.
Downstream
Frame ID: Choose the downstream frame.
Level: RouterMapper will automatically fill in the level for you.
Starting Level Input: Choose the first downstream destination.
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of dynamic
routing thread connections you want to add.

Note
Dynamic routing threads must be on the same level. This
RouterMapper version does not support dynamic routing
threads that span levels.

5. Click OK. The Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box will close.
RouterMapper will create dynamic routing threads based on information
entered in the Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog boxes. The dynamic
routing threads appear in the dynamic routing threads list control of the
Dynamic Routing Threads tab on the Edit Logical Database dialog box (see
Figure 8-42 on page 266).

Note
All dynamic routing thread entries are highlighted when they first appear
in the Edit Logical Database dialog box. To deselect them, click the left or
right mouse button.

Notice that RouterMapper sequentially numbers the level outputs and level
inputs, based on your beginning selection and the number of dynamic
routing thread connections you add.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 265

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Click mouse button

once to deselect

Figure 8-42. Dynamic Routing Thread List, After Dynamic Routing

Threads Have Been Added

6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Editing Dynamic Routing Threads

You may edit dynamic routing thread entries from the Dynamic Routing
Threads tab on the Edit Logical Database dialog box.

Note
RouterMapper does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Edit
function on a connection within a combiner system.

1. Choose Dynamic Routing Threads at the RouterMapper main menu. The

Edit Logical Database dialog box opens; all existing dynamic routing thread
connections are displayed.
2. Double-click the dynamic routing thread connection you want to edit (or
highlight the dynamic routing thread connection, and then click Edit).
3. The Edit Dynamic Routing Thread dialog box opens. All currently-selected
options will fill the drop-down boxes.

266 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-43. Editing Dynamic Routing Threads

4. Make any editing changes in the drop-down list boxes as necessary. You do
not have to re-enter items that will not change:
Upstream
Frame ID: Upstream frame
Level: Upstream level
Starting Level Output: First upstream source
Downstream
Frame ID: Downstream frame
Level: Downstream level
Starting Level Input: First downstream destination
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of dynamic
routing thread connections you want to add.

Note
Dynamic routing threads must be on the same level. This
version of RouterMapper does not support dynamic routing
threads that span levels.

5. Click OK. The Edit Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box will close and
you will return to the Edit Logical Database dialog box. All of the
newly-edited dynamic routing thread connections are highlighted.
6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 267

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Editing Remote Access Lists

RouterMapper allows you to limit one or more downstream frame’s access to
upstream sources through the use of the remote access list editing function.
The example in Figure 8-44 shows how remote access lists can be used to
restrict frame 3 from accessing frame 1’s sources, while still allowing frame 2 to
access all of frame 1’s sources and frame 3 to access frame 2’s sources.
Upstream

Frame 1 DRT
(Limits to Frame 3 access
Frame 1 of Frame 1 sources set via
DRT remote access lists)

Unlimited Limited
remote remote
Frame 2 access access Frame 2
Can access all Still has access to
Frame 1 sources DRT all Frame 1 sources DRT
Downstream

Set access limits

Frame 3 Frame 3
Can access all Frame Still has access to all
1 and Frame 2 sources Frame 2 sources but only
limited access to Frame 1
sources

Figure 8-44. Limiting Remote Access Example

1. Choose Dynamic Routing Threads at the RouterMapper main menu. The

Edit Logical Database dialog box opens and all existing dynamic routing
thread connections are displayed.
2. Highlight the dynamic routing thread connection you want to edit, and then
click Access List. The Edit Remote Access List dialog box opens.

268 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-45. Edit Remote Access List Dialog Box

This dialog lists all dynamic routing thread connections for the upstream frame
and for the downstream frame to which it is physically connected.
• By default, each connection appears twice: once in the Inputs Frame
section, and once in the Inputs Accessible section.
• The source(s) you want the others to access is selected from the Inputs
Frame list.
• The Thread Request Wait time is the time required (in seconds) for waiting
on a thread connection before timing out.
The function buttons located between the two lists are used to select the specific
configuration.
• The Assign button allows you to assign a source from the Inputs Frame list
to the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
• The Delete button allows you to delete an assigned source from the Inputs
Accessible remote access list.
• The Assign All button allows you to assign all sources from the Inputs
Frame list to the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
• The Delete All button allows you to delete all assigned sources from the
Inputs Accessible remote access list.
To assign a specific source to the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID for the
dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is physically
connected.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 269

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. Click Delete All to clear the assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible
remote access list.
3. Highlight the specific source that you want to assign to the remote access
list.
4. Click Assign. The source name appears in the Inputs Accessible list.
5. Click OK when you are finished assigning specific sources. You will return
to the Edit Logical Database dialog box.
6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To assign all sources to the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID for the
dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is physically
connected.
2. Click Assign All to add the assigned sources to the Inputs Accessible
remote access list.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Logical Database dialog box.
4. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete a specific source from the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID for the
dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is physically
connected.
2. Highlight the specific source that you want to delete from the remote access
list.
3. Click Delete. The source name is removed from the Inputs Accessible list.
4. Click OK when you are finished deleting specific sources. You will return
to the Edit Logical Database dialog box.
5. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all sources from the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID for the
dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is physically
connected.
2. Click Delete All to clear the assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible
remote access list.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Logical Database dialog box.
4. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

270 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads

You may delete your dynamic routing thread entries from the Edit Logical
Database dialog box.

Note
RouterMapper does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread
Delete function on a connection within a combiner system.

To delete one dynamic routing thread entry, follow these steps:

1. Highlight the dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
3. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message:

Figure 8-46. Deleting One Dynamic Routing Thread Connection

4. Click Yes. The selected dynamic routing thread connection is removed from
the list.
5. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete several dynamic routing thread entries not adjacent to one
another, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the first dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted.
2. Hold down the <Ctrl> key on the keyboard, and then select the next
dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted. Only the chosen dynamic
routing thread entries are highlighted.
3. Click Delete. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message (see
Figure 8-47):

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 271

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-47. Deleting Several Non-Adjacent Dynamic Routing Thread

Connections

4. Click Yes. All highlighted dynamic routing thread connections are removed
from the list.
5. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all dynamic routing thread entries or several dynamic routing
thread entries adjacent to one another, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the first dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted.
2. Hold down the <Shift> key on the keyboard, and then select the last
dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted. All dynamic routing thread
entries between the first chosen and the last chosen are highlighted.
3. Click Delete. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message (see
Figure 8-48):

Figure 8-48. Deleting All Dynamic Routing Thread Connections

4. Click Yes. All dynamic routing thread connections are removed from the
list.
5. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

272 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads

RouterMapper automatically performs dynamic routing thread optimization for
you after you have performed an Add, Delete, Edit, or Inputs Access function at
the Edit Logical Database dialog box. When you click Done to return to the
main menu, RouterMapper creates and optimizes a dynamic routing thread
connection database, then generates a dynamic routing fabric database file
(*.DRF) in the database subdirectory.
This dynamic routing fabric database file is used for the Dynamic Routing
Fabric Monitoring software application. Contact your dealer or our Sales
Department for a copy of this application.

Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information

After dynamic routing threads have been created and edited, they must be
downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can take effect.

Note
REMEMBER! Download any device in the Device List that does not
display an “OK” status.

To download dynamic routing thread information, follow these steps:

1. Highlight the device entry.
2. Click Download. Multiple devices may be selected using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple devices).
3. The About to Download dialog box opens.
• Choose the Selected Device radio button to download dynamic routing
thread information for the highlighted device only.
• Choose the Changed Device radio button to download dynamic routing
thread information for devices that have information that changed since
the last download.
• Choose the All Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread
information for all devices in the database.
4. Click OK. The Downloading Devices box opens.
• If the download process is completed without errors, a summary dialog
box opens. This dialog box will list the number of devices that were
successfully downloaded. The Device List is updated to reflect the
current status of the devices (the devices are marked “OK”).
• If there are errors during the download process, a Download Failures
dialog box opens. This dialog box will list the error or errors encountered
for each device. After all errors are corrected, download the devices
again.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 273

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Editing a Database that Includes Partitioned

Matrices
If the database includes partitioned Integrator frames, the Level Input column
may display both the Level Input number and the Physical Input number(s) as
shown below. In such cases, the level input number is the top number. The
bottom numbers identify the physical input for each component in the
partitioned matrix.

Bottom numbers are physical inputs

assigned to the Level Input

In this example, Level Input 1 is as-

signed to Physical Input 1 for the
red component, Physical Input 2
for the green component, and
This matrix is partitioned Physical Input 3 for the blue
into 3 components component

Top number is
Level Input

Figure 8-49. Identifying Level and Physical Inputs

Procedures for assigning a level input/output are identical to those for

non-partitioned frames. See pages 238 (sources) and 251 (destinations) for more
information.
Physical inputs/outputs can only be assigned if the matrix partitioning type is
“Wild.” Physical inputs and outputs are automatically assigned to RGB and
Contiguous matrices and cannot be changed. For those matrices, the
assignments are displayed, but are “read-only.”
If Wild partitioning has been selected for a frame, the physical assignments can
be changed by typing the number into the field, or by clicking on the arrow
located to the right of the drop-down list box. Any physical input can be
assigned to any level input on any component (likewise for outputs).

274 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Note
Physical inputs are automatically assigned for matrices using RGB or
contiguous partitioning. These physical inputs cannot be changed unless
the partitioning type is changed to “wild-mapping.” Wild-mapping
partitioning must be selected for a matrix if the physical inputs are to be
changed.

To assign a Physical Input (partitioned matrices only), follow these steps:

1. Click the component’s physical input number. A drop-down list box arrow
appears.
2. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the desired input
number.
OR
Type the desired physical input number in the box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 275

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing

As mentioned previously, category indexing is the primary method of selecting
sources and destinations on an RCP-ABA panel. With category indexing, both a
category (i.e., VTR, CAM, MIC, etc.) and an index (i.e., 21, 2, 36, etc.) are
required to identify a device. The first click of a button selects the category; the
second click selects the index (see Figure 8-50).

Destination Source
Status
F1 VTR 2 SAT 5 CAM 1 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select Select Select Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear
F2 Lock Clear Clear Clear 9 0
Dest Dest Dest Dest D E F 6 7 8 All

1 2
Press the Press the
CATEGORY SELECT key INDEX SELECT key

The category “SAT” The index “5”

is selected is selected

Figure 8-50. Selecting Sources and Destinations via Category Indexing

(ABA Panels Only)

This method of category indexing allows many sources to be accessed from a

single panel without the need for hundreds of selection buttons. A Broadcast
Center, for example, could contain twenty monitors, each of which could be
accessed using the one button labeled “MON” followed by the appropriate
index number. Similarly, each of twenty cameras could be selected using only
one button labeled “CAM” followed by the appropriate index number. Up to 16
categories can be used with a 1RU ABA panel (48 categories on a 2RU panel).
For that reason, the use of generic category names (i.e., MON, CAM, Edit, SAT,
etc.) is generally recommended to minimize the number of categories required.
RouterMapper simplifies the creation of categories by automatically creating an
appropriate category name when the Source or Destination name is entered in
the database. In most cases, the assigned category name will not require editing.
However, for more complex databases, a powerful interface for managing and
editing categories is included in the RouterMapper application (on the
Categories tab).
To access the Categories tab of the Edit Logical Database dialog, follow
these steps:
1. Click either the Sources or Destinations button at the RouterMapper main
menu.
2. Select the Categories tab (see Figure 8-51).

276 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-51. Edit Logical Database Dialog Box, Categories Tab

The Categories list box contains a list of all category names in the database. To
the right of the list box are function buttons for managing the category list. The
Sources Affected and Destinations Affected list boxes contain lists of all logical
sources and destinations that use the selected category.
The Errors group includes two list boxes: one for sources and one for
destinations. If any sources or destinations in the router database can not be
accessed via the current set of categories and indexes, those sources and
destinations are displayed in the Errors boxes.

Adding a New Category

1. Click New to the right of the category list box. The new category is added to
the list in alphabetical order.
2. Overtype the default text with the desired category name. REMEMBER!
Only 16 categories can be used with a 1RU ABA panel (48 categories on a
2RU panel). For that reason, we recommend the use of generic category
names (e.g., MON, CAM, Edit, SAT, etc.) to minimize the number of
categories required.

Viewing Sources Affected by a Category

To view a list of the sources affected by a particular category, click the
category name. The Sources Affected list box will display all the logical sources
associated with that category.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 277

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-52. Viewing Sources Affected by a Category

Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category

To view a list of the destinations affected by a particular category, click the
category name. The Destinations Affected list box will display all the logical
destinations associated with that category.

Figure 8-53. Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category

278 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Deleting a Category
1. Click the category name in the category list box. Select multiple categories
by holding down either <Shift> or <Ctrl> while clicking on the names.
2. When all desired categories are selected, click Delete.
3. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message (see Figure 8-54):

Figure 8-54. Deleting a Category

4. Click Yes to remove all selected categories from the list.

5. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To completely clear the category list:
1. Click Delete All. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
2. Click Yes to remove all selected categories from the list.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all categories that are not assigned to logical sources or
destinations:
1. Click Delete Unused. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
2. Click Yes to remove all categories from the list.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Generating Category Names

To generate categories for all logical sources and destinations according to
the rules described in “Assigning a Source Name” on page 235, click Generate.

Changing a Category Name

1. Double-click the name in the category list box to produce the edit box.
2. Overtype the highlighted text with the new name.

Correcting Source Errors

Note
For quick access to the functions described, right-click anywhere within
the Categories list box, and then select the function from the pop-up
menu.

1. Double-click the error entry in the Errors-Sources drop-down list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 279

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. The Add New Category/Index dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 8-55.
The dialog box will offer a default category that will allow access to the
logical source.
3. Click OK to accept the default category or type a new category name in the
New Category edit box. REMEMBER: Only 16 categories can be used
with a 1RU ABA panel (48 on a 2RU panel). Using generic category names
(i.e., SAT, CAM, Edit, etc.) will minimize the number of categories
required.

Figure 8-55. Correcting Source Errors

Correcting Destination Errors

Note
For quick access to the functions described, right-click anywhere within
the Categories list box, then select the function from the pop-up menu.

1. Double-click the error entry in the Destinations Errors drop-down list box.
2. The Add New Category/Index dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 8-55.
The dialog box will offer a default category that will allow access to the
logical source.
3. Click OK to accept the default category or type a new category name in the
New Category edit box. REMEMBER: Only 16 categories can be used
with a 1RU ABA panel (48 on a 2RU panel). Using generic category names
(i.e., SAT, CAM, Edit, etc.) will minimize the number of categories
required.

280 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-56. Correcting Destination Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 281

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Creating and Managing Indexes

To access the Indexes tab of the Edit Logical Database dialog, click Sources
or Destinations at the RouterMapper main menu. Select the Indexes tab.

Figure 8-57. Edit Logical Database Dialog Box, Indexes Tab

The Indexes list box contains a list of all index names in the database. To the
right of the box are function buttons for managing the index list.
The Errors group includes two list boxes, one for sources and one for
destinations. If any sources or destinations in the router database can not be
accessed via the current set of categories and indexes, those sources and
destinations are displayed in the Errors boxes.

282 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Adding a New Index

Note
The total number of characters on a selection key (Category and Index
combined) cannot exceed 8 characters.

1. Click New to the right of the indexes list box.

2. The new index is added to the bottom of the list.
3. Overtype the default text with the desired index name.

Deleting an Index
To delete an index, follow these steps:
1. Click the index name in the indexes list box. Multiple indexes can be
selected by holding down either the <Shift> or the <Ctrl> key while
clicking on the names.
2. When all desired indexes are selected, click Delete.
3. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message (see Figure 8-58):

Figure 8-58. Deleting an Index

4. Click Yes. All selected indexes are removed from the list.
5. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To completely clear the index list:
1. Click Delete All. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
2. Click Yes. All indexes are removed from the list.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Changing an Index Name

To change an index name, follow these steps:
1. Click the name in the index list box once, pause briefly, and then click it a
second time to produce the edit box.
2. Overtype the highlighted text with the new name.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 283

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Correcting Source Errors

Note
For quick access to the functions described, right-click anywhere within
the Categories list box, then select the function from the pop-up menu.

1. Double-click the error entry in the Sources Errors drop-down list box.
2. The Add New Category/Index dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 8-55.
The dialog box will display a default category that will allow access to the
logical source.

Figure 8-59. Correcting Source Errors

3. Type a new index name in the New Index edit box.

4. Click OK.

284 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Correcting Destination Errors

Note
For quick access to other functions, right-click anywhere within the
Indexes list box, then select the function from the pop-up menu.

To correct destination errors, follow these steps:

1. Double-click the error entry in the Destinations Errors drop-down list box.
2. The Add New Category/Index dialog box opens, as shown below. The
dialog box will offer a default category that will allow access to the logical
destination.
3. Type a new index name in the New Index edit box.
4. Click OK.

Figure 8-60. Correcting Destination Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 285

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Managing Custom Icons

You can add and delete unique icons assigned to logical sources and
destinations via the Icons Management tab. These icons are displayed on the
Icon box on the Logical Sources and Logical Destinations tabs, and
RouterWorks control panels. You can add new icons, remove icons, or restore
the default icons that come with RouterMapper.

Figure 8-61. Edit Logical Database Dialog Box, Icons Management Tab

The Available Icons list box displays a thumbnail view of each one of the icons
currently used in a database. These are the icons that appear in the icon list
boxes in the Logical Sources/Logical Destinations tabs and RouterWorks
control panels.
When you click on one or more icons in the Available Icons list box, any
sources and destinations that would be affected by any change in the selected
icon(s) are listed:
• Any sources are listed in the Affected Sources list box.
• Any destinations are listed in the Affected Destinations list box.

Adding Icons
The Add button brings up a dialog that allows you to extract a single icon from
any icon file or executable file (*.ico, *.dll, or *.exe). You can use the dialog to
select a file to extract the icon from, then to select the icon you want from
within the file.

286 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Note
This option allows you to choose one icon at a time. To select multiple
icons, use the Add Multiple option.

To add a custom icon, follow these steps:

1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-61 on page 286).
3. Click Add. The Change Icon dialog box (Figure 8-62) opens.
The file name and path for Microsoft® Windows standard icons are
highlighted in the File Name box and thumbnail views of all of these
standard icons are displayed in the Current Icon box.

Figure 8-62. Change Icon Dialog Box

• If the icon you want is displayed:

a. Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to add.
b. Click OK. The selected icon’s thumbnail appears in the Available Icons
list box.
• If the icon you want is not displayed:
a. Click Browse.... The Change Icon browse box opens.
b. Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the file
you want to display.
c. Highlight the name of the file you want, and then click Open. A
thumbnail view of the icon file you selected appears in the Change Icon
browse box (Figure 8-63).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 287

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

d. Click OK. The selected icon’s thumbnail appears in the Available Icons
list box.

Figure 8-63. Change Icon Browse Box with Selected Icon Displayed

To add multiple custom icons, follow these steps:

1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-61 on page 286).
3. Click Add Multiple. The Add Multiple Open dialog box (Figure 8-64)
opens.

288 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-64. Add Multiple Open Dialog Box

4. Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the files you
want to add.
5. Highlight the names of the files you want, and then click Open. (Multiple
files may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques. Hold
down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple files). The selected
icons’ thumbnails appears in the Available Icons list box.

Importing Icons
Importing Icons from Another Database

Note
RouterMapper databases can be identified via their “ICS” file name
extension.

To import all of the icons from a different RouterMapper database, follow these
steps:
1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Icons Management tab.
3. Click Import. The Open Leitch Icon List dialog box opens (Figure 8-65).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 289

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-65. Open Leitch Icon List Dialog Box

• If the database you want to import from is in the dialog box display:
• Select it.
• Click Open.
• If the database you want to import from is not in the dialog box display:
• Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the
database you want to import.
• Select it.
• Click Open.
The icons from the selected database are appended to the end of the existing
icon display in the Available Icons list box.

Importing Individual Icons

This option differs from adding a custom icon in that it allows you to import
JPG, GIF, or BMP files as icons.
1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Icons Management tab.
3. Click Import Image. The Import Icon dialog box opens (Figure 8-66).

290 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-66. Importing Individual Icons

You can select these different bitmap image types:

• BMP
• GIF
• JPG
If necessary, use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of
the files you want to add.
4. Highlight the names of the files you want, and then click Open. (Multiple
files may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques. Hold
down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple files). The selected
images are appended to the end of the existing icon display in the Available
Icons list box.

Restoring Default Icons

To restore the default list of icons, follow these steps:
1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-61 on page 286).
3. Click Reset. RouterMapper will restore the default icons

Removing Icons
To remove selected icons, follow these steps:
1. Click Sources at the RouterMapper main menu. The Edit Logical Database
dialog box opens.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-61 on page 286).
3. Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to remove.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 291

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

4. Click Remove. The selected icon is removed from the Available Icons list
box.
To remove all icons, click Remove All. Any icons listed in the Available Icons
list box are removed.

292 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9
Editing a Frame Definition

Overview
This chapter covers the various facets involved in editing a frame definition via
RouterMapper, as well as editing the various tab settings that make up a router
matrix.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Editing a Frame’s Configuration” on page 294
• “Editing a Router Frame” on page 294
• “Editing the Router Matrix” on page 297

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 293

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Editing a Frame’s Configuration

1. Select (or double-click the left mouse button on) the frame name from the
device list at the RouterMapper main menu.
2. Click Edit. The Edit Frame dialog box opens. (See Figure 9-1 on page 294,
Figure 9-2 on page 295, and Figure 9-3 on page 295 for pictures of the
various Edit Frame dialog box variations that appear in RouterMapper.)
The Edit Frame dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that includes all functions
necessary for configuring a router frame. Any of the tabs [Router Frame,
Configured Matrices, Partitioning, Detected Matrices, Detected Cards or
Control Card(s)] can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab. Information
on using those tabs can be found in pages 294 through 370.

Editing a Router Frame

Note
For Platinum frames, this type of information is edited from the
Configured Matrices tab (see page 298).

The type and size of the matrices in a frame can be edited from the Edit Router
Frame tab.

Figure 9-1. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Router Frame Tab Selected

294 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-2. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Router Frame Tab Selected
(Integrator Gold Only)

Figure 9-3. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Router Frame Tab Selected
(Panacea Only)

Note
Figure 9-3 shows tabs for web panels and web users. These tabs appear
only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced resource card and you
have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. For more information
about the web router application, see Chapter 7.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 295

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To change the matrix type, follow these steps:

1. Select the new matrix type from the drop-down list box. Valid options are
listed below. (Max Matrix Size options change as the Matrix Type is
changes.)
• AES EBU1
• Analog mono audio
• Analog stereo audio1
• Analog video
• High Definition (HD)
• Stereo audio1
• SDI
• Data router1
• Integrator Gold multirate digital1 2
2. Change the size of each matrix in the frame by clicking on the desired
matrix size, and then clicking Add.
To increase the size of a matrix, you may have to delete one or more matrices, as
you cannot select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.

Note
By default, the “Stuffed As” size is the same as the selected Max Matrix
Size. In some cases, however, you may wish to override the default in
order to save slots for future use. For example, when adding a 64×64
matrix, two slots would be left empty by stuffing the matrix as a 32×32.

1 Thismatrix type is not available for Panacea products.

2 This
option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only. Its Configured Matrices dialog
box is different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 133 for more information.

296 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To delete a matrix from the frame, follow these steps:

1. Click the matrix in the frame.
2. Click Delete. (An outline appears around the matrix when it is selected.)
(Panacea frames only) To indicate an installed submodule, include these
steps:
1. If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check
box in the Module Options. The matrix types with programmable I/O
submodule are listed in Table 4-5 on page 152.
2. Click Hardware… to change the I/O hardware module default settings of a
selected matrix in the empty frame.
3. The I/O Hardware Module tab opens. See “I/O Hardware Module Tab
(Panacea Frames Only)” on page 374 for more information about this
selection.

Editing the Router Matrix

Configured Matrices Tab
The Frame ID, Level, First Source, First Destination and Signal Type can be
changed from the Configured Matrices tab. In addition, matrix partitioning can
be set up through the Configured Matrices tab.
• See page 298 — page 304 for information about the Configured Matrices
tab for Platinum routers.
• See page 304 for information about the Configured Matrices tab for
Integrator routers.
• See page 305 — page 307 for information about the Configured Matrices
tab for Integrator data routers.
• See page 307 — page 309 for information about the Configured Matrices
tab for Integrator Gold routers.
• See page 310 — page 311 for information about the Configured Matrices
tab for Panacea routers.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 297

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Configured Matrices Tab (Platinum Routers)

Figure 9-4. Configured Matrices Tab (Platinum)

At the Configured Matrices tab, you can add a new matrix, or delete or
configure an existing matrix for a Platinum frame. Matrix information (name,
inputs, outputs, format, partition) is displayed in the matrix list control area.
Corresponding input and output modules are displayed on the right side of the
dialog box. The Output column and the Input column are set up with separate
list box controls. The matrix’s module information is coded as described in
Table 9-1.

Table 9-1. Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the
selected matrix
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because
they are assigned to another matrix
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be assigned
to any matrix
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to
(or unassigned from) the selected matrix

298 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

There are two icons that show module information, as shown in Table 9-2.
RouterMapper may display both icons for a particular slot; see Figure 9-4 on
page 298 for an example.

Table 9-2. Matrix Informational Icons

Icon Description
RouterMapper has detected a module in this slot; you
can identify its parameters via the Detected Matrices
Tab

RouterMapper has determined that the module detected

in this slot is different from what the slot was
configured to be

Note
If you have several editing functions to perform, you may
want to do them all at once via the Advanced function (see
page 300).

• To select items from the Input or Output column, use standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys) to select
multiple modules on each, or both, lists. The selected items appear green
until you deselect them. Unselecting will remove the green color
information from the slot, but will not remove the slot from the assigned
matrix.
• To deselect items from the Input or Output column, highlight the
appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and then select Unselect from the
pop-up menu. Unselecting will remove the green color information from the
slot, but will not remove the slot from the assigned matrix.
• To deselect multiple items at once, right-click the mouse, and then select
Unselect All from the pop-up menu. Unselecting will remove the green
color information from the slot, but will not remove the slot from the
assigned matrix.

Note
Input modules can be assigned to more than one matrix at a
time. Output modules cannot be assigned to more than one
matrix.

• To assign a module to a different matrix, highlight the matrix you want to

assign a module to, highlight the available slot (displayed as light grey),
right click the mouse, and then select Assign to <matrix name>. The
assigned slot will display green color information until you unselect it.
• To remove a module from a matrix, highlight the slot you want to remove
from the matrix, right click the mouse, and then select Unassign from

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 299

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

<matrix name>. The removed slot will display green color information until
you unselect it.
• To change the matrix name, click the name box of the appropriate matrix,
and then type in a new name. (You may also click the right mouse button to
copy the existing name, paste in a new name, or delete the name
completely.)
• To change the matrix format, click the format box of the appropriate
matrix, and then select a new format type. Alternatively, highlight the
appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and then select Change Format from
the pop-up menu. Choose the new format from the display list.
• To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title of the
column by which you want to sort. Click the title box once to sort in
ascending order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again to sort in
descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
• To add a new matrix, click Add. The Add Matrix dialog box opens. See
page 85 for information on how to complete this dialog.
• To delete an individual matrix, highlight the appropriate matrix, and then
click Delete.
• To delete all listed matrixes, click Delete All.
• To add a virtual CENTRIO matrix to an underlying CENTRIO video
matrix, highlight the video matrix, right click the mouse, and then select
Add CENTRIO PIPs. The CENTRIO PIPs selection is added to the
Configured Matrices list.
• To perform multiple edit functions click Advanced.... The Matrix
Partitioning tab opens. See page 314 for a description of this tab. At this tab
you are able to change these selections:
• Matrix name
• Matrix format
• Matrix sort order
• Color for matrix partitioning display
• Level
• Input offset
• Output offset
• Partition type
• Number of partitions
• Physical map order
• To assign dual outputs, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the
mouse, and then select Dual Output from the pop-up menu. Select this
option only if your Platinum modules include a dual output module such as
the PT-HSR-DOB, PT-SR-DOB, or PT-ENC-DOB.

300 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• To enable redundant crosspoints, right-click the mouse button, and then

choose Redundant Switch Mode from the shortcut menu.

Note
This function is available with 256×256 frames only.

• Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active
crosspoint module. Any double density 8+1 mode capability is disabled.
• Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active
crosspoint module. Existing crosspoints will not be switched, but will
remain on their original crosspoint module. Any double density 8+1
mode capability is disabled.
• To enable double density, right-click the mouse button, and then choose
Double Density Mode from the shortcut menu.
• Click 7+1 to have 1 video feed switched to the double density matrix.
The remaining 7 video feeds will stay in the assigned matrix.
• Click 8+1 to have 1 video feed switched to the double density matrix.
The remaining 8 video feeds will stay in the assigned matrix. (This option
requires an additional crosspoint card.) Any redundant switchpoint
capability is disabled.
• To set the crosspoint switching mode, right-click the mouse button, and
then choose Redundant Switch Mode from the shortcut menu.
• Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active
crosspoint module. Existing crosspoints will not be switched, but will
remain on their original crosspoint module.
• Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active
crosspoint module.
• To assign sync settings, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the
mouse, and then select Assign Sync from the pop-up menu. Choose the new
sync setting from the display list.
You can change the default sync setting values at the Control Settings tab.
See page 354 for instructions on how to change the sync names and settings.
• To change module formats
a. Highlight the appropriate matrix.
b. Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows
selection methods, select several modules at the same time), and then
select Change Format.... The Select I/O Card Type dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 301

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-5. Select I/O Card Type Dialog Box

c. Select the format you want for the module(s). The card type will
automatically change to match the format you selected.
d. If the card type includes options, click the check box next to the plugin.
• To change module parameter settings
a. Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows
selection methods, select several modules of the same format), and then
select Parameter Settings.... The Configure Module Parameters dialog
box1 opens.
The parameters listed in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box
are user-controllable. These parameters vary, depending on which type
of module has been selected. See the Platinum Routing Switchers
Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation
Manual for a list of each module’s parameters, description, and user
range.
b. Double click the parameter instance you want to change, or double click
the appropriate parameter name to change all instances to the same
value.

1 The
Configure Module Parameters dialog box displays the same type of information as the
Module Parameters List component of the Detected Matrices tab (see Figure 9-27 on page 335).
If you change parameter information in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box, the values
you select will become the default values after a device download is performed.

302 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-6. Configure Module Parameters Dialog Box

c. Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list

box or a text box opens.
• In a drop-down list box, select the setting that you want.
• In a text box, enter the value you want.
• To clear module parameter settings
a. Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows
selection methods, select several modules of the same format), and then
select Parameter Settings.... The Configure Module Parameters dialog
box opens.
b. Right click the parameter instance you want to clear.
OR
Right click the appropriate parameter name to clear all its parameter
instances at the same time.
c. Click Clear. Selected parameter instance values are cleared.
• To clear all module parameter settings
a. Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows
selection methods, select several modules of the same format), and then
select Parameter Settings.... The Configure Module Parameters dialog
box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 303

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

b. Click Clear All. All parameter instances values are cleared.

Configured Matrices Tab (Integrator Routers)

Note
See page 305 for Configured Matrices Tab information for Integrator data
routers.

See page 307 for Configured Matrices Tab information for Integrator Gold
routers.

Figure 9-7. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Configured Matrices Tab Selected
(Integrator Routers Only)

To edit the matrix configuration, select a configuration from these drop-down

list box(es).
• Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must
match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices
with the same level number will switch together. The matrices in a frame
can have different level numbers.
• First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines
the point at which destination numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point
at which source numbering will start for this matrix.
• Signal Type describes how the matrix is used in the system, and is for
informational purposes only. Changing the signal type does not affect
system operation.

304 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Configured Matrices Tab (Integrator Data Routers)

Figure 9-8. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Configured Matrices Tab Selected
(Integrator Data Router Only)

To edit the matrix configuration, follow these steps:

1. Select a configuration from these drop-down list box(es).
• Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must
match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices
with the same level number will switch together. The matrices in a frame
can have different level numbers.
• First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting
determines the point at which destination numbering will start for this
matrix.
• First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the
point at which source numbering will start for this matrix.
2. Click Edit Ports. The Edit Ports Signal Type dialog box opens (see
Figure 9-9 on page 306).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 305

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-9. Edit Port Signal Types Dialog Box

3. Select the desired port.

4. Choose a signal type from the Signal Type drop down list box. (To change
more than one port’s signal type, press and hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys while selecting desired ports.) Signal types are as follows:
• Data RS232 Auto — This port signal type must only be used for a port
on a RS-232 card. This port will switch between DTE and DCE, based on
Source/Destination context.
• This port is set to DTE when the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller” and the port is used as a Destination.
• This port is set to DCE when the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller” and the port is used as a Source.
RS-232 ports do not automatically take the opposite sense of the other
port in a switch.
• Data RS232 DCE — This port is always configured as DCE regardless
of its use as a Source or as a Destination in a crosspoint Take command.
It will communicate with a DTE port through a 1:1 cable or a DCE port
through a null modem cable.
• Data RS232 DTE — This port is always configured as DTE regardless
of its use as a Source or as a Destination in a crosspoint Take command.
It will communicate with a DCE port through a 1:1 cable or a DTE port
through a null modem cable.

306 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Data RS422 Auto — This port chooses its port configuration based on
its use as a source or destination in a switch command depending on the
Data Router Type setting. If the Data Router Type is set to “Dest to
Controller,” the port is configured as a tributary if used as a destination so
that it may be connected to a controller, provided that the source is not
“RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device.” Otherwise, it take the opposite
sense: If the source is “RS422 Controller,” the port is configured as a
controller so that it may be connected to a device. If the source is “RS422
Device,” the port is configured as a device so that it may be connected to
a controller.
• Data RS422 Controller — This port is always configured as a device so
that it may be connected to a controller with a 1:1 cable.
• Data RS422 Device — This port is always configured as a controller so
that it may be connected to a device with a 1:1 cable.

Configured Matrices Tab (Integrator Gold Routers)

Figure 9-10. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Configured Matrices Tab Selected
(Integrator Gold Router Only)

To edit the matrix configuration follow these steps:

1. Select a configuration from these drop-down list box(es).
• Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must
match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices
with the same level number will switch together. The matrices in a frame
can have different level numbers.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 307

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting

determines the point at which destination numbering will start for this
matrix.
• First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the
point at which source numbering will start for this matrix.
• I/O Signals allows you to modify the level output reclocker and level
input EQ fields.
2. Click Edit. The Edit Component Signal Type dialog box opens (see
Figure 9-11 on page 308).

Figure 9-11. Integrator Gold Edit Component Signal Types Dialog Box

3. Modify the level output reclocker as follows:

a. Highlight the desired level output.
b. Choose a signal type from the Reclocker Setting drop-down list box.
(To change more than one level output reclocker, press and hold down
the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired level outputs.)
Reclocker settings are as follows:

Table 9-3. Reclocker Settings

Reclocker
Description
Setting
143 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 143 Mb/s signal
177 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 177 Mb/s signal
270 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 270 Mb/s signal
360 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 360 Mb/s signal

308 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Table 9-3. Reclocker Settings (Continued)

Reclocker
Description
Setting
540 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 540 Mb/s signal
1.485 Gb/s Reclocker only locks to 1.485 Gb/s signal
Auto pass ASI Reclocker locks to any of 143, 270, 360, 540
Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s (177 Mb/s is not allowed
as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
Auto pass 177 Reclocker locks to any of 143, 177, 270, 360,
540 Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s (ASI should not be
used as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
By-pass SDI slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output
slew rate is hard coded to the slower SDI slew
rate
By-pass HD slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output
slew rate is hard coded to the faster HD slew
rate

4. Modify the level input EQ as follows:

a. Highlight the desired level input.
b. Choose a signal type from the EQ Setting drop-down list box. (To
change more than one level input EQ, press and hold down the <Shift>
or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired level inputs.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 309

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Configured Matrices Tab (Panacea Routers)

Figure 9-12. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Configured Matrices Tab Selected
(Panacea Routers)1

To edit the matrix configuration, select a configuration from these drop-down

list box(es).
• Frame ID2 is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must
match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices
with the same level number will switch together. The matrices in a frame
can have different level numbers.
• First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines
the point at which destination numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point
at which source numbering will start for this matrix.
• Signal Type describes how the matrix is used in the system, and is for
informational purposes only. Changing the signal type does not affect
system operation
• Matrix Name and Color identify the matrix by name instead of by ID
number. These settings are for informational purposes only; changing them
will not affect system operation.

1 The
Web Panels and Web Users tabs opens only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. For more information
about the web router application, see Chapter 7.
2 This item may not appear on some Panacea Configured Matrices windows.

310 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To change the frame settings, follow these steps:

Note
You cannot edit a Panacea frame’s level, starting destination, and starting
source at this dialog box. These settings are automatically updated on
every Poll of the control system.

1. Click the Frame Settings component of the 1|2RU Frame illustration on the
Configured Matrices tab (see Figure 9-13 on page 311). The information on
the right side of the tab will change to reflect the Frame properties for that
particular frame.

Figure 9-13. Panacea Configured Matrices Tab with Frame Properties

Displayed

2. Select a new configuration from these drop down list box(es).

• Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must
match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Frame Name appears for informational purposes only. Changing the
frame name will not affect system operation.

Matrix Partitioning
Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller
switching units called components. This might be used in configurations where
RGB signals are to be switched (e.g., the matrix is split into three separate
components – one for red, one for green, and one for blue), or in configurations
where both component and composite signals are to be switched within the

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 311

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

same frame. Matrix partitioning allows each component to appear to the control
system as a different level.
Each component in a matrix has a level configuration, a first source, and a first
destination. (See page 297 for more information on levels, first source, and first
destination parameters.) Any physical input or output can be assigned to any
component.

Matrix Partitioning Types

RGB/Stereo Partitioning
Selecting RGB/Stereo partitioning divides a matrix into components of equal
size. This configuration allows a user to connect the RGB outputs from a
component device to the first three physical inputs on the router, and the RGB
outputs of a second component device to physical inputs four, five and six. Each
group of three inputs appear to the control system as a single input, and is
switched simultaneously.
When you select RGB/Stereo, RouterMapper automatically assigns all physical
inputs and outputs of the matrix to appropriate components. For example, if 3
components are selected, physical input 1 is assigned to the first red, physical
input 2 to the first green, physical input 3 to the first blue, physical input 4 to the
second red, physical input 5 to the second green, etc.
Contiguous Partitioning
Selecting Contiguous Partitioning divides a matrix into blocks of sources and
destinations. When Contiguous partitioning is selected, RouterMapper
automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the
appropriate components. For example, if three components are selected for a
32×32 matrix, physical inputs 1-10 are assigned to the first component, physical
inputs 11-20 to the second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to the third
component.
Wild Partitioning
In configurations where maximum flexibility is required, matrices can be
partitioned to allow wild mapping of physical inputs and outputs. Selecting
Wild Partitioning allows any input or output to be assigned to any component.
Shared Inputs (Platinum routers only)
Selecting shared inputs divides a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations.
When Contiguous partitioning is selected, RouterMapper automatically assigns
blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the appropriate
components. For example, if three components are selected for a 32×32 matrix,
physical inputs 1-10 are assigned to the first component, physical inputs 11-20
to the second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to the third component.
This option differs from Contiguous partitioning in that input blocks can
overlap, whereas in Contiguous partitioning the input blocks cannot overlap.
Mono Breakaway (Platinum routers only
Selecting Mono Breakaway combines the features of RGB/Stereo partitioning
and Wild partitioning. With Mono Breakaway, in the default setup of the matrix

312 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

all inputs are shared. Outputs are sorted into components of equal size. Any
input or output can be assigned to any component.
Stereo Breakaway (Platinum routers only)
Selecting Stereo Breakaway divides a matrix into components of equal size
(that is, RGB) and allow any input, output, or channel to be assigned to any
component, or to more than one component at the same time. This option is
particularly useful for setting up audio channels1 in TDM applications where
you want to breakaway channels or always move them together.

1 Each
AES signal consists of two audio channels. For example, in stereo pairs, “left” is one
channel and “right” is one channel.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 313

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Matrix Partitioning (Platinum Routers)

To enable matrix partitioning follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, double-click the name of the frame you
want to partition. The Configured Matrices screen opens.
2. Click Advanced.... The Matrix Partition dialog box opens.

Figure 9-14. Matrix Partitioning Tab, Platinum Routers

3. At the top left of the dialog box you will see pertinent matrix information.
You can change the name, the input partition display color, starting level,
and input and output offsets.
• To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title of the
column by which you want to sort. Click the title box once to sort in
ascending order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again to sort in
descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
• To change the matrix name, click the name box of the appropriate
matrix, and then type in a new name. (You may also click the right mouse
button to copy the existing name, paste in a new name, or delete the name
completely.)
• To change the input matrix partition display color, click the color box
of the appropriate matrix, and then choose the color you want.

314 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• To change the starting level of a matrix, click the drop-down list box
under the Levels column. (You cannot type in the information into this
field.)
• To change the input offset number, type in the desired offset number
into the field under the Input Offset column.
• To change the output offset number, type in the desired offset number
into the field under the Output Offset column.
• To change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component, click somewhere within the read-only area of the matrix
partition list for the component you want to change. (Alternatively, move
your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse
button. A shortcut menu opens. Select Physical Map Order.) The Physical
Map Order dialog box opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
The Physical Map Order dialog box displays the physical I/O location
of a particular component. At this dialog box, you can change the input
or output assignment of any physical component.
Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input
or output, and then select a new physical location number from the
drop-down list box. RouterMapper will assign the new number to your
chosen component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned. For example, if you change the assignment of
Component Input 9 from 179 to 187 (which is currently assigned to
Component Input 17), RouterMapper will assign 187 to Component
Input 9 and 179 to Component Input 17.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 315

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-15. Physical Map Order Dialog Box

4. At the top right of the Matrix Partition dialog box is the Matrix Size
information box (see Figure 9-14 on page 314). This display is for
informational purposes only; you cannot change the matrix size here
5. Below the Matrix Size box is the Partition Type drop-down list box. Here
you will select from these partition type components: None, RGB,
Contiguous, Wild, and Shared Inputs.

Note
See page 312 for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.

• For instructions on configuring for no partition type, see page 316.

• For instructions on configuring for RGB partitioning, see page 318.
• For instructions on configuring for Contiguous partitioning, see
page 320.
• For instructions on configuring for Wild partitioning, see page 321.
• For instructions on configuring for Shared Inputs partitioning, see
page 324.
a. No Partitioning
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type. To
choose this option, select None from the Partition Type drop-down list
box. You will only have one partition with this option, so the # of
Partitions box is greyed out.

316 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component within the None partition type.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click
the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate component
input or output, and then select a new physical location number
from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input
View and Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on
these tabs provides a graphic representation of how your selected input
and output partitions will look. Choose the appropriate tab to view
either the resulting input or output partitioning.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes, go on to
step 6 on page 328.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 317

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

b. RGB/Stereo Partitioning1

Figure 9-16. RGB/Stereo Partitioning

To choose this option, select RGB/Stereo from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions from the #
of Partitions drop-down list box.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component within the partition type.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click
the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate component
input or output, and then select a new physical location number
from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned.

1 See
page 312 for a description of this matrix partitioning type.

318 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input
View and Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on
these tabs provides a graphic representation of how your selected input
and output partitions will look, based on the partition type components
you selected. Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting
input or output partitioning.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a
different partition (component). The steps for completing this function
are the same for both inputs and outputs.
• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to
reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in
the Physical Input View that you want to assign to a different
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections appear
light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you
just unassigned.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component
name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes, go on to
step 6 on page 328.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 319

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

c. Contiguous Partitioning1

Figure 9-17. Contiguous Partitioning

To choose this option, select Contiguous from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions from the #
of Partitions drop-down list box.
The initial appearance of the matrix (as illustrated in the Physical I/O
View box) shows boxes equal in shape and size; the number of boxes
will match the number of partitions you have selected. You can change
the I/O number per partition:
• Click on the component box you want to expand or reduce. A blue
border with small “handles” on it appear around the component
box.
• Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number of inputs
in the selected component. The selected component box will get
larger and the contingent component will get smaller. If you pull
slowly you will see a display message showing how many inputs
and how many outputs the component contains.

1 See
page 312 for a description of this matrix partitioning type.

320 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number of

outputs in the selected component. The selected component box
will get larger and the contingent component will get smaller.
• Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs and
outputs in the selected component. The selected component box
will get larger and both contingent components will get smaller.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes, go on to
step 6 on page 328.
d. Wild Partitioning1

Figure 9-18. Wild Partitioning

To choose this option, select Wild from the Partition Type drop-down
list box, and then select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions
drop-down list box.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component within the Wild partition type.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click
the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.

1 See
page 312 for a description of this matrix partitioning type.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 321

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate component
input or output, and then select a new physical location number
from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input
View and Physical Output View tabs. The information displayed on
these tabs provides a graphic representation of how your selected input
and output partitions will look, based on the partition type components
you selected. Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting
input or output partitioning.
The default view for Wild partitioning is that the inputs and outputs for
each component are continuous (e.g., inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6...32) and
contiguous to one another (where the inputs from one component end
the inputs from the next component begin; e.g., component 1 input
1...32; component 2 input 1,2,3,...; etc.). You can change that view to
RGB, so that inputs 1, 2, and 3 from each component fall in a row; then
inputs 4, 5, and 6; and so forth. The steps for completing this function
are the same for both inputs and outputs.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing order:
• Move your mouse into the Physical Input View space.
• Right-click the mouse button and select one of the following from
the pop-up menu:
• Click Make RGB Inputs to make the Physical Input View space
appear in RGB order. The Physical Output View space will
remain in contiguous order.
• Click Make RGB All to make the both the Physical Input View
space and the Physical Output View space appear in RGB
order.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing order:
• Move your mouse into the Physical Input View space.
• Right-click the mouse button and select one of the following from
the pop-up menu:
• Click Make Contiguous Inputs to make the Physical Input View
space appear in contiguous order. The Physical Output View
space will remain in RGB order.
• Click Make Contiguous All to make the both the Physical Input
View space and the Physical Output View space appear in
contiguous order.

322 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a
different component. The steps for completing this function are the
same for both inputs and outputs.
• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to
reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in
the Physical Input View that you want to assign to a different
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections appear
light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you
just unassigned.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component
name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes, go on to
step 6 on page 328.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 323

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

e. Shared Inputs1

Figure 9-19. Shared Inputs Partitioning

To choose this option, select Shared Inputs from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions from the #
of Partitions drop-down list box.
The initial appearance of the matrix as illustrated in the Physical I/O
View box shows boxes equal in shape and size; the number of boxes
will match the number of partitions you have selected. You can change
the I/O number per partition:
• Click on the matrix box you want to expand or reduce. A blue
border with small “handles” on it appears around the matrix box.
• Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number of inputs
in the selected matrix. The selected matrix box will get larger or
smaller but contingent matrixes will stay the same size. If you pull
slowly you will see a display message showing how many inputs
and how many outputs the matrix contains.
• Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number of
outputs in the selected matrix. The selected matrix box will get
larger and the contingent matrix will get smaller.
1 See
page 312 for a description of this matrix partitioning type.

324 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs and

outputs in the selected matrix. The selected matrix box will get
larger and the contingent matrix will get smaller.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes, go on to
step 6 on page 328.
f. Mono Breakaway1

Figure 9-20. Mono Breakaway Partitioning

To choose this option, select Mono Breakaway from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions from the #
of Partitions drop-down list box.
• Select the Physical Input View tab.
The initial setup of the matrix is that all inputs are shared. You can
change the input number per partition:
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then
right-click the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog
box opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate
component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box.
RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned.

1 See
page 312 for a description of this matrix partitioning type.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 325

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs to a

different partition (component).
• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to
reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs
in the Physical Input View that you want to assign to a different
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections
appear light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the
inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs
you just unassigned.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component
name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
• Select the Physical Output View tab.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then
right-click the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate
component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned.
In some cases you may want to assign particular outputs to a
different partition (component).
• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to
reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs
in the Physical Input View that you want to assign to a different
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections
appear light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the
inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs
you just unassigned.

326 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component

name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes, go on to
step 6 on page 328.
g. Stereo Breakaway1

Figure 9-21. Stereo Breakaway Partitioning

To choose this option, select Stereo Breakaway from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions from the #
of Partitions drop-down list box.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click
the mouse button. A shortcut menu opens.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Figure 9-15 on page 316).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate component
input or output, and then select a new physical location number
from the drop-down list box.
RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen component,
and assign the original number from your chosen component to the
component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
Assigning to a Different Partition
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a
different partition (component). The steps for completing this function
are the same for both inputs and outputs.
1 See
page 313 for a description of this matrix partitioning type.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 327

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to

reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in
the Physical Input View that you want to assign to a different
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections appear
light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you
just unassigned.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component
name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
Assigning to Multiple Partitions
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to
more than one partition (component). The steps for completing this
function are the same for both inputs and outputs.
• Highlight the first component to which you want to assign the
inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in
the Physical Input View that you want to assign to the first
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component
name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
• Highlight the next component to which you want to assign the
inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in
the Physical Input View that you want to assign to the next
component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to <component
name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections will receive that
component’s color assignment.
6. When all of your selections are complete, click OK. You will return to the
Configured Matrices tab.
7. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Matrix Partitioning (Integrator and Panacea Routers)

Note
Data router matrices cannot be partitioned.

328 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To enable matrix partitioning, follow these steps:

1. Double-click the name of the frame you want to partition. The Edit Frame
screen opens.
2. If it is not already chosen, select the Configured Matrices tab.
3. Click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
4. The Matrix Properties group will change, as shown in Figure 9-22

Figure 9-22. Enable Matrix Partitioning1

1 TheWeb Panels and Web Users tabs opens only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. For more information
about the web router application, see Chapter 7.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 329

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

5. To edit the individual components of the matrix, click Edit

Components, or select the Partitioning tab. The following screen opens.

Figure 9-23. Matrix Partitioning Type, RGB/Stereo Partitioning

6. Select the matrix partitioning type from the drop-down list box.

Note
See page 312 for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.

To partition a matrix into RGB stereo components, follow these steps:

1. Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
The Partitioning dialog box opens (see Figure 9-23 on page 330).
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the dialog box
will change to reflect the number of components selected. The component
size is automatically designated, and cannot be changed directly.
3. Click the component in the block diagram at the left of the screen to select it
for editing. The component is outlined when it is selected. All changes
made in the component properties group are applied to the component
selected.
4. Set the first destination, first source, and level number for each component.
5. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.
• Type a unique name into the Name edit box.
• Select a color for the component by clicking Color.

330 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To partition a matrix into contiguous components, follow these steps:

1. Select Contiguous from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
The following screen opens.

Figure 9-24. Matrix Partitioning Type, Contiguous Partitioning

2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the fields in the
dialog box will change to reflect the number of components selected.
3. Select a component for editing by clicking on the component in the block
diagram at the left of the screen. A colored outline appears around the
component to indicate that it is selected. In the example above, component
number one is selected. Note the nodes (the squares) along the sides of the
box outline. You can change the size of the component by dragging these
nodes into a new position.
4. Select the level number from the drop-down list box to specify the level on
which this component will operate.
5. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box.
(The First Destination is like the Destination Offset in previous Harris
product manuals.) The First Destination setting determines the point where
destination numbering will start for this component.
6. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box.
(The First Source is like the Source Offset in previous Harris product
manuals.) The First Source setting determines the point where source
numbering will start for this component.
7. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.
• Type the new name into the Name edit box.
• Select the color by clicking Color.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 331

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To partition a matrix for wild partitioning, follow these steps:

1. Select Wild from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box. A dialog
box similar to the one shown in Figure 9-25 on page 332 opens.
2. Select a component for editing by clicking on the component name in the
list box at the left of the screen. The component name is highlighted to
indicate that it is selected. Specify the level on which this component will
operate by selecting the level number from the drop-down list box.
3. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box.
The First Destination setting determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for this component.
4. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. The
First Source setting determines the point at which source numbering will
start for this component.
5. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.
• Type the new name into the Name edit box.
• Select the color by clicking on the Color.
6. Change the physical assignments to match the actual configuration of the
matrix as described in “Editing a Logical Database” on page 225

Figure 9-25. Matrix Partitioning Type, Wild Partitioning

332 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Detected Matrices Tab

When a system poll is initiated, RouterMapper will query all devices attached to
the system to determine the configuration of each. The properties of the detected
frame are displayed on the Detected Matrices tab. This information is read-only
(it cannot be edited).
If the first output card in a matrix has failed, or if the wrong card has been
placed into the frame, the frame’s control card will not be able to determine a
valid matrix. In this case, the graphic of the frame shown on the Detected
Matrices tab is empty. However, the frame will still report exactly which cards it
has found in each slot. This information can be viewed on the Detected Cards
tab, and can assist in troubleshooting the system.

Detected Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames)

Figure 9-26. Detected Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames)

To view the details of a particular matrix, click View Detail. The Matrix
Partition tab opens. You will not be able to change matrix information.
To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the matrix you
are configuring, click Copy to Configured Matrix.
You can view some hardware details at the Detected Matrices tab: module
parameters, frame settings, and the hardware snapshot file.
To determine the parameters for a particular module:
1. Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 333

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

2. Right-click the mouse button, and the Select View <type> Module. The
Module Parameters list box1 opens.
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are
user-controllable. These parameters vary, depending on which type of
module has been selected. Selections that are greyed out are read-only and
cannot be changed. See the Platinum Routing Switchers Frames and
Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for a list of
each module’s parameters, description, and user range.
To change a specific parameter instance for a particular module:
1. Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module. The
Module Parameters list box opens.
3. Highlight the specific parameter instance you want to change, right-click
the mouse button, and then click Set....
4. Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or
an editable text box opens. Make the desired changes, and then click Set.
5. Click OK to return to the Module Parameters list box. The changes to the
parameter instance are displayed.
To return to the default setting, highlight the specific parameter instance you
want to change, right-click the mouse button, and then click Refresh.

1 The
Module Parameters List displays the same type of information as the Configure Module
Parameters dialog box (see Figure 9-6 on page 303). If you change parameter information in the
Configure Module Parameters dialog box, the values you select will become the default values
after a device download is performed.

334 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-27. Module Parameters List Box for Modules

To change a specific parameter for a particular module:

1. Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module. The
Module Parameters list box opens.
3. Highlight the specific parameter you want to change, right-click the mouse
button, and then click Set....
4. Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or
an editable text box opens.
Make the desired changes, and then click Set.
5. Click OK to return to the Module Parameters list box. The same change for
all instances in the selected parameter is displayed.
To return to the default setting, highlight the specific parameter you want to
change, right-click the mouse button, and then click Refresh.
To determine the settings for the frame in which a particular module is
located:
1. Position the screen cursor above the resource module entry (PT-RES) in the
Control Components section
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View Frame Settings. The
Module Parameters list box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 335

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-28. Module Parameters List Box for Frames

The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are

user-controllable. Selections that are greyed out are read-only and cannot be
changed. Table 9-4 on page 336 lists frame parameters, description, and
user range.

Table 9-4. Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Parameter Description User Range
Frame Type [RO] Programmed frame size • PM-FR-5
• PM-FR-9
• PT-FR-15
• PT-FR-28
Detected Frame Type [RO] Actual, physical frame size • PM-FR-5
• PM-FR-9
• PT-FR-15
• PT-FR-28
Frame Id Number assigned to frame from RouterMapper • 0 - 127
to allow it to participate in the control system

336 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Table 9-4. Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper (Continued)

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Parameter Description User Range
Frame Name Alphanumeric string used in RouterMapper to • 23 characters
allow user-friendly naming of the Platinum
frame; it shows in the hardware list of
RouterMapper
CPU Id [RO] PT-RES serial number; allows licensing for • 12 characters
optional features such as SNMP
Sync Mode1 Specifies sync settings for sync ports • Auto
• (see page 112 for descriptions of these sync • Standard
Sync Mode4 mode settings) • Advanced

Sync Reference1 Only used if sync mode is “Standard” • None*

• (see page 113 for a description of this sync • 1280×720/50P Line 7
Sync Reference4 mode setting) • 1280×720/60P Line 7
• 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/24P Line 7
• 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
• 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/25P Line 7
• 1920×1080/30P Line 7
• 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/50I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
• Analog 525/60 Line 10
• Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
• Analog 625/50 Line 6
Detected Reference1 [RO] Sync reference that is automatically detected • None*
• by PT-RES (this is the sync reference used • 1280×720/50P Line 7
Detected Reference4 [RO] when Sync Mode parameter is set to Auto) • 1280×720/60P Line 7
Four concurrent available sync references are • 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
allowed • 1920×1080/24P Line 7
If an external sync reference is removed from • 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
the frame, the Sync Presence parameter will • 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
indicate that it is not present; however, the • 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
Detected Reference parameter will continue to • 1920×1080/25P Line 7
show the previous detected reference to prevent • 1920×1080/30P Line 7
interruption in switching operations • 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/50I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
• Analog 525/60 Line 10
• Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
• Analog 625/50 Line 6

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 337

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Table 9-4. Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper (Continued)

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Parameter Description User Range
Redundancy Mode Instructs PT-RES to automatically switch • Manual
crosspoints from a crosspoint module to its • Auto
redundant crosspoint module when the active
one is removed
This feature is not available for frames that do
not have redundant crosspoint modules; when
set to Manual, you must switch each crosspoint
to the redundant card by setting it to Active by
using the crosspoint active parameter
Redundant Switch Mode Instructs PT-RES to switch all currently active • Switch All
crosspoints to the redundant crosspoint module
when the active one is removed
External Temperature [RO] Specifies external operating temperature in –128° to 120°C
degrees Celsius
General Alarm1 [RO] Alarm relay on PT-RES • No Alarm
• • Alarm
General Alarm3 [RO]
Alarm Enable1 Enables/disables General Alarm parameter • Enable
• • Disable
Alarm Enable3
Active Crosspoint1 For frames that support redundant crosspoints, • On
• this parameter allows you to set the currently • Off
Active Crosspoint8 active crosspoint module
If Redundant Switch Mode is set to Switch All”
all active crosspoints will switch through the
set crosspoint module and the corresponding,
previous active crosspoint module will become
inactive
For all frames the value of this parameter
indicates whether the crosspoint module
installed is active (present and allowing
switched)
Sync Enable1 Allows you to select which sync references can • On
• trigger crosspoint switches • Off
Sync Enable4
Sync Presence1 Indicates which sync reference is presently • On
• detected by PT-RES • Off
Sync Presence4 If an external sync reference is removed from
the frame, the Sync Presence parameter will
indicate that it is not present; however, the
Detected Reference parameter will continue to
show the previous detected reference to prevent
interruption in switching operations

338 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Table 9-4. Application Parameters Available Through RouterMapper (Continued)

(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Parameter Description User Range
Active TDM Crosspoint1 Allows you to set the currently active TDM • On
Active TDM Crosspoint2 module • Off

Active Sync Module1 Allows you to set the currently active sync • On
• module • Off
Active Sync Module2
Internal Network1 Used with CENTRIO, sets the network address • 192.168.101.000*
• for internal Ethernet for each bank of
Internal Network4 CENTRIO modules
This feature is not available for frames that do
not have CENTRIO modules installed
Double Density Mode Used when a CENTRIO double density • 7+1
submodule is installed on a Platinum IB+ • 8+1
module • None*
This feature is not available for frames that do
not have CENTRIO modules installed
Temperature Threshold Indicates the temperature threshold for all the 60°C* (-127° to +127°C)
temperature sensors in/on a Platinum frame
When a change in any external or internal
temperature sensor readings rises to the same
value or greater than the temperature threshold
value, the frame generates an alarm on the
PT-Alarm module
When a change in any external or internal
temperature sensor value results in all
temperature values drop to less than the
temperature threshold, the alarm indicator is
cleared

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 339

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To view a “snapshot” of system settings:

1. Position the screen cursor above any module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button., and then select View Hardware Snapshot
File. A “snapshot” (non-editable) version of the frame's settings appear.
You can use this image as a diagnostics tool, to make sure that the frame
configuration setup file corresponds with your desired frame setup.

Figure 9-29. Hardware Snapshot File

340 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Detected Matrices Tab (Integrator and Panacea Frames)

“Detected Matrices” refers to the system configuration that a frame will use if it
is in DIP Switch mode. If the frame is in Program mode, it will attempt to use
the configuration reported in the Configured Matrices tab.

Figure 9-30. Detected Matrices Tab (Integrator Frames)

Figure 9-31. Detected Matrices Tab (Panacea Frames)1

1 TheWeb Panels and Web Users tabs open only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. For more information
about the web router application, see Chapter 7.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 341

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the matrix you
are configuring, click Copy to Configured Matrix.

Detected Cards Tab

Figure 9-32. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Detected Cards Tab (Integrator
Frames Only {Except Integrator Gold])

Figure 9-33. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Detected Cards Tab (Integrator
Gold Only)

342 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-34. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Detected Cards Tab (Panacea
Only)1

The Detected Cards tab will contain information on all modules found in the
frame during a system poll. This information is read-only. The tab will show a
graphic of the Integrator frame filled with the cards reported by the frame. Each
card can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse. The detailed properties of
the selected card are shown on the right side of the dialog box.

Note
The same elevators and back panels are used for different cards. For
example, a video output back panel can be used with an analog video
output card or an SDI output card. Also, the same elevator is used for
analog video, SDI, and AES-EBU matrices. Detailed information about
which combinations are valid is not presented here. Please refer
questions to a Customer Service representative.

For all routers except for Panacea models, the router properties displayed
include
• Type of card (e.g., analog video)
• Whether the card is an input or an output card
• Type of elevator to which the card is connected (all cards of the same
matrix should report the same elevator type; if not, the card that is not
reporting is probably inoperable)
• Type of back panel attached to the card (this should match the card type)

1 TheWeb Panels and Web Users tabs open only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. For more information
about the web router application, see Chapter 7.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 343

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be useful to

Customer Service when diagnosing a problem)
• Whether the optional output monitoring card is installed in the selected
slot.
• Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the
selected slot (this information varies for each card type and will not be
detailed here; it may, however, be useful to Customer Service)
For Panacea models, the router properties displayed include
• Type of I/O card (e.g., analog video)
• Type of back panel interface:
• Coaxial
• Balanced
• Balanced with 600Ω
• FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be useful to
Customer Service when diagnosing a problem)
• Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the
selected slot (this information varies for each card type and will not be
detailed here; however, it may be useful to Customer Service)

344 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Monitoring Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames Only)

Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and outputs
as a set of inputs on a separate matrix (which is called the monitor matrix). It
allows you to monitor what comes out of a particular output. If you have a
monitoring module installed in your Platinum router, you can set up monitoring
information here. You can monitor input signals, output signals, or both input
and output signals. You can set up a matrix monitoring configuration in one of
two ways: via the Quick-Physical I/O selection list, or by manually inputting the
information desired. (If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that is
automatically created and updated, do not choose this option. See page 85
through page 86 for information on having RouterMapper create a monitoring
matrix automatically.)
To “quick-add” a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix to the list
box.
2. In the Quick-Physical I/O Selection List box, highlight the name of the
matrix to assign to the monitoring configuration list.
3. Click the appropriate radio button to select input or output monitoring, or
both.
4. Click Assign. The selected matrix opens in the Monitoring Matrix
Configuration list box.
• To remove the matrix, click Delete.
• To edit matrix information, highlight the name of the matrix assigned to
the monitoring configuration list, and then click Advanced. The
Monitor Matrix dialog box opens. (See step 5 through step 6, starting on
page 346, for more instructions on completing this dialog box.)
5. Click Next. The Control Settings dialog box opens.
To manually create a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix to the list
box.
2. At the matrix list control area, highlight the desired input and/or output
module slots to include in the selected monitor matrix.
3. Right-click the mouse, and select Assign to Monitor Matrix.
4. Click Advanced. The Monitor Matrix dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 345

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-35. Monitor Matrix Dialog Box

5. In the Properties box, make the following selections:

• Select the desired level on which this matrix will operate from the
drop-down list box.
• If you want input monitoring offset, set the desired input offset number.
• If you want output monitoring offset, set the desired output offset
number.
• Select a display color.
6. In the On-Download Initial Source box, select one of the following options:
• Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect outputs
after download.
• Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the matrix
areas after download.
• Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected to
the first input in the matrix.
If you have added more than one matrix, and some of the same modules are
assigned to both matrixes, an asterisk appears to the left of the name (see
Figure 9-36 on page 347). The asterisk means that this particular matrix will
provide virtual output monitoring. See the Platinum Frame and Modules
Manual Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual for more
information on real and virtual output monitoring.

346 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-36. Virtual Monitoring Indicators

Firmware Tab
(Platinum Frames Only)

Figure 9-37. Firmware Tab (Platinum Routers Only)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 347

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

The Firmware tab allows you to quickly update to the most current Platinum
firmware versions for detected, selected modules; or for all detected, installed
modules.
To update the firmware for a Platinum module, follow these steps.
1. Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the update procedure is
performed.
You can check for firmware upgrades on our website. Download the
upgrade to <drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware, as this is the location
where RouterMapper first looks for firmware upgrade files.
2. Perform a Poll on the selected frame to obtain the latest detected modules
and firmware versions. (For information on how to perform a poll, see
“Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 80.)
3. At the RouterMapper main menu, double-click the name of the frame that
contains the modules you want to upgrade. If necessary, switch to the
Firmware tab.
4. From the selected matrix list, click the modules you want to upgrade.
Multiple modules may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
modules).

Note
A quick way to determine the installed firmware version is to
“hover” the mouse over the module icon to the right of the
module name.

5. Right-click the mouse to bring up the pop-up menu, and then click Assign.
The selected module names appear in the firmware upgrade list.
Note that in the firmware upgrade list, the slot location and name of the
module appears, as well as the installed firmware version of that module
and the version number for any known upgrades.
If you downloaded your firmware upgrade file to a directory different from
the recommended one:
• Right-click on the appropriate module in the firmware list. A shortcut
menu opens.
• Click Change Firmware.
• Use standard Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of
the firmware upgrade file you want to use.
6. In the firmware list, click the module you want to upgrade, and then click
Upgrade.
OR
Click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once.
7. The Firmware Upgrade message dialog box opens, which will display the
steps in the upgrade process as they occur.

348 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-38. Firmware Upgrade Message Dialog Box

If you need to stop the upgrade procedure, click Cancel. The dialog box
will display a message that says “Aborting firmware upgrade...Please wait.”
8. When the process is complete, click the Close (X) box in the upper right
corner of the Firmware Upgrade message dialog box.
9. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Control Card(s) Tab and Control Settings Tab

The Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s) that are
installed in the frame. This information is presented as an aid in troubleshooting
a system. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
Platinum routers have a Control Settings tabbed dialog box that is somewhat
different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 350 for a picture of
the Platinum Control Settings tab and a corresponding explanation of how to fill
in the card fields.
Panacea routers have a Control Card tabbed dialog box that is somewhat
different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 371 for a picture of
the Panacea Control Card tab and a corresponding explanation of how to fill in
the card fields.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 349

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Control Settings Tab (Platinum Frames)

Figure 9-39. Control Settings Tab

This dialog box allows you to set up identifiers needed for file transfer protocol
(FTP) functions, Ethernet network properties, I/O sync and reference settings,
SNMP settings, and protocol and license key settings.
1. Select the “Allow the frame to automate the Logical Database
Synchronization” check box to enable this device to use the database name
synchronization function. (See page 30 and page 64 for more information
about this feature.)
2. Fill in these fields in the Platinum Frame Identification box:
• Select the frame ID (the frame’s physical address) from the drop-down
list box.
• In the Frame Name box, enter the frame’s descriptive name.

350 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Configuring FTP Login Settings

1. In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings.... The
Communication Settings dialog box opens.
If necessary, select the FTP Login tab.

Figure 9-40. FTP Login Tab

2. In the Username box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The
actual username is set up or changed via Navigator.)
3. In the Password box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The
actual password is set up or changed via Navigator.)
4. In the Confirm box, re-enter the password you just entered.
5. Click OK to accept the changes.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 351

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Configuring Network Settings

1. In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings.... The
Communication Settings dialog box opens.
IMPORTANT: The ENET 1 and ENET 2 tabs control the Ethernet
ports on your Platinum router. The configuration steps you
follow will differ, depending on whether you use one or both
ports.
The ENET 1 and the ENET 2 tabs’ network properties are divided into two
sections: the Current (read-only) section, which is displayed on the left side
of Figure 9-41/Figure 9-42; and the Programmed (editable) settings section,
which is displayed on the right side of Figure 9-41/Figure 9-42.

Note
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The MAC
address is set up via Navigator or card-edge controls.

Programmed settings include

• Frame IP address (this is necessary for transferring or upgrading files via
an FTP site; the actual frame IP address is set up via Navigator or
card-edge controls.)
• Gateway address
• Subnet Mask address

Figure 9-41. ENET 1 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results

352 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-42. ENET 2 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results

To set up communication for RouterMapper to transfer configuration

files to the Platinum frame (this is not assigning an IP address to the
frame):
a. Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.
b. Select the ENET 1 tab.
c. Fill in the Frame IP address.
d. Click OK to accept the changes.
To assign IP settings to the Platinum frame's ENET 1 and/or ENET 2
ports:
a. Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.
b. Select the ENET 1 tab.

Note
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The
MAC address is set up via Navigator or card-edge
controls.

c. Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask

address.
d. Select the ENET 2 tab.

Note
The ENET 2 port is disabled by default; you will need to
make changes only if you are using a second Ethernet
port on a Platinum router.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 353

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

e. Select the Check to modify network settings for this port check box.
f. Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask
address.
g. Click Download to accept the changes and send the changes to the
router. You will receive a series of informational messages showing the
progress of the download.

Note
If the IP address you changed from is already set up in
the Comm Settings menu, this download will change
the selection at the RouterMapper Comm Settings
menu. If the IP Address you changed from is not
already set up, this download will not add the selection
to the list.

Configuring Sync Settings

Note
The I/O Type drop-down list box appears when the you select Standard
radio button. The Sync Pulse Delay box appears when you select the
Advanced radio button.

1. In the Platinum I/O Sync and References box, click Sync.... The Configure
I/O Sync Settings dialog box opens.

Figure 9-43. Configure I/O Sync Settings Dialog Box

2. You can configure separate settings for up to four separate sync ports. For
each port, choose the following settings:
• Choose the desired sync (1 through 4) from the drop-down list box.
• Enter a name by which to identify a particular sync port.
• Choose Auto, Standard, or Advanced mode (see page 112 for sync port
mode selection descriptions)
3. Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box.

354 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Setting Up SNMP
If you are using SNMP with your Platinum router, click SNMP.... The SNMP
Agent Options dialog box opens.
• See page 355 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• See page 356 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting Trap
Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 357 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 359 for a description of the System fields.

Setting up License Keys and Map Names

To set up license keys and Map Names information settings for your Platinum
router, click Advanced.... The Advanced Settings dialog box opens.
• See page 359 for more information about the Advanced Settings dialog box.
• See page 359 for Map Names fields.
• See page 360 for a description of Licensing fields.
SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

Figure 9-44. SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 355

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

The SNMP Agent Options dialog box is a dialog box that allows you to set up
all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three separate group boxes are displayed on
this dialog box:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (see page 356)
• SNMP Agent (see page 357)
• System (see page 359)
Trap Destination IP Addresses
The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or
delete SNMP Trap Destinations.
• To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:
a. Click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box opens.

Figure 9-45. Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

b. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap
destination.
c. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for the
SNMP Trap destination. The port number can be from 1 to 65535.
d. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community name.
e. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that you
would like to use for the SNMP Trap.
f. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds) before an
SNMP Trap is sent to a manager if the initial attempt failed.
g. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a
manager if the initial attempt failed.
• To delete an SNMP Trap destination:

356 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

a. At the SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box list control, select the IP
address for the SNMP Trap Destination you want to delete. Multiple
devices may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques
(hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
b. Click Delete. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You are
prompted to confirm the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
SNMP Agent
Table 9-5 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed in the
SNMP Agent group box.

Table 9-5. SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The
network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in
SNMP terms, a “Get” operation has
to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information
from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in
SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in
a MIB browser in order to write
information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps
are sent if the read or write
community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address pop-up
dialog box (see Figure 9-46)

The Managers Address pop-up dialog box allows you to specify the addresses
of the managers whose requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 357

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-46. Manager Address Dialog Box

• To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• To modify a manager address:
a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.
d. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• To delete a manager address:
a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple addresses).
b. Click Remove. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You are
prompted to confirm the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.

358 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the
Navigation dialog box. This is user-defined information that, once provided by
an administrator, is available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB
browser. Table 9-6 shows the fields and function descriptions for the items listed
in the System box.

Table 9-6. System Fields of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch
Agent”
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name

Advanced Settings
The Advanced Settings dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to
view the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration
information; and displays information and settings for Map Names and license
options.
Map Names Tab
The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame’s source and
destination “Names Mapping” file based on the current logical RouterMapper
database.

Figure 9-47. Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer
the Map Names file to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on
RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 359

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (You
are asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the Map
Names file to be generated.
• With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the
current logical database.
• With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an
existing file.
• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the file has
been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the frame to use the new
transfer file.
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses for up to
two separate Platinum resource modules (PT-RES-1 and PT-RES-2).

Figure 9-48. License Tab

The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer
the license key to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on
RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (You
are asked to log in before the file transfer is initiated.)
• In the License Key box(es), enter the appropriate license activation code(s)
you received from your Customer Service representative.
• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the file has
been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the SNMP license is
recognized.

360 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Changing Protocol Settings

To enable this function, click Protocols.... The Change Protocol Settings dialog
box opens.

Protocols Tab

Figure 9-49. Protocols Tab

This tab shows you the available protocols that your Platinum frame currently
supports. You cannot disable any of these protocols; however, this tab allows
you to enable and disable signal presence settings for the X-Y pass through
protocol1.
• When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is selected,
RouterMapper will allow input signal presence messages to be sent.
• When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is not selected,
RouterMapper will filter out input signal presence messages.
• When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is selected,
RouterMapper will allow output signal presence messages to be sent.
• When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is not
selected, RouterMapper will filter out output signal presence messages.

1 For
a detailed discussion of the X-Y pass-through protocol, see the Harris Routing Switchers
Serial Protocol Reference Operation and Reference Manual.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 361

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Connections Tab

Figure 9-50. Connections Tab

This tab allows you to make the appropriate selections to enable filtering out
messages based on specific connections, devices, and level inputs/outputs. The
Connection tab includes several different group boxes:
• Enabling Connections Group Box
• Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
• Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box
• Connection Property Settings Group Box

362 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Enabling Connections Group Box

The Enable Connections group box displays all current connections available on
your Platinum frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the following
connections; default connections show an asterisk at the end of the connection
name.

Note
You can enable or disable any of the default connections. You cannot edit
or delete default connections. Any user-added (non-default) connections
can be edited or deleted.

• XYSer1 uses X-Y pass through and X-Y terminal protocols on serial port 1
on the Platinum communications back panel.
• XYSer2 uses X-Y pass through & X-Y Terminal protocols on serial port 2
on the Platinum communications back panel.
• XYCoax1 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 1 on the Platinum
communications back panel.
• XYCoax2 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 2 on the Platinum
communications back panel.
To enable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
connection name is checked.
To disable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
connection name is unchecked.
To add a connection, follow these steps:
1. Click Add under the Enable Connections group box. The Add New Client
Connection dialog box opens.

Figure 9-51. Add New Client Connection Dialog Box

2. Enter a connection name in the Name box.

3. Click OK. The Connections Property Settings box is enabled.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 363

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

At the Connection Property Settings box, you must specify a server IP and
port number because the Network Client selection uses the Ethernet port.
See page 365 for more information.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows
you to specify the level inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per
each connection.
1. Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list.
2. If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down
list box.
3. Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs
list. Any status messages for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow
Inputs list box are filtered out from this connection.

Note
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list
using standard Windows selection techniques. Move inputs
between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.

If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for
all detected inputs are allowed for the selected connection.
4. Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow
Outputs list. Any status messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the
Allow Outputs list box are filtered out from this connection.

Note
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs
list using standard Windows selection techniques. Move
outputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.

If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages
for all detected outputs are allowed for the selected connection.
5. If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the
summary of all the assigned level inputs and outputs. The Input & Output
Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs displayed.
When finished, click OK. You will return to the Connections tab.
6. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status
Message Posting group box.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box
The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to
make selections to filter out status messages by devices.
1. Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list. A list of
devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box.

364 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

2. To allow status message postings for a specific devices:

• Enter the device ID number in the device ID edit box.
• Click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a panel,
frame, or Edge, the device’s name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the
Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices From This
Connection check box to allow the frame to post all status messages for
all detected devices associated with the selected connection.
3. To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:
• Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box. Multiple device IDs may be selected
from the list using standard Windows selection techniques.
• Click Delete to remove the selected device IDs from the list.
4. To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.
Connection Property Settings Group Box
If you selected Network Client as a connection type, you must specify a server
IP and port number in this group box. You can also specify whether or not you
want to let the frame automatically reconnect if a server connection fails or is
lost.
Click the Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices from This
Connection… check box to allow the frame to post status messages for all
detected devices for the selected connection. If the check box is unchecked, the
frame will use the assigned device IDs to determine which devices are allow
status message posting.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 365

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Servers Tab

Figure 9-52. Servers Tab

This tab allows you to filter out messages based on specific server connections,
devices, and level inputs/outputs. This tab functionality is very similar to the
Connections tab; however, server connections are for other devices (panels,
frames, Edge, window application, etc.) to connect to Platinum frame through
the Ethernet ports. The Server tab includes several different group boxes:
• Enabling Connections Group Box
• Connection Property Settings Group Box
• Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
• Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box
Enabling Connections Group Box
The Enable Connections group box displays all current server connections
available on your Platinum frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the
following connections; default connections show an asterisk at the end of the
connection name.
• XYNetSrv uses X-Y pass through protocol.
• XYTelnet uses X-Y terminal and XY pass through protocols.
• XYAdmin uses X-Y pass through protocol.
• XYStream uses X-Y Pass through protocol.
To enable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left of
the connection name is checked.
To disable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left
of the connection name is unchecked.

366 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To add a server connection, follow these steps:

1. Click Add under the Enable Connections group box. The Add New Server
Connection dialog box opens.

Figure 9-53. Add New Server Connection Dialog Box

2. Enter a server name in the Name box.

3. From the Type drop-down list box, select a protocol type for the server
connection.
• Select Network Client to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network
client.
• Select Network Server to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network
server.
• Select Telnet Server to use X-Y terminal and X-Y pass through protocols
on a Telnet server.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Servers tab. The Connections Property
Settings box is enabled. (At the Connection Property Settings box, you must
specify a listening port number and the maximum number of clients
allowed. See page 367 for more information.
Connection Property Settings Group Box
Each server connection requires that you specify a unique listening port (that
other devices and/or applications must know to connect to a this particular
server from the frame); and a maximum number of other devices and/or
applications that the frame allows to connect to this server at a time.
1. In the Listening Port box, enter the port number of the listening port.
2. In the Max Clients box, enter the maximum number of other devices and/or
applications allowed to connect to this server at one time.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows
you to specify the level inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per
each server.
1. Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 367

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

2. If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down
list box.
3. Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs
list. Any status messages for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow
Inputs list box are filtered out from this connection.

Note
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list
using standard Windows selection techniques. Move inputs
between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.

If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for
all detected inputs are allowed for the selected connection.
4. Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow
Outputs list. Any status messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the
Allow Outputs list box are filtered out from this connection.

Note
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs
list using standard Windows selection techniques. Move
outputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.

If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages
for all detected outputs are allowed for the selected connection.
5. If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the
summary of all the assigned level inputs and outputs. The Input & Output
Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs displayed.
When finished, click OK. You will return to the Server tab.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box
The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to
make selections to filter out status messages by devices.
1. Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list. A list
of devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs
for Status Message Posting list box.
2. To allow status message postings for a specific devices:
• Enter the device ID number in the device ID edit box.
• Click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a panel,
frame, or Edge, the device’s name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the
Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices From This
Connection check box to allow the frame to post all status messages for
all detected devices associated with the selected connection.
3. To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:

368 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for
Status Message Posting list box. Multiple device IDs may be selected
from the list using standard Windows selection techniques.
• Click Delete. The selected device IDs are removed from the list.
4. To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.

Ports Tab

Figure 9-54. Ports Tab

The currently enabled serial and Ethernet ports are displayed in the Enable Ports
box. The port selections that you cannot enable or disable are greyed out.
• To enable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
port name is checked.
• To disable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the
port name is unchecked.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 369

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Control Card Tab (Integrator Frames)

Figure 9-55. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Control Card(s) Tab (Integrator
Frames)

The Control Card tab dialog box shows information for the bottom control card
(CPU A) on the left, and the top control card (CPU B) on the right. If both
control cards are installed, the Present indicator is “Yes” for both. However,
only one of the two control cards is active at one time. Only the details for the
active card are shown on the Control Card(s) tab.
The mode of the active control card is either DIP switch or Program. This mode
is set via the DIP switches on the front of the control card. See the frame manual
for DIP switch settings. However, note that the frame must be in Program mode
to operate with a downloaded configuration. The firmware version and FPGA
version controls will display the versions of the software installed on the active
control card.
The DIP switch controls will show the current positions of the control card’s
DIP switches.
• DIP Switch, Left is the leftmost of the two DIP switches on the front of
the control.
• DIP Switch, “Right” is the switch on the right front of the control card. A
“0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A “1”
indicates that a switch is in the ON position.
• DIP Switch, “Internal” indicates the settings of the DIP switch located on
the center of the card (this switch is only visible when the card is
removed from the frame).

370 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Control Card Tab (Panacea Frames)

Figure 9-56. Edit Frame Dialog Box, Control Card(s) Tab (Panacea
Frames)1

The Panacea Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s)
that are installed in the frame. This information is read-only (except for the
network programmed section) and is presented as an aid in troubleshooting a
system. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows information for the control card on the left, and the
control card's network and configuration files setup on the right. If the control
card is installed, the details for the active card are shown on the Control Card
tab.
• The mode of the active control card is DIP Switch, Simple Partitioning, or
Advanced Partitioning. This mode is set via the DIP switches on the front of
the control card. (See the Panacea Series Frame and Modules
Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual for DIP switch
settings.) The frame must be in Program mode to operate with a
downloaded configuration.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version controls will display the versions
of the software installed on the active control card.
• The DIP switch controls will show the current positions of the control card's
DIP switches.
• DIP Switch, “Top” is the top switch of the three DIP switches on the front
of the control.
• DIP Switch, “Center” is the DIP switch in the middle.

1 The Web Panels and Web Users tabs open only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced
resource card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. For more information
about the web router application, see Chapter 7.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 371

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• DIP Switch, “Bottom” is the last switch of the control card.

• A “0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A “1”
indicates that a switch is in the (or ON) position.
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections: the Current
(read-only) and the programmed (editable) settings. Programmed settings
include
• IP address
• Gateway address
• Subnet Mask address
• MAC address
Only IP, Gateway, and Subnet Mask addresses are configurable by clicking on
the Programmed radio button.
Click Protocols to access the Editing Serial Protocols, Edit Ethernet Protocols,
and Name Sync tabs.
• See page 156 for instructions on editing serial protocols.
• See page 157 for instructions on viewing Ethernet protocols and editing
selected values.
• See page 159 for instructions on enabling the automated database
synchronization function for Panacea routers.
Click SNMP... to set up SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 160 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
• See page 160 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting Trap
Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 162 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 163 for a description of the System fields.
Click Advanced… to view the configuration file names that are used to store a
frame's configuration information. Tabs on the Advanced... button allow you to
set up a frame’s virtual X-Y settings, Time Server (for Web support) and Map
Names files.
• See page 164 for a description of the Config Files tab.
• See page 164 for a description of the Virtual XY tab.
• See page 165 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 165 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 166 for a description of the License tab.
Figure 9-57 on page 373 shows a picture of the Configuration Files tab that
appears after you click Advanced....

372 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-57. Panacea Control Card Dialog Box, Config Files Tab
Selected

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 373

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

I/O Hardware Module Tab (Panacea Frames Only)

Note
The I/O Hardware Module tab is displayed only if the Panacea has an
enhanced resource card installed.

The I/O Hardware Module dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to
change hardware for a selected Panacea matrix. All of the tabs (Destinations,
Sources, Alarm, and General) can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
Information on using those tabs can be found in pages 374 through 378.
You can “travel” to the I/O Hardware Module dialog box via the Edit Frame >
Router Frame path. At the Router Frame dialog box, click Hardware... to reach
the I/O Hardware Module dialog box.
You can change the input/output hardware for a Panacea matrix via the I/O
Hardware Module tab dialog box display (see Figure 9-61 on page 377).

Destinations Tab

Figure 9-58. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box, Destinations

Tab

The Destinations tab allows you to change the reclocker and slew rate settings
for a particular destination.
The Reclocker Settings list box on the left side of the tab shows all destinations’
reclocker settings available in the matrix.

374 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To change the reclocker setting of a destination, follow these steps:

1. Select the desired destination.
2. Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
To change the reclocker setting of more than one destination at one time,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
destinations.
2. Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
The Slew Rate Settings list box on the right side of the tab shows all
destinations’ Slew Rates available in the matrix.
To change the slew rate of a destination, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired destination.
2. Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list box.
To change the slew rate of more than one destination at the same time, fol-
low these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
destinations.
2. Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list box.

Sources Tab

Figure 9-59. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box, Sources Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 375

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

The Sources tab displays the EQ bypass settings for a matrix. You can turn the
EQ settings on or off at this tab.
The EQ By-Pass Settings list box shows all sources’ EQ bypass settings
available in the matrix.
To turn a source's EQ By-Pass on or off, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired source.
2. Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list box.
To turn the EQ By-Pass of more than one source on or off at the same time,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
sources.
2. Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list box.

Alarm Tab

Figure 9-60. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box, Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to enable or disable any I/O alarms that the frame
supports.
Click on the I/O Module drop-down list box to select an I/O module for which
you want to display the extended alarm names.
The main list box shows all available extended alarms in the matrix.
To enable or disable an alarm type, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired alarm.

376 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

2. Click either Enable or Disable.

To enable/disable more than one alarm type, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
alarms.
2. Click on either Enable or Disable.

General Tab

Figure 9-61. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box, General Tab

The Synchronous Timing Mode, Source to be Used as a Restore Source after a

Frame Reset, and Module Options can be changed from the General tab. Fill in
the desired information as described below.
To change the synchronized timing mode, click on either the Auto, Standard,
or Advance radio buttons.
• In Auto mode, the switch point is determined by the detected sync type
only based on SMPTE RP-168 specifications.
• The Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing
reference.
• The Advance mode provides the option to enter a take delay in
milliseconds.
To change the source to be used as a Restore Source after a frame reset,
select an option from the Misc. drop-down list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 377

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box
in the Module Options area. The matrix types with programmable I/O
submodule are listed in Table 4-5 on page 152.

Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings

Note
The clean switch option is available on Panacea serial digital video
routing switchers. The quiet switch option is available on Panacea AES
digital audio routing switchers. Both clean switch and quiet switch options
are available on Panacea P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers.

Parametric settings are used to change clean switch and quiet switch support
settings.
Panacea parametric settings can be configured from the RouterMapper main
menu shortcut menu display. You can only configure the parametric settings for
a Panacea frame with matrices that are configured with clean and/or quiet
switch support. The matrix types with programmable I/O submodule are listed
in Table 4-5 (page 152).
To select the parametric settings option, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu, highlight the name of the Panacea router
that you want to modify.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3. Scroll down to the Parametric Settings... option, and then click <Enter>.
4. The Parametric Settings tab opens.

Parametric Settings Tab

Note
If you are in Demo mode, you will not be able to access the Parametric
Settings tab.

The Parametric Settings dialog box is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to
change the parametric settings for a selected Panacea matrix. The tab choices of
this dialog box will differ, based on the matrix type you choose. See Table 4-5
on page 152 for information on matrix types and supported I/O submodules.
• Clean Switch tab information appears as follows:
• Information on the Clean Switch tab appears on page 379.
• Information on the Clean Switch tab for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ
routing switchers appears on page 382.
• Information on the Quiet Switch tab appears on page 381.
• Information on the Transitions tab for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing
switchers appears on page 383.

378 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Information on increased control over individual audio channels appears

on page 387.
Any of the tabs (Clean Switch, Quiet Switch, or Transition) can be selected by
clicking on the appropriate tab at the Parameter Settings dialog box.

Clean Switch Tab

Note
Corresponding information for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers
appears on page 382.

Figure 9-62. Clean Switch Tab (without Relay Bypass)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 379

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-63. Clean Switch Tab (with Relay Bypass)

You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean switch
submodule at this tab.
• The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
• The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
• The Bypass Router check box allows you to enable the relay bypass
capability. (This selection is only available if you configured the router
matrix as clean switch with bypass. See Table 4-5 on page 152 for a list of
matrix sizes that support relay bypass.)
To include or remove the clean switching support of a source, follow these
steps:
1. Select the desired source.
2. To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click on either Enable
or Disable.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at one
time:
• Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
sources.
• Click on either Enable or Disable.
3. Click on the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and
horizontal timing, and the status of the source’s autotiming.
5. To enable or disable relay bypass, do one of the following:

380 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• To disable Panacea A/V processing (that is, enable relay bypass), select
the Bypass Router checkbox.
A Bypass Change message appears. Click Yes to enable the relay
bypass function.
• To enable Panacea A/V processing (that is, disable relay bypass), select
the Bypass Router checkbox.
A Bypass Change message appears. Click Yes to disable the relay
bypass function.
The Querying Status box displays the current source query/set operation.

Quiet Switch Tab

Note
Corresponding information for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers
appears on page 383.

Figure 9-64. Quiet Switch Tab

You can include or remove support for a Panacea’s quiet switch submodule at
this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
The Quiet Switch Destination list box shows all available destinations in the
matrix.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 381

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To include or remove the quiet switching support of a destination, follow

these steps:
1. Click on the check box to the left of the destination name of a desired
destination (the “check” mark will toggle back and forth).
2. Move the slide bar from left to right to increase the fade duration/time (in
milliseconds).
A module must have valid reference frequency to set a correct fade time.
The following frequencies are valid:
• 32 kHz
• 44.1 kHz
• 48 kHz
3. Click on the Set button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current destination’s quiet switch
support and quiet switch fade duration.
The Querying Status box displays the current destination query/set operation.

Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

Figure 9-65. Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean switch
submodule at this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
1. Select the desired source.

382 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

2. To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click on either Enable

or Disable.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at one
time:
• Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
sources.
• Click on either Enable or Disable.
3. Click on the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and
horizontal timing, and the status of the source’s auto timing.
The Status box displays the current source query/set operation.

Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

Figure 9-66. Transition Tab

You can set up or change audio and video transition selections for a Panacea
clean switch/quiet switch at this tab.
1. At the Matrix ID drop-down list box select either 0 or 1:
• Select 0 for a 1RU setup
• Select 0 for the top frame in a 2RU setup
• Select 1 for the bottom frame in a 2RU setup
2. At the Output combo box in the Reclocker Settings group box, make these
choices:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 383

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

a. In the first drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:

• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
• Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.

Note
A matrix’s physical output corresponds to its location on the back of the
frame.

b. In the Reclocker drop-down list box, select the actual duration

frequency you want.

Table 9-7. SD Format Actual Duration Frequency

Valid Settings
Reference
Standard Standard

ANY • Auto mode

• Delay Auto mode
NTSC • 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
PAL • 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)

Table 9-8. HD Format Actual Duration Frequency

Valid Settings
Reference Standard
Standard
ANY • Auto mode
• Delay Auto mode
NTSC • 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
PAL • 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-59.9 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
720p-59.9 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)

384 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Table 9-8. HD Format Actual Duration Frequency

Valid Settings
Reference Standard
Standard
1080i-50.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-60.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
720p-60.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)

3. At the Video Transition Group box, make these choices:

a. In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of transition
you want to use:

Table 9-9. Video Transition Types

Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next source
Cut Cuts from current source immediately into next
source (can be either “hard” or “soft”)
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black and cuts into
next source
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source and
fades-from-black to next source

b. For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following (you
cannot do both):
• In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during which you
want the transition to occur. RouterMapper will automatically
adjust the number of corresponding seconds it will take.
OR
• Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the number of
seconds it will take for the transition to occur. RouterMapper will
automatically adjust the number of corresponding frames it will
take.
c. If you want audio processing, click the Enable Audio Processing check
box.
d. If you want audio-follow-video, click in the Audio Follow check box.
This will allow an audio signal associated with any given video signal
to be recorded, switched, or mixed with that video signal. If you make
this section, skip to step 5.
4. If you do not want audio-follow-video, at the Audio Transition Group box,
make these choices:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 385

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

a. In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of transition
you want to use:

Table 9-10. Audio Transition Types

Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next source
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black and cuts into
next source
Cut Cuts from current source immediately into next
source (can be either “hard” or “soft”)
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source and
fades-from-black to next source

b. For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following (you
cannot do both):
• In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during which you
want the transition to occur. RouterMapper will automatically
adjust the number of corresponding seconds it will take.
OR
• Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the number of
seconds it will take for the transition to occur. RouterMapper will
automatically adjust the number of corresponding frames it will
take.

Caution
Audio transition settings are disabled if all PGM 1 and PGM
2 channels have audio processing set to OFF (i.e., the
audio processing check box not selected). See “Audio
Processing Settings” on page 387 for more information.

5. Make one of the following selections:

• Click Advanced to access advanced audio processing settings. The
Advanced button will take you to these audio processing settings tabs:
Audio Gain, Audio Effect, and Audio Source. See page 387 for more
detailed information on using the advanced audio gain, audio effect, and
audio source tabs for more precise audio processing settings.
• Click Restore Defaults to set all transition settings back to the factory
defaults.
• Click Set to send the changes you made in the Transition tab to the frame.
• Click Refresh to reset the tab entries to their current setting from the
frame.
6. Click OK to leave the Parametric Settings dialog box.

386 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Audio Processing Settings

The audio processing settings allow you to have increased control over
individual audio channels. These settings provide you with selections beyond
the basic audio transition types provided in the Transition tab. To access the
advanced settings, click Advanced on the Transition tab.

Audio Effects

Figure 9-67. Audio Effects Tab

The Audio Effects tab allows you change the embedded audio for a given video
signal on the designated output.
To control the audio effects, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
• Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.
2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control. (Always make
sure that the Audio Processing check box is selected.) Each group contains
four separate channels.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 387

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

3. At the Channel 1 & 2 drop-down list box, select the type of channel signal
effect you want. (See Table 9-11 for a list of effects and their corresponding
results.)

Table 9-11. Channel Signal Effects

Channel Signal Result
Copy Left to Right Copies signal from left channel to
right channel
Copy Right to Left Copies signal from right channel to
left channel
Mute Channel No audio signal
None Allows audio group to pass through
both channel pairs without audio
effects; any transitions, levels, and/or
sources will take effect (embedding
and de-embedding will take place)
Swap Left and Right Switches signal from left channel to
right channel

4. At the Channel 3 & 4 drop-down list box, select the type of channel signal
effect you want. (See Table 9-11 for a list of effects and their corresponding
results.)

Note
If you do not want to include the audio group in the output’s
audio processing, deselect (uncheck) the Audio Group
Present In Output” check box.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each group that you want to adjust.
6. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Effects tab to the
frame, or click Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default settings from
the frame.
7. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings dialog box.

388 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Audio Gain

Figure 9-68. Audio Gain Tab

The Audio Gain tab allows you more precise control of the strength of the audio
signal. To control the audio gain, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
• Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.
2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control. (Always make
sure that the Audio Processing check box is selected.) Each group contains
four separate channels.
3. For each channel in the group1 that you want to adjust, move the
corresponding slider bar up and down. You can adjust the slider bar between
6 dbV (the maximum voltage expressed in decibels you can choose) and
-INF (negative infinity, or no audio output). Any negative number (that is, a
number less than 0) should be preceded by a minus sign.
OR

1A
group consists of four audio channels, as defined in SMPTE 272M and SMPTE 299M.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 389

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

If you know the exact amount by which you want to increase or decrease the
gain, enter the number into the box at the bottom of the slider bar.

Note
If you do not want to include the audio group in the output’s
audio processing, deselect (uncheck) the “Audio Group
Present In Output” check box.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each group that you want to adjust.
5. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Gain tab to the frame,
or click Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default settings from the
frame.
6. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings dialog box.

Audio Source

Figure 9-69. Audio Source Tab

The Audio Source tab allows you to map input signals of the audio channels to a
video signal. To set the audio source(s) for a video signal, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select PGM 1 (if the matrix’s physical
output is 1) or PGM 2 (if the matrix’s physical output is 5):
2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control. (Always make
sure that the Audio Processing check box is selected.) Each group contains
four separate channels.

390 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

3. From the Channel 1 drop-down list box, select the audio channel for the
video source you selected at the Transitions tab. This will map the input
signals of audio channels on a video signal to the audio channels of the
output.

Note
If you do not want to include the audio group in the output’s
audio processing, deselect (uncheck) the Audio Group
Present In Output” check box.

4. Repeat step 3 for each channel and/or group that you want to adjust.
5. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Source tab to the
frame, or click Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default settings from
the frame.
6. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings dialog box.

Panacea Web Panels Tab (Panacea Frames Only)

Figure 9-70. Web Panels Tab for Panacea Web Configurations

For information about adding and editing a Panacea web configuration, see
“Adding Web Router Application Devices” on page 212.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 391

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Panacea Web Users Tab (Panacea Frames Only)

Figure 9-71. Web Users Tab for Panacea Web Configurations

For information about adding users for a Panacea web configuration, see
“Setting Up Web Users” on page 221.

392 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10
Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Overview
Use the Edit Button Function dialog box1 to assign functions to user-definable
selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels. The following topics are
explained in this chapter:
• “Assigning Button Functions” on page 394
• “Creating an Alarm Key” on page 413
• “Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key” on page 412
• “Creating a Category/Index Key” on page 399
• “Creating a Chop Key” on page 429
• “Creating a Command Select Key” on page 404
• “Creating a Crosspoint Select Key” on page 398
• “Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key” on page 422
• “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 397
• “Creating a Function Key” on page 406
• “Creating a Lock Key” on page 410
• “Creating an On-Air Swap Key” on page 431
• “Creating a Page Key” on page 409
• “Creating a Panel Status Key” on page 408
• “Creating a Parametric Key” on page 424
• “Creating a Protect Key” on page 411
• “Creating a Salvo Select Key” on page 400
• “Creating a Source Alarm Select Key” on page 420
• “Creating a Source Select Key” on page 396

1 You
can access the Edit Button Function dialog box by right-clicking on any button at the Edit
Panel dialog box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 393

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Assigning Button Functions

Figure 10-1. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog includes a drop-down list box that is used to
select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to
define the specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties
group will depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The
functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
1. If you have not done so already, set up a control panel. (See Chapter 5:
“Adding Router Control Panels” for information).
2. In the RouterMapper main menu, highlight the control panel name, and then
click Edit. The Edit Panel dialog box opens.
3. Click on the tab (e.g., Sources, Destinations, Auxiliary Keys) that contains
the buttons for which you want to assign functions.
4. Right-click on the specific button for which you want to assign a function.
The Edit Button Function dialog box (Figure 10-1 on page 394) opens.
5. Select the function from the drop-down list box. The Properties group on
the Edit Button Function dialog box will change when the selection is made.
Possible button functions are shown in Table 10-1.
6. Select the button properties from the options available in the Properties
group, and then click Done to return to the Edit Panel dialog box.

394 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Table 10-1. Button Functions Programmable via RouterMapper

Control Panels
(• = available)

RCP-16×1SBAp

RCP-12×2BAp
RCP-ABA
Button Functions

RCPp
Alarm (page 413) — Monitors specified hardware alarms • • •
Breakaway-Follow (page 412) — Functions as either breakaway or follow button • • •
Category (page 399) — Functions as additional category/index key •
Chop (page 429) — Allows two sources to be rapidly switched on one destination, at a
predetermined or custom rate (RCP-ABAe and RCPp-LCD panels only)
• •
Command (page 404) — Functions as a command key • • • •
Crosspoint (page 398) — Functions as a crosspoint select key • •
Destination (page 397) — Functions as additional destination select key • • •
Destination Alarm (page 422) — Allows use of a push button panel to select logical
destination(s) for logical crosspoint switch(es); provides capability to monitor specified • • •
hardware alarms
Function Button (page 406) — Functions as a function button • • • •
Locks (page 410) — Prevents all users from changing the destination
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support this feature.)
• • • •
None — Disabled • • • •
On-Air Swap (page 431) — Exchanges sources on one destination with sources on another
destination
•
Page (page 409) — Functions as a page key •
Panel Status (page 408) — Functions as a panel status key • •
Parametric (page 424) — Allows selection of individual parameters affecting inputs and
outputs (currently available for P-R(L)CP-32×8CQp panels only)
•
Protects (page 411) — Prevents all users from changing the destination except the user who
initiated the Protect • • • •
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support this feature.)
Salvo (page 400) — Functions as a salvo select key • • • •
Source (page 396) — Functions as an additional source select key • •
Source Alarm Select (page 420) — Allows use of a push button panel to select logical
source(s) for logical crosspoint switch(es); provides capability to monitor specified hardware • • •
alarms

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 395

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Source Select Key

1. Select the Source option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
2. The Edit Button Function dialog box opens.
3. Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the source to
associate with the key.
4. Scroll through the list and select the desired source.
5. Click Done.

Figure 10-2. Creating an Additional Source Select Key

Note
On RCPp series panels, you will also have an option to
select Status-Only or Joystick Override (these options are
disabled on RCP-ABA series panels).

• Use a Status-Only Source Select key to create a monitoring panel that is

intended to display, but not control, the status of a router. If Status Only is
checked, the button will light when the source is active, but the router
will not be affected if you press the button.
• Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary changes. While
you hold down the button, the source is switched. When you release the
button, the router will switch back to the previous source.

396 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Destination Select Key

Note
If this is the only change or the last change to be made to the panel, you
can download the new settings by clicking Download on the Edit Panel
screen. To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.

1. Select the Destination option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-3. Creating an Additional Destination Select Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select the
destination that is associated with the key.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list and select the desired destination.
4. Click Done.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 397

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Crosspoint Select Key

A crosspoint is a connection between a specific source and a specific
destination. Whenever a crosspoint key is pressed on an ABA panel, the
associated source and destination are connected.
To create an additional Crosspoint Select key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Crosspoint option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-4. Creating an Additional Crosspoint Select Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select the
crosspoint destination.
3. Scroll through the list and select the desired destination.
4. Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the crosspoint
source.
5. Scroll through the list and select the desired source.
6. Click Done.

Note
On RCPp series panels, you will also have an option to select
Status-Only or Joystick Override (these options are disabled on
RCP-ABA series panels).

• Use a Status-Only Crosspoint Select key to create a monitoring panel that

is intended to display the status of a router, but not control it. If Status
Only is checked, the button will light when the crosspoint is active, but
the router will not be affected if you press the button.

398 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

• Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary changes. While

you hold down the button, the crosspoint is switched. When you release
the button, the router will switch back to the previous crosspoint.

Creating a Category/Index Key

(ABA Series Panels Only)
Note
For more detailed information on category indexing, see “Understanding
and Managing Category/Indexing” on page 276.

1. Select the Category option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-5. Creating an Additional Category/index Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Category box to select the
category to associate with the key.
3. Scroll through the list and select the desired category.
4. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Index box to select the
index that is associated with the key.
5. Scroll through the list and select the desired index.
6. Click Done.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 399

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Salvo Select Key

A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that occur simultaneously.
Salvos can be used to store commonly used, complex router setups involving
multiple destinations for instant recall with one button press. A salvo could be
created, for example, that would send a test signal to every monitor in an Edit
Suite. Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints defined by the salvo.
Other crosspoint connections in the system are not affected.
To create a Salvo Select key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Salvo option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-6. Creating a Salvo Select Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Salvo box to select the
salvo that is associated with the key.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list and select the desired salvo.
4. Click Done.

Note
In newer version control panels, the salvo button will light up (tally)
whenever the crosspoints that are part of the salvo are initiated, no
matter where the crosspoint Take occurs.

If any of the salvo’s crosspoints change status, the salvo button light will
turn off. For more information about control panels, see the
Programmable Panel Series Configuration and Operation Manual.

400 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Adding or Editing a Salvo

When creating a Salvo Select key, new salvos may be added and existing salvos
may be edited from the Edit Button Function dialog.
• To add a new salvo, click Add.
• To edit an existing salvo, click Edit.
The Salvo Editor dialog box opens (see Figure 10-7).

Figure 10-7. Adding a New Salvo

The Salvo Editor is an off-line RouterWorks matrix panel. The sources and
destinations in the database are displayed as a row of control buttons along the
top and right sides of the panel (sources on the top, and destinations on the side).
Each control button includes the source or destination name and icon, although
names and icons may not be readable in full-screen view. For greater legibility,
any portion of the panel may be enlarged using the Zoom-In button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 401

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Crosspoints on the panel are indicated via colored markers at the intersection of
the source and destination lines. The markers are displayed as pie-shaped
wedges that correspond to the level colors (for information on assigning level
colors, see page 227). For example:
• If a video level is assigned the color blue, a blue marker at the intersection
of a source and destination line indicates that the source is connected to the
destination on the video level.
• If more than one colored marker is present at an intersection, the source is
connected on each level displayed.
• If a source is selected on all levels in the system (AFV switching), the
marker appears as a multicolored circle, consisting of all colors of the active
levels.
To select a crosspoint on the Salvo Editor screen, follow these steps:
1. Select the level(s) on which the source should be connected by clicking on
the appropriate level buttons (the level buttons are located at the top of the
dialog box). If a button is colored, the level is enabled and the source is
connected on that level.
2. Click the intersection of the source and destination lines. A colored marker
appears.
A salvo may be defined in one of several ways. The Capture option takes a
“snapshot” view of the current state of the router and stores it as a salvo. This
salvo can then be edited (crosspoints added or deleted) as needed.
A salvo may also be created by copying an existing salvo. The copied salvo may
serve as a starting point for the definition of the new salvo. Crosspoints can be
added or deleted as necessary.
A salvo may also be created “from scratch” by selecting the crosspoints (the
sources and destinations) on the off-line Salvo Editor panel.
To capture the existing state of the router, follow these steps:
1. Assign an appropriate name to the new salvo by highlighting the default
name contained in the Name Edit box and typing a new name in the box.
2. Click Capture at the Salvo Editor main menu. The current router crosspoint
assignments are copied to the off-line Salvo Editor panel.
3. Edit the salvo displayed on the off-line panel by adding or deleting
crosspoint assignments as necessary.
4. Click Done to exit the Salvo Editor.
To add a crosspoint to a salvo, follow these steps:
Click at the intersection of the source and destination lines. The crosspoint is
added to the salvo.
To delete a crosspoint from a salvo, follow these steps:
1. Position the cursor over the crosspoint to be deleted and click the right
mouse button. The Lock/Protect/Clear shortcut menu opens.
2. Select Clear. The crosspoint is deleted.

402 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

OR
Select Clear All at the Salvo Editor dialog box to clear all crosspoints.
To copy an existing salvo, follow these steps:
1. Click Copy at the Salvo Editor dialog box. The Copy Salvo dialog box
opens.
2. In the Copy Salvo From box, select the salvo that is copied to the new salvo.
The new salvo name will already be displayed in the Copy To box.
3. Do one of the following:
• Click Overwrite to completely overwrite any crosspoints previously
selected in the new salvo. Any previously existing crosspoints are deleted
from the new salvo.
• Click Merge to merge the two salvos. Existing crosspoints from both
salvos are stored in the new salvo. No crosspoints are deleted.

Figure 10-8. Copying a Salvo

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 403

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Command Select Key

The Command Select key allows you to assign an arbitrary X-Y command to a
panel’s key. For details on X-Y commands, refer to your Harris Serial Protocol
Reference, or contact Customer Service.
To create a Command Select key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Command option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-9. Creating a Command Select Key

2. Select the command that is associated with the key by clicking on the arrow
located to the right of the Select Command box.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list.
4. Select the desired command.
5. Click Done.

Adding, Editing, or Deleting Commands

To add a command, follow these steps:
1. Click Add Command. A default name appears in the Edit Name box.
2. Type over the default name in the Edit Name box with a new name.
3. Select the type of command string you wish to use (ASCII or Hex) by
clicking on the appropriate radio button.
4. Enter the command string in the Edit Command box.
To edit a command, follow these steps:
1. Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to the right
of the Select Command box.

404 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

2. Scroll through the list of choices.

3. Select the command to be edited.
4. Highlight the name and/or command string and type over with the new
information.
To delete a command, follow these steps:
1. Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to the right
of the Select Command box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the command to be deleted.
4. Click Delete.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 405

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Function Key

Note
In the RCP-IDe and RCP-12×2BAp panels, several radio button
selections are “greyed” to indicate that they are not available as an
option.

1. Select the Function option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-10. Creating a Function Key

2. Select the function that is associated with the key by clicking on the
appropriate radio button. Available options are shown in Table 10-2 on
page 407.

406 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Table 10-2. Edit Button Function Key Options

Option Description
Take Executes any preset crosspoint assignments
Panel Enable When enabled, causes the panel to function
normally; when disabled, source polls are
performed, but no crosspoint changes are made
Shift Requires you to press the <Shift> key to fire a salvo
(to prevent inadvertent execution of salvos)
Clear All Clears all preset crosspoint assignments
Back Space Clears the last preset crosspoint assignment entered
(not available on RCP-12×2BAp)
Scroll Up Increments the source by one
Scroll Down Decrements the source by one
Window Select* Allows you to select which panel window (display)
you want to preset
Window Clear * Allows you to clear any presets from a panel window
(display)
Page Up† Increments set-up button pages by one
Page Down† Decrements set-up button pages by one
Destination Status† Displays the status and bitmap of a particular
destination
Source Status† Displays the status and bitmap of the lowest level
source connected to a particular destination
* ABA panels only
† RCP-IDe panels only

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 407

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Panel Status Key

A Panel Status key is used to indicate whether the control panel is connected to
a routing switcher. With a Panel Status key configured, the router system is
polled periodically to determine if the panel is connected. If the key on the
control panel is lit, the panel is connected to a router. If the key is not lit, the
panel is not connected to a router. Pressing a Panel Status key will have no
effect on the router.
To create a Panel Status key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Panel Status option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-11. Creating a Panel Status Key

Note
Polling the system uses bandwidth, so the time interval should be as long
as possible to save bandwidth for other operations such as firing salvos.

2. In the Poll Interval list box, select the time interval in seconds at which the
system should be polled. (For example, if “5” is selected, the router is
polled every 5 seconds.)
3. Click Done.

408 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Page Key

(ABA Series Panels Only)
Although ABA panels have only four display windows and can status a limited
number of levels at one time, it is possible to create multiple pages, each with a
different definition. For example, one page on an ABA-XY panel might be
configured to display the video, audio and time code levels separately (one in
each window); a second page could be configured to display the video in one
window, the left and right channels of audio in one window, and the time code
in the third window. To create multiple pages, first create a Page key.
To create a Page key, follow these steps:

Note
You can also create Page keys by double-clicking on any selection button
displayed on the control panel bitmap on the Windows + Paging tab.

1. Select the Page option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-12. Creating a Page Key

2. Click the up or down buttons to the right of the Number of Pages box to
select the number of pages to be included on this panel.
3. Click the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Page Number box to
select the page number that is to be associated with this selection key.
4. Scroll through the list of choices and select the appropriate page number.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 409

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Lock Key

Note
Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the
Lock feature.

The Locks option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent

changes to the Destination. Locking a destination prevents anyone from
changing the Destination.
To create a Lock key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Locks option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-13. Creating a Lock Key

2. Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio button (any

features not applicable to your panel are greyed out).
• Choose XY to allow a panel to lock the current selected destination.
• Choose Dual to allow a panel to lock up to two specified destinations.

410 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Protect Key

Note
Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the
Protect feature.

The Protects option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent

changes to the Destination. With the Protects feature enabled, whoever enabled
the Protect is able to change the destination at will, but other users are prevented
from changing that destination until the Protect is removed.
To create a Protect key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Protects option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-14. Creating a Protect Key

2. Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio button (any

features not applicable to a panel are greyed out).
• Choose XY to allow a panel to protect the current selected destination.
• Choose Dual to allow a panel to protect up to two specified destinations.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 411

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

The Breakaway/Follow option defines a selection key to function as either a
Breakaway or a Follow key.
• A Breakaway key allows the operator at a push-button panel to select
only the levels assigned to the button. For example, if a video breakaway
button is pressed, and then a source is selected, the source is connected to
the current destination, but only on the video level. The audio level is
unaffected.
• A Follow key allows the operator to return the panel to AFV mode with a
single key press.
To create a Breakaway/Follow key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Break-away/Follow option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-15. Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

2. Click the appropriate radio button to select either Breakaway or Follow.

3. For a breakaway button, also select the levels that are controlled by the
button.
4. The lowest level is statused.

412 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating an Alarm Key

(Harris-Branded RCP Panels, RCP-IDe, RCP-32×8CQp, 16×2CS,
and 32×2CS Panels Only)
The Alarm option allows you to monitor specified hardware alarms.
To create an alarm key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-16. Creating an Alarm Key

2. In the Edit Name box, type over the default name with a new name.
3. Click Configure.... The Edit Source Alarm list box will open to allow you
to define an alarm definition for the new alarm key. (See “Using the Alarm
Editor” for more information about using this function.)
4. After the Alarm Editor list box returns you to the Edit Button Function list
box, click OK to accept all changes and additions.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 413

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Using the Alarm Editor

Figure 10-17. Edit Source Alarm List Box

The Edit Source Alarm list box shows the alarm type(s) for an associated alarm
key. That alarm key is monitored by the push-button panel.
The list box also displays the following types of information about existing
items:
• Device ID
• Device type
• Level
• Alarm type
• Alarm description

Adding Alarm Types

To add an alarm type, follow these steps:
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, click Add.... The Add Alarm Entry
dialog box opens. (The Add Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a “General”
detection style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style (Figure 10-18) for all panels
(except ABA panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire
frame.
• Use the “Extended” detection style (see Figure 10-19 on page 417) when
you want to monitor alarms for a specific module’s behavior.

Note
The “Extended” detection style currently works only with Panacea or
Integrator Gold modules.

414 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

To use the General detection style, follow these steps:

Figure 10-18. Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (General Detection Style
Selected)

a. Leave the radio button selection at “General.”

b. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box, and then
select the Level that is associated with the alarm type.
c. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and
then select the frame address that is associated with the alarm type.
d. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box:

Table 10-3. Alarm Types

Alarm Type Description
0x1 Fan 1 failure
0x2 Fan 2 failure
0x4 Power supply 1 failure
0x8 Power supply 2 failure
0x100 System power supply 1 failure
0x200 System power supply 2 failure
0x400 System power supply 3 failure

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 415

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Table 10-3. Alarm Types

Alarm Type Description
0x800 System power supply 4 failure
0x1000 System fan 1 failure
0x2000 System fan 2 failure
0x4000 System fan 3 failure
0x8000 System fan 4 failure
0x10000 System fan 5 failure
0x20000 System fan 6 failure
0x40000 XY bus 1 error
0x80000 XY bus 2 error
0x100000 No flash
0x200000 Old database

Note
Clicking on a second alarm type will not deselect the first
alarm type you chose. You must deselect an Alarm type
by clicking on its name so that it is no longer highlighted.

e. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
f. Click OK until you return to the RouterMapper main menu.

416 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

To use the Extended detection style, follow these steps:

Figure 10-19. Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (Extended Detection Style
Selected)

a. Click the radio button selection next to “Extended.”

b. Click the arrow to the right of the Level list box, and then select the
Level that is associated with the alarm type.
c. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID list box, and then select the
frame address that is associated with the alarm type.
d. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type list box, and then select
the frame type that is associated with the alarm type.

Note
The “Frame Type” list box currently lists only Panacea or
Integrator Gold.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 417

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

e. Click the arrow to the right of the Module list box, and then select the
module type that is associated with the alarm type.

Note
Clicking on a second alarm type will not deselect the
first alarm type you chose. You must deselect an Alarm
type by clicking on its name so that it is no longer
highlighted.

f. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.

Extended alarm values range from decimal number 0 to 255. The actual
meaning of each alarm value is defined differently, depending on the
module type that is “stuffed” in the frame. See the specific frame's
configuration and operation manual for details.
g. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
h. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
i. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
j. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Editing Alarm Types

Note
The Edit Alarm Entry dialog boxes look almost exactly like the Add Alarm
Entry dialog boxes. Only the dialog box title is different. Figure 10-18 on
page 415 and Figure 10-19 on page 417 show what these dialog boxes
look like.

The process for editing an alarm type is similar to that for adding an alarm type.
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that you want to
edit.
2. Click Edit.... The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm
Entry dialog box defaults to a “General” detection style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except ABA
panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire frame.

Note
The “Extended” detection style currently works only with
Panacea or Integrator Gold modules.

• Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor alarms for
a specific module’s behavior.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box, and then select
the Level that is associated with the alarm type.

418 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

4. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then
select the frame address that is associated with the alarm type.

Note
The “Frame Type” list box currently lists only Panacea or
Integrator Gold.

5. (If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to the right
of the Frame Type drop-down list box, and then select the frame type that is
associated with the alarm type.
6. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
7. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
8. Click OK until you return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Deleting Alarm Types

To delete an alarm type, follow these steps:
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that you want to
delete. To select more than one alarm types, using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the alarm entries.)
2. Click Delete. You will receive a system prompt that asks you if you want to
continue.
3. Click Yes. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
5. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all alarm types, follow these steps:
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, click Delete All. You will receive a
system prompt that asks you if you want to continue.
2. Click Yes. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 419

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

Note
This option is not available for ABA panels.

The Source Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a logical
source for a logical crosspoint switch. It also provides you with the capability to
monitor specified hardware alarms.
To create a Source Alarm key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Source Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-20. Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

2. Click the arrow located on the right of the Source box, and then select the
desired source.
3. To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name box.
4. Click Configure.... The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit
Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a “General” detection style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except ABA
panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire frame.
• Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor alarms for
a specific module’s behavior.

Note
The “Extended” detection style currently works only with
Panacea or Integrator Gold modules.

420 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

5. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box, and then select
the Level that is associated with the alarm type.
Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then
select the frame address that is associated with the alarm type.
(If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to the right
of the Frame Type drop-down list box, and then select the frame type that is
associated with the alarm type.

Note
The “Frame Type” list box currently lists only Panacea or
Integrator Gold.

6. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.

7. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.

Note
Clicking on a second alarm type will not de-select the first
alarm type you chose. You must deselect an Alarm type by
clicking on its name so that it is no longer highlighted.

8. Click OK until you return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 421

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

Note
This option is not available for ABA panels.

The Destination Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a
logical destination for a logical crosspoint switch. It also provides you with the
capability to monitor specified hardware alarms.
To create a Destination Alarm key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Destination Alarm option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-21. Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

2. Click the arrow located on the right of the Destination box.

3. Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired destination.
4. To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name box.
5. Click Configure.... The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit
Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a “General” detection style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except ABA
panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire frame.
• Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor alarms for
a specific module’s behavior.

Note
The “Extended” detection style currently works only with
Panacea or Integrator Gold modules.

422 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

6. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box, and then select
the Level that is associated with the alarm type.
7. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then
select the frame address that is associated with the alarm type.
(If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to the right
of the Frame Type drop-down list box, and then select the frame type that is
associated with the alarm type.

Note
The “Frame Type” list box currently lists only Panacea or
Integrator Gold.

8. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.

Note
Clicking on a second alarm type will not de-select the first
alarm type you chose. You must deselect an Alarm type by
clicking on its name so that it is no longer highlighted.

9. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Destination Alarm list box.
10. Click OK until you return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 423

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Parametric Key

Note
If a selected frame is not a Panacea clean switch/quiet switch router, the
only two options that are available are signal presence (source) and
signal presence (destination).

The Parametric option allows you to set up individual parameters affecting

inputs and outputs for Platinum frames and Panacea frames.
To create a Parametric key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Parametric option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list
box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-22. Creating a Parametric Key

2. In the Edit Name dialog box, enter a name for the parametric key you are
creating.
3. To access the Parametric Editing Setup main display, choose one of the
following options:
• Click on Configure... in the Control combo box if you want to create or
edit a list of parametric settings assigned to control buttons. (If the
associated frame does not have clean/quiet switch routing capabilities,
the Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Figure 10-24 on page 426)
will only allow you to change the Frame ID. All other selections for that
frame are greyed out.)
• Click on Blink... or Monitor... in the Monitor combo box if you want to
create or edit a list of parametric settings assigned to monitoring/alarm or
blinking/alarm buttons on a control panel.

424 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

4. The Parametric Editing Setup list box opens. The Parametric Editing Setup
list box will open to allow you to define a controlling, monitoring, or
blinking setup for the new control key. (See “Using the Parametric Editing
Setup Capability” for more information about using this function.)
5. After the Parametric Editing Setup list box returns you to the Edit Button
Function list box, click OK to accept all changes and additions.

Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability

Figure 10-23. Parametric Editing Setup List Box

Note
The parametric setup list boxes for configuring, monitoring, and blinking
look almost exactly alike. Only the dialog box title is different.

The Parametric Editing Setup list box shows the parametric settings for an
associated control panel key. That key is monitored by the pus-button panel. If
you chose Monitor... or Blinking... setups, the control panel will report alarm
conditions via a steady or a blinking light on the button. The list box also
displays the following types of information about existing items:
• Frame ID
• Parameter
• Matrix/Level
• Input/Output
• Parameter
• Condition
• Value
• Logical Operator (Blink and Monitoring options only)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 425

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Adding Parametric Settings

To add a parametric setting, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Add.... The Edit Parametric
Information dialog box (Figure 10-24) opens.

Figure 10-24. Edit Parametric Information Dialog Box

2. From the Frame ID box, select the Platinum or Panacea router associated
with this control panel button.
3. From the Parameter box, select the appropriate parametric setting.
Descriptions of the parameters available for the different setups
(Configure, Monitor, or Blinking) are shown in Table 10-4 on page 426.
4. From the Matrix box, select the matrix ID number that corresponds to the
one you selected at the Transitions tab (see Figure 9-66 on page 383).
5. From the Input box, select the desired physical input. The drop-down list
contains an entry for each of the inputs currently available on the level
selected. (This option may not appear for all Parametric selections.)
Panacea clean/quiet switch routers are limited to 16 inputs.
Table 10-4. Setup Mode Parameter List
Mode
Parameter Description
Configure Blink/Monitor
Signal presence (source) Source signal is present or not No Yes
present
Signal presence (destination) Destination signal is present or No Yes
not present
Reference type Sync reference types No Yes
Clean switch: source in time Source is locked and timed-up No Yes
with the external sync reference

426 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Table 10-4. Setup Mode Parameter List (Continued)

Mode
Parameter Description
Configure Blink/Monitor
Clean switch: source H timing Source is locked, but is x No Yes
amount of pixels out of time
with the external sync reference
Clean switch: source V timing Source is locked, but is x No Yes
amount of lines out of time with
the external sync reference
Clean switch: invoke Send a command to the QS to Yes Yes
auto-timing perform an autotime to
determine the timing of the
sources against the external sync
reference input
Reclocker data rate Rate at which data is reclocked Yes Yes
(see Table 9-7 on page 384 and
Table 9-8 on page 384 for actual
duration frequencies)
Reclocker lock Reclocker is locked to a set data No Yes
rate
Quiet switch: reference status Indicates to RouterMapper or No Yes
the RS-232 port that a reference
is present, and what format it is
Quiet switch: reference Indicates to RouterMapper or No Yes
frequency the RS-232 port which external
sync reference type is present;
this is a combination of the
number of lines, interlaced or
progressive scanning (i or p),
and the frame refresh rate in
Hertz (Hz); e.g., 1080i/59.94Hz,
or 720p/50Hz
Video transition type Selects type of video transition Yes Yes
from current source to next
source (see Table 9-9 on
page 385 for a list of video
transition types and their
corresponding functions)
Video transition duration Number of frames during which Yes Yes
a selected video transition type
will occur
Audio transition type Selects type of audio transition yes Yes
from current source to next
source (see Table 9-10 on
page 386 for a list of audio
transition types and their
corresponding functions)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 427

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Table 10-4. Setup Mode Parameter List (Continued)

Mode
Parameter Description
Configure Blink/Monitor
Audio transition duration Number of frames during which Yes Yes
a selected audio transition type
will occur
Auto transition Reserved for future use – –
Audio effects Changes the embedded audio for Yes Yes
a given video signal on the
designated output (see Table
9-11 for a list of effects and their
corresponding results)
Audio gain Allows more precise control of Yes Yes
the strength of the audio signal
Audio source Allows mapping input signals of Yes Yes
the audio channels to a video
signal

6. From the Output box, select the physical output location on the frame back
panel. (This option may not appear for all Parametric selections.) Panacea
clean/quiet switch routers are limited to 2 outputs – PGM1 and PGM2.
7. From the Condition box, select the monitoring condition you want to
associate with this control panel button. The conditions listed will vary,
depending on whether you selected Configure, Blink, or Monitor at the
Edit Button Function drop-down list box.(In addition, the conditions listed
may or may not be appropriate for your selected parameter.)
• If you are in Configure mode, choose the appropriate condition.
• If you are in Monitor or Blink mode, choose the appropriate
mathematical operator.
8. From the Value box, select the item value that corresponds to the Condition
you chose.
9. (Monitor and Blink modes only) From the Operator box, choose the
appropriate Boolean operator that corresponds to the Condition you chose.
10. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
11. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Editing Parametric Settings

To edit a parametric setting, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Edit.... The Edit Parametric
Information dialog box (Figure 10-24) opens.
2. Change the setting for the list box you want to edit. Descriptions of the list
box drop-down options are described on page 426 through page 428.

428 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Deleting Parametric Settings

To delete a parametric setting, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, highlight the parametric setting
that you want to delete. To select more than one setting, using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
while selecting the setting entries.)
2. Click Delete. The setting will disappear from the list box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all parametric settings, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Delete All. The settings will
disappear from the list box.
2. Click Yes. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Creating a Chop Key

(RCP-ABA and RCPp-LCD only)
The Chop key allows two sources to be rapidly switched on one destination. A
Chop alternately switches the controlled Destination (on all applicable levels)
between two Sources, in a repetitive manner. Applications include signal timing
and camera matching.
To create a Chop key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Chop option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The following dialog box opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 429

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Figure 10-25. Creating a Chop Key

2. From the Predefined Chop Rates drop-down list box, select one of the
following:
• Select Fast for a switch rate of 10 frames per second.
• Select Medium for a switch rate of 20 frames per second.
• Select Slow for a switch rate of 30 frames per second.
• For a customized switch rate (that is, a rate different from 10, 20, or 30
frames per second):
• Select Custom.
• Set the switch rate you desire in the Chop Rate spin box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

430 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating an On-Air Swap Key

(RCP-12×2BAp only)
The Swap function allows you to take the sources on one destination and
exchange them with sources on the other destination. This function enables you
to use one destination as a preview (or cue) bus and the other as an on-air bus.
To create an On-Air Swap key, follow these steps:
1. Select the On-Air Swap option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box. The following dialog box opens.

Figure 10-26. Creating an On-Air Swap Key

2. Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination A icon box. A
drop-down list containing icons for currently defined destinations opens.
3. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for Destination A.
4. Click the destination you want to swap the resources from.
5. Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination B icon box. A
drop-down list containing icons for currently defined destinations opens.
6. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for Destination B.
7. Click the desired destination you want to swap the resources to.
To disable this function, select None from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 431

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

432 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11
Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Overview
Note
To determine which panel type you are using, refer to “Models” on page
434.

The following topics are explained in this chapter:

• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 439
• “Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key” on page
447
• “Clearing Selection Key Assignments” on page 450
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 441
• “Editing Details of a Panel Definition” on page 451
• “Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel” on page 443
• “Moving a Selection Key” on page 441

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 433

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Models
The RCP-ABA (1RU) is available in three models: the XY, the SB, and the
AFV/MB models. These panels differ in appearance and functionality, but use
similar configuration procedures. Configuration information in this chapter
applies to all 1RU models, except where noted.

ABA(1)-XY Models
The ABA(1)-XY models provide X-Y operation and source selection with 4
levels of breakaway. (The ABA1EXYp contains an Ethernet connector for use
with CCS Gateway products or with network-ready routers). The panel includes
five display windows (one destination, four sources) with associated select
keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys, and 16 user-definable destination/
source select keys.

Source selection on Operator-definable Take / Clear keys

Current Destination 3 independent Level Source/Destination TAKE executes selection
selection display groups selection keys CLEAR aborts selection

Destination Source
Status
BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset

XYp
ABAAlphanumeric
BreakAway

User-definable Category or Index

function keys Favorite Key designator
designator

Figure 11-1. ABA-XYp Model

ABA1EXYp X-Y bus control panels simultaneously provide control and status
of 4 destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display when the
panel is initially configured. Both sources and destinations are selected on the
front of the control panel, while the destination and sources may be monitored
in the display screens. Sources may be switched on all levels simultaneously
(AFV switching), or independently (breakaway switching).

434 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Operator-definable
Source/Destination
selection keys Take / Clear keys
Current Destination TAKE executes selection
selection display CLEAR aborts selection

Destination Source
Status
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select XYp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear ABAAlphanumeric 9 0
Dest BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 All

Scroll User-definable Source Selection on Category or Index

knob function keys 3 independent Level Favorite Key designator
groups designator

Figure 11-2. ABA1E-XYp Model

ABA(1)-SB, ABA1ESBp Models

The ABA(1)-SB models provide control of a single destination with 4 levels of
breakaway. (The ABA1ESBp contains an Ethernet connector for use with CCS
Gateway products or with network-ready routers). The panel includes one
destination display window, four source display windows with associated select
keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys, and 16 user-definable source select
keys.

Take / Clear Keys

Source selection Source selection Operator-definable TAKE executes selection
display, 1st Level display, 3rd Level Source selection keys CLEAR aborts selection

Source

Enable CAM 1 Tone Tone ----- Status

Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

SBp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear T/C Clear ABAAlphanumeric 9 0
BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 All

Function Source selection Source selection Category or Index

keys display, 2nd Level display, 4th Level Favorite Key designator
designator

Figure 11-3. ABA-SBp Model

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 435

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Take / Clear keys

Scroll Source selection Source selection Operator-definable TAKE executes selection
knob display, 1st Level display, 3rd Level Source selection keys CLEAR aborts selection

Source
Status
Enable CAM 1 Tone Tone ----- Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

SBp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear T/C Clear ABAAlphanumeric
BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 9 0 All

Function Source selection Source selection Category or Index

Keys display, 2nd Level display, 4th Level Favorite Key designator
designator

Figure 11-4. ABA1-SBp Model

ABA1ESBp single bus control panels control and display the status of 1 router
destination. The controlled destination is assigned to the control panel when it is
initially configured and cannot be changed from the front of the control panel.
The displays on the panel show the sources connected to the destination on each
of 4 levels. Sources may be switched on all 4 levels simultaneously (AFV
switching), or they may be switched independently (breakaway switching).

Figure 11-5. ABA1ESBp Control Panel

436 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

ABA-AFV, ABA(1)-MB, ABA1EMBp Models

The ABA-AFV and ABA(1)-MB models provide audio-follow-video (no
breakaway) source selection on 4 destinations. (ABA1EMBp contains an
Ethernet connector for use with CCS Gateway products or with network-ready
routers.) A specific destination is assigned to each of the 4 display windows
when the panel is initially configured. These destinations cannot be changed
from the front of the control panel. The source connected to each destination is
displayed in the control windows.

Source selection Source selection Take / Clear keys

display display Use-definable TAKE - Executes selection
1st destination 3rd destination Source selection keys CLEAR - Aborts selection

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4

CAM 1 DDR 1 MIX PGM VTR 1

STATUS
PRESET

AFVp
ABA Alphanumeric
BreakAway

Function Source selection Source selection Category or Index designator

keys display display Favorite Key
2nd destination 4th destination designator

Figure 11-6. ABA-AFV Model

Source selection Source selection Take / Clear keys

display, 1st display, 3rd Operator-definable TAKE executes selection
Destination Destination Source selection keys CLEAR aborts selection

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4 Status CAM SAT SAT EDIT Studio Uplink TX DDR
Enable
VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset A B C 1 2 3 4 5
TAKE

Select Select Select Select AFVp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear
Lock Lock Lock Lock ABAAlphanumeric 9 0
Dest Dest Dest Dest BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 All

Function Source selection Source selection Category or Index

keys display, 2nd display, 4th Favorite Key designator
Destination Destination designator

Figure 11-7. ABA-MBp Model

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 437

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Source selection Source selection Take / Clear keys

Scroll display, 1st display, 3rd Operator-definable TAKE executes selection
knob Destination Destination Source Selection keys CLEAR aborts selection

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4 Status CAM SAT SAT EDIT Studio Uplink TX DDR
Enable
VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset A B C 1 2 3 4 5
TAKE

Select Select Select Select AFVp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear
Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock ABAAlphanumeric 9 0 All
Dest Dest Dest Dest BreakAway D E F 6 7 8

Function Source selection Source selection Category or Index

keys display, 2nd display, 4th Favorite Key designator
Destination Destination designator

Figure 11-8. ABA1-MBp Model

ABA1EMBp multibus control panels simultaneously provide control and status

of 4 destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display when the
panel is initially configured. This destination cannot be changed from the front
of the control panel. The source connected to each destination is displayed in the
control display, and can be changed using the procedures outlined in the
following sections. Sources are switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV
switching).

Figure 11-9. ABA1EMBp Control Panel

438 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit a panel, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main menu (or click the
panel name, and then click Edit).
2. The Edit Panel dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 11-10.

Figure 11-10. Edit Panel Dialog Box

When an ABA(1) panel is added (as described in Chapter 5: “Adding Router

Control Panels”), it is created with a panel definition. This definition may be the
RouterMapper default definition (if the panel was added before the database
was edited) or it may be a unique definition based on your particular database (if
the panel was added after the database was created.)
• If the ABA(1) panel was added after the database was edited, it is
configured to access the complete set of sources and destinations included
in the database. All necessary category index keys are assigned, and the
panel is completely functional without further definition. In many cases, it
will not be necessary to proceed further with the panel editing process. If,
however, you wish to change anything in the definition (move the selection
keys, limit access to a specific set of sources or destinations, change the
auxiliary key functions, etc.), you will find the information necessary in this
chapter.
• If the panel carries the default definition, the panel will have to be manually
edited as described in “Editing Details of a Panel Definition” on pages 451
through 465. As an alternative, the panel can be deleted from the database
and then added back to the database using the Poll method (refer to “Polling

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 439

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

the Control System” starting on page 43). All necessary categories are
assigned at that time.

For information on how to Refer to

Assign a category key Pages 461-463
Assign Favorite Keys Pages 447-450
Change panel name, ID, style Pages 465-466
Delete selection key assignments Pages 450-451
Limit access to Sources and Destinations Pages 443-447
Move a selection key Pages 441-443
Reconfigure auxiliary keys Pages 451-452
Set Levels affected Pages 452-454

440 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)

Figure 11-11. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used
to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to
define the specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties
group will depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The
functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited. Table 10-1 on page 395 shows a list of button functions available for
ABA panels.
See “Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions” on page 394 for
more detailed information about the selections available with this dialog box.

Moving a Selection Key

Note
The “drag and drop” operation will not move an index definition. To move
the index definition to a new key, you must reassign the key definition.
For more information about this function, see “Editing Details of a Panel
Definition” starting on page 451.

To rearrange the order of the selection keys on an ABA(1) panel, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. A dialog box similar to that
shown in Figure 11-12 opens (the actual appearance will depend on the style of
the ABA(1) panel being edited).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 441

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To move a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Position the cursor over the selection key that is to be moved.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the selection key to its new position.
4. Release the mouse button. The selection keys appear in their new positions.

To move a selection key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the new position.
3. Drop it.

Figure 11-12. Moving a Selection Key

442 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Limiting the Sources and Destinations

Available to a Panel
When a panel is created, it will have access to the complete set of sources and
destinations in the database (assuming the panel was created after the database
was edited). It is possible, however, to limit panel access to a specific set of
sources and destinations. To change the panel access list, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. (The actual appearance will
depend on the style of the panel being edited.)

Figure 11-13. Edit Panel Dialog Box, Assignments Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 443

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel

RouterMapper allows you to assign the type of view order you want to see on
the Assignments tab list boxes and on a particular panel. You may sort in either
alphabetical or logical order.

Destination Source
Status
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select XYp VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear ABAAlphanumeric 9 0
Dest BreakAway D E F 6 7 8 All

Sorts Assignments tab lists in Sorts panel’s Source Selection and

alphabetical or logical order Destination Selection display lists
in alphabetical and logical order

Figure 11-14. Assigning View Order

• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab will display these lists in
numeric-alphabetic order.
• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical
order, the Assignments tab will display these lists in the order in which
you first assigned the Sources and Destinations.

Note
You must perform a download before this sort takes effect.
See “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58.

444 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in alphabetical order,

RouterMapper will “instruct” the panel to display Source Selection and
Destination Selection information in numeric-alphabetic order.
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in logical order, RouterMapper
will “instruct” the panel to display Source Selection and Destination
Selection information in the order in which you first assigned the Sources
and Destinations.(For more information about logical order, see
“Overview of the Edit Logical Sources Dialog” on page 230 and
“Overview of Edit Logical Destinations Dialog” on page 249).

Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations

The simplest way to deny panel access to one or two sources or destinations is
to remove them from the access list by dragging them from the This Panel list to
the Global Database list (you can also remove a source or destination using the
Delete button). Deleting a source or destination from the access list only
removes it from this panel’s definition. It does not remove it from the database
or from other panels based on this database.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source or destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source or destination from the This Panel list box to the Global
Database box (or click Delete). The source is removed from the panel list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 445

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Allowing Access to a Limited Set of

Sources or Destinations
To create a very limited set of sources and destinations to which the panel
will have access, remove all source and destination assignments from the panel
access list using Delete All. Add the desired sources and destinations to the
panel access list using Assign.
To remove all sources and destinations, follow these steps:
1. Click Delete All.
2. The sources and destinations are removed from the panel list. (The
ABA-SB model only has one destination, so it does not have a Delete All
button in the Destinations group.)
You may also use the Clear All button to delete all source and destination
assignments at one time.

Note
When viewing the Assignments dialog box on a VGA monitor, the Assign
and Delete buttons may not contain text descriptions. See Figure 11-15
for the VGA equivalents.

To add a source or destination to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source or destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag (or double-click) the source or destination from the Global Database
box and drop it in the This Panel box (or click Assign).
3. The source/destination is added to the panel list.

Figure 11-15. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

446 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Assigning a Favorite Source or

Destination to a Selection Key
On the ABA(1) panels, sources and destinations can be selected via either
Category/Index or Favorite Key selection techniques. With Favorite Key
selection, a source or destination selection requires only one key press. One of
the 16 user-definable selection keys is configured to select a specific source or
destination for rapid access. For example, a selection key could be defined as
CAM12. When pressed, the key would select Camera 12.

Destination Source
Status
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear 9 0
Dest D E F 6 7 8 All

Selects the source and presets it

into all three selection windows 1 Press the desired Favorite Source key

The TAKE key blinks to indicate a pending source selection operation

Destination Source
Status
Enable BETA 7 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear

Bkspc
Dest
Lock Video Clear A1 Clear A2 Clear 9 0 All
D E F 6 7 8

2 TAKE key confirms selection

Pressing TAKE key selects VTR 2 into all three levels

Figure 11-16. Selecting a Source via Favorite Key

Note
For information on assigning a category/index key, refer to “Assigning a
Category Key” on page 461.

To assign a favorite source or destination, click the Assignments tab at the

Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 11-17 on
page 448 opens. (The actual appearance of the dialog box will depend on the
type of ABA(1) panel being edited.)
To assign a Favorite Source to a selection key, follow these steps:
1. Select the source name from the panel list in the Source group.
2. Drag the source name to the selection key.
3. The selection key will change to reflect the new assignment.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 447

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To assign a favorite source:

1. Select the source from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 11-17. Assigning a Favorite Source

Note
A favorite source can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit
Button Function dialog box. Right-click the selection key to access the
dialog. This dialog box is described in detail in “Edit Button Function
Dialog Box” on page 441.

To assign a Favorite Destination to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Select the destination name from the panel list in the Destinations group.
The selected destination is highlighted.
2. Drag the destination name to the selection key. The selection key will
change to reflect the new assignment.

448 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To assign a favorite destination:

1. Select the destination from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 11-18. Assigning a Favorite Destination

Note
A favorite destination can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit
Button Function dialog box. Right-click the selection key to access the
dialog. This dialog box is described in detail in “Edit Button Function
Dialog Box” on page 441.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 449

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

Note
A default index assignment cannot be removed by dragging the key to
the trash can. You must manually assign the key index to None. For more
information on this function, see “Assigning a Category Key” on page
461.

To clear a single selection key assignment, drag the selection key to the trash
can. The identifying information in the selection key will disappear to indicate
that it is unassigned.

To clear a single selection:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

To clear all selections:

1. Press Clear All.

Figure 11-19. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

To clear all selection key assignments, click Clear All. The identifying
information in the selection keys will disappear to indicate that they are
unassigned.

450 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Editing Details of a Panel Definition

If you add a panel before the database is edited, it is created with a default
definition. Only two categories are assigned: “In” and “Dest.” You may either
create a panel definition “from scratch,” or delete the panel from the panel list
and add it again using the Poll method (refer to “Setting up a Database” on page
43). Adding a panel after the database is edited will cause RouterMapper to
automatically create a panel definition to match the database.
Sometimes you may also need to perform more than just the basic editing
functions described earlier in this chapter. This section contains information on
performing more complex editing functions.
To create a panel definition “from scratch,” or to create a more complex
panel definition, double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main menu
(or click the panel name, and then click Edit). The Edit Panel dialog box
(Figure 11-10 on page 439) opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box
depends on the style of the panel being edited.

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Note
You may also access the Edit Button Function dialog box from either the
Window + Paging tab or the Assignments tab. To change any button’s
function while on these tabs, right-click the button

All ABA, ABA1, and ABA2 (1RU) panels include four user-definable auxiliary
keys. When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default
assignments (ENABLE, BACK [if an SB panel, the default assignment is
LOCK], TAKE, and CLEAR).
To change any of the key assignments:
1. Click the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. A dialog box
similar to Figure 11-10 on page 439 opens. The actual appearance of the
dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited. The
user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog, and the
arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the auxiliary keys.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The Edit
Button Function dialog opens, as shown in Figure 11-11 on page 441. The
same Edit Button Function dialog box is used to define the auxiliary keys
and function buttons on the ABA(1), ABA(2), and RCPp panels. You can
find a detailed description of this dialog (as well as instructions for creating
various types of buttons) in Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button
Functions”.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 451

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

Note
When redefining the auxiliary keys, remember that you must have a
TAKE key for the panel to download and operate properly.

If RouterMapper notes selection key definition errors that will not allow the
panel to be successfully downloaded, a Warning group appears on the Auxiliary
Keys tab. To view the error message(s), click View Errors. The Panel Errors
dialog box opens.

Figure 11-20. Panel Errors Dialog Box

Setting the Levels Affected

Each source selection window on an ABA-XY and ABA-SB panel represents a
different level and displays the source connected to the current destination on
that level. For example, an ABA-XY panel may be configured to control the
Video, Audio, and Timecode levels. One source select window is configured to
display the source connected to the current destination on the Video level; a
second source select window will display the source connected to the
destination on the Audio level; and the third source select window will display
the source connected to the current destination on the Timecode level. (The
current destination is displayed in the first window.)
An ABA-SB panel may be configured to control the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2,
and Timecode levels. One window is configured to display the source connected
to the destination on the Video level; the second window will display the source
connected to the destination on the Audio 1 level; the third window will display
the source connected to the destination on the Audio 2 level; and the fourth
window will display the source connected to the destination on the Timecode
level.

452 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

On an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, each of the four source selection

windows represents a different destination and displays the source connected to
that destination on each level or group of levels.
To select the level to be associated with each selection window, follow these
steps:
1. Click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
2. A dialog box similar to Figure 11-21 on page 453 opens. (The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being
edited.)

Figure 11-21. Edit Panel Window, Windows + Paging Tab

When you move the mouse cursor over the graphic in the dialog, you will notice
that the cursor changes as it encounters hots spots on the graphic. When the
cursor changes to a pointing index finger, it indicates that the button can be
configured from this dialog. If you pause momentarily over a button, a text
description of the button’s current assignment opens.
The Controlled Levels check boxes are used to select the levels that are
controlled by the Source Selection keys for this window. Only those levels that
have been enabled in the database are displayed.
The Status Level group contains a Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box,
and a level drop-down list box (the drop-down list box will only be enabled if
the check box is not checked).
If the Follow Lowest Controlled Level box is checked, the Source Select
window will status the lowest level checked in the Controlled Levels group.
If you wish to select a different level to be statused, disable the Follow Lowest
Controlled Level check box, and then select the level from the drop-down list
box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 453

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To configure the Source Selection window, follow these steps:

1. Click the Source Selection window. A blue outline appears around the
selected window. The Edit Window x group will change to reflect the
current settings for that window.
2. Enable the level(s) that are to be controlled by the Source Selection keys
associated with this window. Enable a level by clicking on the check box
next to the Level Name. A level is enabled if the check box is checked.
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of the lowest
controlled level, check the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box.
The level drop-down list box will become disabled.
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of a level other
than the lowest level, uncheck the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check
box. Select the desired level from the drop-down list.
3. Click Done. You will return to the main menu.

Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages

To display and control more levels than would normally be available on a panel,
multiple pages can be created, each with a different definition. For example, one
page on an ABA-XY panel could be configured to display the video, audio and
time code levels separately, while a second page might display the video in one
window, the left and right channels of audio in one window, and the time code
in the remaining window.
To create an additional page, create a Page key as outlined in Editing Panel
Button Functions. Each page must have its own Page key. Any of the 4 auxiliary
keys or the 16 selection keys may be used. Right-click the button, then define
the key via the Edit Button Function dialog; or double-click the button, then
select the Make Page Button option.

Determining Destinations Accessible to a Panel

Determining Destinations Accessible to XY Models
The ABA-XY panel includes one destination selection window. This window
and its associated selection keys allow a user to select the destination being
controlled and statused. A panel can be configured to have access to all
destinations in the router database, or to only a limited subset of the
destinations.
To define the set of destinations available to a panel, click the Assignments
tab at the Edit Panel screen.

454 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-22. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

On the Assignments tab, Destinations are assigned at the Destinations group on

the left side of the dialog. The Global Database list box displays all destinations
available in the database. The This Panel list box displays the destinations
currently assigned to the panel. Assigning destinations to a panel is a simple
matter of transferring the destinations from the Global Database box to the This
Panel box.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database
box to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-23.

To add a Destination:
1. Select the Destination from the Global Database list.
2. Drag it to the panel list.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 11-23. Adding a Destination by Dragging and Dropping

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 455

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Note
When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not
contain text descriptions. See Figure 11-24 for the VGA equivalents.

You may also add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete
buttons located between the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or
double-click a destination from the Global Database box.

Figure 11-24. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

To give the panel access to ALL destinations in the database, follow these
steps:
1. Click Assign All in the Destinations group.
2. All destinations are listed in the This Panel list box.
To add a destination to the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign).
3. The destination is added to the panel list.
To remove a destination from the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the destination to the trash can (or click Delete).
3. The destination is removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click Delete All.
2. All destinations are removed from the panel list.

456 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Determining Destinations Accessible to SB Models

The ABA(1)-SB allows control of one destination with four levels of
breakaway. To select the destination available to this panel, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen.

Figure 11-25. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

The destination is assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of the
dialog. The Global Database list box displays all destinations available in the
database. The This Panel list box displays the destination currently assigned to
the panel. To assign a destination to a panel, transfer the destination from the
Global Database box to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-23 on
page 455.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database
box to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-23 on page 455.
You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete
buttons located between the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or
double-click a destination from the Global Database box.
To assign the destination, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign). The
destination appears in the panel list.

Determining Destinations Accessible to AFV/MB Models

The ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB allows control of four destinations. Each is
assigned to one of the four status display windows on the panel. The source
connected to the destination is displayed in the window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 457

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To select the destinations available to this panel, click the Windows + Paging
tab at the Edit Panel screen. The destinations are assigned via the Controlled
Destinations drop-down list box.

Figure 11-26. Edit Panel Window, Windows + Paging Tab

To assign the destinations on an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, follow

these steps:
1. Click the status display window that is to be assigned to the destination.
2. Select the destination that is to be associated with this window by clicking
on the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box. Scroll through
the list of choices, and select the destination.
3. Enable the level(s) on that this destination should switch.

Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel

The source select windows and their associated selection keys allow a user to
select the source connected to the current destination. A panel can be configured
to have access to all sources in the router database, or to only a limited subset of
the sources.
To define the set of sources available to a panel, click the Assignments tab at
the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to Figure 11-27 on page 459 opens.
(The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being
edited.)

458 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-27. Defining the Set of Sources Available

Sources are assigned via the Sources group on the right side of the dialog. The
Global Database list box displays all sources available in the database. The This
Panel list box displays the sources currently assigned to this panel.

Assigning Sources to a Panel

Assigning sources to a panel is a simple matter of transferring the sources from
the Global Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a source to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box
to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-28 on page 460.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 459

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To assign a Source to a panel:

1. Select the Source from the Global Database list.
2. Drag it to the panel list.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 11-28. Adding a Source by Dragging and Dropping

Note
When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not
contain text descriptions. See Figure 11-29 for the VGA equivalents.

You may also add sources to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete
buttons located between the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or
double-click a source from the Global Database box.

Figure 11-29. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

To give the panel access to all sources in the database, follow these steps:
1. Click Assign All in the Sources group.
2. All sources are listed in the panel list.
To add a source to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the source to the This Panel list box (or click Assign).

460 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

3. The source is added to the panel list.

To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source to the trash can (or click Delete).
3. The source is removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the Delete All key.
2. All sources are removed from the panel list.

Assigning a Category Key

On the ABA(1) panels, sources and destinations can be selected via either
Category/Index or Favorite Key selection techniques.
With category indexing, both a category (i.e., VTR, CAM, etc.) and an index
(i.e., 21, 36, etc.) are required to identify a device. The first press of a button
selects the category; the second and subsequent presses select the index. For
example, to select CAM12, a user would press the CAM button (the category),
followed by the number 1 and number 2 keys (the index 12).

Destination Source
Status
F1 VTR 2 SAT 5 CAM 1 VTR 2 Preset
CAM
A
SAT
B
SAT
C
EDIT
1
Studio
2
Uplink
3
TX
4
DDR
5
TAKE

Select Select Select Select VTR TRUNK MIC AUX Mon QC Clear
F2 Lock Clear Clear Clear 9 0
Dest Dest Dest Dest D E F 6 7 8 All

1 2
Press the Press the
CATEGORY SELECT key INDEX SELECT key

The category “SAT” The index “5”

is selected is selected

Figure 11-30. Selecting a Source via Category Indexing

Note
For a detailed discussion of category indexing, refer to “Understanding
and Managing Category/Indexing” on page 276. For information on
assigning a favorite key, refer to “Assigning a Favorite Source or
Destination to a Selection Key” on page 447.

To assign a category to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the Assignments tab. A dialog box similar to Figure 11-25 on
page 457 opens. (The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the
style of the panel being edited.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 461

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

2. The Categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments
dialog. The 16 buttons at the top of the dialog box correspond to the
Selection keys on the ABA(1) panels.
3. Select the category name from the Categories list box. The selected
category is highlighted.
4. Drag the category name to the selection key, as shown in Figure 11-31 on
page 462.
5. The selection key will change to reflect the new assignment.

To assign a category to a selection key:

1. Select the category from the Categories list.
2. Drag it to the desired selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 11-31. Assigning a Category to a Selection Key

Note
Double-click a category in the Categories list box to assign the selected
category to the first available key.

To assign a category and an index to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the selection key. The Edit Button Function dialog box opens.
(Category should be already selected in the Button Function list box.)
2. From the Select Category list box, select the desired category name.
3. From the Select Index list box, select the index number.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Assignments tab.

462 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-32. Assigning a Category and an Index to a Selection Key

Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

If sources or destinations on the Assignments tab are highlighted in red (or if the
Summary text indicates that one or more sources/destinations are
“inaccessible”), then there is a potential problem with the selection key
assignments. Those sources and/or destinations that are in error (highlighted
red) will not be available from the control panel using the current selection key
assignments. An example of one such problem and a possible resolution is
shown in Figure 11-33.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 463

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Assigning the “QA”

Category to a Selection
Key would remove problem by
providing access to the
QA sources and destinations

Destinations and sources that

cannot be addressed based on the
current selection key assignments
are highlighted in red

Summary Indicator appears

to notify user that there are
inaccessible destinations
or sources

Figure 11-33. Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

464 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Changing a Panel Definition

Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, Protocol

Note
The capability of editing Ethernet information is available for RCP-ABAe
control panels only.

Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce the dialog
box shown in Figure 11-34. The list boxes on the Name, ID, Style tab’s screen
displays the current Panel Name, Panel ID and Panel Style settings. The Version
box displays the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the
panel must have been polled previously for the Version information to be
correct).
Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the definition has
been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by pressing
the Download button on the Edit Panel screen (or refer to “Downloading
Device Definitions” on page 58). To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.

Figure 11-34. Edit Panel Window, Name, ID, Style Tab

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text
box. (Up to 15 characters may be used.) Typically, the Panel Name would
indicate where the panel is located (e.g., Edit B, Master Control, etc.)
To change the panel ID, follow these steps:
1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 465

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

3. Select the new panel ID.

Note
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed
in the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to
the manual that was supplied with the panel).

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel style.

CAUTION
A panel style change will initialize the current
configuration to the default setting. All previous
modifications are lost.

To change a panel brand, follow these steps:

• If a “Harris” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Harris
radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris radio
button.
• If a “Leitch” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Leitch
radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch radio
button.

466 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Changing Protocols
On RCP-ABAe panels, RouterMapper allows you to view and set the protocol
settings for the panel’s serial and Ethernet ports, and set the automated database
name synchronization function.

Setting Serial Port Option Values

1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information
box. The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Serial
Protocols tab.

Figure 11-35. Edit Protocols Window, Serial Protocols Tab

2. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item
selection).
3. The Options window opens. Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud
rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial interface are displayed.
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may
not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational purposes
only; you cannot change them through RouterMapper. To change a value,
follow these steps:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 11-36 on page 468).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 467

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-36. Changing Serial Protocol Option Values

b. Select the new value.

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.
d. Click OK to accept the changes. You will return to Edit Protocols
window.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Name ID, Styles tab.
5. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Setting Ethernet Port Option Values

1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information
box. The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet
Protocols tab. The assigned values for the default server and client protocols
for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.

468 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-37. Edit Protocols Window, Ethernet Protocols Tab

2. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item
selection). The Options window opens (see Figure 11-38). The option
values for the client or server selection are displayed.

Figure 11-38. Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values

While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may
not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational purposes
only; you cannot change them through RouterMapper. To change a value,
follow these steps:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change.
• If a drop-down menu appears, select the new value.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 469

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

• If a drop-down list does not appear, overwrite the existing value with
the new value.
b. Click somewhere outside the Value column. The new selection opens
within the Value column.
c. Click OK to accept the changes. You will return to Edit Protocols
window.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Name ID, Styles tab.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Setting Network Information

At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Control Card tab.

Figure 11-39. Edit Protocols Window, Control Card Tab

The Control Card tab displays information about the resource module installed
in the control panel. The information is updated on every Poll of the control
system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and
network and configuration files setup on the right.
System Information
• The Name field displays the control panel device name.
Network Information
The control card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Programmed settings.
• Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the control panel. When you select
the Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are read-only.

470 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings
that you want used with the control panel. When you select the Programmed
radio button, you can edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the control panel.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the control panel is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to
which the control panel belongs.
For changed network properties to be enabled, you must click Download IP
Info. A series of informational messages that inform you of the status of the
download opens onscreen.
When all changes are complete, click OK. You will return to the Name, ID,
Style tab.
Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Automating Logical Names Synchronization

The names synchronization feature1 allows control panels using the same
source and destination names as other devices in the same database to be
updated whenever the logical names for the database change.
As a result, you do not have to perform a RouterMapper device download for
the changed name synchronization to take place.
1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information
box. The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Name Sync
tab.

Figure 11-40. Name Sync Tab

1 The names synchronization feature is available for control panels with RES-H resource modules,

build 3.18 or higher

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 471

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

2. Select the “Allow this device to automate the Logical Database

Synchronization” check box to allow this device to use the database name
synchronization function. (See page 30 and page 64 for more information
about this feature.)
3. Click OK. You will return to the Name, ID, Style tab.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Note
You can also enable this function at the main menu. See page 64 for
instructions.

472 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12
Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Overview
Note
To determine which panel type you are using, refer to “Models” on page
474.

The following topics are explained in this chapter:

• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 476
• “Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key” on page
484
• “Clearing Selection Key Assignments” on page 487
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 478
• “Editing Details of a Panel Definition” on page 488
• “Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel” on page 480
• “Moving a Selection Key” on page 478

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 473

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Models
The RCP-ABA (2RU) provides X-Y operation and source selection on eight
independent levels. The RCP-ABA (2RU) is available in three models: the XY,
the SB, and the MB models. These panels differ in appearance and functionality,
but use similar configuration procedures. These models include an Ethernet
connector for use with CCS Protocol products or with network-ready routers.
Configuration information in this chapter applies to all 2RU models, except
where noted.

ABA2EXYp Models
The ABA2EXYp X-Y bus control panels include 5 display windows (1
destination, 4 sources) with associated select keys, 4 user-definable auxiliary
keys, 48 user-definable push button source/destination select keys, and a scroll
knob. Sources and destinations are selected from the front of the panel using
push button keys or a scroll knob.

Operator-definable Take / Clear keys

Current Destination Source selection Destination/Source TAKE executes selection
selection display display selection keys CLEAR aborts selection

DESTINATION SOURCES
Status
BETA 7 VTR 2 Video Clear Preset
Group
1
VTR CAM SAT DDR Studio Maint ESS 1 2 3

VTR 2 A1 Clear
Group
2
NET TX RX EDIT Uplink QC CG 4 5 6 Take

VTR 2 A2 Clear
Levels
Pg 1
Group
3
Trunk ATR TEST MIC MON MGR AUX 7
1 8 9
Clear
All

XYp
Change
Dest
Lock
Dest VTR 2 T/C Clear
Levels
Pg 2
Group
4
Black Bars VTR 12 A B C D 0 Bkspc ABA2 Alphanumeric
BreakAway

Change Dest. Scroll Source Independent

Destination lock knob Selection Index Entry
keys keys

Figure 12-1. ABA2E-XYp Control Panel

ABA2ESBp Models
The ABA2ESBp single bus control panels control and display the status of one
router destination. The controlled destination is assigned to the control panel
when it is initially configured and cannot be changed from the front of the
control panel. The displays on the panel show the sources connected to the
destination on each of four levels. Sources may be switched on all four levels
simultaneously (AFV switching), or they may be switched independently
(breakaway switching).

474 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-2. ABA2ESBp Control Panel

ABA2EMBp Models
The ABA2EMBp multibus control panels simultaneously provide control and
status of four destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display
when the panel is initially configured. This destination cannot be changed from
the front of the control panel. The source connected to each destination is
displayed in the control display, and can be changed using the procedures
outlined in the following sections. Sources are switched on all levels
simultaneously (AFV switching).

Figure 12-3. ABA2EMBp Control Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 475

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main menu (or click the
panel name, and then click Edit). The Edit Panel dialog box opens.

Figure 12-4. Edit Panel Dialog Box

• When an ABA panel is added, it is created with a panel definition. This

definition may be the RouterMapper default definition (if the panel was
added before the database was edited) or it may be a unique definition based
on your particular database (if the panel was added after the database was
created).
• If the ABA panel is added after the database edit, it is configured to access
the complete set of sources and destinations included in the database. All
necessary category index keys are assigned, and the panel is completely
functional without further definition. In many cases, it will not be necessary
to proceed further with the panel editing process. If, however, you wish to
change anything in the definition (move the selection keys, limit access to a
specific set of sources or destinations, change the auxiliary key functions,
etc.), you will find the information necessary in this chapter.
13. If the panel carries the default definition, the category/index keys, source
selection keys, sources available, destinations available and levels affected
will have to be manually edited as described in Editing the Details of a
Panel Definition. As an alternative, the panel can be deleted from the

476 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

database and then added back to the database using the Poll method (refer to
“Polling the Control System” starting on page 43). All necessary categories
are assigned at that time.

For information on how to Refer to

Assign a category key Pages 496-499
Assign Favorite Keys Pages 484-487
Change panel name, ID, or style Pages 500-501
Delete selection key assignments Page 487
Limit access to sources and destinations Pages 480-484
Move a selection key Page 478
Reconfigure auxiliary keys Pages 488-489
Set Levels affected Pages 489-491

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 477

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)

Figure 12-5. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used
to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to
define the specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties
group will depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The
functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited. Table 10-1 on page 395 shows a list of button functions available for
ABA panels.
See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions,” on page 394 for
more detailed information about the selections available with this dialog box.

Moving a Selection Key

To rearrange the order of the selection keys on an ABA(2) panel, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box similar to that shown in
Figure 12-6 opens (the actual appearance will depend on the style of the
ABA(2) panel being edited).

478 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Note
The “drag and drop” operation will not move an index definition. To move
the index definition to a new key, you must reassign the key definition.
For more information about this function, see “Editing Details of a Panel
Definition” starting on page 488.

To move a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Position the cursor over the selection key to be moved.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the selection key to its new position.
4. Release the mouse button. The selection key appears in its new positions.

To move a selection key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the new position.
3. Drop it.

Figure 12-6. Moving a Selection Key

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 479

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to

a Panel
When a panel is created, it will have access to the complete set of sources and
destinations in the database (assuming the panel was created after the database
was edited). It is possible, however, to limit panel access to a specific set of
sources and destinations. To change the panel access list, click the Assignments
tab at the Edit Panel window. (The actual appearance will depend on the style of
the panel being edited.)

Figure 12-7. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

480 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel

RouterMapper allows you to assign the type of view order you want to see on
the Assignments tab list boxes and on a particular panel. You may sort in either
alphabetical or logical order.

DESTINATION SOURCES
Status
BETA 7 VTR 2 Video Clear Preset
Group
1
VTR CAM SAT DDR Studio Maint ESS 1 2 3

VTR 2 A1 Clear
Group
2
NET TX RX EDIT Uplink QC CG 4 5 6 Take

VTR 2 A2 Clear
Levels
Pg 1
Group
3
Trunk ATR TEST MIC MON MGR AUX 1
7 8 9
Clear
All

XYp
Change
Dest
Lock
Dest VTR 2 T/C Clear
Levels
Pg 2
Group
4
Black Bars VTR 12 A B C D 0 Bkspc ABA2 Alphanumeric
BreakAway

Sorts Assignments tab lists in Sorts panel’s Source Selection and

alphabetical or logical order Destination Selection display lists
in alphabetical or logical order

Figure 12-8. Assigning View Order

• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab will display these lists in
numeric-alphabetic order (see Figure 12-8).
When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical
order, the Assignments tab will display these lists in the order in which you
first assigned the Sources and Destinations (see Figure 12-8).
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in alphabetical order,
RouterMapper will “instruct” the panel to display Source Selection and

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 481

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Destination Selection information in numeric-alphabetic order (see

Figure 12-8 on page 481).
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in logical order, RouterMapper
will “instruct” the panel to display Source Selection and Destination
Selection information in the order in which you first assigned the Sources
and Destinations (see Figure 12-8 on page 481).

Note
You must perform a download before this sort takes effect.
See “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 58.

For more information about logical order, see “Overview of the Edit Logical
Sources Dialog” on page 230 and “Overview of Edit Logical Destinations
Dialog” on page 249.

Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations

The simplest method of denying panel access to one or two sources or
destinations is to remove them from the access list by dragging them from the
This Panel list to the Global Database list (you can also remove a source or
destination using the Delete button). Deleting a source or destination from the
access list only removes it from this panel’s definition. It does not remove it
from the database or from other panels based on this database.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source from the This Panel list box and drop it in the Global
Database box (or click Delete).
3. The source is removed from the panel list.

Allowing Access to a Limited Set of

Sources and Destinations
To create a very limited set of sources and destinations to which the panel
will have access, follow these steps:
1. Remove all source and destination assignments from the panel access list
using Delete All.
2. Add the desired sources and destinations to the panel access list by dragging
and dropping them in the This Panel box (or by using the Assign button).
To remove all sources and destinations, follow these steps:
1. Click Delete All.
2. All sources and destinations are removed from the panel list.
To add a source or destination to the panel access list, follow these steps:

1. Click a source or destination name in the Global Database list box.

482 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

2. Drag or double-click the source or destination from the Global Database

box; drop it in the This Panel box (or click Assign).

Note
When viewing the Assignments dialog box on a VGA monitor,
the Assign and Delete buttons may not contain text
descriptions. See Figure 12-9 for the VGA equivalents.

3. The source or destination is added to the panel list.

Figure 12-9. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 483

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a

Selection Key
On ABA panels, you can select sources and destinations via Category/Index or
Favorite Key selection techniques. With Favorite Key selection, source or
destination selection requires only one key press. One of the 48 user-definable
selection keys is configured to select a specific source or destination for rapid
access. For example, a selection key could be defined as MON2. When pressed,
the key would select Monitor 2.

DESTINATION SOURCES

Status
OUT 5 MON2 Video Clear Preset 7 8 9

MON2 A1 Clear 4 5 6 Take

MON2 A2 Clear VTR 1 VTR 2 AUX EDIT Studio Uplink TX DDR 1 2 3

Clear
All

Select
Dest
Lock
Dest MON2 T/C Clear CAM 1 TRUNK MIC AUX MON 2 QC B C 0 Bkspc

1 Press the desired

Favorite Source key
Selects the Source and presets it into the selection window
The TAKE key blinks to indicate a pending source selection operation
DESTINATION SOURCES

Status
OUT 5 MON2 Video Clear Preset 7 8 9

MON2 A1 Clear 4 5 6 Take

Levels
MON2 A2 Clear Pg 1 VTR 1 VTR 2 AUX EDIT Studio Uplink TX DDR 1 2 3
Clear
All

Levels XYp
Select
Dest
Lock
Dest MON2 T/C Clear Pg 2 CAM 1 TRUNK MIC AUX MON 2 QC B C 0 Bkspc Alphanumeric
BreakAway

2 Press the TAKE key

Figure 12-10. Selecting a Source via Favorite Key

484 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

To assign a Favorite Source to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to
that shown in Figure 12-7 on page 480 opens.
2. Select the source name from the panel list in the Source group.
3. Drag the source name to the selection key. The selection key will change to
reflect the new assignment.
A favorite source can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit Button
Function dialog box1. (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)

To assign a favorite source:

1. Select the source from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 12-11. Assigning a Favorite Source

1 See
Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for a detailed description of the Edit
Button Function dialog box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 485

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

To assign a Favorite Destination to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to
that shown in Figure 12-7 on page 480 opens.
2. Select the destination name from the panel list in the Destinations group.
The selected destination is highlighted.
3. Drag the destination name to the selection key. The selection key will
change to reflect the new assignment.
A favorite destination can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit Button
Function dialog box. (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)

To assign a favorite destination:

1. Select the destination from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 12-12. Assigning a Favorite Destination

486 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

Note
A default index assignment cannot be removed by dragging the key to
the trash can. You must manually assign the key index to “None.” See
page 496 for more information on this function.

To clear a selection key assignment, drag the selection key to the trash can. The
identifying information in the selection key will disappear to indicate that it is
unassigned.

To clear a single selection:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

To clear all selections:

1. Press Clear All.

Figure 12-13. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

To clear all selection key assignments, click Clear All. The identifying
information in the selection keys will disappear to indicate that they are
unassigned.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 487

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Editing Details of a Panel Definition

As discussed earlier in this chapter, if a panel is added before the database is
edited, it is created with a default definition. Only two categories are assigned
(“In” and “Dest”). At this point, you can either create a panel definition “from
scratch,” or delete the panel from the panel list and add it again using the POLL
method (refer to “Polling the Control System” in Getting Started). Adding a
panel after the database is edited will cause RouterMapper to automatically
create a panel definition that matches the database.
You may also need to perform more than just the basic editing functions
described earlier in this chapter. This section contains information on
performing more complex editing functions.
To create a panel definition “from scratch,” or to create a more complex
panel definition, double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main menu
(or click the panel name, and then click Edit). The Edit Panel dialog box
(Figure 12-4 on page 476) opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box
depends on the style of the panel being edited.

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Note
You may also access the Edit Button function dialog box from the
Window + Paging tab or the Assignments tab. To change any button’s
function while on these tabs, right-click the button.

All ABA (2RU) panels include four user-definable auxiliary keys. When a new
panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments (ENABLE,
BACK [if an SB panel, the default assignment is LOCK], TAKE, and
CLEAR).
To change any of the key assignments:
1. Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box
similar to the one shown in Figure 12-4 on page 476 opens. The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.
The user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog and the
arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the auxiliary keys.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
3. The Edit Button Function dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 12-5 on
page 478. You can find a detailed description of this dialog (as well as
instructions for creating various types of buttons) in Chapter 10: “Editing
Control Panel Button Functions,” on page 393.

488 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

Note
When redefining the auxiliary keys, remember that you must have a
TAKE key for the panel to download and operate properly.

If RouterMapper notes selection key definition errors that will not allow the
panel to be successfully downloaded, a Warning group appears on the Auxiliary
Keys tab. To view the error message(s), click View Errors. The Panel Errors
dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 12-14.

Figure 12-14. Panel Errors Dialog Box

Setting the Levels Affected

Each source selection window on an ABA (2RU) panel represents a different
level and displays the source connected to the current destination on that level.
For example, a panel may be configured to control the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2
and Timecode levels. One window is configured to display the source connected
to the current destination on the Video level; the second window will display the
source connected to the destination on the Audio 1 level; the third window will
display the source connected to the current destination on the Audio 2 level; and
the fourth window will display the source connected to the destination on the
Timecode level.
To select the level that is to be associated with each selection window, click
the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog.The following dialog box
opens.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 489

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-15. Setting the Levels Affected

When you move the mouse cursor over the graphic in the dialog, you will notice
that the cursor changes as it encounters “hot spots” on the graphic. When the
cursor changes to a pointing index finger, it indicates that the button can be
configured from this dialog. If you pause momentarily over a button, a text
description of the button’s current assignment opensopens.
To configure a Source Selection window, click the window. The configuration
options in the Edit Window x group will change to reflect the current
assignments. On the Edit Panel dialog, the Source Selection window reflects the
current assignments.
The Controlled Levels check boxes are used to select the levels that are
controlled by the Source Selection keys for this window. Only those levels that
have been enabled in the database are displayed. (Refer to “Defining the
Levels” in Editing a Logical Database for information on defining levels.)
The Status Level group contains a Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box,
and a Level drop-down list box (the drop-down list box will only be enabled if
the check box is not checked).
• If the Follow Lowest Controlled Level box is checked, the Source Select
window will status the lowest level checked in the Controlled Levels
group.
• If you wish to select a different level to be statused, disable the Follow
Lowest Controlled Level check box, and then select the level from the
drop-down list box.
To configure the Source Selection window, follow these steps:
1. Click the Source Selection window. A blue outline appears around the
selected window. The Edit Window x group will change to reflect the
current settings for that window.

490 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

2. Enable the level(s) that are to be controlled by the Source Selection keys
associated with this window: Click the check box next to the Level Name.
(A level is enabled if the check box is checked.)
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of the lowest
controlled level, check the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box.
The level drop-down list box will become disabled.
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of a level other
than the lowest level, uncheck the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check
box, and then select the desired level from the drop-down list.
3. Click Done to return to the Edit Panel dialog box.

Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages

To display and control more levels than would normally be available on a panel,
multiple pages can be created, each with a different definition. To create an
additional page, create a Page key as outlined in “Creating a Page Key” on
page 409. Each page must have its own Page key. Any of the auxiliary keys or
the selection keys can be used. Right-click the button, and then define the key
via the Edit Button Function dialog; or double-click the button and select the
Make Page Button option.

Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel

The ABA (2RU) panel includes one destination selection window. This window
and its associated selection keys allow a user to select the destination being
controlled and statused. A panel can be configured to have access to all
destinations in the router database, or to only a limited subset of the
destinations.
To define the set of destinations available to a panel, click the Assignments
tab at the Edit Panel screen. The following dialog box appears.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 491

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-16. Defining a Set of Destinations Available to a Panel

Destinations are assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of the dialog.
The Global Database list box displays all destinations available in the database.
The This Panel list box displays the destinations currently assigned to the panel.
Assigning destinations to a panel is a simple matter of transferring the
destinations from the Global Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database
box and drop it in the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 12-17.

To add a Destination:
1. Select the destination from the Global Database list.
2. Drag it to the panel list.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 12-17. Adding a Destination by Dragging and Dropping

492 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Note
When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not
contain text descriptions. See Figure 12-18 for the VGA equivalents.

You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete
buttons located between the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or
double-click a destination from the Global Database box.

Figure 12-18. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

To give the panel access to all destinations in the database, click Assign All
in the Destinations group. All destinations are listed in the This Panel list box.
To add a destination to the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign). The
destination is added to the panel list.
To remove a destination from the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the destination to the trash can (or click Delete). The destination is
removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, click Delete All. All destinations are removed
from the panel list.

Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel

The source select windows and their associated selection keys allow a user to
select the source connected to the current destination. A panel can be configured
to have access to all sources in the router database, or to only a limited subset of
the sources.
To define the set of sources available to a panel, click the Assignments tab at
the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to Figure 12-19 opens. (The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 493

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-19. Defining the Set of Sources Available to a Panel

Sources are assigned via the Sources group on the right side of the dialog box.
The Global Database list box displays all sources available in the database. The
This Panel list box displays the sources currently assigned to this panel. To
assign sources to a panel, transfer the sources from the Global Database box to
the This Panel box.

Note
You may sort the Assignments tab list boxes in alphabetical order
(numeric, then A-Z) or logical order (the order in which you assigned the
Sources and Destinations). d the Sources and Destinations). For more
information about logical order, see “Overview of the Edit Logical Sources
Dialog” on page 230 and “Overview of Edit Logical Destinations Dialog”
on page 249.

494 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Assigning Sources to a Panel

To add a source to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box
and drop it in the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 12-20.

Note
When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete
buttons may not contain text descriptions. See Figure 12-18
for the VGA equivalents.

You may add sources to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete
buttons located between the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or
double-click a source from the Global Database box.
To give the panel access to all sources in the database, click Assign All in the
Sources group. All sources are listed in the panel list.
To add a source to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the Global Database list box.

To assign a source to a panel:

1. Select the source from the Global Database list.
2. Drag it to the panel list.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 12-20. Adding a Source by Dragging and Dropping

2. Drag (or double-click) the source to the This Panel list box (or click
Assign). The source is added to the panel list.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source to the trash can (or click Delete). The source is removed
from the panel list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 495

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

To clear the panel access list, click Delete All. All sources are removed from
the panel list.

Assigning a Category Key

On the ABA panels, sources and destinations can be selected via selecting either
Category/Index or Favorite Key category keys.
With category indexing, both a category (e.g., VTR, CAM, etc.) and an index
(e.g., 21, 36, etc.) are required to identify a device. The first press of a button
selects the category; the second and subsequent presses select the index. For
example, to select AUX9, a user would press the AUX button (the category),
followed by the number 9 key (the index 9).

The category (AUX)

is selected The index (9) is selected

DESTINATION SOURCES

Status
Preset

1 Press the Category 2 Press the Index

Select key Select key

Figure 12-21. Selecting a Source via Category Indexing

Note
For a detailed discussion of category indexing, see page 276 through
page 282. For information on assigning a favorite key, see page 484.

To assign a category to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the Assignments tab. A dialog box similar to that shown in
Figure 12-22 opens.

496 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

To assign a Category to a selection key:

1. Select the category from the Categories list.
2. Drag it to the desired selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 12-22. Assigning a Category to a Selection Key

The categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments
dialog. The buttons at the top of the dialog box correspond to the Selection
keys on the ABA panels.
2. Select the category name from the Categories list box. The selected
category is highlighted.
3. Drag the category name to the selection key, as shown in Figure 12-22
4. The selection key will change to reflect the new assignment.

Note
Double-click a category in the Categories list box to assign the selected
category to the first available key.

To assign a category and an index to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the selection key. The Edit Button Function dialog box opens.
(Category should be already selected in the Button Function list box.)
2. From the Select Category list box, select the desired category name.
3. From the Select Index list box, select the index number.
4. Click Done to return to the Assignments tab.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 497

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-23. Assigning a Category and an Index to a Selection Key

498 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

If sources or destinations on the Assignments tab are highlighted in red (or if the
Summary text indicates that one or more sources/destinations are
“inaccessible”), then there is a potential problem with the selection key
assignments. Those sources and/or destinations that are in error (highlighted
red) will not be available from the control panel using the current selection key
assignments. Figure 12-24 shows an example of such a problem and its possible
resolution.

Assigning the “VTR”

category to a Selection
Key would remove problem by
providing access to
the VTR1, VTR2, ...
sources and destinations
Destinations and Sources that
cannot be addressed based on the
current selection key assignments
are highlighted in red

Summary Indicator appears

to notify user that there are
inaccessible destinations
or sources

Figure 12-24. Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 499

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Changing a Panel Definition

Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol

Note
The capability of editing Ethernet information is available for RCP-ABAe
control panels only.

Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce the dialog
box shown in Figure 12-25. The list boxes on the Name, ID, Style tab displays
the current Panel Name, Panel ID and Panel Style settings. The Version box
displays the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the panel
must have been polled previously for the Version information to be correct).
Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the definition has
been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking
Download on the Edit Panel screen (or refer to “Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 58). To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.

Figure 12-25. Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text
box. Up to 15 characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name would indicate
where the panel is located (i.e., Edit B, Master Control, etc.)
To change the panel ID, follow these steps:
1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel ID.

500 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Note
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed
in the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to
the manual that was supplied with the panel).

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel style.

CAUTION
A panel style change will initialize the current
configuration to the default setting. All previous
modifications are lost.

To change a panel brand, follow these steps:

• If a “Harris” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Harris
radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris radio
button.
• If a “Leitch” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Leitch
radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch radio
button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 501

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Changing Protocols
On RCP-ABAe panels, RouterMapper allows you to set some of the option
values for a selected protocol. You can also download IP addresses for a
selected panel.

Setting Serial Port Option Values

1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information
box. The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Serial
Protocols tab.

Figure 12-26. Edit Protocols Window, Serial Protocols Tab

2. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item
selection). The Options window opens.
3. Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop
bits, and serial interface are displayed.
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may
not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational purposes
only; you cannot change them through RouterMapper. To change a value,
follow these steps:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 12-27 on page 503).

502 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-27. Changing Serial Protocol Option Values

b. Select the new value.

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.
d. Click OK to accept the changes. You will return to Edit Protocols
window.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Name ID, Styles tab.
5. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Setting Ethernet Port Option Values

1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information
box. The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet
Protocols tab. The assigned values for the default server and client protocols
for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 503

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-28. Edit Protocols Window, Ethernet Protocols Tab

2. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item
selection). The Options window opens (see Figure 12-29). The option
values for the client or server selection are displayed.

Figure 12-29. Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values

While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may
not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational purposes
only; you cannot change them through RouterMapper. To change a value,
follow these steps:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change.
• If a drop-down menu appears, select the new value.

504 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

• If a drop-down list does not appear, overwrite the existing value

with the new value.
b. Click somewhere outside the Value column. The new selection appears
within the Value column.
c. Click OK to accept the changes and return to Edit Protocols window.
3. Click OK to return to the Name ID, Styles tab.

Setting Network Information

At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select the Control Card tab.

Figure 12-30. Edit Protocols Window, Control Card Tab

The Control Card tab displays information about the resource module installed
in the control panel. The information is updated on every Poll of the control
system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and
network and configuration files setup on the right.
System Information
• The Name field displays the control panel device name.
Network Information
The control card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Programmed settings.
• Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the control panel. When you select
the Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are read-only.
• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings
that you want used with the control panel. When you select the Programmed
radio button, you can edit these settings.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 505

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the control panel.

• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the control panel is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to
which the control panel belongs.
For changed network properties to be enabled, you must click Download IP
Info. A series of informational messages that inform you of the status of the
download opens onscreen.
4. When all changes are complete, click OK. You will return to the Name, ID,
Style tab.
5. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Automating Logical Names Synchronization

The names synchronization feature1 allows control panels using the same
source and destination names as other devices in the same database to be
updated whenever the logical names for the database change. As a result, you do
not have to perform a RouterMapper device download for the changed name
synchronization to take place.
1. At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Name Sync tab.

Figure 12-31. Name Sync Tab

2. Select the “Allow this device to automate the Logical Database

Synchronization” check box to allow this device to use the database name
synchronization function. (See page 30 and page 64 for more information
about this feature.)
3. Click OK. You will return to the Name, ID, Style tab.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
1 The names synchronization feature is available for control panels with RES-H resource modules,

build 3.18 or higher

506 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Note
You can also enable this function at the main menu. See page 64 for
instructions.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 507

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

508 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13
Editing RCPp Panels

Overview
The RCPp series programmable panels are available in several different styles,
and are customizable for almost any system design. “Configuration Options” on
page 510 lists some of the available options.

Note
Refer to Chapter 14: “Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels” for information on
editing an RCP-16×1SBAp. Refer to Chapter 15: “Editing RCP-12×2BAp
Panels” for information on editing an RCP-12×2SBAp.

The following topics are explained in this chapter:

• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 511
• “Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style” on page 522
• “Configuring the Auxiliary Keys” on page 513
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 521
• “Controlling Backlight Intensity” on page 534
• “Defining the Destinations” on page 513
• “Defining the Sources” on page 517
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 512
• “Editing LCD Button Displays” on page 525
• “Monitoring Device Addresses” on page 540
• “Setting Up Button Pages” on page 537

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 509

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Configuration Options
The following panel options are controllable via RouterMapper. Only
RouterMapper-configurable information is included in this manual. For
installation, hardware configuration, and operation information, see the
pertinent manual, as indicated.
• 1RU control panels
• 4×1
• 4×4
• 8×1
• 8×8
• 16×1
• 16×1 LCD (RCP-IDe)
• 16×4
• 16×8
• 16×16
• 32×1
• 32×8
• 32×8CQp
• 2RU control panels
• 16×16 LCD (RCP-IDe)
• 32×1 LCD (RCP-IDe)
• 32×4
• 32×32
• 32×32 LCD (RCP-IDe)
• 64×1
• 64×1 LCD (RCP-IDe)

510 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Note
The LCD Display tab opens for RCP-ID control panels only.

To edit the RCPp panels, double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper
main menu (or click the panel name, and then click Edit). The Edit Panel dialog
box opens.

Figure 13-1. Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box

• Use the Auxiliary Keys tab to configure the user-definable auxiliary keys.
• Use the Destinations tab to define the destinations available.
• Use the Sources tab to define the sources available.
• Use the Levels tab to define the levels affected.
• Use the Address, Style tab to change the panel name, ID, or panel style.
• Use the LCD Display tab to set up and edit LCD displays on RCP-IDe
control panels.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 511

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

Note
Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5 ×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the
lock/protect feature.

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to

user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)

Figure 13-2. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used
to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to
define the specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties
group will depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The
functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited. Table 10-1 on page 395 shows a list of button functions available for
RCPp panels.
See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” on page 394 for
more detailed information about the selections available with this dialog box.

512 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCPp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys. When a new panel
is added, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments (Enable and Lock).
To change either assignment:
1. Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box
similar to the one shown in Figure 13-1 on page 511 opens. The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The Edit
Button Function dialog box (Figure 13-2 on page 512) opens. The functions
available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited. See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” on
page 394 for more detailed information about the selections available with
this dialog box.

Defining the Destinations

To assign a destination select key, click the Destinations tab at the Edit Panel
screen. A dialog box similar to Figure 13-3 (Figure 13-4 for 32×8 CQ-X) opens.
The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the configuration of the
RCPp panel.

Destination Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32×8 CQ-X Panels
Destinations are assigned at the Logical Destinations group. The list box lists all
destinations available in the database. The button icon shows the key currently
assigned to each destination.

Figure 13-3. Edit Panel Window, Destinations Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 513

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Destination Tab Assignments for 32×8 CQ-X Panels

Figure 13-4. Edit Panel Window, Destinations Tab for 32×8 CQ-X Panel
Only

The Destination Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default destination buttons
defined as follows:
• Button 1: Cut1
• Button 2: Crossfade1
• Button 3: Cut fade1
• Button 4: Fast1
• Button 5: Timing alarm1
• Button 6: V fade1
• Button 7: Fade cut1
• Button 8: Slow1

1 See
page 385 for a description of this transition type.

514 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Assigning Selection Keys

To assign a destination to a selection key, drag the destination from the
Logical Destinations group and drop it on the desired key, as shown in
Figure 13-5.

To assign a Destination key:

1. Select the Destination from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 13-5. Assigning a Destination

You may also create a destination select key by using the Edit Button Function
dialog box. See “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 397 for more
information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 515

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a destination select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 13-6. The key is “greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.

To clear a selection key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

Figure 13-6. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

516 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Defining the Sources

To assign a source select key, click the Sources tab at the Edit Panel screen. A
dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 13-7 (Figure 13-8 for 32×8 CQ-S;
Figure 13-9 for 32×8 CQ-X) opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box
depends upon the configuration of the RCPp panel.

Figure 13-7. Edit Panel Window, Defining Sources Tab

Figure 13-8. Edit Panel Window, Defining Sources Tab for 32×8 CQ-S

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 517

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Figure 13-9. Edit Panel Window, Defining Sources Tab for 32×8 CQ-X

Source Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32×8 CQ-S and 32×8 CQ-X Panels
Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group. The list box lists all sources
available in the database. The button icon shows the key currently assigned to
each source.

Source Tab Assignments for 32×8 CQ-S Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-S panel has the default source buttons defined
as follows:
• Buttons 1 to 16: Source Alarm buttons (Src1 to Src16)1
• Button 26: Cut1
• Button 27: Crossfade1
• Button 28: V fade1
• Button 29: Cut fade1
• Button 30: Fade cut1
• Button 31: Slow1
• Button 32: Fast1

1 See
page 385 for a description of this transition type.

518 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Source Tab Assignments for 32×8 CQ-X Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default source buttons defined
as follows:
• Button 1 to 16: Cross-point buttons (PGM1 for Src1 to Src16)
• Button 17 to 32: Cross-point buttons (PGM2 for Src1 to Src16)

Assigning Selection Keys

To assign a source to a selection key, drag the source from the Logical Sources
group and drop it on the desired key, as shown in Figure 13-10.

To assign a Source key:

1. Select the Source from the Logical Sources list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 13-10. Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a source select key by using the Edit Button Function
dialog box. See “Creating a Source Select Key” on page 396 for more
information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 519

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in Figure 13-11
on page 520. The key is “greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.

To clear a selection key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

Figure 13-11. Clearing a Source Selection Key Assignment

520 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Configuring the Levels Affected

The Levels tab specifies what levels are affected when sources are selected from
the panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab, pressing a source select
button on the panel will affect all levels defined for that source.
The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to specific levels
on the panel. For example, a panel could be created with only the video level
enabled. In this case, even if audio/video sources were selected, only the video
level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the
appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for this panel.

Figure 13-12. Assigning Levels for a Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 521

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

Note
Figure 13-13 shows this tab as it appears for a Harris- or Leitch-branded
control panel. For all other styles, Panel Brand selection is greyed out.

Figure 13-14 on page 523 shows this tab as it appears for a Panacea
clean switch/quiet switch control panel. For other panels, the “Associate
with Frame” drop-down list box will not appear.

Click the Address, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this tab.

Figure 13-13. Address, Style Tab

• The list box on this screen displays the current Panel Name.
• The two combo boxes display the Panel ID and Panel Style settings.
• The Panel Brand box displays the “branding” of the control panel.
• (For clean/quiet switch panels only) The Associate with Frame combo box
displays the controlling and monitoring Panacea P-SCQ or P-HSCQ frame
associated with a corresponding Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control
panel.
• The Version box displays the hardware and software versions reported by
the panel (the panel must have been polled previously for the Version
information to be correct).
To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text
box. The descriptive name may contain up to 15 characters. Typically, the Panel
Name would indicate where the panel is located (e.g., Edit B, Master Control,
etc.)

522 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Figure 13-14. Address, Style Tab for Clean/Quiet Switch

To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel ID.

Note
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed
in the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to
the manual that was supplied with the panel).

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel style.

CAUTION
A panel style change will initialize the current
configuration to the default setting. All previous
modifications are lost.

Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the definition has
been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking
Download on the Edit Panel screen (or refer to “Downloading Device
Definitions” starting on page 58). To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 523

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

4. To change the panel brand, select the appropriate Panel Brand radio
button.
• If a “Harris” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the
Harris radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris
radio button.
• If a “Leitch” logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the
Leitch radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch
radio button.

CAUTION
If you set up alarms for your Harris-branded control
panel, changing to a Leitch-branded panel will
trigger a warning message:

If you click Yes, RouterMapper will remove all alarm,

source alarm, destination alarm, and parameter
buttons from the panel.

(For Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panels only) To change the
associated Panacea frame, follow these steps:
1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new frame to associate with the parametric buttons on this panel.

524 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Editing LCD Button Displays

(RCP-IDe Panels Only)
Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this tab. A
series of tabbed dialog boxes allow you to add or edit text, add or change button
icon displays, and change active or inactive button display brightness.
The default button setup is
• Text displayed
• Default Font
• Icon not displayed
• Color display green
• Color intensity brightest

Figure 13-15. Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 525

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Setting Up Button Text

RouterMapper will allow you to customize your LCD buttons with different text
information. You can format the text in terms of font type, font size, and font
features (bold, italics, underline), as well as align text within a button. You can
display text in conjunction with, or instead of, icon display information.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original settings
you must select Cancel, which will return you to the RouterMapper main menu.

Adding Text

Note
The Button Definition box to the right of the Text tab shows how the
selected button was originally configured. This option is provided as a
quick reference, so that you do not have to refer back to another tab to
see its original configuration.

1. Click an LCD button to which you want to add text.

2. The Show Text check box is selected, so that you can display the default or
new text as well as an image. (If you want display an image as well as text,
you will also have to set up the image via the Icon tab. See “Setting Up
Button Images” on page 529 for more information.)
If you want to display an image only, uncheck this box.
3. Click OB to provide an opaque background between the text and any image
displayed. The button stays depressed when this feature is on.
4. To use the default text entries, leave the Use Default Text box checked.
RouterMapper will display the text assigned via the logical source or logical
destination setup. See “Assigning a Source Name” on page 235 for
information on how to name logical sources. See “Assigning a Destination
Name” on page 249 for information on how to name logical destinations.
5. To insert customized text
a. Uncheck the Use Default Text box.
b. Enter any combination of up to eight letters and/or numbers in the Line
1 box. If desired, enter any combination of up to eight letters and/or
numbers in the Line 2 box.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each LCD button to which you want to add
text.
7. Set up the text characteristics for each LCD button.

526 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Setting Up Text Characteristics for Individual Buttons

1. Click an LCD button that you want to configure.
2. Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (i.e., Bold, Italic,
Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you will not be
able to modify its text size or other features.
3. Click Center Text to align the button text in the center of the button. The
button stays depressed when this feature is on.

Note
The Align Text feature is especially useful when you want to align text
within an image.

You can also manually align text within a button (for example, you can
move the text below a button image). The arrow keys to the right of the
Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to move text within a button. You can move
the text up, down, right, or left. If you would rather align text manually,
make sure the Center Text button is off, and then use the arrow keys to
manipulate text locations.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each LCD button you want to configure.
5. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these
options:
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on page 529)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up Button
Colors” on page 532)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page 533)

Setting Up Text Characteristics for Multiple Buttons

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the other buttons that you
want to configure.
3. Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (i.e., Bold, Italic,
Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you will not be
able to modify the text type, size, or other features.
4. Click Center Text to align the button text in the center of the button. The
button stays depressed when this feature is on.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 527

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Note
The Align Text feature is especially useful when you want to align text
within an image.

You can also manually align text within multiple several buttons at once
(for example, you can move the text below a button image). The arrow keys
to the right of the Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to move text within a
button. You can move the text up, down, right, or left. If you would rather
align text manually, make sure the Center Text button is off, and then use
the arrow keys to manipulate text locations.
5. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these
options:
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on page 529)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up Button
Colors” on page 532)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page 533)

528 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Setting Up Button Images

RouterMapper will allow you to customize your LCD buttons with different
images, or icons. You can display icons in conjunction with, or instead of, text
display information. You can use the RouterMapper default icons, or you can
add customized icons.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original settings
you must select Cancel, which will return you to the RouterMapper main menu.

Setting Up Images for Individual Buttons

Note
If you want to add customized icons to the default icon list, you must add
them via the Icon Management tab in RouterMapper. See “Managing
Custom Icons” on page 286 for more information.

1. If necessary, click on the Icon tab.

Figure 13-16. LCD Icons Tab

Note
The Button Definition box to the right of the Icon tab how the selected
button was originally configured. This option is provided as a quick
reference, so that you do not have to refer back to another tab to see its
original configuration.

2. Click an LCD button to which you want to add an image.

3. Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 529

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

4. To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box checked.
5. To insert a different icon
a. Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b. Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
6. The icon appears in the center of the LCD button. Move the Icon Size slider
to the left to decrease icon size, and to the right to increase icon size. The
increased/decreased (in percentage of original size) size opens in the Icon
Size box.
7. If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show Text
check box).
8. If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to the left of
the drop-down list box allows you to move an image up, down, left, or right
within a button.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each LCD button to which you want to add an
image.
10. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these
options:
• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page 526)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up Button
Colors” on page 532)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page 533)

Setting Up Identical Images for Multiple Buttons

RouterMapper will allow you to simultaneously customize several LCD buttons
with the same image and image characteristics.

Note
If you want to add customized icons to the default icon list, you must add
them via the Icon Management tab in RouterMapper. See “Managing
Custom Icons” on page 286 for more information.

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to set up.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the other buttons that you
want to set up.
3. Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
4. To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box checked.
5. To insert a different icon
a. Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b. Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.

530 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

6. The icon opens in the center of the LCD button. Move the Icon Size slider
to the left to decrease icon size, and to the right to increase icon size. The
increased/decreased (in percentage of original size) size opens in the Icon
Size box.
7. If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show Text
check box).
8. If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to the left of
the drop-down list box allows you to move an image up, down, left, or right
within a button.
9. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these
options:
• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page 526)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up Button
Colors” on page 532)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page 533)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 531

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Setting Up Button Colors

RouterMapper will allow you to customize your LCD buttons with different
shades of three colors: green, red, or amber. You can assign one color to all of
the LCD buttons, or assign different colors to individual buttons. In addition,
you can adjust the color intensity for active and inactive display.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original settings
you must select Cancel, which will return you to the RouterMapper main menu.

Setting Up Colors for Individual Buttons

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2. If necessary, click on the Color tab.

Figure 13-17. LCD Display Color Tab

3. (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box. An
example of how buttons look with the new color assignment appears in the
Inactive Preview box.
4. (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from the
drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15
(brightest).
5. (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the
drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15
(brightest).
6. Click the next LCD button that you want to configure, and select its colors,
as explained in steps 3 through 5.
7. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these
options:

532 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page 526)

• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on page 529)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page 533)

Setting Up Colors for Multiple Buttons

1. If necessary, click on the Color tab.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the other buttons that
you want to configure.
3. (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box. An
example of how buttons look with the new color assignment appears in the
Inactive Preview box.
4. (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from the
drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15
(brightest).
5. (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the
drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15
(brightest).
6. If you want the selected color and intensities to be assigned to all of the
LCD buttons on the panel, click Apply to All. (The selected color and
intensities are assigned to all of the LCD buttons on the panel, not just the
selected buttons.)
7. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these
options:
• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page 526)
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on page 529)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page 533)

Finishing
1. Click Download to download all device configuration information (e.g.,
changes to sources and destinations), as well as the LCD display
characteristics, to the RCP-IDe panel.
OR
Click Update LCD Display to download the LCD display characteristics
only to the RCP-IDe panel
2. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 533

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Controlling Backlight Intensity

In most cases, you will not need to adjust the contrast on your control panel
buttons. As your RCP-ID control panel ages, however, the degree of difference
between the lightest and darkest areas on a a button may fade. In such a case,
you should adjust the Contrast.

CAUTION
Adjusting the backlight intensity too often will
cause the LCDs to burn out prematurely.

Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog to bring up this tab.

Figure 13-18. Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab

534 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys

1. Click on the auxiliary key for which you want to change the intensity. The
Text, Icon, and Color tabs display disappear and the Brightness box opens.
2. Click on the drop-down arrow for the button state (active or inactive) you
want to change. A series of color gradation samples opens.

Figure 13-19. Adjusting Color Intensity for Auxiliary Keys

3. Click the color intensity you want. That color appears in the button state
brightness display box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 535

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Changing Intensity for Panel Keys

1. Click on the Panel button on the lower left side of the LCD Display tab. The
Text, Icon, and Color tabs display will disappear and the Panel LCD
Contrast box opens.

Figure 13-20. LCD Contrast

2. In the Panel LCD Contrast box, move the Brightness slider.

• Move the slider to the left for greater backlight intensity.
• Move the slider to the right for less backlight intensity.
• Click Restore Default to restore the panel’s original backlight intensity.
3. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

536 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Setting Up Button Pages

Note
Standard RCP-IDe control panels do not support button paging.

RCP-IDee LCD control panels support button paging, which allows you to
select alternate button definitions, or “pages,” for the same control panel.This
allows panels with a limited number or buttons to provide a virtual panel of
much greater size. You can add up to 20 pages to RCP-IDee LCD control
panels; page 1 is always the original, or default, setup.

MON MON MON AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
Page 1 VR 1 VR 2 VR 3
1 2 3 Tx 1 Tx 2 O1 02 03 04 05 06 07 AIR

UP

Blac LOC
Page 2 Bars
k SAT A SAT B SAT C CAM 1 CAM 2 CAM 3 Rx 1 Rx 2 Rx 3 VTR 1 VTR 2 VTR 3 VTR 4 K
DN

Test Test Test Still Still Still Still Still Blac

Page 3 Bars
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 k
12P
6PM
Salv Salv M XPT XPT XPT
Page 4 New Stat Shift
o1 o2 DUB ingest GoLive New 1 2 3
s
s

Figure 13-21. Example of 16×1 Panel with Four Button Pages

In the example shown in Figure 13-21, a 16×1 panel has been configured with 4
pages of buttons. To access the additional pages, the operator presses the
function buttons that have been reconfigured as “Page Up/Page Down” keys.
Pressing the “Page Up” key selects lower-numbered pages, while the “Page
Down” key selects higher numbered pages. When the highest- (or lowest-)
numbered pages have been reached, the selection “wraps” to the lowest- (or
highest-) numbered page.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 537

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

To set up button pages, follow these steps:

1. Click the Address, Style Tab. If necessary, check the Enhanced LCD Panel
check box. The paging information section appears on the Address, Style
tab (see Figure 13-22).

Figure 13-22. Paging Information

If you have added the control panel via the Add command but are not sure
if the panel you added is an enhanced version, click Poll to Check if
Enhanced. RouterMapper will do a poll of your existing system to see if
the panel is an enhanced version.
2. Under Paging Information, enter the total number of pages (including the
default first page) you want to set up. For example, enter “4” in the Number
Pages box if you want 3 pages in addition to the default page.

Note
When a panel has pages, each page requires a Page Up and a Page
Down button. If you do not want to use the auxiliary keys for these
functions, you will need to set up the Page Up/Down activity via the
Function Button function. See page 406 for more information.

3. If you want the existing auxiliary keys to be reassigned to act as paging

(page up and page down) keys, click the Auxiliary Up/Down check box.
4. Click Apply.
5. Select the Destinations tab. In the lower right corner you will see a
drop-down list box that allows you to select whatever page you want to
configure.

538 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

6. Define the Destinations for the appropriate pages. (See “Defining the
Destinations” on page 513 for instructions on how to define destinations.)
You can copy page definition information from one page to another. See
step 539 on page 539 for more information.
7. Select the Sources tab. In the lower right corner you will see a drop-down
list box that allows you to select whatever page you want to configure.
8. Define the Sources for the appropriate pages. (See “Defining the Sources”
on page 517 for instructions on how to define sources.)
You can copy page source information from one page to another. See step
539 on page 539 for more information.
9. Select the Address, Style tab again. To copy information from one page to
another:
a. Select the page you want to copy from (highlight the page number in
the From box).
b. Select the page you want to copy to (highlight the page number in the
To box).
c. Choose one of the following options.
• Click Sources to copy the source setup from one page to another. If
you want an exact copy, uncheck the Increment Sources check box;
otherwise, RouterMapper will automatically assign the other active
sources in increasing numerical order.
• Click Destinations to copy the destination setup from one page to
another. If you want an exact copy, uncheck the Increment Dests
check box; otherwise, RouterMapper will automatically assign the
other active destinations in increasing numerical order.
• Click Functions to copy the button function setup from one page to
another.
• Click LCDs to copy the LCD button setup from one page to
another.
• Click From Page Smart Apply to copy source, destination,
function, and LCD setups from one page to all of the other pages.
10. Enter the control panel IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask
(address used to identify the subnetwork to which the control panel
belongs).
11. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 539

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Monitoring Device Addresses

The RCP-IDe allows you to monitor any specific serial devices or IP addresses
to make sure the associated device is still active. You can also enable an alarm
condition to notify you when the associated device is inactive (both auxiliary
buttons will blink simultaneously to indicate the “inactive” alarm condition).

Serial Protocols
1. Click the Address, Style tab.
2. Click Protocols.... The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select
the Serial Protocols tab.
3. The assigned values for the selected serial port are displayed.

Figure 13-23. Edit Protocols -- Serial Protocols Window

4. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit. The Options window
opens (see Figure 13-27 on page 543). The assigned options for the selected
serial port are displayed.

540 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Figure 13-24. Serial Protocols Options Window

Note
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may
not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational
purposes only; you cannot change them through RouterMapper.

You can change some of the option’s values at this window. To change a
value:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 13-28).

Figure 13-25. Serial Protocols Options Window

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 541

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

b. Select the new value.

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Serial Protocols tab.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

Ethernet Protocols
1. Click the Address, Style tab.
2. Click Protocols.... The Edit Protocols window opens. If necessary, select
the Ethernet Protocols tab.
3. The assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the
selected Ethernet port are displayed.

Figure 13-26. Edit Protocols -- Ethernet Protocols Window

4. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit. The Options window
opens (see Figure 13-27). The assigned values for the default server and
client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.

542 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Figure 13-27. Ethernet Protocols Options Window

Note
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may
not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational
purposes only; you cannot change them through RouterMapper.

You can change some of the option’s values at this window. To change a
value:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A shortcut
menu opens (see Figure 13-28).

Figure 13-28. Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

b. Select the new value.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 543

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection
appears in the Value column.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Ethernet Protocols tab.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper main
menu.

Setting Network Information for RCP-IDe Panels

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in
the RCP-IDe LCD control panel. The information is updated on every Poll of
the control system.
The dialog box shows the control card's network setup on the right.
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections: Current and
Programmed settings.

Figure 13-29. Current Settings

• Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the panel. When you select the
Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are read-only.

544 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

Figure 13-30. Programmed Settings

• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings
that you want used with the RCP-IDe. When you select the Programmed
radio button, you can edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the RCP-IDe.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the RCP-IDe is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to
which the RCP-IDe belongs.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 545

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 13: Editing RCPp Panels

546 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14
Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Overview
Note
Refer to Chapter 13: “Editing RCPp Panels” For information on
configuring other RCPp Series panels.

The RCP-16×1SBAp is one of several different control panel styles available in

the RCPp programmable panels series. The panel is shown in Figure 14-1.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 549
• “Configuring the Auxiliary Keys” on page 551
• “Configuring Breakaway Keys” on page 552
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 557
• “Changing Panel Name or ID” on page 558
• “Defining the Destinations” on page 553
• “Defining the Sources” on page 555
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 550

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 547

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Models
The RCP-16×1SBAp provides control of a single destination with two levels of
breakaway. The panel includes two user-definable function keys, two
breakaway keys and 16 source select keys with associated LEDs.

RCP-16X1SBAp

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LCP-16X1SBAp

Lock

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Figure 14-1. RCP-16×1SBAp Panel

548 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit the RCP-16×1SBAp panels, double-click the panel name at the
RouterMapper main menu (or click the panel name, and then click Edit). The
Edit Panel dialog box opens.

Figure 14-2. Edit Panel Dialog Box

• Use the Auxiliary Keys tab to configure the user-definable auxiliary keys.
• Use the Breakaway Keys tab to select levels you want to control.
• Use the Destinations tab to define the destinations available.
• Use the Sources tab to define the sources available.
• Use the Address, Style tab is used to change the panel name, ID, or panel
style.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 549

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCPp control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)

Figure 14-3. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used
to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to
define the specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties
group will depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The
functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited. Table 10-1 on page 395 shows a list of button functions available for
RCP-16×1SBAp panels.
See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” on page 394 for
more detailed information about the selections available with this dialog box.

550 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Note
Either of the two auxiliary keys can be used as Destination Select keys.
See “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 397 for more
information.

All RCP-16×1SBAp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys. When

you add a new panel, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments (Enable
and Lock). To change either assignment:
1. Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box
similar to the one shown in Figure 14-2 on page 549 opens. The
user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog, and the
arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the auxiliary keys.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The Edit
Button Function dialog box (Figure 14-3 on page 550) opens. Refer to
Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for detailed
instructions on using this dialog box.

Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

If RouterMapper notes selection key definition errors that will not allow the
panel to be successfully downloaded, a Warning group appears on the Auxiliary
Keys tab.
To view the error message(s), click View Errors. The Panel Errors dialog box
opens.

Figure 14-4. Resolving Panel Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 551

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Configuring Breakaway Keys

Note
Either of the two breakaway keys can be used as Destination Select
keys. See “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 397 for more
information.

The RCP-16×1SBAp includes two user-definable breakaway keys, each of

which can control a different level. For example, one key could be assigned to
the video level, and the second key to the audio level. You tor could then
perform a video-only switch by pressing the Video key before selecting the
source. Likewise, an audio-only switch could be performed by pressing the
Audio key before selecting the source. To perform an AFV switch, you would
press both breakaway keys simultaneously before selecting the source.
To configure the breakaway keys:
1. Click the Breakaway Keys tab at the Edit Panel screen. The user-definable
breakaway keys are circled in blue on the dialog. The arrows point to the
RouterMapper buttons used to define the breakaway keys.

Figure 14-5. Configuring Breakaway Keys

2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The Edit
Button Function dialog box (Figure 14-3 on page 550) opens. Refer to
“Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key” on page 412 for detailed instructions
on using this dialog box to create a breakaway key.

552 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Defining the Destinations

Assigning Selection Keys
1. Click the Destination tab at the Edit Panel screen. The Destination Select
dialog box opens.
The destination is assigned at the Logical Destinations group on the left side
of the dialog. The list box lists all destinations available in the database.
2. Drag the destination from the Logical Destinations group and drop it on the
Dest box, as shown in Figure 14-6.

To assign a Destination to the panel:

1. Select the Destination from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 14-6. Assigning a Destination by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a destination selection key by using the Edit Button
Function dialog box. See “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 397 for
more information.
The RCP-16×1SBAp panel can be configured with more than one destination.
Either of the two auxiliary keys or the two breakaway keys can be used as
destination select keys.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 553

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a destination select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 14-7. The key is “greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.

To clear a Destination Select key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

Figure 14-7. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

554 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Defining the Sources

Assigning Selection Keys
1. Click the Sources tab at the Edit Panel screen. The Source Select dialog box
opens. Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group on the left side of
the dialog. The list box lists all sources available in the database. The button
icon shows the key currently assigned to each source.
2. Drag the source from the Logical Sources group and drop it on the desired
key, as shown in Figure 14-8.

To assign a Source key:

1. Select the Source from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 14-8. Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a source selection key using the Edit Button Function
dialog box. See “Creating a Source Select Key” on page 396 for more
information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 555

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in Figure 14-9.
The key is “greyed” to show it is unassigned.

To clear a Source Select key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

Figure 14-9. Clearing Selection Key Assignment

556 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Configuring the Levels Affected

Note
If the panel is configured with Breakaway keys, the Levels tab is
disabled. All check boxes are greyed.

The Levels tab specifies what levels are affected when sources are selected from
the panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab, pressing a source select key
on the panel will affect all levels defined for that source.
The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to specific levels
on the panel. For example, a panel could be created with only the video level
enabled. In this case, even if audio/video sources were selected, only the video
level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the
appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for this panel.

Figure 14-10. Assigning Levels for the Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 557

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Changing Panel Name or ID

Note
The RCP-16×1SBAp can only function as an RCP-16×1SBAp. The Panel
Style group is disabled (greyed out).

Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce the Name,
ID, Style dialog box shown in Figure 14-11. The list box on this screen displays
the current Panel Name. The two combo boxes display the Panel ID and Panel
Style settings. The Version box displays the hardware and software versions
reported by the panel (the panel must have been polled previously for the
Version information to be correct).

Figure 14-11. Changing the Panel Name or ID

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text
box. Up to 15 characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name would indicate
where the panel is located (for example, Edit B, Master Control, etc.)

558 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel ID.

Note
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed
in the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to
the manual that was supplied with the panel).

Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the definition has
been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking
Download on the Edit Panel screen (or refer to “Downloading Device
Definitions” starting on page 58). To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 559

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

560 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15
Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Overview
Note
See Chapter 13: “Editing RCPp Panels” for information on configuring
other RCPp series panels.

The RCP-12×2BAp is one of several different control panel styles in the RCPp
programmable panels series The panel is shown in Figure 15-1 on page 562.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 562
• “Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style” on page 570
• “Configuring the Auxiliary Keys” on page 564
• “Configuring Breakaway Keys” on page 565
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 569
• “Defining the Destinations” on page 566
• “Defining the Sources” on page 567
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 563

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 561

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Models

Figure 15-1. RCP-12×2BAp Panel

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit RCP-12×2BAp panels, double-click the panel name at the
RouterMapper main menu (or click the panel name, and then click Edit). The
Edit Panel dialog box opens.

Figure 15-2. Edit Panel Dialog Box

562 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

• Use the Auxiliary Keys tab to configure user-definable auxiliary keys.

• Use the Breakaway Keys tab to select levels you want to control.
• Use the Destinations tab to define the destinations available.
• Use the Sources, Dest-A and Sources-Dest-B tabs to define the sources
available.
• Use the Levels tab to define the levels affected.
• Use the Name, ID, Style tab to change panel name, ID, or style.

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on RCP-12×2BAp control panels. (Right-click the
selection key to access the dialog.)

Figure 15-3. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used
to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to
define the specific parameters of the button. The appearance of the Properties
group will depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box. The
functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being
edited. The functions available in the drop-down list will depend on the type of
panel being edited. Table 10-1 on page 395 shows a list of button functions
available for RCP-12×2BAp panels.
See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” on page 394 for
more detailed information about the selections available with this dialog box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 563

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCP-12×2BAp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys. When a
new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments (Enable
and Dual Locks).
To change either assignment:
1. Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box
similar to the one shown in Figure 15-2 on page 562 opens.
• The user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog.
• The arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the
auxiliary keys.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The Edit
Button Function dialog box (Figure 15-3 on page 563) opens. Refer to
Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for detailed
instructions on using this dialog box.

564 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Configuring Breakaway Keys

All RCP-12×2BAp panels include two user-definable breakaway keys. When a
new panel is added, the breakaway keys are given default assignments (Video
and Audio).
To change either assignment, follow these steps:
1. Click the Breakaway Keys tab at the Edit Panel screen. The user-definable
breakaway keys are circled in blue on the dialog. The arrows point to the
RouterMapper buttons used to define the breakaway keys.

Figure 15-4. Configuring the Breakaway Keys

2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The Edit
Button Function dialog box (Figure 15-3 on page 563) opens. Refer to
“Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key” on page 412 for detailed instructions
on using this dialog box to create a breakaway key.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 565

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Defining the Destinations

Assigning Selection Keys
To assign a destination select key:
1. Click the Destinations tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to
Figure 15-5 opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the
configuration of the RCP-12×2BAp panel.
Destinations are assigned at the Logical Destinations group. The list box
lists all destinations available in the database. The button icon shows the
key currently assigned to each destination.
2. Drag the destination from the Logical Destinations group and drop it on the
desired key, as shown in Figure 15-5.

To assign a Destination key:

1. Select the destination from the list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 15-5. Assigning a Destination to a Selection Key by Dragging

and Dropping

You may also create a destination selection key by using the Edit Button
Function dialog box. See “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 397 for
more information.

566 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Defining the Sources

Assigning Selection Keys

Note
The RCP-12×2BAp is a dual bus panel. The top row of buttons controls
the first destination source select (Destination A). The bottom row of
buttons controls the second destination source select (Destination B).
The Edit Panel screen contains separate tabs to allow you to control the
sources for the separate destinations.

1. Click the Sources – Dest. A or the Sources – Dest. B tab at the Edit Panel
screen (see Figure 15-6).
Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group. The list box lists all
sources available in the database. The button icon shows the key currently
assigned to each source.
2. Drag the source from the Logical Sources group.
3. Drop the source on the desired key, as shown in Figure 15-6.

To assign a Source key:

1. Select the Source from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.

Figure 15-6. Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a source selection key by using the Edit Button Function
dialog box. See “Creating a Source Select Key” on page 396 for more
information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 567

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To clear or delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 15-7. The key is “greyed” to show it is unassigned.

To clear a Source Select key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.

Figure 15-7. Clearing Source Select Key

568 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Configuring the Levels Affected

Note
If the panel is configured with Breakaway keys, the Levels tab is
disabled. All check boxes are greyed.

The Levels tab specifies what levels are affected when sources are selected from
the panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab, pressing a source select
button on the panel will affect all levels defined for that source.
The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to specific levels
on the panel. For example, a panel could be created with only the video level
enabled. In this case, even if audio/video sources were selected, only the video
level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the
appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for this panel.

Figure 15-8. Assigning Levels for a Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 569

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

Clicking on the Name, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box will produce the
Name, ID, Style dialog box. The list box on this screen displays the current
Panel Name. The two combo boxes display the Panel ID and Panel Style
settings. The Version box displays the hardware and software versions reported
by the panel (the panel must have been polled previously for the Version
information to be correct).

Figure 15-9. Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text
box. The descriptive name may contain up to 15 characters. Typically, the Panel
Name would indicate where the panel is located (i.e., Edit B, Master Control,
etc.)
To change the panel ID, follow these steps:
1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel ID.

Note
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed
in the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to
the manual that was supplied with the panel).

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.

570 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

2. Scroll through the list of choices.

3. Select the new panel style.

CAUTION
A panel style change will initialize the current
configuration to the default setting. All previous
modifications are lost.

Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the definition has
been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the new settings by pressing
the Download button on the Edit Panel screen (or refer to “Downloading
Device Definitions” starting on page 58). To print new key caps, click Print
Key Caps.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 571

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

572 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16
Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Overview
Note
To determine which panel type you are using, refer to “Models” on page
574.

The RCP-GPIp series panels are general purpose interfaces that provide contact
closure inputs and outputs for Hedco, MixBox, XPlus and VIA series routers.
The RCP-GPIp panels are available in two different styles. The GPI32p
provides 32 input and output contact closures. The GPI64p provides 64 input
and output contact closures. Both can be configured using RouterMapper.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box” on page 574
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 576
• “Configuring Aux and Main Contact Functions” on page 576
• “Example of GPI Configuration” on page 578
• “Setting the Panel ID and Name” on page 575

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 573

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Models
RCP-GPI32p
90/135 VAC 200/265 VAC
FIRMWARE
CAUTION: REVISION
RISK OF FIRE
REPLACE FUSE
AS MARKED
PANEL ID
1 8 9 16
ON

ON

ON
OFF
INPUTS 1-16 INPUTS 17-32 OUTPUTS 1-16 OUTPUTS 17-32
DIP SW LEVELS
50/60 Hz 5VA MAX

RCP-GPI64p
90/135 VAC 200/265 VAC
FIRMWARE
CAUTION: REVISION
RISK OF FIRE
REPLACE FUSE
AS MARKED
PANEL ID
1 8 9 16 INPUTS 33-48 INPUTS 49-64 OUTPUTS 33-48 OUTPUTS 49-64
ON
ON

ON

OFF
INPUTS 1-16 INPUTS 17-32 OUTPUTS 1-16 OUTPUTS 17-32
DIP SW LEVELS
50/60 Hz 5VA MAX

Figure 16-1. RCP-GPIp Rear Panels

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box

Double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main menu (or click the
panel name, and then click Edit). The Microsoft® Windows® Notepad
application will launch with the GPI Panel Definition file displayed.

Figure 16-2. GPI Definition File

574 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Modifying the GPI Panel Definition File

GPI Panel Definition File Layout

Begin Indicator
Sets panel ID
Sets panel name
Configures levels affected
Configures Aux contacts

Configures main contacts

Figure 16-3. GPI Panel Definition File

Note
There will only be one GPI Definition File regardless of the number of GPI
panels in the RouterMapper panel list.

A single GPI Definition File is used for all GPI panels in the database. The
definition file includes a separate section for each GPI panel, with all the
configuration information for that panel contained within the section. A panel
section begins with the indicator BeginGPI and ends with the indicator
EndGPI. The entries in between the BeginGPI and EndGPI indicators define
the panel.
Each entry in a panel definition section begins with an identifier that indicates
which parameter is being defined in that line. Possible identifiers are PanelID,
PanelNAME, ValidLevels, Aux1, Aux2, Contact1 . . . Contact64. An equals
sign (=) will follow each parameter identifier. The configuration information
appears to the right of the equals sign. For example, a PanelID=10 entry means
that the Panel ID for this panel is 10. A PanelNAME=Tally 3 entry means that
this panel is named “Tally 3.”

Setting the Panel ID and Name

1. Locate the appropriate panel section in the GPI Panel Definition file (look
for the GPIBegin indicator).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 575

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

2. On the PanelID= line, enter the panel ID that is associated with this panel.
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed in
the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on the physical panel
(for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to the
manual supplied with the panel).
3. On the PanelName= line, enter a descriptive for the panel. Up to 15
characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name indicates where the panel
is located (e.g., Edit B, Master Control, etc.)

Configuring the Levels Affected

1. Locate the appropriate panel section in the GPI Panel Definition File (look
for the GPIBegin indicator).
2. On the ValidLevels= line, enter the number of levels to be associated with
the panel. Valid entries are numbers 0 through 7. (Refer to Figure 16-3 on
page 575 for an illustration.)

Configuring Aux and Main Contact Functions

The Aux and Contact entries define the functions that each GPI contact will
perform. There are 64 main contacts, each with a separate definition entry (i.e.,
Contact1, Contact2, etc.). The Aux entries are identical to the Contact entries,
except that they correspond to contacts that are out of sequence with regard to
the others.
1. Locate the appropriate panel section in the GPI Panel Definition File (look
for the GPIBegin indicator).
2. Enter the contact’s function on the right side of the Aux= or Contact= line
(see Figure 16-3 on page 575). For example, if a contact is to act as a
source, enter “Source” in the Contact= line.
3. In addition to the function type, contacts also require additional
configuration information. For example, if you enter “Source” in the
Contact= line, you must also define which source is associated with the
contact. To enter additional information in a Contact line, place a
comma after the function, and then enter the additional information after the
comma. Function types and required information are listed in Table 16-1 on
page 577.

576 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Table 16-1. GPI Function Types

Function Type Description Additional Information
None No effect on either the GPI input or None required
output.
Source GPI Input: selects the source Index of the logical source associated with the contact
GPI Output: tallies the source Contact1=Source, 12
Destination GPI Input: selects the destination Index of the logical destination associated with the
GPI Output: tallies the destination contact
Contact1=Destination, 12
CrossPoint GPI Input: selects the crosspoint Index of the logical source & destination
GPI Output: tallies the crosspoint Contact1=Crosspoint,3,4
StatusOnlyCrossPoint GPI Input: no effect Index of the logical source & destination
GPI Output: tallies the crosspoint Contact1=Crosspoint,3,4
LocalSalvo Fires a salvo Index of the local salvo
Contact1=LocalSalvo, 2
Shift Requires Shift to be selected and None required
held when salvos are fired Contact1=Shift
Take Causes the panel to be operated in None required
Preset/Take mode (Take must be Contact1=Take
pressed to make the switch).
Clear Allows the operator to abort a None required
preset switch before the Take Contact1=Clear
StatusOnlySource GPI Input: no effect Index of the logical source associated with the contact
GPI Output: tallies the source only Contact1=StatusOnlySource, 12
while the contact is held closed
JoyStickSource GPI Input: selects the source only Index of the logical source associated with the contact
while the contact is held closed Contact1=JoyStickSource, 12
GPI Output: tallies the source only
while the contact is held closed
JoyStickCrossPoint GPI Input: selects the crosspoint Index of the logical source & destination
only while the contact is held Contact1=JoyStickCrosspoint,3,4
closed
GPI Output: tallies the crosspoint
only while the contact is held
closed

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 577

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Example of GPI Configuration

See Figure 16-5 on page 579 for an illustration of the GPI Panel Definition file
entries for this example.

Figure 16-4. RCP-GPI32p as a 32×1 Single Destination (on Destination

5) with Control and Tally

578 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Figure 16-5. GPI Panel Definition File Entries for RCP-GPI32p as a 32×1 Single Destination (on
Destination 5) with Control and Tally

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 579

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

580 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Keywords

A devices 212
panels 213–220
ABA(1)-MB, -SB, -XY. See RCP-ABA 1RU control
users 221–223
panels
Addresses, monitoring device 540–544
ABA2(E)-XYp. See RCP-ABA 2RU control panels
Alarm editor
ABA-AFV. See RCP-ABA 1RU control panels
adding alarm types 414–418
Adding
deleting alarm types 419
CENTRIO matrices 92–95
editing alarm types 418–419
commands 404
Alarm key 413
control panels 171–175
Allowing access
devices
to destinations 446, 482–483
adding by discovery 51, 80, 172, 179
to sources 446, 482
adding by polling 43, 80, 172, 179
Application parameters, RouterMapper-controllable 336–
adding manually 53–54, 82–122, 123–126, 127–
338
132, 133–136, 151–167, 168–169, 173–175, 179–
Assembling key caps 69
189
Assigning
Edge protocol gateway 179–189
category keys 461–463, 496–498
generic Harris routers. See Legacy frames,
destination selection keys 447, 484, 515, 553, 566
adding
dual outputs 300
Hedco (HD-16) series. See Legacy frames,
favorite sources to selection keys 447–448, 484, 519,
adding
555, 567
Integrator frames 123–126, 127–132, 133–136
module to Platinum matrix 299
MixBox series. See Legacy frames, adding source selection keys 447–448, 484, 519, 555, 567
NEO series. See Legacy frames, adding
sources 459–461, 495–496
output monitoring setup 137–146
sync settings 301
Panacea frames 151–167 view order 444–445, 481–482
Platinum frames 82–122 Assigning web router application configurations 223
Prophecy series. See Legacy frames, adding Audio processing settings
router control panels 173–175 audio effects 387–388
shortcut 64 audio gain 389–390
Via series. See Legacy frames, adding audio source 390–391
XPlus series. See Legacy frames, adding
Automatic disconnect feature 27
XPRESS series. See Legacy frames, adding
Automating logical names synchronization 64, 159, 204,
dynamic routing threads 263–266
471–472, 506–507
folders 60, 61
indexes 283 B
parametric settings 426–428
Platinum matrix 84–105, 300 Backing up databases 71–73
salvos 401–402 Breakaway keys 552
web router application Breakaway⁄Follow key 412

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 581

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Button colors, editing 32–33 Configuration examples, RCP-GPIp 578

Button pages setup 537–539 Configuration options
RCP-IDe panels 510
C RCPp panels 510
Category indexing Configuring
adding categories 277 auxiliary keys 451, 488, 513, 551, 564
changing names 279 breakaway keys 552, 565
correcting destination errors 280–281 contact aux functions 576
correcting source errors 279–280 Edge protocol gateway 179–210
deleting categories 279 levels 521, 557, 569, 576
generating names 279 Connecting RouterMapper to your system 14–17
introduction 276–277 creating an additional serial port 16
viewing destinations affected by categories 278 downloading router frame and control panel
viewing sources affected by categories 277–278 configurations 14
Category⁄Index key 399 Contacting us
CENTRIO product information 7
adding matrices 92–95 technical support 7
creating actual PIP destinations 258–259 Contiguous partitioning 99, 312, 320–321, 331
double density 301 Control panels
setting up PIPs to follow destinations 259–261 12×2BAp models 562
virtual destinations 258–261 16×1SBAp models 548
Changing ABA(1)-MB models 437
index names 283 ABA(1)-SB models 435
matrix format 300 ABA(1)-XY models 434
matrix name 300 ABA1(E)-XY models 435
matrix sort order 300 ABA2(E)-XYp models 474
module format, Platinum 301 ABA-AFV models 437
module parameter setting, Platinum 302 adding salvos 401–402
panel brands 465–466, 500–501 adding to database by discovery 172
panel IDs 465–466, 500, 522–523, 558–559, 570 adding to database by polling 172
panel names 465, 500, 522, 558, 570 adding to database using Add command 173
panel styles 465–466, 500–501, 522–523, 570–571 Alarm key 413
Changing protocol settings 113–122, 361–369 allowing access to destinations 446, 482–483
Clean switch 379–381, 382–383 allowing access to sources 446, 482
Clearing assigning button functions 394
destination selection keys 450, 487, 516, 554 assigning category keys 461–463, 496–498
module parameter setting, Platinum 303–304 assigning destination selection keys 447, 484, 515, 553,
source selection keys 450, 487, 520, 556, 568 566
Coax port protocol option values, Edge protocol gateway assigning source selection keys 447–448, 484, 519, 555,
193–194, 210 567
Color codes, Platinum matrix 298 assigning sources 459–461, 495–496
Commands assigning view order 444–445, 481–482
adding commands 404 Breakaway⁄Follow key 412
Command Select key 404 Category⁄Index key 399
deleting commands 405 changing panel brands 465–466, 500–501
editing commands 404–405 changing panel IDs 465–466, 500, 522–523, 558–559,
Communication dependencies 3 570
Communication settings 18–23 changing panel names 465, 500, 522, 558, 570
demo mode setting 21 changing panel styles 465–466, 500–501, 522–523, 570–
dial-up setting 21 571
selecting settings 18 clearing destination selection keys 450, 487, 516, 554
serial setting 19 clearing source selection keys 450, 487, 520, 556, 568
TCP/IP setting 19 Command Select key 404

582 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

configuration options Source Select key 396

RCP-IDe panels 510 Copying device links 66
RCPp panels 510 Copying folder links 62
configuring auxiliary keys 451, 488, 513, 551, 564 Correcting
configuring breakaway keys 552, 565 destination errors 285
configuring contact aux functions 576 source errors 284
configuring levels 521, 557, 569, 576 Creating
copying control panel definitions 55 actual PIP destinations 258–259
creating panel definitions 451, 488 additional serial port 16
Crosspoint Select key 398 control panel definitions 451, 488
defining destinations 513, 553–554, 566 indexes 282
defining sources 517–519, 555–556, 567–568 Crosspoint Select key 398
denying access to destinations 445, 482 Crosspoint switching mode 95, 301
denying access to sources 445, 482 Crosspoints, redundant 95, 301
Destination Alarm Select key 422
Destination Select key 397 D
determining destinations accessible to panels 454– Data router frames 127–132
458, 491–493 Database setup 43
determining sources accessible to panels 458–459, Deleting
493–494 commands 405
downloading configurations 14 devices 67
Edit Button Function key 406 dynamic routing fabric manager threads 271
editing salvos 401–403 folders 63
GPI32p models 574 indexes 283
GPI64p models 574 matrix 300
limiting available destinations 443, 480 parametric settings 429
limiting available sources 443, 480 web router application
Lock key 410 users 224
moving a selection key 441, 478 Demo mode communication connection setting 21
On-Air Swap key 431 Denying access
Page key 409 to destinations 445, 482
Panel Status key 408 to sources 445, 482
Parametric key 424 Description
Protect key 411 RCP-ABA1EMBp 438
RCP-12×2BAp panels 561–571 RCP-ABA1ESBp 436
RCP-16×1SBAp panels 547–559 RCP-ABA2EMBp 475
RCP-ABA 1RU panels 433–472 RCP-ABA2ESBp 475
RCP-ABA 2RU panels 473–507 Destination Alarm Select key 422
RCP-GPIp Destination Select key 397
configuration examples 578 Destinations
function types 577 adding logical destinations 255
panel definition file layout 575 assigning
RCP-GPIp panels 573–579 icons 251
RCP-IDe panels 509–545 level outputs 251
RCPp panels 509–524 names 249
resolving auxiliary key definition errors 452, 489, 551 physical outputs 251
resolving inaccessibility errors 463, 499 defining 248, 513, 553–554, 566
Salvo Select key 400 deleting logical destinations 256
setting GPIp panel IDs 575 editing preferences 256
setting GPIp panel names 575 virtual destinations for CENTRIO 258–261
setting levels associated with selection windows 452, Determining
489 destinations accessible to panels 454–458, 491–493
Source Alarm Select key 420 sources accessible to panels 458–459, 493–494

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 583

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Device addresses, monitoring 540–544 mapping values, Pro-Bel 185–189

Device definition function buttons 40 serial port protocol assignments 181–186, 206–207
Device summary list 41 serial port protocol option values 181–186, 206–207
Devices setting network information 195–203, 208–210
adding devices 53–54 SNMP Agent 199–201
adding devices shortcut 64 supported Ethernet protocols 190
copying links 66 supported serial protocols 183
deleting 67 upgrading firmware 77–78
device management menu 65 Edge. See Edge protocol gateway
discovering 63 Edit button function dialog box 394, 441, 478, 512, 550, 563
editing 67 Edit Button Function key 406
managing devices 63–67 Edit panel dialog box
moving links 66–67 RCP-12x2BAp 562
polling 63 RCP-16×1SBAp 549
removing 66 RCP-ABA 1RU 439
Dial-up communication connection setting 21 RCP-ABA 2RU 476
Discovering RCP-IDe 511
devices 63 RCPp 511
folders 60 Editing
Discovering devices 51 button colors 32–33
Discovery commands 404–405
discovering devices 51 control panel button functions
Discovery function 172, 179 adding salvos 401–402
Double density, enabling 301 Alarm key 413
Downloading assigning functions 394
configurations breakaway⁄follow 412
control panel 14 category⁄index 399
router frame 14 Command Select 404
corrective actions 59 Crosspoint Select 398
device definitions 58 destination alarm select 422
dynamic routing fabric manager thread information destination select 397
273 edit button function 406
folders 61 editing salvos 401–403
problems 59 lock 410
Dual outputs, assigning 300 on-air swap 431
Dynamic routing fabric manager 262 page 409
adding threads 263–266 panel status 408
deleting threads 271 parametric 424
downloading thread information 273 protect 411
editing remote access lists 268–270 salvo select 400
editing threads 266–267 source alarm select 420
optimizing threads 273 source select 396
control panels
E RCP-12×2BAp panels 561–571
Edge protocol gateway RCP-16×1SBAp panels 547–559
adding by discovery 179 RCP-ABA 1RU panels 433–472
adding by polling 179 RCP-ABA 2RU panels 473–507
adding manually 179–189 RCP-GPIp panels 573–579
coax port protocol option values 193–194, 210 RCP-IDe panels 509–545
configuring 179–210 RCPp panels 509–524
detected cards 195, 208 databases 225–292
Ethernet port protocol option values 190–192, 207 adding icons 286–289
logical names synchronization 64, 204 backing up databases 71–73

584 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

category indexing 276–281 folder management menu 61

destinations 248 managing folders 60–63
dynamic routing fabric manager 262 moving links 62
importing icons 289–291 polling 60, 61
levels 226 renaming folders 61
managing custom icons 286 Frames
partitioned matrices 274 adding
printing databases 70 by Add command 81
removing icons 291–292 by discovery 80
restoring databases 73–76 by polling 80
restoring default icons 291 downloading configurations 14
sources 230 editing
device definitions 54 frame definitions 294, 294–392
devices 67 matrices 297
dynamic routing fabric manager matrix partitioning 311
remote access lists 268–270 Function types, RCP-GPIp 577
threads 266–267
frame configurations 294 G
frame definitions Gateway. See Setting network information
audio processing settings 387 Generic Harris routers. See Legacy frames, adding
control cards 349 GPI32p model control panel. See RCP-GPIp control
detected cards 342 panels
detected matrices 333 GPI64p model control panels. See RCP-GPIp control
editing configuration 294 panels
firmware upgrades 347–349
I/O hardware module 374 H
matrix partitioning 311
Hard panel fonts 31
parametric settings 378
Hedco (HD-16) series. See Legacy frames, adding
router matrices 297
parametric settings 428 I–J
salvos 401–403
Editing web router application user information 224 Icons
Editor preferences 28 adding 286–289
Enabling redundant crosspoints 301 assigning icons
Ethernet port protocol assignments destinations 251
control panels 468–470, 503–505 sources 238
Panacea 157–158 importing 289–291
Ethernet port protocol option values managing 286
control panels 468–470, 503–505 Platinum matrix 299
Panacea 157–158 removing 291–292
Ethernet port protocol option values, Edge protocol restoring defaults 291
gateway 190–192, 207 Illustrations
RCP-ABA1EMBp 438
F RCP-ABA1ESBp 436
RCP-ABA2EMBp 475
4×1p, 4×4p model control panels. See RCPp control
RCP-ABA2ESBp 475
panels
Indexes
Firmware upgrades 77–78, 347–349
adding 283
Folders
changing names 283
adding folders 60, 61
correcting destination errors 285
copying links 62
correcting source errors 284
deleting folders 63
creating 282
discovering 60
deleting 283
downloading 61

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 585

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

managing 282 sources 443, 480

Indicators, polling status 45 Lock key 410
Initiating a poll 43, 80 Logical names synchronization 64, 108, 159, 204, 350, 471–
Installation 472, 506–507
communication settings 18–23
connecting RouterMapper 14–17 M
creating an additional serial port 16 Main window overview 39
downloading router frame and control panel device definition function buttons 40
configurations 14 device summary list 41
installing RouterMapper software 10 pop-up menus 40
installing RouterMapper v.5.06 13 router definition function buttons 41
preferences 27–33 sorting entries 40
remote dial-up 23–27 Managing
uninstalling RouterMapper 34 devices 63–67
Integrator frames folders 60–63
adding 123–126 Managing indexes 282
data router 127–132 Map names
Integrator Gold 133–136 Edge 202
editing 328–333, 341–344, 349, 370 Panacea 165–166
Introduction Platinum 359–360
communication dependencies 3 Matrix partitioning 311
contacting us 7 contiguous 99, 312, 320–321, 331
new features 2 editing components 330
system requirements 2 enabling 314, 329
using RouterMapper on-line help 5–6 Mono breakaway 102, 312, 325–327
using this manual 3 RGB/Stereo 98, 312, 318–319, 330
IP address. See Setting network information shared inputs 101, 312, 324–325
Stereo breakaway 103, 327–328
K stereo breakaway 313
Key caps types 98–105
assembling 69 Wild 100, 312, 321–323, 332
printing 68 MixBox series. See Legacy frames, adding
Monitoring device addresses 540–544
L Mono breakaway partitioning 102, 312, 325–327
Launching RouterMapper 38 Moving a selection key 441, 478
LCD buttons Moving device links 66–67
See also RCP-IDe control panels Moving folder links 62
controlling backlight intensity 534 Multiple edit functions, performing 300
editing displays 525–536
setting up pages 537–539
N
setup 525–539 NEO series. See Legacy frames, adding
Legacy frames, adding 168–169 Network information settings
Levels Panacea 155
changing a level’s color 227 Platinum 110–112, 352–354
defining 226 RCP-ABA 1RU control panels 470–471
specifying logical router size 229 RCP-ABA 2RU control panels 505–506
Licenses, SNMP RCP-IDe panels 544–545
Edge 203 New features 2
Panacea 166
Platinum 360 O
Limiting On-Air Swap key 431
destinations 443, 480 Optimizing dynamic routing fabric manager threads 273

586 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Output monitoring 137–146 changing matrix name 300

changing matrix sort order 300
P color codes 298
Page key 409 deleting matrix 300
Panacea icons 299
adding frames 151–167 removing module from matrix 299
editing frames 294, 297, 310–311, 328–333, 341–344, modules
349, 371–392 assigning module to matrix 299
Ethernet port protocol assignments 157–158 changing module format 301
Ethernet port protocol option values 157–158 changing parameter settings 302
logical names synchronization 64, 159 clearing parameter settings 303–304
serial port protocol assignments 156–157 removing module from matrix 299
serial port protocol option values 156–157 multiple edit functions, performing 300
SNMP Agent 160–163 redundant crosspoints, enabling 301
upgrading firmware 77–78 sync settings, assigning 301
Panel defaults 31 TDM starting slot offset 108
Panel Status key 408 Polling
Panels, web router application 213–220 devices 63
Parameters folders 60, 61
RouterMapper-controllable application parameters initiating a poll 43
336–338 polling problems and corrective actions 46
Parametric editing setup 425 polling problems and corrective actions, combiner
adding settings 426–428 system 46–50
deleting settings 429 polling the control system 43
editing settings 428 status indicators 45
Parametric key 424 Pop-up menus 40
Parametric settings 378 Preferences 27–33
Partitioned matrices 274 editing button colors 32–33
Partitioning editor preferences 28
contiguous 99, 320–321, 331 hard panel fonts 31
Mono breakaway 102, 325–327 panel defaults 31
physical map order 104 soft panel fonts 31
RGB/Stereo 98, 318–319, 330 zero-based export 33
shared inputs 101, 324–325 Printing
Stereo breakaway 103, 327–328 databases 70
types 98–105 key caps 68
wild 100, 321–323, 332 Product information contact information 7
Performing multiple edit functions, Platinum 300 Prophecy series. See Legacy frames, adding
P-HSC modules. See Clean Switch; Quiet Switch Prophecy series. See RCP-12×2BAp control panels
P-HSCQ modules. See Clean Switch Protect key 411
P-HSCQ modules. See Clean Switch; Transition Protocol settings 113–122
Physical map order 104 control panels 465, 467–472, 500, 502–507
PIP follow destinations 259–261 Platinum 361–369
Platinum P-SC modules. See Clean Switch; Quiet Switch
adding frames 82–122 P-SCQ modules. See Clean Switch; Transition
crosspoint switching mode, setting 301
double density, enabling 301
Q
dual outputs, assigning 300 Quiet switch 381–382
logical names synchronization 64, 108, 350
matrix R
adding matrix 84–105, 300 RCP-12×2BAp control panels 561–571
assigning module to matrix 299 auxiliary keys, configuring 564
changing matrix format 300

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 587

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

breakaway keys, configuring 565 panel styles, changing 465–466

destination selection keys, assigning 566 protocol settings 465, 467–472
destinations, defining 566 selection keys, moving 441
levels, configuring 569 serial port protocol assignments 467–468, 502–503
models 562 serial port protocol option values 467–468
panel IDs, changing 570 source selection keys
panel names, changing 570 assigning 447–448
panel styles, changing 570–571 clearing 450
source selection keys sources
assigning 567 allowing access to 446
clearing 568 assigning 459–461
sources, defining 567–568 denying access 445
RCP-16×1SBAp control panels 547–559 determining accessibility 458–459
auxiliary keys limiting 443
configuring 551 view order, assigning 444–445
definition errors, resolving 551 RCP-ABA 2RU control panels 473–507
breakaway keys, configuring 552 auxiliary keys
destination selection keys configuring 488
assigning 553 definition errors, resolving 489
clearing 554 category keys, assigning 496–498
destinations, defining 553–554 destination selection keys
levels, configuring 557 assigning 484
models 548 clearing 487
panel IDs, changing 558–559 destinations
panel names, changing 558 allowing access 482–483
source selection keys denying access 482
assigning 555 determining accessibility 491–493
clearing 556 limiting 480
sources, defining 555–556 Ethernet port protocol assignments 503–505
RCP-ABA 1RU control panels 433–472 Ethernet port protocol option values 503–505
auxiliary keys inaccessibility errors, resolving 499
configuring 451 levels, setting 489
definition errors, resolving 452 logical names synchronization 506–507
category keys, assigning 461–463 models 474
destination selection keys network information, setting 505–506
assigning 447 panel brands, changing 500–501
clearing 450 panel definitions, creating 488
destinations panel IDs, changing 500
allowing access to 446 panel names, changing 500
denying access 445 panel styles, changing 500–501
determining accessibility 454–458 protocol settings 500, 502–507
limiting 443 selection keys, moving 478
Ethernet port protocol assignments 468–470 serial port protocol option values 502–503
Ethernet port protocol option values 468–470 source selection keys
inaccessibility errors, resolving 463 assigning 484
levels, setting 452 clearing 487
logical names synchronization 471–472 sources
models 434–438 allowing access 482
network information, setting 470–471 assigning 495–496
panel brands, changing 465–466 denying access 482
panel definitions, creating 451 determining accessibility 493–494
panel IDs, changing 465–466 limiting 480
panel names, changing 465 view order, assigning 481–482

588 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

RCP-ABA1EMBp source selection keys

description 438 assigning 519
illustration 438 clearing 520
RCP-ABA1ESBp sources, defining 517–519
description 436 Redundant
illustration 436 crosspoints 95, 301
RCP-ABA2EMBp switch mode 95
description 475 Reference standard
illustration 475 HD format 384
RCP-ABA2ESBp SD format 384
description 475 Remote dial-up 23–27
illustration 475 automatic disconnect 27
RCP-GPIp control panels 573–579 configuring RouterWorks 25
configuration examples 578 configuring the PC modem 23
contact aux functions, configuring 576 configuring the router 24
function types 577 configuring the router modem 24
GPI32p models 574 connecting equipment 23
GPI64p models 574 controlling a remote router 27
levels, configuring 576 Removing
models 574 devices 66
panel definition file layout 575 Removing module from Platinum matrix 299
panel IDs, setting 575 Renaming folders 61
panel names, setting 575 Resolving
RCP-IDe control panels 509–545 auxiliary key definition errors 452, 489, 551
configuration options 510 inaccessibility errors 463, 499
configuring auxiliary keys 513 Restoring databases 73–76
destination selection keys RGB/Stereo partitioning 98, 312, 318–319, 330
assigning 515 Router definition function buttons 41
clearing 516
destinations, defining 513 S
LCD buttons setup 525–539 16×1SBAp. See RCP-16×1SBAp control panels
levels, configuring 521 Salvos 401–403
models. See configuration options adding crosspoints 402
panel IDs, changing 522–523 capturing existing states 402
panel names, 522 Copying existing salvos 403
panel styles, changing 522–523 copying existing salvos 403
source selection keys deleting crosspoints 402
assigning 519 Salvo Select key 400
clearing 520 selecting crosspoints 402
sources, defining 517–519 Selecting
RCP-p control panels communication connection settings
panel names, changing 522 demo mode 21
RCPp control panels 509–524 dial-up 21
configuration options 510 serial 19
configuring auxiliary keys 513 TCP/IP 19
destination selection keys Serial communication connection setting 19
assigning 515 Serial port protocol assignments
clearing 516 control panels 467–468, 502–503
destinations, defining 513 Edge protocol gateway 181–186, 206–207
levels, configuring 521 Panacea 156–157
models. See configuration options Serial port protocol option values
panel IDs, changing 522–523 control panels 467–468, 502–503
panel styles, changing 522–523 Edge protocol gateway 181–186, 206–207

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 589

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Panacea 156–157 Sync settings, assigning 301

Setting System limitations 42
database setup 43 System requirements 2
GPIp panel IDs 575
GPIp panel names 575 T
levels associated with selection windows 452, 489 12×2BAp. See RCP-12×2BAp control panels
network information TCP/IP communication connection setting 19
RCP-ABA 1RU control panels 470–471 TDM starting slot offset 108
RCP-ABA 2RU control panels 505–506 Technical support contact information 7
RCP-IDe panels 544–545 Transition 383
Settings, application parameters 336–338 Troubleshooting
Shared inputs partitioning 101, 312, 324–325 download problems 59
SNMP Agent polling problems 46
Edge protocol gateway 199–201 polling problems, combiner system 46–50
licenses 360
Panacea frames 160–163 U
Platinum frames 355, 355–359
Uninstalling RouterMapper 34
Soft panel fonts 31
Upgrades, firmware 347–349
Sources
Upgrading firmware 77–78
adding logical sources 246
Users, web router application 221–224
assigning
Using
icons 238
manual 3
level inputs 238
on-line help
names 235
context-sensitive help 5
physical inputs 238
full-text search 5
defining 230, 517–519, 555–556, 567–568
general help 5
deleting logical sources 247
editing sources preferences 247 V
modifying grid appearance 231
sharing level inputs 241 Via series. See Legacy frames, adding
Source Alarm Select key 420
Source Select key 396 W
status names 243 Web router applications
Startup and customization 37–69 adding
adding devices manually 53–54 devices 212
assembling key caps 69 panels 213–220
copying control panel definitions 55 users 221–223
database setup 43 assigning configurations 223
discovering devices 51 deleting users 224
downloading device definitions 58 editing user information 224
editing device definitions 54 Wild partitioning 100, 312, 321–323, 332
launching RouterMapper 38
main window overview 39 X-Y
polling status indicators 45 XPlus series. See Legacy frames, adding
polling the control system 43 XPRESS series. See Legacy frames, adding
printing key caps 68
Stereo breakaway partitioning 103, 313, 327–328 Z
Subnet mask. See Setting network information
Zero-based export function 33
Switching mode, crosspoint 95, 301

590 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2009, Harris Corporation
Router Control Software Reference Guide

Edition M
ROUTERWORKSMAN
 ®
RouterWorks
Router Control Software
Reference Guide

Edition M
September 2008
Copyright Information
Copyright 1998-2008, 2009 Harris Corporation, 1025 West NASA Boulevard,
Melbourne, Florida 32919-0001 U.S.A. All rights reserved. This publication
supersedes all previous releases. Printed in Canada.
This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and are
distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and
decompilation. No part of this product or related documentation may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of
Harris Corporation and its licensors, if any.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated into new editions of the publication. Harris Corporation may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described
in this publication at any time.

Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your warranty
coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures for obtaining
warranty service. To view the complete warranty, visit our website.
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Using RouterWorks On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Full-Text Help Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Single-Bus Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Multi-Bus Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Matrix Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
RouterMapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Remote Dial-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Related Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Contacting Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 2: Installation
Installing RouterWorks Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installing RouterWorks on PCs Using Microsoft Windows Me Operating
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting RouterWorks to a Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Editing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Launching RouterWorks Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 3: Operation
Selecting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting a Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide iii

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Breakaway Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Performing a Multiple Take (Matrix Panels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix Panels only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Source Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Multiple Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Source Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Undoing a Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Locking and Protecting Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Locking a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Unlocking a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Protecting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Unprotecting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Allowing Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Alarms (Matrix Panels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Executing and Editing Salvos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Capturing the Existing State of the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying an Existing Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Executing a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Editing a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Deleting a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Active Salvos Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bidirectional Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Editing the .PAN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the Bidirectional Take Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Using the Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting Up a New Panel via Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Editing an Existing Panel via Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Determining .PAN File Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Designating the Router Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting the Locks and Protects Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing the Control Panel Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setting Control Panel Size Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Adding/Deleting Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Activating Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Activating Active Salvos Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

iv RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Activating Signal Presence Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Activating Bidirectional Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Creating Control Panels for Individual Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating Control Panels for Multiple Remote Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Index
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide v

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

vi RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1
Introduction

RouterWorks router control software provides an easy-to-use graphical user

interface for the entire line of Leitch/Harris signal routers. RouterWorks is a
group of Microsoft® Windows®1-based applications that can be easily
navigated using only basic Windows skills. Sources and destinations in a
routing system are graphically represented on on-screen control panels, and can
be selected or deselected using a standard mouse or touch screen. Control panels
may be customized for each routing system or for each operator, enabling any
user to quickly and easily locate and select appropriate sources and destinations
in the system.
RouterWorks software may be used as the only controlling device in a system or
it may be used in conjunction with traditional hardware control panels. Multiple
RouterWorks control stations may control the same routing system.
RouterWorks continually monitors the routing system and reports all changes in
the status of the system, regardless of the type of controlling device that
initiated the change. The RouterWorks package is modem-ready and can control
an unlimited number of remote routing systems using only a modem, phone
line, router, and PC. Appropriate wherever “ease-of-use” is an issue,
RouterWorks is an effective, powerful tool that will greatly simplify the use of
your Leitch/Harris signal router.

System Requirements
You may use RouterWorks with any IBM-compatible computer that meets these
minimum requirements.
CPU 3 GHz Pentium IV processor
RAM At least 1 GB
Hard disk space At least 20 GB free
Additional disk drives CD-ROM or CD-RW

1 “Windows” is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Me, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 1

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Operating system 1 Windows 2000

Windows XP
Windows Me2
Windows Vista (requires CCS Navigator™)
Port(s) Serial port, RS-232 or RS-422/9600 baud or higher
Ethernet port
Display resolution 800×600, 256 colors
1024×768, high color (16 bit) recommended
Pointing device Mouse, trackball, touch screen, or other pointing
device

1 Windows”
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Me, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
2
See page 23 for special information concerning the installation of RouterWorks using Microsoft
Windows Me operating system.

2 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

System Limitations
Table 1-1 shows the various system limitations of RouterWorks.

Table 1-1. RouterWorks System Limitations

System Item Limitation
Maximum number of levels 8
Maximum number of logical sources 3072
Maximum number of logical destinations 3072
Maximum number of sources usable with non Power-PC 128
based alphanumeric panels (panels that do not have serial
& Ethernet ports) when in program mode — DIP switch
mode is only limited by router system size
Maximum number of panels in one router system 128
Maximum number of salvos — The actual number of 254
salvos that can be downloaded to panels is limited by the
panel memory and number of buttons on the panel, but
RW/RM supports up to 254 salvos total
Maximum number of Integrator frames in one router 128
system
Maximum number of matrices per Integrator frame 8
Maximum number of components per Integrator frame 5
matrix

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 3

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Firmware Requirements
RouterWorks may be used to control any Leitch router that meets the following
requirements:

Table 1-2. Leitch Router Requirements for Using RouterWorks

For Direct Control via the For Remote Control via
Frame Type
Serial Port Modem

HD Series SCE-101 or RSCE-101, SCE-101 or RSCE-101,

version 2.0 or later, or version 3.0 or later, or
SPT-1000-XY SPT-1000-XY
Xplus® Version 2.0 or later Version 3.0 or later
®
VIA32 Version 1.0 or later Version 1.0 or later
Integrator™ Version 1.0 or later Version 1.0 or later
Panacea Version 1.0 or later Version 1.0 or later
Platinum Version 1.0 or later Version 1.0 or later

To identify the firmware version in use, check the X-Y bus connections on the
frame. Version 2 and higher frames will use mini-XLR connectors instead of the
RJ-11 connectors used in earlier versions. Earlier version frames cannot be
upgraded. If serial control is desired for these earlier version frames, discuss the
RSCE-101 option with your Customer Service representative.
If all the serial ports on a frame are currently being used, and serial control is
desired, additional ports can be created using the SPT-1000-SXY Serial
Protocol Translator. Contact your Leitch representative for more information.
If your router system requires a firmware upgrade, please contact Customer
Service.

4 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using this Manual

This manual is intended as a reference to the RouterWorks software and is not
organized in step-by-step tutorial fashion.
The manual has the following writing conventions:

Table 1-3. Writing Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection
names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books or
publications, and the first instances of new terms and
specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as
ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as
a DOS entry or something you type into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid
Note and troubleshoot problems

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 5

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using RouterWorks On-Line Help

The stand-alone help offers complete information on all RouterWorks functions.
General Help and Help search functions are available.

General Help
When you need help on any RouterWorks topic, choose Help from the Leitch
Routing Switchers display window (see page 8 for a graphical representation of
this window). This will allow you to locate information by category. Figure 1-1
shows an illustration of the General Help window.

Figure 1-1. General Help Window

Context-Sensitive Help
Context-sensitive Help gives you instant help whenever a menu command is
highlighted, a dialog box is open, or a pop-up message box is displayed.
Press F1 for context-sensitive help.

Full-Text Help Search

RouterWorks Help includes a full text search capability so that you can find
help topics containing the text string you specify. Two options are available that
allow you to refine your search: the Index option and the Database Find option.
Figure 1-2 shows an illustration of the results of a full-text Help search using
the Index option. Figure 1-3 shows an illustration of the results of a full-text
Help search using the Database Find option.

6 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-2. Full-Text Help Search — Index Option

Figure 1-3. Full-Text Help Search — Database Find Option

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 7

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features
The RouterWorks package includes a single-bus panel, a multi-bus panel, a
matrix panel, a Panel Wizard, and RouterMapper™ applications.

Figure 1-4. RouterWorks Display Window

8 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Single-Bus Panel
Level Breakaway Active salvo
buttons Source LEDs control
Lock button

Protect
button

Drop-down
Destination list box

Salvo button Source buttons

Figure 1-5. Single-Bus Panel Window

The RouterWorks single-bus panel provides control over one destination at a

time. User-access to the destination may be restricted via Locks and Protects to
prevent inadvertent changes to crosspoint selections. Sources may be connected
to a selected destination in either AFV or Breakaway modes. Source status on
each individual level is clearly indicated on the on-screen panel by color-coded
LED bars. Logical source connections may be easily changed from the
on-screen control panel. Changes made on other control panels in the system
will also be reflected on the single-bus panel whenever the affected destination
is selected from the drop-down list box.
The single-bus panel is divided into two main sections: destinations are on the
left, and sources are on the right. The Source section includes a Status display
that lists the sources connected on each level to the selected destination. The
destination is selected via the drop-down list box located at the bottom of the
Destination section. Lock and Protect buttons are also included in this section
of the control panel, and are described in detail in other chapters of this manual.
The Sources section of the single-bus panel includes a separate Breakaway
button for each level in the router. A Follow button, a salvo button, a set of
source buttons representing each logical source, and a set of LEDs representing
each level and each source on each level is also included.
Optionally (for Panacea panels only), a single-bus panel display can show
Source Signal presence indicators. Signal presence is indicated by a circle
display located directly below each source button on a RouterWorks panel. For
each level on which a valid signal is detected and reported by the router, a
wedge of the signal presence indicator circle display will be filled using the
Level’s assigned color. If the router reports that the input does not detect a valid
input signal, the wedge will be colored using the color that signifies loss of
input signal. (The default color is black.) The circle display for a single-bus
panel is illustrated in Figure 1-5 on page 9.
If a panel controls more than one level, the circle is divided into sections based
on the number of levels that the RouterWorks panel controls. Each source will
display one section for each level on which signal presence has been reported. If
no signal presence is reported for a level of a source (e.g., a router that does not

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 9

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

support signal presence reporting or for a source that is not defined for a
particular level), the wedge for that level will not be displayed.
You can activate the display of source signal presence indicators via the
Advanced Options function in Panel Wizard (see “Signal Presence Settings” on
page 79). Alternatively, you can edit the panel initialization (.PAN) file directly
(see “Activating Signal Presence Indicators” on page 92).

10 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Multi-Bus Panel
Lock
and
Protect Active salvo Category/Index
buttons control Source LEDs control

Destination
buttons Lock
and
Level Protect
Breakaway buttons
buttons

Salvo button Source buttons

Figure 1-6. Multi-Bus Panel Window

With the RouterWorks multi-bus panel you can easily monitor and control
several router destinations from one panel. Multiple sources and destinations are
simultaneously displayed on the on-screen panel. Access to destinations may be
restricted via Locks and Protects to prevent unintentional changes to crosspoint
selections. Sources may be connected to selected destinations in either AFV or
breakaway modes. Source status is clearly displayed for each level. Changes
made on other control panels in the system will also be reflected on the
multi-bus panel.
The multi-bus panel is divided into three main sections: destinations are on the
top, sources are on the bottom, and category/index control is to the right.
• The Destination section includes a status display that lists the sources
connected on each level to the selected destination. Destinations are
selected by clicking on the Destination button desired. Lock and Protect
buttons (used to protect the destination from being inadvertently changed)
are also included in this section of the control panel and are described in
detail in the sections that follow. An Active Salvo Control display window
displays the names of all salvos that are completely engaged. If a salvo has
all levels of every crosspoint engaged, the name will appear in the Active
Salvos Control list box.
• The Sources section includes a separate Breakaway button for each level in
the router. A Follow button, a salvo button, a set of source buttons
representing each logical source, and a set of LEDs representing each level
and each source on each level is also included.
• The category/index control section of the multi-bus panel provides another
way to perform switching based on categories and indexes. With this
function you may group related inputs or outputs into categories (e.g., VTR,
CAM, MIC, etc.) with each having an index “identifier” (e.g., 2, 17, 36,

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 11

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

etc.) to make it easier for you to locate. The Category/Index control function
is particularly useful in systems with very large numbers of inputs and
outputs.
• Optionally (for Panacea panels only), a multi-bus panel display can show
source signal presence indicators. Signal presence is indicated by a circle
display located directly below each source button on a RouterWorks panel.
For each level on which a valid signal is detected and reported by the router,
a wedge of the signal presence indicator circle display will be filled using
the Level’s assigned color. If the router reports that the input does not detect
a valid input signal, the wedge will be colored using the color that signifies
loss of input signal. (The default color is black.) The circle display for a
multi-bus panel is illustrated in Figure 1-6 on page 11.
If a panel controls more than one level, the circle is divided into sections
based on the number of levels that the RouterWorks panel controls. Each
source will display one section for each level on which signal presence has
been reported. If no signal presence is reported for a level of a source (e.g.,
a router that does not support signal presence reporting or for a source that
is not defined for a particular level), the wedge for that level will not be
displayed.
You can activate the display of source signal presence indicators via the
Advanced Options function in Panel Wizard (see “Signal Presence Settings”
on page 79). Alternatively, you can edit the panel initialization (.PAN) file
directly (see “Activating Signal Presence Indicators” on page 92).

12 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Matrix Panel

Figure 1-7. Matrix Panel Window

With the RouterWorks matrix panel, the status of an entire router system may be
monitored and controlled from a single screen. A complete 16x16 router can be
displayed on a 1024×768 screen with reasonable legibility. (A 32×32 router can
be displayed as well; however, the names and icons in the Source and
Destination buttons will not be visible.)
Crosspoints are displayed in a matrix format with intersecting source and
destination lines. Sources appear horizontally across the top and destinations
appear vertically down the right side. Sources and destinations are connected by
double-clicking at the desired crosspoint.
The sources and destinations in a router are displayed on the matrix panel as a
row of control buttons along the top and right sides of the panel. Sources are
displayed along the top, and destinations down the right-hand side. Each control

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 13

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

button includes the source or destination name and icon, although names and
icons may not be readable in the full-screen view. For greater legibility, any
portion of the panel may be enlarged using the Zoom-In button at the right of
the screen.
Crosspoints in the router are monitored via colored markers at the intersection
of the source and destination lines. The markers are displayed as pie-shaped
wedges that correspond to the colors of the Breakaway Level buttons. If, for
example, a video Breakaway Level button is colored blue, a blue marker at the
intersection of a source and destination line indicates that the source is
connected on the video level. If more than one colored marker is present at an
intersection, the source is connected on each of the levels displayed. If a source
is selected on ALL levels in the system (AFV switching), the crosspoint marker
will appear as a multi-colored circle, consisting of all colors of the active levels.
Optionally (for Panacea panels only), a matrix panel display can show Source
Signal presence indicators. Signal presence is indicated by a circle display
located directly above each source button on a RouterWorks panel. For each
level on which a valid signal is detected and reported by the router, a wedge of
the signal presence indicator circle display will be filled using the Level’s
assigned color. If the router reports that the input does not detect a valid input
signal, the wedge will be colored using the color that signifies loss of input
signal. (The default color is black.) The circle display for a matrix panel is
illustrated in Figure 1-7 on page 13.
If a panel controls more than one level, the circle is divided into sections based
on the number of levels that the RouterWorks panel controls. Each source will
display one section for each level on which signal presence has been reported. If
no signal presence is reported for a level of a source (e.g., a router that does not
support signal presence reporting or for a source that is not defined for a
particular level), the wedge for that level will not be displayed.
You can activate the display of source signal presence indicators via the
Advanced Options function in Panel Wizard (see “Signal Presence Settings” on
page 79). Alternatively, you can edit the panel initialization (.PAN) file directly
(see “Activating Signal Presence Indicators” on page 92).
The matrix panel may be operated in either of two configurations: Preset/Take
or No-Take configuration. The configuration is determined by the setting of the
UseTake= line in the MATRIX.PAN file. (See “Modifying On-Screen Display
via the .PAN File” on page 85 for more information about selecting the panel
configuration.)
• In No-Take configurations, crosspoints are switched as soon as they are
selected. The crosspoint markers will be presented as solid, colored wedges.
The Take button will not appear on these panels.
• In Preset/Take configurations, crosspoints are preset on the panel prior to
actual switching. The switch only occurs when you press the Take button.
Any number of crosspoints may be preset before the Take is executed.
Crosspoint markers in Preset/Take configured panels will appear as hollow,
colored wedges (outlines only) when the crosspoint is preset, and will
change to solid markers when the Take is executed.

14 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Zooming the Matrix Panel Window

To enlarge a section of the matrix panel, click on the Zoom-In (+) button
located on the right side of the panel. The mouse cursor will change shapes to
indicate Zoom mode. Click on a crosspoint within the section that will be
enlarged. The panel will automatically zoom-in to display five sources and five
destinations around the crosspoint selection.
To display more than five crosspoints, follow these steps:
1. Select the Zoom-In button, and then place the cursor over the top left
corner of the matrix section that will be enlarged.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor diagonally across the screen. A rectangle will be drawn
over the area selected. (Draw the rectangle over the crosspoint matrix
only — do not include the source or destination buttons. The associated
source and destination buttons will be automatically included in the
zoomed-in view.)
4. When the rectangle is large enough to include all of the crosspoints desired
in the enlarged view, release the mouse button.
The screen will redrawn in the zoomed-in view.
To return to the full-screen view, click on the Zoom-Out (–) button.
Clicking on the Zoom-Out button will always take you all the way back to the
full screen view, regardless of the number of times you have zoomed in.

Sizing the Matrix Panel Window

1. Move the mouse cursor over an edge of the window. The cursor will change
to a two-headed arrow.
2. While this cursor is visible, click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the edge of the window into the desired position.
4. When the mouse button is released, the window will be redrawn in the new
position, and the buttons will be resized.

Panel Wizard
RouterWorks includes a panel creation utility called Panel Wizard. It takes you
through a step-by-step process to create or edit a RouterWorks software panel.
The Panel Wizard utility “asks” you questions about what type of panel you
would like to create, and then creates a new panel for you.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 15

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-8. Panel Wizard Introduction Window

RouterMapper
Leitch’s RouterMapper configuration utility is an easy-to-use Microsoft®
Windows®-based application for programming RouterWorks, router frames,
control panels, and the Opus master controller. Using RouterMapper, you may
create a database that describes a routing system (i.e., available levels, sources,
and destinations). That database may be downloaded to a control panel and/or
router frame, and may also be used in conjunction with RouterWorks software
applications. Function keys and selection keys (on Programmable Panel series
panels only) may also be defined, and keycap inserts printed.
RouterMapper allows control panels to be customized for specific systems or
operators. Unique names and icons can be assigned to each source and
destination in the routing system, enabling a user to locate and select the desired
inputs and outputs quickly and easily. Different on-screen control panels may
also be designed for each operator with only the sources and destinations
required by that operator. This level of customization protects the system
resources from inadvertent changes.
RouterMapper also allows mapping of the logical sources and destinations that
appear on the RouterWorks control panels. The Editor assigns these logical
sources and destinations to physical sources and destinations in a routing
system. For example, when operators select a source labeled “VTR-12” (the
logical source), they may in reality be selecting Source 1, Source 2 or any other
source (the physical source) in the system. Because the physical design of the
routing system is transparent to the RouterWorks user, changes may be made to
the routing system without affecting the overall image that the operator sees.
RouterMapper can also set the levels on which logical sources and destinations
will be valid. A logical source for a camera, for example, could be set without
corresponding audio. This “camera” source would be clearly indicated on the
on-screen control panel as a video-only source and, when selected, will leave
the audio levels unchanged. This form of “automatic breakaway” is especially

16 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

useful for devices such as still stores, paint boxes, microphones, speakers,
monitors, and cameras.

Figure 1-9. RouterMapper Main Window

Remote Dial-Up
The RouterWorks application also includes a remote dial-up feature that allows
a routing system to be controlled from a remote location. Your system should be
set up for Dial-Up control at the RouterMapper Communications Settings dialog
box. For more information, see your RouterMapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide.

TCP/IP
The RouterWorks application also allows you to control a routing system via
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Your system should
be set up for TCP/IP control at the RouterMapper Communications Settings
dialog box. For more information, see your RouterMapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide.

Demo Mode
If the PC is not connected to a routing system, but the user wants to see how the
RouterWorks software will operate with a routing system, your system should
be set up for Demo Mode at the RouterMapper Communications Settings dialog
box. Selecting Demo Mode will simulate the presence of a router and will allow
the software to be operated normally.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 17

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Related Products
RouterWorks may be easily integrated with other Leitch/Harris routing control
products, including EventWorks™ and the Programmable Panel Series control
panels.
• EventWorks is a Microsoft® Windows®-based program (similar to
RouterWorks) that is used to automate takes and salvos according to a
user-defined schedule or sequence.
• The Programmable Panel Series control panels are the hardware equivalent
of EventWorks and the RouterWorks panels. These programmable panels
use the same database as the RouterWorks and EventWorks panels, and may
be used in conjunction with these products to control a routing system. For
additional information on these or any other of our products, contact the
Sales Department or visit our website.

Contacting Us
If you have questions about this or other Leitch/Harris products, contact us for
technical support and product information.

Technical Support
We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our
customers around the world. Visit our website for information on how to contact
the Customer Service team in your geographical region.

Product Information
If you would like the latest product information or documentation, contact your
dealer or the Sales Department at one of the locations listed on our website.

18 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2
Installation

Installing RouterWorks Software

1. Place the program disk or CD into the correct drive on your personal
computer.
2. From the taskbar’s Start menu, select Run.

Figure 2-1. Run Dialog Box

3. In the Command Line box, enter [drive designator]:\setup.exe.

4. Click OK to launch the RouterWorks setup program.
5. The setup program will display an installation confirmation dialog box.
• Click OK to continue program installation.
• Click on Cancel to abort the installation.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 19

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-2. Installation Confirmation Dialog Box

6. Click OK to continue the installation process. The Install Directory dialog

box will appear.

Figure 2-3. Install Directory Dialog Box

At this screen, designate the directory in which the RouterWorks program

files will be stored. To change the destination directory, enter the complete
path of the desired directory in the highlighted box. RouterWorks will create
the specified directory (if it does not already exist) and store all program
files in this directory.

20 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

7. Click OK. The Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager dialog box will
appear.

Figure 2-4. Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Dialog Box

The optional Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager function allows you to

manage the dynamic routing thread connections between Integrator frames
and other large routing systems based on Integrator frames. Contact your
Leitch sales representative to discuss what is required for this option.
8. Click OK to continue the installation process. A Program Group dialog will
appear. You may select the Windows Program Group where the application
icons will appear.

Figure 2-5. Program Group Dialog Box

9. If you are re-installing RouterWorks, the Preserve Settings dialog box will
appear. This message refers to the EDITRTR.INI file (which is stored in
the Windows subdirectory). The EDITRTR.INI file stores all information
concerning any application preferences originally created in RouterWorks.
• Click on Yes to keep your existing preferences.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 21

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

• Click on No to overwrite existing preferences.

CAUTION
If you click “No” at the Preserve Settings dialog
box, RouterWorks will overwrite your existing
preferences with a new EDITRTR.INI file.

10. When the program installation is complete, a Read Me box will appear on
the screen. This box includes up-to-date information that may or may not
have been incorporated into the manual at the time of program release.
Click OK to close the Read Me dialog box and return to the Windows
desktop.

Figure 2-6. Read Me Dialog Box

22 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

If the RouterWorks program has been successfully installed, the Start menu
should now include a new group titled Leitch Routing Switchers.

Figure 2-7. Leitch Routing Switchers Group Window

• Select the Read Me icon to reopen the text notes that were displayed on
installation.
• Select the Un-Install icon to launch an application by which the
RouterWorks software can be removed from the system.
• Select any of the Help icons to open a standard Windows Help file.
• Select the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel icons to open
those applications, each of which is described in detail in the chapters that
follow.
• Select the Panel Wizard icon to to quickly set up a control panel.
• Select the RouterMapper icon to launch the RouterMapper application

Installing RouterWorks on PCs Using Microsoft Windows Me

Operating System
If you want to install RouterWorks on a PC that uses a Windows Me operating
system, you may need to manually remove the following files and Windows
registry entries.

Files and Directories

1. At the Leitch root directory (C:\Leitch)
a. Move any previously-created databases that you want to save to another
location.
b. Move any previously-created PAN files that you want to save to another
location.
c. Delete all files and subdirectories.
2. At the Windows root directory (C:\Windows [or WINNT, etc.])

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 23

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Installation

a. Move the EDITRTR.INI file that you want to save to another location.
b. Delete EDITRTR.INI file in the Windows root directory.

Registry Entries
Use REGEDIT to remove the following key, sub-keys and values:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Leitch Routers and Switchers

Connecting RouterWorks to a Router

To control a router with the RouterWorks software, the PC must be connected to
a serial port in the routing system. For more information about connecting your
PC to a serial port, please refer to your RouterMapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide.
If your PC is not connected to a routing system, but you want to see how
RouterWorks operates, select “Demo Mode” from the Comm Settings menu in
RouterMapper. Selecting Demo Mode will simulate the presence of a router and
will allow the software to be operated normally.

Editing the Database

Before RouterWorks can be used to control a router, a database for the routing
switcher must be created. Sources, destinations, and switching levels that are to
appear on the on-screen control panels must first be defined using the
RouterMapper application. Procedures for creating and editing databases can be
found in the RouterMapper manual that was provided with your software.
A database created in RouterMapper can be used with RouterWorks and the
Programmable Panel series control panels, as each product uses the same
RouterMapper configuration utility. If you have already defined a router
database using RouterMapper, it is not necessary to create a new one. Simply
designate your existing database as the RouterWorks database by editing the
panel initialization files as described in “Designating the Router Database” on
page 85.

Launching RouterWorks Applications

1. Open the Leitch Routing Switchers group window. (See Figure 2-7 on
page 23 for a graphic representation of this window.)
2. Choose one of the following options:
• Select the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel icons to
open those applications.
• Select the Panel Wizard icon to quickly set up a control panel.
• Select the Read Me icon to reopen the text notes that were displayed on
installation.
• Select the RouterWorks Help icon to open the Help file.

24 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3
Operation

Selecting a Destination
Destinations available for use with a control panel are defined via
RouterMapper and the panel definition file.
• To add, delete, or change a destination in the database, refer to the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• For instructions on how to include or exclude a destination from this panel,
see “Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations” on page 91.
To select a destination on a single-bus panel
1. Click the arrow button located to the right of the drop-down destination list.
2. The list will expand to reveal the destinations available for use with this
control panel.
3. Scroll through the list of destinations, and click the desired destination.
Sources currently connected to the selected destination will be reflected in
the Source Status window and on the Source LEDs.

Figure 3-1. Selecting a Destination — Single-Bus Panel

To select a destination on a multi-bus panel

1. Click the desired Destination button.
2. If the desired destination is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list
of available destinations using the scroll bar immediately below the
Destination buttons. The destination name and icon will appear in each
status window, along with sources currently connected to the destination.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 25

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-2. Selecting a Destination — Multi-Bus Panel

To select a destination on a matrix panel: Procedures for connecting

sources and destinations on the matrix panel depend on the configuration
(Preset/Take or No-Take) of the panel. Switching procedures will be covered
separately in “AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching” on page 27 and
“Breakaway Switching” on page 29.

Connecting a Source
Sources available for use with a control panel are defined via RouterMapper and
the panel definition file.
• To add, delete, or change a source in the database, refer to the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• To include and exclude sources and destinations, refer to “Adding/Deleting
Logical Sources” on page 89 and “Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations”
on page 91.
To connect a Source to a currently selected destination on a
single-bus or a multi-bus panel, click the appropriate source button. The
source will be reflected in the Source status window, and the LEDs for that
source will light to reflect the new connection. Click the scroll bar located
beneath the source buttons to view additional sources.

Figure 3-3. Connecting a Source: Single-Bus Panel

26 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-4. Connecting a Source: Multi-Bus Panel

To connect a source on a matrix panel: Procedures for connecting

sources on the matrix panel depend on the configuration (Preset/Take or
No-Take) of the panel. Switching procedures will be covered separately in
“AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching” on page 27 and “Breakaway
Switching” on page 29.

AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching

Single- and Multi-Bus Panels
Clicking on a source when all levels are enabled (when each Level button is lit)
will change all levels for that source simultaneously (AFV switching).
To perform an AFV switch for single- or multi-bus panels
1. Enable all Level buttons (or press the Follow button). Each Level button
should be lit.
2. Click the desired Source button. The source will be switched on all levels
simultaneously.

Figure 3-5. AFV Switching: Single-Bus Panel1

1
Only the levels enabled for a particular source will be changed when a source is selected at the
single-bus panel. If, for example, a Camera source has been configured at the Database Editor as
video-only, only the video level LED will be lit when the Camera source is selected. The LEDs
for other levels will be blank for the source. Clicking on the Camera source will change only the
enabled level. Other sources connected to the selected destination on other levels will not be
affected.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 27

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-6. AFV Switching: Multi-Bus Panel1

1
A particular source may be enabled only on specific levels. A logical source for a camera, for
example, could be set without corresponding audio. This “camera” source would be clearly
shown on a multi-bus panel as a video-only source and, when selected, would leave the audio
levels unchanged. Only the levels enabled for a particular source will be changed when the source
is selected at the multi-bus panel. LEDs corresponding to the enabled levels will be lit. All other
level LEDs will be blank for that source.

28 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Matrix Panels
Selecting a crosspoint when all levels are enabled (when each Level button is
lit) will change all levels for that source simultaneously (AFV switching).

Figure 3-7. AFV Switching — Matrix Panel

To perform an AFV switch - Preset/Take configuration

1. Enable all Level buttons, or click Follow. (Each Level button should be lit.)
2. Click the desired crosspoint(s).
3. Click Take. The crosspoint(s) will be switched on all levels.
To perform an AFV switch - No-Take configuration
1. Enable all Level buttons, or click Follow. (Each Level button should be lit.)
2. Double-click the desired crosspoint. The crosspoint will be switched on all
levels.

Breakaway Switching
A source may be changed on selected levels without affecting the sources
already connected on other levels (breakaway switching).

Single- and Multi-Bus Panels

To perform a Breakaway switch for single- or multi-bus panels
1. Enable the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to be
switched independently. Only those buttons that have been enabled should
be lit.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 29

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

2. Click the desired Source button. The source will be switched on the
selected breakaway level only. Sources connected on other levels will not
be affected.

Figure 3-8. Breakaway Switching — Single-Bus Panel

Figure 3-9. Breakaway Switching — Multi-Bus Panel

To return to AFV switching for single- or multi-bus panels, click

Follow. All Level buttons will now be lit. Sources connected with all Level
buttons lit will be switched on all levels simultaneously.

30 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Matrix Panels

Figure 3-10. Breakaway Switching — Matrix Panel

To perform a Breakaway switch - Preset/Take configuration

1. Enable the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to be
switched independently (only those buttons that have been enabled should
be lit).
2. Click the desired crosspoint(s).
3. Click Take. The source will be switched only on the selected breakaway
level(s). Sources connected on other levels will not be affected.
To perform a Breakaway switch - No-Take configuration
1. Enable the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to be
switched independently (only those buttons that have been enabled should
be lit).
2. Double-click the desired crosspoint. The source will be switched only on
the selected breakaway level(s). Sources connected on other levels will not
be affected.
To return to AFV switching, click Follow. All Level buttons will now be lit.
Sources connected with all Level buttons lit will be switched on all levels
simultaneously.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 31

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Performing a Multiple Take (Matrix Panels Only)

The Multiple Take feature allows you to take several destinations on selected
levels to a single source.
If you have selected “Demo Mode” for RouterMapper, any multiple Takes that
you select will be discarded when you close the .PAN file. See “Selecting
Serial, Remote, TCP/IP, or Demo Connection Settings” in the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for information on how switch from
Demo mode.
To perform a multiple take
1. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary, use
Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click somewhere within the matrix grid under the source that you
want to take to your multiple destinations. A pop-up menu will appear (see
Figure 3-11).

.
Figure 3-11. Multiple Take Window

3. Click the Take <Source name> to Multiple Destinations selection. The

Take Multiple Destinations to <Source name> drop-down list box will
appear (see Figure 3-12).

Figure 3-12. Take Multiple Destinations to <Source Name>

Drop-Down List Box

32 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

4. Select as many destinations as you like from the drop-down list box.
• To select a sequential range of destinations, click the first selection in
the range, and then hold the <Shift> key while you click the last one in
the range. All of the destination names in the range will be highlighted
• To select several non-sequential destinations, press and hold the <Ctrl>
key while clicking destination selections. All selected destination
names will be highlighted.
5. Click OK to perform the Take operation. (Click Cancel at any time to close
the dialog box without performing the Take. This will not affect the existing
state of the system.)

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 33

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix

Panels only)
RouterWorks’ advanced features include Source Disconnect, Source Replace,
and Multiple Disconnect.

Source Disconnect
The Source Disconnect feature allows you to quickly disconnect all destinations
connected to a specified source.
You will not be able to use this feature on destinations that are locked or
protected.
To process a Source Disconnect
1. If necessary, edit the existing matrix panel via Panel Wizard to set up the
Options > Enable Source Disconnect capability.
• To learn how to edit a matrix panel, see “Editing an Existing Panel via
Panel Wizard” on page 74.
• To learn how to quickly create a panel, see “Setting Up a New Panel via
Panel Wizard” on page 66).

Figure 3-13. Enabling Source Disconnects via Panel Wizard

2. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary, use

Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
3. In the matrix grid control, select the Source by right-clicking the crosspoint
marker. A pop-up menu will appear (see Figure 3-14 on page 35).

34 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-14. Disconnect Source Window

4. Highlight Disconnect Source In [Source XX], and then press <Enter>.

RouterWorks will search through all destinations and disconnect the ones that
are connected to the source you specified.

Multiple Disconnect
The Multiple Disconnect feature allows you to disconnect several destinations
connected to a single source.
You will not be able to use this feature on destinations that are locked or
protected.
To process a multiple disconnect
1. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary, use
Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click somewhere within the matrix grid. A pop-up menu will appear
(see Figure 3-11 on page 32).
3. Click the Take <Source name> to Multiple Destinations selection. The
Take Multiple Destinations to <Source name> drop-down list box will
appear (see Figure 3-12 on page 32).
4. In the Sources list box, select <Disconnect>. The list box name will change
(see Figure 3-15).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 35

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-15. Take Multiple Destinations to <Disconnect> Drop-Down

List Box

5. Select as many destinations as you like from the drop-down list box.
Multiple destinations may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
devices).
6. Click OK to perform the Disconnect operation. (Click Cancel at any time
to close the dialog box without performing the Disconnect. This will not
affect the existing state of the system.)

Source Replace
The Source Replace feature allows you to move all destinations from one
specified source to another specified source.
You will not be able to use this feature on destinations that are locked or
protected.
To process a Source Replace
1. If necessary, edit the existing matrix panel via Panel Wizard to set up the
Options > Enable Source Disconnect capability.
• For instructions on how to edit a matrix panel, see “Editing an Existing
Panel via Panel Wizard” on page 74.
• For instructions on how to quickly create a panel, see “Setting Up a
New Panel via Panel Wizard” on page 66.
2. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary, use
Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
3. In the matrix grid control, select the Source by right-clicking the crosspoint
marker. A pop-up menu will appear (see Figure 3-16 on page 37).

36 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-16. Move Destinations Window

4. Highlight Move Destinations on Source In [Source XX], and then press

<Enter>.
RouterWorks will search through all destinations in the selected source and
move them to the new source you specified.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 37

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Undoing a Take
The Undo Last Take feature allows you to reverse up to eight consecutive Take
commands issued from the control panel.
The Undo Last Take feature will not undo Take operations issued from other
control panels. The Undo Last Take feature only remembers the status for the
selected destination at the time of the most recent Take for that destination at
the user’s panel. If a different control panel has changed that same status to
another source, the Undo Last Take feature will restore the destination to the
source that was active at the time that the last Take was issued from the user’s
RouterWorks panel.
To undo a Take command
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A popup
menu will appear.

Figure 3-17. Undo Last Take Popup Menu

2. Scroll down to Undo Last Take (or press <Ctrl> Z).

3. The last Take command you performed will be removed.
To undo several Take commands
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar.
2. Scroll down to Undo Last Take (or press <Ctrl> Z).
3. Repeat step 2 until you have undone as many Take commands as you wish.
(Remember that this feature allows you to reverse up to eight Take
commands.)
4. The last set of Take commands you performed will be removed.

38 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Locking and Protecting Destinations

Locking a Destination
The Lock feature allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent
changes to the Destination. Locking a destination prevents anyone from
changing the Destination. You can lock either a single Destination at a time, or
lock multiple Destinations at the same time.
The Source Disconnect, Multiple Disconnect, Source Replace, and Undo Last
Take features do not operate on Lock/Unlock operations.
Attempting to unlock a locked Destination will cause a pop-up message to
appear. This pop-up message identifies the panel ID where the destination was
locked. Panels with the same IDs can unlock each others’ panels.
The pop-up will also include override buttons, if the panel is configured to
allow users to override a lock (see “Allowing Overrides” on page 47).
To lock a single destination for single-bus panels
1. Select the Destination from the drop-down list box by clicking the arrow
located to the right of the box.
2. Connect the desired source to the Destination by clicking the appropriate
source button.
3. Click Lock. The Destination will be locked to all users.

Figure 3-18. Locking a Destination — Single-Bus Panel

To lock multiple destinations for single-bus panels

1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 39

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-19. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Drop-Down Menu

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-20. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

3. Select which Destinations you want to lock.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will be locked to all users.
To lock a single destination for multi-bus panels
1. Select the Destination by clicking on it.
2. Connect the desired source to the Destination by clicking on the appropriate
source button.
3. Click the Lock (L) button located inside the Destination button. This
Destination will be locked to all users.

40 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-21. Locking a Destination —Multi-Bus Panels

To lock multiple destinations for multi-bus panels

1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear. (See Figure 3-19 on page 40.)
2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The Lock/
Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-20 on
page 40.)
3. Select which Destinations you want to lock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will be locked to all users.
To lock a single destination for matrix panels
1. Select the Destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear.

Figure 3-22. Locking a Destination — Matrix Panels

2. Click on Lock. The Destination will be locked to all users.

If a Destination on the matrix panel is locked, an icon will be displayed at
the crosspoint. Click the icon to produce a pop-up menu that will allow the
lock to be disabled. Right-click the crosspoint to produce the pop-up menu.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 41

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

To lock multiple destinations for matrix panels

1. Select the Destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear. (See Figure 3-22.)
2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The Lock/
Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-20 on
page 40.)
3. Select which Destinations you want to lock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will be locked to all users.

Unlocking a Destination
The Source Disconnect, Multiple Disconnect, Source Replace, and Undo Last
Take features do not operate on Lock/Unlock operations.
To unlock a single destination for single-bus panels
1. Select the Destination from the drop-down list box by clicking the arrow
located to the right of the box.
2. Connect the desired Source to the Destination by clicking the appropriate
source button.
3. Click Lock. The Destination will be unlocked to all users.
To unlock multiple destinations for single-bus panels
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear. (See Figure 3-19 on page 40.)
2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The Lock/
Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-20 on
page 40.)
3. Check the box marked Unlock Selected Items.
4. Select which Destinations you want to unlock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
5. Click OK. The Destinations will be unlocked for all users.
To unlock a single destination for multi-bus panels, click the Lock (L)
button located inside the Destination button. This Destination will then be
available to all users.
To unlock multiple destinations for multi-bus panels
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear. (See Figure 3-19 on page 40.)

42 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-20 on
page 40.)
3. Check the box marked Unlock Selected Items.
4. Select which Destinations you want to unlock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
5. Click OK. The Destinations will be unlocked for all users.
To unlock a single destination for matrix panels
1. Click the Lock icon located to the right of the locked Destination. A pop-up
menu will appear.
2. Remove the check mark next to Lock. The Destinations will be unlocked
for all users.
To unlock multiple destinations for matrix panels
1. Select the Destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear. (See Figure 3-22 on page 41.)
2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The Lock/
Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-20 on
page 40.)
3. Select which Destinations you want to unlock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will then be available for all users.

Protecting a Destination
The Protect feature also prevents inadvertent changes to the Destination, but
differs from a Lock in one respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user
who enabled the Protect will be able to change the destination at will, but other
users will be prevented from changing that destination until the Protect is
removed.
The Source Disconnect, Multiple Disconnect, Source Replace, and Undo Last
Take features do not operate on Protect/Unprotect operations.
To protect a single destination for single-bus panels
1. Select the destination from the drop-down list box.
2. Connect the desired source to the destination by clicking the appropriate
source button.
3. Click Protect. The destination will be unavailable to everyone except the
person who originally enabled the Protect.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 43

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-23. Protecting a Destination — Single-Bus Panels

To protect multiple destinations for single-bus panels

1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-24. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations Drop-Down

Menu

2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The

Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-25. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

44 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

3. Select which Destinations you want to protect.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The destinations will be unavailable to everyone except the
person who originally enabled the Protect.
To protect a single destination for multi-bus panels
1. Click the desired destination.
2. Click the appropriate source button to connect the desired source to the
destination.
3. Click the Protect (P) button located inside the Destination button. This
destination will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally
enabled the Protect.

Figure 3-26. Protecting a Destination — Multi-Bus Panels

To protect multiple destinations for multi-bus panels

1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear. (see Figure 3-24 on page 44.)
2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The
Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear. (See
Figure 3-25 on page 44.)
3. Select which destinations you want to protect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The destinations will be unavailable to everyone except the
person who originally enabled the Protect.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 45

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

To protect a single destination for matrix panels

1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear. (See Figure 3-22 on page 41.)
2. Click on Protect. The destination will be unavailable to everyone except
the person who originally enabled the Protect.
If a destination on the matrix panel is protected, an icon will be displayed at
the crosspoint. Click the icon to produce a pop-up menu that will allow the
lock or protect to be disabled. You can also right-click the crosspoint to
produce the pop-up menu.
To protect multiple destinations for matrix panels
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear. (See Figure 3-22 on page 41.)
2. Click on Protect/Unprotect Multiple. The Protect/Unprotect Destinations
dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-25 on page 44.)
3. Select which Destinations you want to Protect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
4. Click OK. The destinations will be unavailable to everyone except the
person who originally enabled the Protect.

Unprotecting a Destination
The Source Disconnect, Multiple Disconnect, Source Replace, and Undo Last
Take features do not operate on Protect/Unprotect operations.
To unprotect a single destination for single-bus panels
1. Select the destination from the drop-down list box.
2. Connect the desired source to the destination by clicking the appropriate
source button.
3. Click Protect. The destination will be available to everyone.
To unprotect multiple destinations for single-bus panels
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear. (See Figure 3-24 on page 44.)
2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The
Protect/Unprotect Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-25 on
page 44.)
3. Check the box marked Unprotect Selected Items.
4. Select which Destinations you want to unprotect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
5. Click OK. The destinations will be available to everyone.

46 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

To unprotect a single destination for multi-bus panels, click the

Protect (P) button located inside the Destination button. This destination will
become available to everyone.
To unprotect multiple destinations for multi-bus panels
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar. A
drop-down menu will appear. (See Figure 3-24 on page 44.)
2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, and then press <Enter>. The
Protect/Unprotect Destinations dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-25 on
page 44.)
3. Check the box marked Unprotect Selected Items.
4. Select which destinations you want to unprotect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
5. Click OK. The destinations will become available to everyone.
To unprotect a single destination for matrix panels
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear. (See Figure 3-22 on page 41.)
2. Click on Protect. The destination will become available to everyone.
To unprotect multiple destinations for matrix panels
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A pop-up
menu will appear. (See Figure 3-22 on page 41.)
2. Click on Protect/Unprotect Multiple. The Protect/Unprotect Destinations
dialog box will appear. (See Figure 3-25 on page 44.)
3. Check the box marked Unprotect Selected Items.
4. Select which Destinations you want to unprotect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
the items).
5. Click OK. The destinations will be available to everyone.

Allowing Overrides
The procedure for allowing overrides is the same for single bus, multi-bus, and
matrix panels.
Setting the Allowing Overrides Feature via Panel Wizard
1. Highlight the file name of the matrix panel you want to edit. (If necessary,
use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click the matrix file name. A drop-down menu will appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 47

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-27. Edit Drop-Down Menu

3. Highlight Edit with Panel Wizard, and then press <Enter>. The Panel
Wizard Introduction window will appear.
4. Click Next until the Options window appears.
5. Click Advanced. The Advanced Options, Common Settings tab will appear.
6. Choose the Options tab, and then check the Allow Lock Override option.

Figure 3-28. Selecting the Allow Lock Override Option

7. Click Next. The Finish window will appear.

8. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
Allowing Overrides via Editing the .PAN File
1. Open the proper panel initialization file (.PAN) in any text editor.

48 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

2. Set the AllowLockOverRide= line to 1. (This is the default setting.)

Attempting to unlock a destination will produce a Lock Error pop-up dialog
box.
• Click on Ignore Lock to temporarily override the lock (the pending
operation will be performed, but the destination will remain locked).
• Click on UnLock to permanently remove the lock.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 49

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Alarms (Matrix Panels Only)

The matrix panel includes an alarm LED for each level that will light when an
alarm condition is detected by the router.

Figure 3-29. Alarms LED

If an alarm LED is lit, click the LED or Details and a dialog box containing
information about the detected alarm condition will appear.

Figure 3-30. Alarms Dialog Box

Click Refresh at the Alarms dialog box to update any and all Alarm messages.

50 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Executing and Editing Salvos

The Salvo feature allows point and click execution or editing of any salvo stored
in the database. (A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that, when
executed, occur simultaneously.) Salvos can be used to store commonly used,
complex router setups involving multiple destinations for instant recall. (For
example, a salvo could be created that would send a test signal to every monitor
in an Edit Suite.) Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints defined by the
salvo. Other crosspoint connections in the system will not be affected.
The Undo Last Take feature does not operate on salvo operations.
• For single- and multi-bus panels To add, edit or execute a salvo, click
Salvo located at the main window. The Salvo Select dialog will appear.

Figure 3-31. Salvo Select Dialog Box

The Salvo Select dialog includes a drop-down list box and three function
buttons: Execute, Edit, and Add. Available salvos are listed in the
drop-down list box and can be selected by clicking the arrow to the right of
the box.
• Click Execute to automatically launch the selected salvo. For more
information about executing a salvo, see page 56.
• Click Edit or Add to open the Salvo Editor, which will allow the
currently selected salvo to be edited or a new salvo to be added to the
database.
• For more information about editing a salvo, see page 57
• For more information about adding a salvo, see page 52.
• For matrix panels: To add, edit or execute a salvo, click the appropriate
button located in the Salvo group at the matrix panel main window. The
buttons available in the Salvo group will depend on the panel configuration
(Preset/Take or No-Take) selected.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 51

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-32. Salvo Group, Preset/Take Configuration

Preset/Take Configuration
The Salvo group includes a drop-down list box and three function buttons:
Preset, Edit, and Add. Available salvos are listed in the drop-down list box.
Click the arrow to the right of the box to select an available salvo.
• Click Preset to preset the selected salvo and enable the Take button for
salvo execution.
• Click Edit or Add to open the Salvo Editor and to allow the currently
selected salvo to be edited; or a new salvo to be added to the database.
• For more information about editing a salvo, see page 57
• For more information about adding a salvo, see page 52.
No-Take Configuration
The Salvo group includes a drop-down list box and three function buttons:
Execute, Edit, and Add. Available salvos are listed in the drop-down list
box. Click the arrow to the right of the box to select an available salvo.
• Click Execute to immediately launch the selected salvo.
• Click Edit or Add to open the Salvo Editor, and to allow the currently
selected salvo to be edited or a new salvo to be added to the database.
• For more information about editing a salvo, see page 57
• For more information about adding a salvo, see page 52.

Adding a Salvo
• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog box.

52 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

2. Click Add. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window will
appear.
The Salvo Editor window (see Figure 3-33 on page 53) is an off-line
RouterWorks matrix panel. Crosspoint selections made at the Salvo Editor
window will not affect the status of the router until the salvo is actually
executed.
3. Define the salvo.
A salvo may be defined in one of several ways.
• The Capture option takes a “snapshot” view of the current state of the
router and stores it as a salvo. This salvo can then be edited (crosspoints
added or deleted) as needed.
• A salvo may be created by copying an existing salvo. The copied salvo
may serve as a starting point for the definition of the new salvo.
Crosspoints can be added or deleted as necessary.
• A salvo may be created “from scratch” by connecting the appropriate
sources and destinations on the off-line Salvo Editor panel. For specific
procedures for making crosspoint selections on the panel, refer to
“Connecting a Source” on page 26 and “Selecting a Destination” on
page 25.

Figure 3-33. Salvo Editor Window

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 53

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Capturing the Existing State of the Router

Note
You must have these advanced options selected for this feature to work:
Allow Editing Salvos, Allow Firing Salvos, Show Active Salvos, and Show
All Salvos. See page 78 for an explanation of these options.

• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.

• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select panel.
2. Click Add. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window will
appear.
3. Assign an appropriate name to the new salvo. (Highlight the default name
contained in the Name Edit box and type a new name in the box.)
4. Click Capture at the Salvo Editor main window. The following message
will appear:

Figure 3-34. Capturing a Salvo Error Message

5. Click Yes.
6. Add or delete crosspoint assignments as necessary to edit the salvo
displayed on the off-line panel.
7. Click on Done to exit the Salvo Editor and return to where you were before
you created the salvo.

Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo

• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select panel.
2. From the drop-down list, select the name of the salvo to which you want to
add a crosspoint.
3. Click Edit. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window will
appear.
4. Click at the intersection of the source and destination lines. (Refer to
“Connecting a Source” on page 26 and “Selecting a Destination” on page 25
for more information.) The crosspoint will be added to the salvo.

54 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo

Note
This procedure will delete a single crosspoint from a salvo. To delete all
crosspoints from a salvo, you must use the Salvo Editor function. If you
click Clear All at the Salvo Editor window, all existing crosspoints will be
deleted from the salvo, but the salvo itself will remain. If you click Delete
at the Salvo Editor window, the salvo itself will be deleted.

The procedure for deleting a crosspoint from a salvo is the same for single-bus,
multi-bus, and matrix panels.
1. Position the cursor over the crosspoint to be deleted and click the right
mouse button.
2. The Lock/Protect/Clear pop-up menu will appear.

Figure 3-35. Lock/Protect/Clear Popup Menu

3. Select Clear. The crosspoint will be deleted.

Copying an Existing Salvo

• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog box.
2. From the drop-down list, select the name of the salvo from which you want
to copy.
3. Click Edit. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window will
appear.
4. Click Copy at the Salvo Editor window. The Copy Salvo dialog box will
appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 55

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-36. Copy Salvo Dialog Box

5. In the Copy From Salvo box (the left side of the dialog), select the salvo that
will be copied to the new salvo. The new salvo name will already be
displayed in the Copy Salvo To box.
6. Click Overwrite to completely overwrite any crosspoints previously
selected in the new salvo. Any previously existing crosspoints will be
deleted from the new salvo.
OR
Click Merge to merge the two salvos. Existing crosspoints from both salvos
will be stored in the new salvo. No crosspoints will be deleted.

Executing a Salvo
Single- and Multi-Bus Panels
1. Click Salvo at the Single-Bus main window to open the Salvo Select dialog
box.
2. Select the salvo from the drop-down list box by clicking on the arrow
located at the right of the box.
3. Click Execute. The selected salvo will be launched immediately.

Matrix Panels
Preset/Take Configuration
1. Select the salvo from the drop-down list box by clicking on the arrow
located at the right of the box.
2. Click Preset. The Take button will be highlighted indicating that the salvo
is preset.
3. Click Take. The selected salvo will be executed immediately.
No-Take Configuration
1. Select the salvo from the drop-down list box by clicking on the arrow
located at the right of the box.
2. Click Execute. The selected salvo will be executed immediately.

56 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Editing a Salvo
• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog box.
2. Select the salvo from the drop-down list.
3. Click Edit. The Salvo Editor window will appear. Redefine the salvo, as
outlined in “Adding a Salvo” on page 52.

Deleting a Salvo
• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog box.
2. Select the salvo from the drop-down list.
3. Click Edit. The Salvo Editor window will appear.
4. Click Delete. The selected salvo will be deleted from the router database.

Active Salvos Control

The Active Salvos Control feature is available in single-bus, multi-bus, and
matrix panel modes. This control shows the salvos that have totally intact
crosspoints.

Figure 3-37. Active Salvos Control Window

The Active Salvos Control displays the names of all salvos that are completely
engaged.
• If a salvo has all levels of every crosspoint engaged, and then the name will
appear in the Active Salvos list box.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 57

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

• If even one level of one crosspoint is not engaged the name will not appear
in the window.
• If identical salvos with different names exist then both names will appear in
the control’s list box simultaneously.
Activate salvos by selecting a salvo in the Salvo Control box and pressing the
Take button in the preset box (if preset is used), or by manually setting the salvo
one crosspoint at a time. The salvo name will appear in the Active Salvos list
box once the salvo is fully engaged. Salvo names will also appear in the Active
Salvos list box if other instances of the application have engaged a salvo.

Bidirectional Take
The bidirectional Take feature allows a convenient method of establishing
two-way communications pathways using a standard source-to destination
router.

Note
See the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide for
information on how to set up logical Sources and Destinations.

Before you can use this feature, you must

• Create logical Sources that correspond to router inputs are connected to a
speaking channel
• Create logical Destination assignments to indicate that the router outputs are
connected to a listening channel
• Add bidirectional routing entry information in the .PAN file for the
appropriate router (see “Activating Bidirectional Take” on page 93)

Configuring the Router

To use the bidirectional Take feature, you must configure the router in such a
way that
• Its inputs are connected to the outgoing pathways used for talking from the
speakers (e.g., microphones).
• Its outputs are connected to the speaker’s incoming (listening)
communication pathway (e.g., headphones or other listening apparatus).
1. Via RouterMapper, create logical Sources that correspond to the router’s
inputs. (Refer to the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide
for instructions about how create Sources and Destinations). Assign the
names for the logical Sources to represent the speakers’ outgoing
communication channels.
In the example below, the Source naming convention identifies the speaker
and that the source corresponds to his talking channel. For example: “S 1
TLK” identifies speaker 1’s talk channel (router input assigned to Level 0
input 1).

58 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-38. Setting Up Sources for Bidirectional Take

2. Create similar logical Destination assignments to indicate that the router

outputs are connected to the speaker’s listening channel (for example, “S 1
LIS” for speaker 1 listening channel assigned to router level 0 input 1).

Figure 3-39. Setting Up Destinations for Bidirectional Take

Editing the .PAN File

Note
Use Microsoft® NotePad or any similar text editor to make changes to the
.PAN file.

To enable the bidirectional Take feature, add the following entry to the
appropriate .PAN file (e.g., “Matrix.PAN”). The entry listed below is not an

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 59

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

exact duplicate of what you must enter. Entry information should reflect your
system’s setup. See “Activating Bidirectional Take” on page 93 for a more
detailed explanation of the information in these entries.
[BidirectionalRouting]
Enabled=1
NumberOfPorts=(value)
Port0=(value)
Port1=(value)
Port2=(value)
•
•
•
Port999=(value)

Using the Bidirectional Take Feature

1. Open a RouterWorks matrix panel (with the appropriate .PAN file entries
added to enable the feature) connected to the properly configured routing
system.
2. Press the “B” key on the PC keyboard to display the bidirectional Take
dialog. A window similar to Figure 3-40 will appear.

Figure 3-40. Bidirectional Take Dialog Box

3. Select the two speakers (ports) that wish to have the conversation in the
“Port A” and “Port B” selection list boxes. (In this example, conversation is
being established between Speakers 1 and 2.)

60 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-41. Bidirectional Take Request

4. Click OK to complete the Take operation.

5. After the Take is completed, the matrix panel will display status showing
that the talk channel for speaker 1 is connected to the Listen channel of
speaker 2, and vice-versa.

Figure 3-42. Matrix Panel Showing Status for Conversation Between

Speakers 1 and 2

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 61

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

6. To add additional listeners to either port, simply highlight their entries in the
list boxes displayed below the selected speaker in the Request Bidirectional
Take dialog box.

Figure 3-43. Setting up a Conversation between Speakers 1 and 2

with Additional Listeners Selected

62 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

In the example below, a conversation will be established between speakers 1

and 2.
• Speakers 3, 4, and 5 will be “listening” to speaker 1.
• Speakers 6, 7, and 8 will be “listening” to speaker 2.
The matrix panel display will show status indicating that a conversation is
established between speakers 1 and 2 (note reciprocal status indicated).
Speakers 3, 4, and 5 show status indicating that they are “listening” to Speaker
1;and 6, 7, and 8 are “listening’ to Speaker 2.

Figure 3-44. Matrix Panel Display Showing Status after Establishing

Conversation Between Speakers 1 and 2

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 63

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 3: Operation

64 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4
Customizing Panels

You may create and customize your panels via two different methods:
• Using Panel Wizard
• Editing the panel initialization (.PAN) file.
Panel Wizard is an easy-to-use, versatile tool that allows you to create and edit
panel configurations quickly and easily. (More advanced users may want to
more closely control the configuration setup by editing the .PAN file directly.)

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 65

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Using the Panel Wizard

The Panel Wizard enables you to create RouterWorks panels quickly. It will take
you step-by-step by asking you questions about what type of panel you would
like to create, and then creating it for you.
You may create a new panel via the Panel Wizard, or you may edit an existing
panel via the Panel Wizard.

Setting Up a New Panel via Panel Wizard

1. At the Leitch Routing Switchers Group window, click the Panel Wizard
icon to start the Panel Wizard. The Introduction window will appear.

Figure 4-1. Panel Wizard Introduction Window

66 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

2. Click Next to start creating your panel. The Step 1-Panel Location window
will appear. At this window you will create a unique name for your panel,
and save it to a location you specify.

Figure 4-2. Step 1 – Panel Location Window

Note
If you select an existing panel document, the settings from that panel will
be imported into the wizard for you to edit; however, if you save this panel
you will overwrite the original settings with the new ones you specify.

3. Enter the location of the panel document (*.PAN) you wish to create:
• Click Browse…
• Select the directory where you want to create the panel.
4. Enter a panel name.
5. Click Save. You will return to the Step 1 window.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 67

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

6. Click Next. The Step 2 – Database Location window will appear. At this
window you will link the newly-created panel to an existing RouterMapper
database.

Figure 4-3. Step 2 – Database Location Window

7. Select an existing RouterMapper database (*.da4) that stores the

information about your router system:
• Click Browse…
• Select the directory where the RouterMapper database is located.
• Select the name of the database to which you want to link the panel.
• Click Open. You will return to the Step 2 window.

68 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

8. Click Next. The Step 3 – Panel Style window will appear. At this window
you will designate if the panel will be single-bus, multi-bus, or matrix.

Figure 4-4. Step 3 – Panel Style Window

9. Click on the drop-down arrow for this list box to display the list of panel
styles available.
10. Select the type of panel you want for this panel:
• Single-bus panels control one destination at a time.
• Multi-bus panels control several destinations at a time.
• Matrix panels show all the desired sources and destinations in a grid-like
display.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 69

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

11. Click Next. The Step 3a – Panel Address and Name window will appear. At
this window you will designate a unique identification (ID) number and
panel name for the panel.

Figure 4-5. Step 3a – Panel Address and Name Window

12. Give the panel a unique address between 0 and 127. This panel address will
be the ID the routers will “see” when you lock or protect a destination.
13. Give the panel a unique name. This name will be the text that will appear in
the RouterWorks title bar whenever you use this panel.
14. Click Next. The Step 4 – Active Levels window will appear.

Figure 4-6. Step 4 – Active Levels Window

70 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

15. Select the levels you want to enable in this panel. You must activate at least
one level.
16. Click Next. The Step 5 - Sources window will appear.

Figure 4-7. Step 5 - Sources Window

17. Select the sources you want to control in this panel and how many of them
to display on the panel at a time. (See your RouterMapper Configuration
Utility Reference Guide for a detailed explanation of Sources.) You must
select at least one source.
18. Click Next. The Step 6 - Destinations window will appear.

Figure 4-8. Step 6 - Destinations Window

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 71

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

19. Select the destinations you want to control in this panel and how many
destinations to display on the panel at a time. (See your RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for a detailed explanation of
Destinations.) You must select at least one destination.
20. Click Next. The Options window will appear.

Figure 4-9. Options Window

At the Options window, you can

• Create a shortcut to your new panel on the Windows desktop or Start
menu
• Run this panel when it is finished
• Edit advanced optional features. (See “Advanced Options” on page 76 for
more detailed information about these options.)

72 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

21. Click Next. The Finish window will appear.

Figure 4-10. Finish Window

22. Click Finish to complete the creation of your new panel.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 73

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Editing an Existing Panel via Panel Wizard

1. Highlight the file name of the matrix panel you want to edit. (If necessary,
use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click on the matrix file name. A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 4-11. Edit Drop-Down Menu

3. Highlight Edit with Panel Wizard, and then press <Enter>. The Panel
Wizard Introduction window will appear.
To change database linked to the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until the Step 2 – Database Location window appears.
2. Select an existing RouterMapper database (*.da4) that stores the
information about your router system. To do this:
• Click Browse…
• Select the directory where the RouterMapper database is located.
• Select the name of the database to which you want to link the panel.
• Click Open. You will return to the Step 2 window.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Panel address, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until you reach the Step 3a – Panel Address and Name window.
2. Give the panel a unique address between 0 and 127. This panel address will
be the ID the routers will “see” when you Lock or Protect a destination.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.

74 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

To change the Panel name, follow these steps:

1. Click Next until you reach the Step 3a – Panel Address and Name window.
2. Give the panel a unique name. This name will be the text that will appear in
the RouterWorks title bar whenever you use this panel.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Levels displayed, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until you reach the Step 4 – Active Levels window.
2. Select the levels you want to enable in this panel. You must activate at least
one level.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Sources or make more Sources visible, follow these
steps:
1. Click Next until the Step 5 - Sources window appears.
2. Select the sources you want to control in this panel and how many of them
to display on the panel at a time. (See your RouterMapper Configuration
Utility Reference Guide for a detailed explanation of Sources.) You must
select at least one source.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Destinations or make more Destinations visible,
follow these steps:
1. Click Next until the Step 6 - Destinations window appears.
2. Select the destinations you want to control in this panel and how many
destinations to display on the panel at a time. You must select at least one
destination.
3. Click Next until the Finish window appears.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change or add Options, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until the Options window appears. At the Options window you
can
• Create shortcuts to your new panel on the Windows desktop or Start menu.
• Run this panel when it is finished.
• Edit advanced optional features. (See “Advanced Options” on page 76 for
more detailed information.)
2. Click Next. The Finish window will appear.
3. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 75

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Advanced Options
There are several separate options tabs available through the Advanced Options
screen:
• Common settings
• Options
• Signal presence settings (Panacea™ frames only)
• Matrix settings (matrix panels only)
• Category/index settings (multi-bus panels only)

76 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Common Settings

Note
These settings are explained in detail in “Setting Control Panel Size
Attributes” on page 86. They are shown in Figure 4-17 on page 87 and
Figure 4-18 on page 88.

The Common Settings tab in Panel Wizard enables you to set the height and
width (in pixels) of some of the common control panel attributes.

Figure 4-12. Advanced Options Window, Common Settings Tab

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 77

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Options
The Options tab in Panel Wizard allows you to enable extra features to make it
easier to use RouterWorks panels.

Figure 4-13. Advanced Options Window, Options Tab (Shown With

Matrix Panel)

Allow Editing Salvos

Check this box to enable the Salvo Edit button (see Figure 4-13). For more
information on how to edit salvos, see page 57.
Allow Firing Salvos
Check this box to allow users to run preprogrammed salvo sequences.
Allow Lock Override
Check this box to allow users to override locks. For more information on
overriding a lock, see page 47.
Allow Resizing
Check this box to allow users to change the size of dialog windows.
Auto AFV
Check this box to automatically allow audio follow video (AFV) switching. For
more information on AFV, see page 27.
Demonstration Mode
Check this box to allow users to test RouterWorks panels without having to be
attached to a router. (Users can access this option by clicking on the right-side
mouse button.)

78 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Enable Extra Menu Items

Check this box to access diagnostics functions that you may find useful for
specialized testing and troubleshooting. (You can access this option by clicking
on the right-side mouse button.)

Note
The Enable Extra Menu Items feature is not supported by Leitch
Customer Service.

Enable Source Disconnects

Check this box to allow users to enable a menu item that allows them to
disconnect all destinations currently statusing a selected source. (You can access
this option by clicking on the right-side mouse button.)
Remember Last Destination
Check this box to allow users to return to the destination they used during their
last RouterWorks session. (Users can access this option by clicking on the
right-side mouse button.)
Save Window on Exit
Check this box to allow RouterWorks to automatically save any changes that
you have made to a panel when you close the application.
Show Alarms
Check this box to enable alarm LEDs for each level to light when an alarm
condition is detected by the router (see Figure 4-13 on page 78). For more
information on alarms, see page 50.
Show All Salvos
Check this box to enable the Salvos drop-down list (see Figure 4-13 on
page 78).
Show EDH
(This option is reserved for future use.)
Show Status
(This option is reserved for future use. )
Use Lock/Protect Bitmap
Check this box to allow Lock and Protect icons to appear on a panel’s Lock and
Protect buttons.
Use Take
Check this box to enable the Take button on a panel screen (see Figure 4-13 on
page 78). For more information on using the Take feature, see page 52.

Signal Presence Settings

The Signal Presence Settings tab in Panel Wizard enables you to display the
input signal presence feature found on the Leitch Panacea series of routing

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 79

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

switchers. Check the Display Source Signal Presence Indicators box to include
the signal presence indicators on a particular panel.

Figure 4-14. Advanced Options Window, Signal Presence Settings Tab

80 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Matrix Settings
The Matrix Settings tab in Panel Wizard lets you adjust some settings specific to
the matrix panel.

*
*

* Circle ratio may be overridden by maximum circle size

and minimum circle size
Figure 4-15. Advanced Options Window, Matrix Settings Tab

Circle Ratio
Maximum Circle Size
Minimum Circle Size
These options control the size (in pixels) of colored crosspoint markers on a
matrix panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 81).
• Enter a value for the Circle Ratio option to set the size of the colored
crosspoint marker.
• You may override the Circle Ratio option by entering values for the
Maximum Circle Size and Minimum Circle Size options.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 81

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Control Button Height

Control Button Width
Control Section Width
These options control the size (in pixels) of the Levels and Alarms control
buttons on the matrix panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 81).
• Enter a value for the Control Button Height to set how high you want the
control buttons to be.
• Enter a value for the Control Button Width to set how wide you want the
control buttons to be.
• Enter a value for the Control Section Width for how wide you want the
Levels and/or Alarms control button sections to be.
Preset Group Height
This option controls the height (in pixels) of the Preset/Take section on a matrix
panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 81). Enter a value for how tall you want the
Preset/Take section to be.
Zoom Group Height
This option controls the height (in pixels) of the Zoom Tool section on a matrix
panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 81). Enter a value for how tall you want the
Zoom Tool section to be.

Category/Index Settings

Note
See “Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing” in the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide for a detailed
explanation of this topic.

The Category/Index Settings tab in the Panel Wizard enables you to configure
the Category/Index control settings; that is, it controls the size and information
displayed in the Category/Index control on the right-hand side of a multi-bus
panel. This function allows you to easily monitor and control several router
destinations from one panel. (See Figure 1-6 on page 11 for a graphic
representation of the multi-bus panel that displays the Category/Index settings.)

82 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Figure 4-16. Advanced Options Window, Category/index Settings Tab

• Destination List, Source List, Level List: An inclusive range of logical

indices (e.g., 1-10).
• Destination List shows the list of indices for destination categories
• Source List shows the list of indices for source categories
• Level List shows the list of indices for levels that are affected by the
choices made in the Destination List and Source List.
There are three ways to designate what to put in the three lists: use a dot
character (“.”), use a wild card character (“*”), or enter exact numbers to
specify the Destination, Source, and Levels lists.
Use a dot character (“.”)
This option is the default option that appears when you first access this
window. Use this option whenever you want to use the settings assigned to a
selected multibus panel.
Use a wild card character (“*”)
Use this option whenever you want to use all of the values defined in the
router logical database.
Enter exact numbers to specify a Destination, Source, and Levels lists
Use this option when you want to specify exact destinations, sources, or
levels.
For example, to specify Sources 1, 3 through 10, 11 through 15, 17 and 20,
the Source List entry would look like this:
1,3-10,11-15,17,20
• Control Width: Width (in pixels) of the category/index control.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 83

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

• Preset Width: Width (in pixels) of the preset control.

• Align with Destination Control: Forces the alignment of the bottom of the
Category/Index panel with the bottom of the Destination control of the
multi-bus panel (by default, the panel aligns with the bottom of source
control). This might be desirable when the category/index control only
controls 1 or 2 levels and the multibus controls several because it prevents
the category/index control from stretching too much vertically. This
option’s default value is zero (0).

84 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

The physical appearance of a panel may be customized by editing the panel
initialization file (the .PAN file). This file is similar to a Windows .INI file, and
may be edited using any standard text editor. The .PAN file may also be used to
design control panels that provide limited access to sources and destinations.

Determining .PAN File Location

To determine the location of the .PAN file, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the Windows taskbar.
2. Select Properties.
3. From the Start Menu Programs tab, click Advanced.
4. In the Programs folder, find the Leitch Routing Switchers folder.
5. Find the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel shortcut (as
appropriate) in that folder.
6. Right-click on the shortcut.
7. Select Properties.
8. On the Shortcut tab, the command line will appear in the Target box. The
second half of this command line is the path to the proper .PAN file.

Designating the Router Database

The .PAN file may be used to designate the database that will be loaded when
the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel is launched. To designate
a specific database, edit the [Database Path] section of the .PAN file as
follows:
•On the Path= line, enter the drive and path of the desired RouterWorks
database file.
• On the FileName= line, enter the file name of the database that will be
loaded upon startup.

Setting the Locks and Protects Preferences

The following locks and protects preferences may be changed by editing the
[Locks&Protects] section of the .PAN file:
• To enable the panel to display a graphical icon for locks and protects, set
the UseBitmap= line to 1. If the line is set to 0, text will be used instead.
• If text is being used for locks and protects, the color of the buttons can be
designated by setting the LockColor= and ProtectColor= lines
appropriately. Enter the RGB values of the desired colors. (For example, the
RGB values for the color red are 255, 0, 0).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 85

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Changing the Control Panel Preferences

The following control panel preferences may be changed by editing the
[Preferences] section of the .PAN file:
• To automatically save the position of the control panel upon exiting, set
the SaveWindowonExit= line to 1.
• To assign a different name to the control panel, enter the new name after
the “=” sign on the PanelName= line. This Panel Name will appear in the
title bar of the control panel window.
• To designate the Panel Address, set the PanelAddress= line to any number
between 1 and 128. Every panel must have a Panel Address, as this is the
address used to identify the panel for communication on the X-Y bus.
Normally, each panel is assigned a unique Panel Address; however, it is
possible to assign the same Panel Address to multiple panels of the same
type.
• To configure the panel to allow destination lock overrides, set the
AllowLockOverRide= line to 1. (See “Allowing Overrides” on page 47 for
more information on overriding locks.)
• To save the last destination displayed before exiting, set the
RememberLastDest= line to 1. When the panel is next launched, this
destination will be displayed upon startup.
• To designate a specific destination to be always displayed on startup, set
the RememberLastDest= line to 0, and set the InitialDestination= line to
the number of the desired destination.
• Set the PanelStyle= line to one of the following:
• SingleBusPanel for a single bus panel
• MultiBusPanel for a multi-bus panel
• MatrixPanel for a matrix panel.
• To configure the panel to automatically revert to AFV switching mode
after a breakaway switch, set the TakeSelectsAFV= line to 1. If this line is
set to 0, the panel will remain in breakaway mode until it is specifically
switched to AFV mode (by clicking on the Follow button). See “Connecting
a Source” on page 26 for more information on AFV and Breakaway
switching.
• To enable the status display, set the ShowStatus= line to 1.
• (For matrix panels only) To select Preset/Take mode, set the Take= line to
1. To select No-Take mode, set the Take= line to 0. The default is Preset/
Take.

Setting Control Panel Size Attributes

Single-Bus Control Panel Size Attributes
Various control panel size attributes may be changed via the [Single-Bus Sizes]
section of the .PAN file.

86 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

StatusBarHeight=
LevelButtonWidth= LevelVerticalOffset=

LevelButtonHeight=

SourceButtonHeight=
DestinationWidth= SourceButtonWidth=

Figure 4-17. Setting Panel Size Attributes: Single-Bus Panels

• To change the width of the drop-down Destination list box, enter the
desired width in the DestinationWidth= line.
• To change the width and height of the Breakaway Level buttons, set the
LevelButtonWidth= line and the LevelButtonHeight= line to the
appropriate dimensions.
• To change the spacing between the Breakaway Level buttons, set the
LevelVerticalOffset= line to the desired spacing.
• To change the height of the LED bars, set the StatusBarHeight= line to
the desired height. Status Bar height can be no greater than the height of the
Level buttons.
• To change the width and height of the Source controls, set the
SourceButtonWidth= line and the SourceButtonHeight= line to the
desired dimensions.
Multi-Bus Control Panel Size Attributes
Various control panel size attributes may be changed via the [MultiBus Sizes]
section of the .PAN file.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 87

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

DestinationWidth=

StatusBarHeight=
LevelButtonHeight=

LevelButtonWidth= SourceButtonWidth= SourceButtonHeight=

LevelVerticalOffset=

Figure 4-18. Setting Panel Size Attributes — Multi-Bus Panels

• To change the width of the Destination controls, enter the desired width in
the DestinationWidth= line. The height of the Destination controls is set
automatically, depending on the number of levels activated and the
LevelButtonHeight= setting.
• To change the horizontal spacing between the Destination controls, enter
the desired spacing in the DestControlOffsetx= line. The vertical spacing
of the controls is set automatically, depending on the number of levels
activated, and the LevelButtonHeight= setting.
• To change the width and height of the Breakaway Level buttons, set the
LevelButtonWidth= line and the LevelButtonHeight= line to the
appropriate dimensions.
• To change the spacing between the Breakaway Level buttons, set the
LevelVerticalOffset= line to the desired spacing.
• To change the height of the LED bars, set the StatusBarHeight= line to
the desired height. Status Bar height can be no greater than the height of the
Level buttons.
• To change the width and height of the Source controls, set the
SourceButtonWidth= and SourceButtonHeight= lines to the appropriate
dimensions.

Matrix Control Panel Size Attributes

Various control panel size attributes may be changed via the [Matrix Sizes]
section of the .PAN file.
• To change the width of the Destination controls, enter the desired width in
the DestinationWidth= line. The height of the Destination controls is set
automatically, depending on the number of levels activated, and the
LevelButtonHeight= setting.

88 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

• To change the horizontal spacing between the Destination controls, enter

the desired spacing in the DestControlOffsetx= line. The vertical spacing
of the controls is set automatically, depending on the number of levels
activated and the LevelButtonHeight= setting.
• To change the width and height of the Breakaway Level buttons, set the
LevelButtonWidth= line and the LevelButtonHeight= line to the proper
dimensions.
• To change the spacing between the Breakaway Level buttons, set the
LevelVerticalOffset= line to the desired spacing.
• To change the height of the LED bars, set the StatusBarHeight= line to
the desired height. Status Bar height can be no greater than the height of the
Level buttons.
• To change the width and height of the Source controls, set the
SourceButtonWidth= line and the SourceButtonHeight= line to the
proper dimensions.

Adding/Deleting Logical Sources

Single-Bus Panels
The [Logical Sources] section of the .PAN file has a single parameter called
NumControls. This parameter sets the number of source controls that will
appear on the on-screen control panel.
The [SourceGroup1] section contains two types of parameters; GroupName
and SourceX. Later versions of RouterWorks will allow you to have multiple
groups of sources so you can put all of your VTRs in one group, all of your
Paint Boxes in another group, etc. The GroupName parameter will allow you
to give each group a unique name (e.g., VTRs, Paint-Boxes, etc.). The source
groups are not supported, however, so the GroupName parameter is not used.
The Sourcex= parameters designate the Logical Source to appear in each
Source button in the group identified by the Section, i.e., [SourceGroup1].
Currently only a single group is supported. There must be a Sourcex= entry for
each Logical Source button that will appear on the panel. The entries must be in
numerical sequence. (The x represents the Logical Source that will appear in the
Source button. Source1=3, for example, means that Logical Source #3 will
appear in button #1.)
This feature might be useful in situations where you need access to a limited
number of sources, but those sources are not contiguous in the router. In such a
case, a panel could be designed that includes only those necessary sources. For
example, to create a four-button panel with Logical Source #3 in the first button,
Logical Source #6 in the second button, Logical Source #9 in the third button,
and Logical source #16 in the fourth button, enter the following text in the .PAN
file:
[LogicalSources]
NumControls=4
[SourceGroup1]

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 89

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Source1=3
Source2=6
Source3=9
Source4=16

Multi-Bus Panels
The [Logical Sources] section of the .PAN file includes two parameters that
may be modified.
• The NumControls= line sets the number of source controls that will appear
on the on-screen control panel.
• The Sourcex= lines designate the Logical Source to appear in each Source
button. There must be a Sourcex= entry for each Logical Source button that
will appear on the panel. The entries must be in numerical sequence.

Note
The x represents the Logical Source that will appear in the Source
button. Source1=3, for example, means that Logical source #3 will
appear in button #1.

This feature is useful in situations where you need access to a limited number of
sources that are not contiguous in the router. A panel could be designed that
includes only those necessary sources. For example, to create a four-button
panel with Logical Source #3 in the first button, Logical Source #6 in the
second button, Logical Source #9 in the third button, and Logical source #16 in
the fourth button, enter the following text in the [LogicalSources] section of the
.PAN file:
[LogicalSources]
NumControls=4
[SourceGroup1]
Source1=3
Source2=6
Source3=9
Source4=16

Matrix Panels
The [Logical Sources] section of the .PAN file includes two parameters that
may be modified.
• The NumControls= line sets the number of source controls that will appear
on the on-screen control panel.
• The Sourcex= lines designate the Logical Source to appear in each Source
button. There must be a Sourcex= entry for each Logical Source button that
will appear on the panel. The entries must be in numerical sequence.

90 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Note
The x represents the Logical Source that will appear in the Source
button. Source1=3, for example, means that Logical source #3 will
appear in button #1.

This feature might be useful in situations where you need access to a limited
number of sources that are not contiguous in the router. In such a case, a panel
could be designed for that operator that includes only those necessary sources.
For example, to create a four-button panel with Logical Source #3 in the first
button, Logical Source #6 in the second button, Logical Source #9 in the third
button, and Logical source #16 in the fourth button, enter the following text in
the [LogicalSources] section of the .PAN file:
[LogicalSources]
NumControls=4
[SourceGroup1]
Source1=3
Source2=6
Source3=9
Source4=16

Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations

The [Logical Destinations] section of the .PAN file operates similarly to the
[Logical Sources] section. The Destinationx= lines define the logical
destinations that will appear in each destination control. There must be a
separate entry for each destination, and all entries must appear in numerical
sequence.

Activating Levels
The [Active Levels] section of the .PAN file defines the levels that will appear
on the on-screen control panel. If a level is to appear, it must be activated in the
.PAN file and enabled via RouterMapper.
• To activate a level, set the Levelx= (where x is the level number) line to 1.
• To deactivate a level, set the Levelx= (where x is the level number) line to
0.
This feature is useful when designing special purpose control panels. For
example, a video-only panel could be designed for a paint station. The panel
operator would only have access to video sources and would be unable to effect
any changes on the audio levels.

Activating Active Salvos Control

The Active Salvos control presents itself based on three parameters from the
.PAN file. The parameters are
• ShowActiveSalvos (used by all panel types)

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 91

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

• ActiveSalvosGroupWidth (used by single-and multi-bus panels only)

• ActiveSalvosGroupHeight (used by matrix panel files only)
The ShowActiveSalvos parameter is used by Matrix.PAN, Singlbus.PAN, and
Multibus.PAN. The value for ShowActiveSalvos may be either 0 or 1.
• If the ShowActiveSalvos parameter is set to 0, the control will not appear
and cannot be used.
• If the ShowActiveSalvos parameter is set to 1, the control will be visible in
the panel window.
The ActiveSalvosGroupWidth parameter is only used by the Singlbus.PAN
and Multibus.PAN files. The parameter specifies how wide (in screen pixels)
the ActiveSalvosControl should appear in the panel. If no width is specified, a
default width of 120 is furnished. This default setting should be wide enough to
accommodate salvos with names approximately 16 characters or less in width.
• In Singlebus mode the panel window will expand to allow the specified
width of the control.
• In Multibus mode, if the Active Salvos Group width provided is large
enough to overlap the neighboring control to the left, the width will be
automatically resized so that the left edge of the Active Salvos Control is
adjacent to the neighboring control to the left.
The ActiveSalvosGroupHeight parameter is only used by the Matrix.PAN file
for Matrix Panel mode. The parameter specifies how tall (in screen pixels) the
ActiveSalvosControl should appear in the panel. If no height is specified a
default height of 100 is provided. This default setting should be tall enough to
accommodate up to 5 salvo names in the list. If the list exceeds the Active
Salvos Control list box length, a vertical scroll bar will appear in the list box.
• In Singlebus mode the Active Salvos Control height will always span the
full height of the window.
• In multibus mode the Active Salvos Control height will always be identical
to its neighbor to the left.

Activating Signal Presence Indicators

Signal presence indicators may be enabled using the Panel Wizard to configure
the RouterWorks panel definition (*.PAN) file (see page 79).
Alternatively, the file may be edited directly. Each .PAN file may contain a
SignalPresenceSettings section as follows.
The EnableSourceSignalPresenceIndicators parameter allows you to turn
signal presence indicators on or off. The value for this parameter may be 0 or 1.
• If this parameter is set to 0, signal presence indicators will be turned off.
(The default value is 0.)
• If this parameter is set to 1, signal presence indicators will be turned on.
The Sections parameter allows you to define the number of sections for the
circle (default value is 8).

92 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Activating Bidirectional Take

The [BidirectionalRouting] section of the .PAN file describes the parameters
of the bidirectional Take feature. The bidirectional Take feature allows a
convenient method of establishing two-way communications pathways using a
standard source-to destination router. For this feature to become functional, it
must be activated in the .PAN file and enabled via RouterMapper.
The entries are set up as follows:
[BidirectionalRouting]
Enabled=1
NumberOfPorts=8
Port0=0,0,Speaker 1
Port1=1,1,Speaker 2
Port2=2,2,Speaker 3
Port3=3,3,Speaker 4
Port4=4,4,Speaker 5
Port5=5,5,Speaker 6
Port6=6,6,Speaker 7
Port7=7,7,Speaker 8
[BidirectionalRouting] identifies the section of the .PAN file corresponding to
this feature.
Enabled=1 causes the Bidirectional Take feature to be available to users. Any
value other than 1 causes the feature to be disabled (that is, unavailable to
users).
NumberOfPorts=8 identifies the number of ports (or “bidirectional channels”)
to be defined in the system. In this case, the number of ports has been set to 8 to
correspond to 8 speakers.
Port<portno>=<logical_src_index>,<logical_dest_index>,<port_name>
The remaining entries define the ports. The fields in each entry are as
follows:
• Port<portno>= identifies the port number definition. Each port definition
begins with the prefix Port, followed by the port number and the equals (=)
symbol (e.g., Port0=, Port1=, Port16=, etc.).
• <logical_src_index> identifies the logical Source index entry in the
RouterMapper database to be used as the source for this port (e.g.,
microphone talk channel). See Figure 3-38 on page 59 for an example of a
logical Source index entry.
Since the index is zero-based, the number to be assigned here is one less
than the logical Source index entry shown on the RouterMapper database
display. See the sample port entry on page 94 for an example.
• <logical_dest_index> identifies the logical Destination index entry from
the RouterMapper database to be used as the destination for this port (e.g.,
headphone listen channel). See Figure 3-39 on page 59 for an example of a
logical Destination index entry.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 93

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Since the index is zero-based, the number to be assigned here is one less
than the logical destination index entry shown on the RouterMapper
database display. See the sample port entry on page 94 for an example.
• <port_name> is the alphanumeric text string to be assigned to this port to
identify it. In the speaker example, Each speaker is assigned a name such as
“Speaker 1.” Any text may be entered here. The name is limited to no more
than 32 characters.
Sample port entry: Port7=7,7,Speaker 8
Defines port 7 to

Note
Since the index is zero-based, the number to be assigned here is one
less than the logical source or destination index entry shown on the
RouterMapper database display

• Use logical Source 7 (logical Source entry #8 as shown on the

RouterMapper database display; see Figure 3-38 on page 59) as
port 7’s input (talk channel)
• Use logical Destination 7 (logical database Destination entry #8 as
shown on the RouterMapper database display; see Figure 3-39 on
page 59) as port 7’s output (listen channel)
• Assign the name “Speaker 8” to the port, indicating that Speaker 8’s
microphone is connected to router input #7 and headphones are fed
by router output #7.

94 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Creating Control Panels for Individual Users

To create on-screen control panels for individual users, follow
these steps:
1. Create the database for the router via RouterMapper.
2. Copy the .PAN file for each user.
3. Assign each file a unique filename.
4. Edit the .PAN file to customize the control panel.
5. Create a new Program Item for each control panel:
a. Right-click on the Windows taskbar.
b. Select Properties.
c. From the Start Menu Programs tab, click Add.
d. In the Command Line box, enter the complete path of the
RTR_CTRL.EXE file, immediately followed by the complete path of
the new control panel’s .PAN file.
e. Click Next.
f. Select the folder where the new shortcut should be placed.
g. Click Next.
h. Type a description of the new panel.
i. Click Finish.
6. Select the new icon from the Windows Start menu to launch the newly
created control panel.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 95

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Creating Control Panels for Multiple Remote Sites

To create control panels for multiple remote sites, follow these
steps:
1. Using RouterMapper, create a separate database with the appropriate phone
number for each remote site.
2. Copy the .PAN files for each remote site.
3. Edit the Path= and FileName= lines in each .PAN file.
4. Create a new Program Item for each remote site:
a. Right-click on the Windows Taskbar.
b. Select Properties.
c. From the Start Menu Programs tab, click Add.
d. In the Command Line box, enter the complete path of the
RTR_CTRL.EXE file, immediately followed by the complete path of
the new control panel’s .PAN file.
e. Click Next.
f. Select the folder where the new shortcut should be placed.
g. Click Next.
h. Type a description of the remote site.
i. Click Finish.
5. Select the new icon from the Windows Start menu to launch the newly
created control panel.

96 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

Keywords

A Circle ratio 81
Circle size
Adding options 75, 78–79
maximum 81
Advanced options, panel wizard
minimum 81
category⁄index settings tab 82–84
Common settings tab 77
common settings tab 77
Connecting sources 26–27
matrix settings tab 81–82
Control
options tab 78–79
align with destination 84
signal presence settings tab 79
width 83
Alarms 50, 79
Customer service 18
Align with destination control 84
Customizing panels
Allow editing salvos 78
creating for individual users 95
Allow firing salvos 78
creating for multiple remote sites 96
Allow lock override 78
modifying on-screen display 85–96
Allow resizing 78
panel initialization (.PAN) file 85–96
Audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 27–29
panel wizard 66–84
Auto AFV 78
D
B
Databases
Bidirectional take designating 85
activating 93–94 editing 24
editing .PAN file 59 Demo mode 17
router configuration 58 Demonstration mode 78
using 60–63 Destination list 83
Breakaway switching 29–31 Destinations
Button locking 39–42
control height 82 protecting 39, 43–46
control section width 82 selecting 25–26
control width 82 unlocking 42–43
unprotecting 46–47
C
Category⁄index settings tab 82–84 E
Changing
Enable extra menu items 79
addresses 74
Enable source disconnects 79
databases 74
destinations 75 F
levels 75
options 75 Features
panel names 75 matrix panel 13–15
sources 75 multi-bus panel 11–12

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 97

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

single-bus panel 9–10 editing 51, 57

Firmware requirements 4 executing 51, 56
no-take configuration 52, 56
G-H preset⁄take configuration 52, 56
Group height setting attributes 88
preset 82 sources
zoom 82 connecting 27
disconnecting 34–35
I-L logical 90–91
replacing 34, 36–37
Installation
Matrix settings tab 81–82
controlling a router 24
Multi-bus panel
editing databases 24
audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 27–28
installing RouterWorks software 19–24
breakaway switching 29–30
launching applications 24
destinations
Introduction
locking multiple 41
demo mode 17
locking single 40–41
features 8–17
protecting multiple 45
firmware requirements 4
protecting single 45
panel wizard 15–16
selecting 25–26
related products 18
unprotecting multiple 47
remote dial-up 17
unprotecting single 47
RouterMapper 16–17
overrides, allowing 47–49
system limitations 3
salvos
system requirements 1
active salvos control 57–58
TCP⁄IP 17
adding 51
using RouterWorks on-line Help system 6
deleting 57
using this manual 5
editing 51, 57
Launching RouterWorks applications 24
executing 51, 56
Level list 83
setting attributes 87
Limitations, system 3
sources
Locking destinations 39–42
connecting 26–27
M-N logical 90
Multiple take 32–33
Matrix panel
alarms 50 O
audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 29
Opening RouterWorks (launching applications) 24
bidirectional take 58–63
Operation
breakaway switching 31
Audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 27–29
destinations
bidirectional take 58–63
locking multiple 42
breakaway switching 29–31
locking single 41
connecting sources 26–27
protecting multiple 46
locking destinations 39–42
protecting single 46
protecting destinations 39, 43–46
selecting 26
selecting destinations 25–26
unprotecting multiple 47
unlocking destinations 42–43
unprotecting single 47
unprotecting destinations 46–47
multiple take, performing 32–33
Options tab 78–79
overrides, allowing 47–49
Overrides, allowing 47–49
salvos
active salvos control 57–58 P-Q
adding 51
deleting 57 .PAN file

98 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

See panel initialization file changing options 75

Panel changing panel addresses 74
creating for individual users 95 changing panel names 75
creating for multiple remote sites 96 changing sources 75
customizing 65–96 making destinations visible 75
matrix 13–15 making sources visible 75
multi-bus 11–12 new panel setup 66–73
panel wizard 15–16 Preset width 84
single-bus 9–10 Product information 18
Panel initialization file Products, related 18
activating Protecting destinations 39, 43–46
active salvos control 91
bidirectional take 93–94 R
levels 91 Remember last destination 79
signal presence indicators 92 Remote dial-up 17
adding Requirements
destinations 91 firmware 4
sources system 1
matrix panel 90–91 RouterMapper 16–17
multi-bus panel 90
single-bus panel 89 S
creating Salvos
panels for individual users 95 active salvos control 57–58
panels for multiple remote sites 96 deleting 57
deleting editing 51, 57
destinations 91 executing 51, 56
sources Save window on exit 79
matrix panel 90–91 Selecting destinations 25–26
multi-bus panel 90 Settings
single-bus panel 89 category⁄index 82–84
designating databases 85 common 77
determining location 85 matrix 81–82
setting attributes options 78–79
matrix bus panel 88 signal presence 79
multi-bus panel 87 Show
single-bus panel 86 alarms 79
setting preferences all salvos 79
control panels 86 EDH 79
locks 85 status 79
protects 85 Signal presence settings tab 79
Panel wizard Single-bus panel
advanced options 76–84 audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 27–28
category⁄index settings tab 82–84 breakaway switching 29–30
common settings tab 77 destinations
matrix settings tab 81–82 locking multiple 39–40
options tab 78–79 locking single 39
signal presence settings tab 79 protecting multiple 44–45
existing panel editing 74–75 protecting single 43
adding options 75 selecting 25
changing databases 74 unprotecting multiple 46
changing destinations 75 unprotecting single 46
changing levels displayed 75 overrides, allowing 47–49

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 99

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Index

salvos requirements 1
active salvos control 57–58
adding 51 T
deleting 57 Take, undoing 38
editing 51, 57 TCP⁄IP 17
executing 51, 56 Technical support 18
setting attributes 86
sources U-Z
connecting 26
Unlocking destinations 42–43
logical 89
unprotecting destinations 46–47
Software installation 19–24
Use lock bitmap 79
Source list 83
Use protect bitmap 79
Sources
Use take 79
connecting 26–27
Using
multiple disconnect 35–36
manual 5
undoing a take 38
on-line Help system 6
Switching
warranty information ii
audio-follow-video (AFV) 27–29
Width
breakaway 29–31
control 83
System
preset 84
limitations 3

100 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Copyright © 1998-2008, 2009, Harris Corporation
DRFM™

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Edition G
DRFM MAN
Dynamic Routing Fabric
Manager™

Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Edition G
September 2007
Copyright Information
Copyright 2001-2007, 2009 Harris Corporation, 1025 West NASA Boulevard,
Melbourne, Florida 32919-0001 U.S.A. All rights reserved. This publication
supersedes all previous releases. Printed in Canada.
This product and related documentation are protected by copyright and are
distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and
decompilation. No part of this product or related documentation may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of
Harris Corporation and its licensors, if any.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated into new editions of the publication. Harris Corporation may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described
in this publication at any time.

Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your warranty
coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures for obtaining
warranty service. To view the complete warranty, visit our website.
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Monitoring and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Contacting Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Requirements and Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the Monitoring and Control Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Dynamic Routing Thread Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Thread Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Disconnecting Dynamic Routing Thread Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Device Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Database Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Changing the Thread Refresh Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DRFM Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Adding Column Fields to Docking Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Workspace Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Monitoring Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Thread Highlighting in the Frame Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Condition Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Manual Thread Enabling and Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide iii

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Contents

iv Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1
Introduction

Overview
The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager allows you to monitor the status and
control dynamic routing threads on systems that use both normal dynamic
routing threads and those associated with combiner systems. You may also use
the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager to monitor more than one frame at the
same time.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 1

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Monitoring and Control Functions

The software allows continuous, real-time updates of dynamic routing thread
status:
• In use status
• What signal the dynamic routing thread carries
• Number of local connections to the dynamic routing thread
You can trace dynamic routing thread connections to their source(s).
You can trace dynamic routing thread connections to their destination(s).
You can disconnect dynamic routing thread users to free up the dynamic routing
threads whenever you desire.

Program Functions
The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software allows a Workspace Save (the
capability to save the setup and layout of your system) so that you can save
multiple layouts for different system views.
You have the capability of monitoring dynamic routing threads among many
frames in one instance of the application.
You can run more than one instance of the application at the same time.

Contacting Us
If you have questions about this or other Harris products, contact us for
technical support and product information.

Technical Support
We committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our customers
around the world. Visit our website for information on how to contact the
Customer Service team in your geographical region.

Product Information
If you would like the latest product information or documentation, contact your
dealer or the Sales Department; or, visit our website for more information.

System Requirements and Limitations

The system requirements and limitations for the Dynamic Routing Fabric
Manager are the same as those for RouterMapper. See your RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for more information.

2 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using this Manual

This manual is intended as a reference to the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager
software and is not organized in step-by-step tutorial fashion.
The manual has the following writing conventions:

Table 1-1. Writing Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and
selection names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books
or publications, and the first instances of new
terms and specialized words that need
emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such
as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries,
such as a DOS entry or something you type
into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to
Note avoid and troubleshoot problems

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 3

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 1: Introduction

4 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2
Getting Started

Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

1. Generate a DRF file from within RouterMapper (see the RouterMapper
Note Configuration and Operation Manual for information on how to generate a
You may want to set up a DRF file).
desktop shortcut to the Dynamic
2. Switch to the Leitch Routing Systems window (or, using Windows
Routing Fabric Manager.
Explorer, switch to C:\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Leitch Routing
Switchers).
3. Click on the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager icon.
4. The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window will appear.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 5

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window

The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window provides a summary of
dynamic routing thread system databases.

Figure 2-1. Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window

• The left third of the window summarizes the current DRF database (the
database definition section).
• The right side of the main window displays a list of all devices associated
with the database.
• The bottom of the window displays a system status area, where system
status messages appear for your information and use.
• The top of the window displays the main menu selections.

Figure 2-2. File Menu Dialog Box

6 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Figure 2-3. View Menu Dialog Box

Figure 2-4. Thread Menu Dialog Box

Figure 2-5. Window Menu Dialog Box

Figure 2-6. Help Menu Dialog Box

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 7

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

1. Start the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software application, as
described in “Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager” (see
page 5).
2. If you haven’t already done so, customize your Dynamic Routing Fabric
Manager main menu screen.
3. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), and then choose the DRF file for the
dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.

Figure 2-7. Opening a Database Dialog Box

4. The dynamic routing threads database will be listed in the Docking dialog.
5. Double-click on (or highlight, and then press <Enter>) one of the dynamic
routing threads to display the following information:
• ID
• From Level
• Output
• To Level
• Input
• Remote Inputs
• Local Connections

8 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Using the Monitoring and Control Functions

Dynamic Routing Thread Connection Status
In the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager, you can see continuous, real-time
Note dynamic routing thread status updates.
This window is a reporting 1. Start the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software application, as
function only. You may not
described in “Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager” (see
make changes at this window.
page 5).
2. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), and then choose the DRF file for the
dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.
3. Double-click on (or highlight, and then press <Enter>) one of the
downstream dynamic routing threads. Dynamic routing thread information
will appear in the Docking dialog.
4. In the docking dialog, double-click on the device for which you want to
view connection status.
5. The Dynamic Routing Thread Connection Status dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-8. Dynamic Routing Thread Status Information Dialog Box

The information dialog contains the following three group boxes: upstream
properties, downstream properties, and connection status.
Upstream Properties
The Upstream Properties group box lists information about the source of the
thread.
Downstream Properties
The Downstream Properties group box lists information about the
destination of the thread.
Connection Status
The Connection Status group box lists thread connection troubleshooting
information.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 9

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Thread Trace
The Thread Trace function allows you to see a “snapshot” of a particular
dynamic routing thread’s connection to its source and/or destination.
To perform a thread trace, follow these steps:
1. In the docking dialog, highlight the dynamic routing thread you want to
trace (either upstream or downstream).
2. Open the Dynamic Routing Thread Trace dialog box (select Thread >
Trace).

Figure 2-9. Dynamic Routing Thread Upstream/Downstream Trace

Dialog Box

You can identify a trace by a cyan-colored icon with an “X” displayed next
it it. The “X” indicates that the trace was executed from this particular
dynamic routing thread.

Disconnecting Dynamic Routing Thread Users

You can disconnect dynamic routing thread users to free up the dynamic routing
threads whenever you need to, either by using the Disconnect function or by
using the Downstream Trace function.
To disconnect users via the Disconnect function, follow these steps:
1. In the docking dialog, highlight the dynamic routing thread that has the
users you want to disconnect.
2. Open the Dynamic Routing Thread Disconnect dialog box (select
Thread > Disconnect).

10 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Figure 2-10. Dynamic Routing Thread Disconnect Dialog Box

The Dynamic Routing Thread Disconnect dialog box will display a list of
all users currently connected to your selected dynamic routing thread.
3. Click Disconnect to disconnect all downstream users currently connected to
Caution your selected dynamic routing thread.
You cannot select which users 4. Click OK to return to the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window.
you want to disconnect! Every
user downstream of the selected To disconnect users via the Thread Trace function, follow these steps:
dynamic routing thread will be 1. In the docking dialog, highlight the dynamic routing thread you want to
disconnected.
trace to its destination.
2. Open the Dynamic Routing Thread Trace dialog box (select Dynamic
Routing Thread > Trace).
3. Select the dynamic routing thread for which you want to perform the
disconnect.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK to return to the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window.

Device Information Dialog

For additional information on a router, right-click on the Router icon in the
Navigator window. A router information dialog box will appear with the name
of the router in its title bar.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 11

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Figure 2-11. Router Information Dialog Box

The dialog contains two group boxes with large, non-editable text fields.
• The upper group box contains information on the router itself and
information about any combiner systems the router may be associated with.
• The lower group box contains information about loop back threads. (A loop
back thread is any thread which connects from a downstream frame back to
an upstream frame).
Bad Router Labeling in Navigator Window
It is possible for all the threads in a router to be disabled, yet the router itself
may be operating normally. In such a case, all of the threads shown for a
router will appear with the Failure condition in the main window. A
different visual cue is given, however, if it is not just the threads but the
router itself that has been disabled. In such a case two things will happen:
• Threads will appear in the Failure condition in the main window.
• A red “X” icon will appear over the disabled router in the Navigator
window. The Red “X” indicates a problem with the router itself.

Database Information Dialog

For additional information on a database, right-click on the database name in the
Navigator window. A database information box will appear with the name,
location, and last modified date of the database listed in the Details window.

12 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Figure 2-12. Database Information Dialog Box

Click Exit to return to the main window.

Changing the Thread Refresh Timer

The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software has a timing mechanism for
monitoring and updating the list of dynamic routing threads currently in use. To
set the timing mechanism, you must set the time at the Dynamic Routing Thread
Refresh Timer.
To set Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer, follow these steps:
1. Select View > Auto Refresh Setting from the main window menu.
2. The Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-13. Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer Dialog Box

3. Type in a refresh thread status time.

4. Click OK to return to the main window.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 13

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

DRFM Options Dialog

The Options dialog box allows you to set or modify various Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager options.
1. Select View > Options from the main window menu.
2. The Options dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-14. Options Dialog Box

The Options dialog box consists of these sections: Warning Notification, Status
Note Notification, Transmit Buffer, Receive Buffer, Trace and Disconnect, Router
Any changes made within the Communication, and Restore Window.
Warning Notification group box
will have mostly only cosmetic Warning Notification
effects. Changes made to values The Warning Notification group box allows you flexibility in setting which
in the other three group boxes, colors will be used for warning issues related to thread conditions in the
however, may have severe
effects on the performance of
Threads View window. Though Warning Notification default colors are red,
the router system and its orange, and yellow, you may assign them another color.
associated software. You should
Status Notification
take note of the default settings
before altering them. The Status Notification group box allows you to change the color schemes
(text and text background colors) for diagnostic status messages.
• Edit Text Color changes the text color of diagnostic status messages.
• Edit Background Color changes the text background color of diagnostic
status messages.
• Critical Errors changes the color scheme for critical error messages
(such as frame alarms, communication failure, input/output card loss or
insert detection, or thread users are out of sync messages).
• Non-critical Errors changes the color scheme for non-critical errors
(such as connecting or disconnecting to router system hardware
messages).
• Warnings changes the color scheme for warning messages (such as
download/upload detection messages).

14 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

• Normal Events changes the color scheme for events (such as frame
detection messages).
Transmit Buffer
The Transmit Buffer group box contains the edit fields Hold Off Depth and
Packet Interval.
• Hold Off Depth allows you to specify the threshold that DRFM must
hold off its transmission. Threshold is the number of incoming messages
in the receive buffer. (This feature is only applicable if Receive buffer is
used.)
• Packet Interval specifies the wait time before sending the next query or
request command to the router system.
Receive Buffer
The Receive Buffer group box contains the edit fields Use Rx Buffer and
Packet Interval.
• Use Rx Buffer specifies if the DRFM needs to store incoming messages
to the Receive buffer before processing them.
• Packet Interval specifies the wait time before processing the next
incoming message from the Receive buffer.
Trace and Disconnect
The Trace and Disconnect group box contains the edit field Query Wait
Time Interval. This field allows you to specify the time out period period
for waiting on confirms status from a thread trace or disconnect request.
Router Communication
The Router Communication group box contains the edit field Time Interval
for Checking Frame Heart Beats. This field allows you to specify the time
interval for periodic checking to see if frame(s) in the router system are still
operational.
Restore Window
The Restore Window check box allows you to restore the original window
when the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager detects any critical errors.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 15

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Using the Program Functions

Adding Column Fields to Docking Dialog
You can insert additional column fields in the device monitoring section of the
docking dialog, and rearrange the viewing order of all existing fields.
To add column fields, follow these steps:
1. Open the Show Column Fields dialog box (View > Show Fields).

Figure 2-15. Show Column Fields Dialog Box

The Show Column Fields dialog lists all available fields in the database.
• The Available Fields section shows the fields available for display (but
not yet displayed) in the docking dialog.
• The Show These Fields in This Order section shows the fields displayed
in the docking dialog, in the order that they appear. The first field in the
section will appear at the extreme left side of the docking dialog;
subsequent fields will appear consecutively to the right of the first field.
2. Highlight the field you want to be displayed in the Available Fields list.
3. Click Add. The field name will appear, highlighted, at the bottom of the
Show These Fields in This Order list.
4. If you want to move the field in the display order, click Move Up until the
field is in the desired sequential order.
5. Click OK.
6. The added column field will appear in the docking dialog sequence.
To remove column fields, follow these steps:
1. Open the Show Column Fields dialog box (View > Show Fields).

16 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

2. Highlight the field you want to remove from the Show These Fields in
This Order list.
3. Click Remove. The field name will appear, highlighted, in its original
location in the Available Fields list.
4. Click OK.
5. The removed column field will no longer appear in the docking dialog
sequence.
To modify fields’ order of appearance in the docking dialog, follow these
steps:
1. Open the Show Column Fields dialog box (View > Show Fields).
2. Highlight the field you want to move in the Show These Fields in This
Order list.
• If you want to move the field “higher” (closer to the left) in the display
order, click on the Move Up button until the field is in the desired
sequential order.
• If you want to move the field “lower” (farther from the left) in the display
order, click on the Move Down button until the field is in the desired
sequential order.
3. Rearrange any other fields as as necessary.
4. Click OK.

Workspace Save
The Workspace Save function provides you with the ability to save the setup
Note and layout of your dynamic routing thread system, so that you can keep multiple
In a Workspace Save, columns layouts for different system views.
and column widths are also
To create a Workspace Save, follow these steps:
saved. See “Adding Column
Fields to Docking Dialog” on 1. At the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main menu, choose File > Save
page 16 for more information Workspace. The Save As dialog box will appear.
about column fields.

Figure 2-16. Workspace Save As Dialog Box

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 17

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

2. Enter a file name for the Workspace Save (.DRW) file.

3. If necessary, “navigate” through your current directory structure to the
subdirectory location where you want to save your DRW file.
4. Click Save.

Monitoring Dynamic Routing Threads

You can monitor a single set of dynamic routing threads or multiple sets of
dynamic routing threads at the same time.
To monitor a single set of dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:
1. Start Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager, as described in “Launching the
Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager” (see page 5).
2. If you haven’t already done so, customize your Dynamic Routing Fabric
Manager main menu screen.
3. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), and then choose the DRF file for the set
of dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.

Figure 2-17. Monitoring a Single Set of Dynamic Routing Threads

4. Double-click on (or highlight, and then press <Enter>) one of the

downstream dynamic routing threads.
To monitor more than one set of dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:
1. Start the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software application, as
described in “Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager” (see
page 5).
2. If you haven’t already done so, customize your Dynamic Routing Fabric
Manager main menu screen.
3. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), and then choose the DRF file for the
first set of dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.
4. Choose Window from the main menu toolbar.

18 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

5. Select New Window from the pull-down list. A new dynamic routing
thread main menu screen will appear.
6. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), and then choose the DRF file for the
next set of dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.
To toggle between the windows, press <Ctrl> F6.

Figure 2-18. Monitoring Multiple Sets of Dynamic Routing Threads

Thread Highlighting in the Frame Window

There are three colors used by the Dynamic Fabric Routing Manager to indicate
thread conditions in the main window. The default colors and their associated
conditions are
• No Highlight — Normal condition
• Yellow — Advisory condition
• Orange — Warning condition
• Red — Failure condition
Normal (No Highlight)
Threads functioning normally will not be highlighted in the Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager main window and will show a value of “Good” in the Condition
column.
Advisory Condition (Yellow)
When router threads are in an Advisory condition, all threads are in use, no
more can be allocated, and further connections will fail.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 19

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Warning Condition (Orange)

Note When router threads are in a Warning Condition, at least one thread in a router is
When an advisory condition disabled; however, the rest will function normally. Disabled threads are those
occurs, all threads in a router
which are not functioning due to one or more of the following problems:
share the advisory condition
highlighting in the Dynamic • Cable connection problems
Routing Fabric Manager main
window.
• Power outage problems
• Hardware problems
• User configurations
Failure Condition (Red)
Note When threads are in a Failure condition, they cannot be used because of
When a Warning condition
occurs, all threads in a router • Cable connection problems
share the Warning condition • Power outage problems
highlighting in the Dynamic
Routing Fabric Manager main • Hardware problems
window. • User configurations
Failure condition types fall into one or more of four possible causes. The types
Note of failure appear as a small, off-white text field pop-up (or tool-tip) when the
When a Failure condition mouse cursor is placed over the thread’s Condition column in the Dynamic
occurs, all threads in a router Routing Fabric Manager main window. Depending on the severity of the failure,
will be in the Dynamic Routing multiple failure conditions may appear in the pop-up text field.
Fabric Manager main window.
Table 2-1. Causes of Failure Conditions
Failure Condition Type Description
Bad Output An upstream frame output
is not available
Input Missing The local frame has missing
or bad input
Frame Missing An upstream frame is
missing, or has timed out on
a ping
Marked Bad Someone has manually
marked the thread as bad

Condition Prioritization
The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager prioritizes the condition(s) (and how
they are highlighted) for threads in the main window.
• A Failure condition receives the highest priority.
• A Warning condition receives a higher priority than an Advisory
(Failure > Warning > Advisory).
• An Advisory condition receives the lowest priority.
For example: If one thread in a Router is not functioning, all of the threads in
the router will appear in Orange (Warning default color) in the main window.
These items will stay highlighted to reflect the advisory condition even if the

20 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

number of dynamic threads used by the router increases to maximum. The

threads will not receive the Yellow (Advisory default color) highlighting
because Orange has a greater priority.

Manual Thread Enabling and Disabling

If a thread has recurring problems, or it has subtle problems that go unnoticed
by the application, you may need to deliberately disable a thread in the software.
Threads can be manually disabled and enabled from in the Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager main window.
To disable a thread, follow these steps:
1. Select the thread in the main window.
2. Right-click on the thread.
3. Select Disable in the menu pop-up.
The thread will then appear with the same visual status cues as any other
disabled thread when it is visible in the main window.
To re-enable the thread, follow these steps:
Note 1. Select the thread in the main window.
Once you have manually
enabled or disabled a thread, it 2. Right-click on the thread.
will no longer change status 3. Select Enable in the menu pop-up.
automatically. The user must
physically restart the frame Again, visual status cues for the thread will be updated in any windows showing
housing the thread for automatic the thread.
thread statusing to resume.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 21

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Chapter 2: Getting Started

22 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Copyright © 2001-2007, 2009, Harris Corporation